ETERNUS CLI User`s Guide FUJITSU Storage ETERNUS DX80 S2

ETERNUS CLI User`s Guide FUJITSU Storage ETERNUS DX80 S2
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
ETERNUS CLI User's Guide
FUJITSU Storage ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2,
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage systems
This page is intentionally left blank.
Preface
This manual describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to configure and manage a RAID system
using the FUJITSU Storage ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Disk
storage system, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage system.
This manual is written for standard-level users who are familiar with the basic functions of the FUJITSU Storage
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Disk storage system, or
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage system.
This manual is written for controller firmware version V10L50 or later. Some of the functions herein may not
be supported for firmware version V10L4x or earlier.
Note that the FUJITSU Storage ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2
Disk storage system, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage system are represented as ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system in this document.
Ninth Edition
August 2015
Content and Structure
This manual contains the following six chapters and appendices:
● Chapter 1 Overview
This chapter introduces the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system Command Line Interface (CLI).
● Chapter 2 Status Display
This chapter explains the commands used for displaying the status details for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system as a whole, as well as for various ETERNUS DX Disk storage system components.
● Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands used for Thin Provisioning management, RAID group management,
volume management, and host interface management, these being the basic settings for the ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system.
● Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands used for user account management, advanced copy management,
network management (Redundant IP/SNMP etc.), date and time/NTP, system configuration (Box ID,
Storage system name), power synchronization, and SSH/SSL security configuration.
● Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands used to provide performance data and a variety of other information.
3
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Preface
● Chapter 6 CLI Original Function
This section explains the commands used by some original functions of the CLI environment.
The appendices describe "Error Messages", "List of Supported Commands", "Firmware Version Support for Commands", "Basic Settings", and "Default Value List".
Latest Information
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice for functionality expansion and
improvement of the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100
S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage systems. The latest version of this manual and the latest information of the
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk
storage systems are released in the following web-site.
Access the following address if needed.
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/storage/eternus/documentation/
Related Manuals
The following manuals contain further relevant information on the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS
DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system Overview
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide -Site PlanningETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide -InstallationETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide -OperationETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Disk storage system Overview
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide -Site PlanningETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide -Installation & OperationETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 Disk storage system User's Guide
ETERNUS Web GUI User's Guide ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, ETERNUS
DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2
• ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User's Guide -Server Connection- (*1)
*1:
Download the necessary manuals to match the environment (such as the server OS and the Fibre Channel card
type) from the specified Web site. For the URL of the download site, refer to the Documentation CD that is
supplied with the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
4
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Preface
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
• AIX is a trademark of IBM Corp.
• Linux® is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
• HP-UX is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company in the United States and other countries.
• VMware, VMware logos, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
VMware, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• VERITAS Volume Manager is a trademark of Symantec Corp. and its affiliated companies.
• The company names, product names and service names mentioned in this document are registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
Additional Information
■ Naming conventions
• Oracle Solaris might be described as Solaris, Solaris Operating System, or Solaris OS.
• The following abbreviations are used for Microsoft® Windows Server®.
Official name
Abbreviation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Windows Server 2008 R2
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 for Itanium-Based Systems
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 HPC Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Windows Server 2008
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 for Itanium-Based Systems
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 HPC Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Datacenter Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard Edition
5
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Preface
■ Typographic conventions
Typeface
Meaning
Example
[]
Brackets indicate that the enclosed parameter is optional.
[ parameter ]
[|]
A separator within brackets indicates that only one of the
separated parameters can be specified.
[ parameter | parameter ]
{|}
A separator within braces indicates that only one of the
separated parameters must be specified.
{ parameter | parameter }
Note that some cases, two or more parameters can be
specified by separating them with a comma.
• Italics are used to show variables such as values and characters that appear in command parameters and
output examples.
■ Symbol conventions
The following symbols are used throughout this manual:
This symbol indicates restrictions and cautions for setting up and operating the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
This symbol indicates supplementary information about functions and methods
that may be useful when setting up and operating the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system.
6
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
18
1.1
Accessing CLI ..................................................................................................................... 18
1.2
The Command Syntax ....................................................................................................... 19
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
1.2.15
1.2.16
Command Format .......................................................................................................................................... 19
Keywords and Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 19
Disk Syntax .................................................................................................................................................... 19
Alias Name Syntax ......................................................................................................................................... 20
Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax ........................................................................................................................ 20
Flexible Tier Pool Syntax ................................................................................................................................ 21
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Syntax ......................................................................................................................... 21
RAID Group Syntax ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Volume Syntax ............................................................................................................................................... 22
Host Syntax ................................................................................................................................................... 23
Affinity Group Syntax ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Host Response Syntax .................................................................................................................................... 24
ECO Schedule Syntax ..................................................................................................................................... 25
Host Interface Port Syntax ............................................................................................................................. 25
Port Group Syntax .......................................................................................................................................... 26
Host Group Syntax ......................................................................................................................................... 26
1.3
Size of Devices and Logical Units ...................................................................................... 27
1.4
Command Auto-complete and History Recall .................................................................... 27
1.5
Command Editing Hotkeys ................................................................................................ 28
1.6
Viewing Command Help .................................................................................................... 29
1.7
Error Message Format ....................................................................................................... 29
1.8
Multiple Sessions .............................................................................................................. 30
1.9
Slave Controller Logins ...................................................................................................... 30
1.10
CLI User Authority ............................................................................................................. 31
1.11
Note for Specifying FTP Server ........................................................................................... 31
1.12
Command Descriptions ..................................................................................................... 31
7
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
Chapter 2
2.1
Status Display
32
Storage System Status ...................................................................................................... 32
show status .............................................................................................................................................. 33
show enclosure-status .............................................................................................................................. 34
show fru-ce ............................................................................................................................................... 41
show fru-de .............................................................................................................................................. 62
show disks ................................................................................................................................................ 64
show hardware-information ..................................................................................................................... 67
Chapter 3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Configuration Settings and Display
69
Thin Provisioning Pool Management ................................................................................ 69
Thin Provisioning Pool ................................................................................................................................... 69
set thin-pro-license .................................................................................................................................. 71
delete thin-pro-license ............................................................................................................................. 72
show thin-pro-license ............................................................................................................................... 73
create thin-pro-pool ................................................................................................................................. 74
set thin-pro-pool ...................................................................................................................................... 77
delete thin-pro-pool ................................................................................................................................. 78
show thin-pro-pools ................................................................................................................................. 79
show thin-pro-pool-progress .................................................................................................................... 81
expand thin-pro-pool ............................................................................................................................... 83
format thin-pro-pool ................................................................................................................................ 85
Thin Provisioning Pool ECO Management ...................................................................................................... 86
set eco-thin-pro-pool ............................................................................................................................... 87
release eco-thin-pro-pool ......................................................................................................................... 89
show eco-thin-pro-pool ............................................................................................................................ 90
Flexible Tier Management ................................................................................................ 91
Flexible Tier Pools .......................................................................................................................................... 91
show flexible-tier-mode ........................................................................................................................... 92
delete flexible-tier-pool ........................................................................................................................... 93
show flexible-tier-pools ............................................................................................................................ 94
show flexible-tier-pool-progress .............................................................................................................. 97
set flexible-tier-sub-pool .......................................................................................................................... 99
show flexible-tier-sub-pools ................................................................................................................... 101
FTRPE Migration .......................................................................................................................................... 104
show ftrpe-migration ............................................................................................................................. 105
FTV Balancing .............................................................................................................................................. 106
start balancing-flexible-tier-pool ........................................................................................................... 107
stop balancing-flexible-tier-pool ............................................................................................................ 108
show balancing-flexible-tier-pools ......................................................................................................... 109
8
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
RAID Group Management ............................................................................................... 111
RAID Group .................................................................................................................................................. 111
create raid-group ................................................................................................................................... 112
set raid-group ........................................................................................................................................ 114
delete raid-group ................................................................................................................................... 117
show raid-groups ................................................................................................................................... 118
show raid-group-progress ...................................................................................................................... 120
expand raid-group ................................................................................................................................. 122
Hot Spares ................................................................................................................................................... 123
set global-spare ..................................................................................................................................... 124
release global-spare ............................................................................................................................... 125
set dedicated-spare ................................................................................................................................ 126
release dedicated-spare ......................................................................................................................... 127
ECO Management ........................................................................................................................................ 128
set eco-mode ......................................................................................................................................... 129
show eco-mode ...................................................................................................................................... 130
create eco-schedule ............................................................................................................................... 131
set eco-schedule .................................................................................................................................... 134
delete eco-schedule ............................................................................................................................... 137
show eco-schedule ................................................................................................................................. 138
set eco-raid-group .................................................................................................................................. 140
release eco-raid-group ........................................................................................................................... 142
show eco-raid-group .............................................................................................................................. 143
Volume Management ..................................................................................................... 144
Volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 144
create volume ........................................................................................................................................ 145
set volume ............................................................................................................................................. 149
delete volume ........................................................................................................................................ 151
delete all-volumes ................................................................................................................................. 152
show volumes ........................................................................................................................................ 153
show volume-progress ........................................................................................................................... 158
show volume-mapping .......................................................................................................................... 160
format volume ....................................................................................................................................... 162
expand volume ...................................................................................................................................... 163
start migration ....................................................................................................................................... 165
stop migration ....................................................................................................................................... 167
show migration ...................................................................................................................................... 168
start balancing-thin-pro-volume ............................................................................................................ 169
stop balancing-thin-pro-volume ............................................................................................................ 170
show balancing-thin-pro-volumes ......................................................................................................... 171
start zero-reclamation ............................................................................................................................ 173
stop zero-reclamation ............................................................................................................................ 174
Flexible Tier Volumes ................................................................................................................................... 175
create flexible-tier-volume ..................................................................................................................... 176
set flexible-tier-volume .......................................................................................................................... 178
format flexible-tier-volume .................................................................................................................... 180
9
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
3.4.3
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
expand flexible-tier-volume ................................................................................................................... 181
delete flexible-tier-volume ..................................................................................................................... 182
delete all-flexible-tier-volumes .............................................................................................................. 183
start flexible-tier-migration ................................................................................................................... 184
ODX Buffer Volume ...................................................................................................................................... 186
set odx-mode ......................................................................................................................................... 187
show odx-mode ..................................................................................................................................... 188
create odx-buffer-volume ....................................................................................................................... 189
set odx-buffer-volume ............................................................................................................................ 191
delete odx-buffer-volume ...................................................................................................................... 192
Host Interface Management ........................................................................................... 193
Host Interface Port Parameters .................................................................................................................... 195
set fc-parameters ................................................................................................................................... 196
show fc-parameters ................................................................................................................................ 200
set sas-parameters ................................................................................................................................. 204
show sas-parameters ............................................................................................................................. 206
set iscsi-parameters ............................................................................................................................... 208
show iscsi-parameters ............................................................................................................................ 217
set fcoe-parameters ............................................................................................................................... 220
show fcoe-parameters ............................................................................................................................ 223
Host Identifiers (Host Alias) ......................................................................................................................... 226
create host-wwn-name .......................................................................................................................... 227
set host-wwn-name ............................................................................................................................... 229
delete host-wwn-name .......................................................................................................................... 230
show host-wwn-names .......................................................................................................................... 231
discover host-wwn-names ...................................................................................................................... 232
create host-sas-address .......................................................................................................................... 233
set host-sas-address ............................................................................................................................... 235
delete host-sas-address ......................................................................................................................... 237
show host-sas-addresses ........................................................................................................................ 238
discover host-sas-addresses ................................................................................................................... 239
create host-iscsi-name ........................................................................................................................... 240
set host-iscsi-name ................................................................................................................................ 243
delete host-iscsi-name ........................................................................................................................... 246
show host-iscsi-names ........................................................................................................................... 247
discover host-iscsi-names ....................................................................................................................... 249
Affinity Groups ............................................................................................................................................. 251
create affinity-group .............................................................................................................................. 252
set affinity-group ................................................................................................................................... 254
copy affinity-group ................................................................................................................................. 256
delete affinity-group .............................................................................................................................. 257
show affinity-groups .............................................................................................................................. 258
LUN Groups .................................................................................................................................................. 260
create lun-group .................................................................................................................................... 261
set lun-group ......................................................................................................................................... 263
copy lun-group ....................................................................................................................................... 265
10
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
3.5.9
3.5.10
3.5.11
3.5.12
3.5.13
delete lun-group .................................................................................................................................... 266
show lun-groups .................................................................................................................................... 267
set host-path-state ................................................................................................................................. 269
show host-path-state ............................................................................................................................. 270
Mapping (When Affinity Groups are Used) .................................................................................................. 272
set host-affinity ...................................................................................................................................... 273
copy host-affinity ................................................................................................................................... 276
release host-affinity ............................................................................................................................... 277
show host-affinity .................................................................................................................................. 279
Mapping (When Host Affinity Mode is Not Used) ........................................................................................ 283
set mapping ........................................................................................................................................... 284
copy mapping ........................................................................................................................................ 286
release mapping .................................................................................................................................... 287
show mapping ....................................................................................................................................... 289
Host Response ............................................................................................................................................. 291
set host-response ................................................................................................................................... 292
delete host-response .............................................................................................................................. 296
show host-response ............................................................................................................................... 297
Host Sense Conversion ................................................................................................................................. 299
set host-sense ........................................................................................................................................ 300
delete host-sense ................................................................................................................................... 302
show host-sense ..................................................................................................................................... 303
Reset Group for Host Interface Port .............................................................................................................. 304
set ca-reset-group .................................................................................................................................. 305
show ca-reset-group ............................................................................................................................... 306
Ping Command for iSCSI hosts ..................................................................................................................... 307
test iscsi-ping ......................................................................................................................................... 308
Port Groups .................................................................................................................................................. 310
create port-group ................................................................................................................................... 311
set port-group ........................................................................................................................................ 312
delete port-group ................................................................................................................................... 314
show port-groups ................................................................................................................................... 315
Host Groups ................................................................................................................................................. 317
create host-group ................................................................................................................................... 318
set host-group ........................................................................................................................................ 320
delete host-group .................................................................................................................................. 322
show host-groups ................................................................................................................................... 323
Host LU QoS ................................................................................................................................................. 326
set host-lu-qos-mode ............................................................................................................................. 327
show host-lu-qos-mode ......................................................................................................................... 328
set lu-qos-group ..................................................................................................................................... 329
show lu-qos-groups ................................................................................................................................ 331
delete lu-qos-group ................................................................................................................................ 333
set host-lu-qos ....................................................................................................................................... 334
show host-lu-qos .................................................................................................................................... 338
set lu-qos-schedule ................................................................................................................................ 343
11
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
show lu-qos-schedule ............................................................................................................................. 346
start host-lu-qos-performance ............................................................................................................... 347
stop host-lu-qos-performance ................................................................................................................ 348
show host-lu-qos-performance .............................................................................................................. 349
Chapter 4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Function/System Settings and Display
356
User Management .......................................................................................................... 356
Role ............................................................................................................................................................. 356
create role .............................................................................................................................................. 358
set role ................................................................................................................................................... 359
delete role .............................................................................................................................................. 360
show role ............................................................................................................................................... 361
create user ............................................................................................................................................. 362
set user .................................................................................................................................................. 363
delete user ............................................................................................................................................. 364
show users ............................................................................................................................................. 365
show login-users .................................................................................................................................... 366
set password .......................................................................................................................................... 367
initialize all-users ................................................................................................................................... 368
import ssh-public-key ............................................................................................................................. 369
delete ssh-public-key ............................................................................................................................. 371
RADIUS Server Settings ................................................................................................................................ 372
set radius ............................................................................................................................................... 373
show radius ............................................................................................................................................ 376
Advanced Copy Management .......................................................................................... 378
SnapOPC+ Outline ........................................................................................................................................ 379
Preparations for the Advanced Copy Function .............................................................................................. 379
Copy Session Management .......................................................................................................................... 383
set advanced-copy-license ..................................................................................................................... 385
delete advanced-copy-license ................................................................................................................ 386
show advanced-copy-license .................................................................................................................. 387
set advanced-copy-policy ....................................................................................................................... 389
show advanced-copy-policy .................................................................................................................... 390
set advanced-copy-parameters .............................................................................................................. 391
show advanced-copy-parameters ........................................................................................................... 393
initialize snap-data-volume ................................................................................................................... 394
show snap-data-volume ......................................................................................................................... 395
show snap-data-pool ............................................................................................................................. 396
delete snap-data-pool-volume ............................................................................................................... 398
start advanced-copy ............................................................................................................................... 399
stop advanced-copy ............................................................................................................................... 400
show advanced-copy-sessions ................................................................................................................ 401
Remote Equivalent Copy Management ........................................................................................................ 408
12
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
4.2.5
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
Summaries of REC Environment Settings through CLI .................................................................................. 409
set host-port-mode ................................................................................................................................ 419
show host-port-mode ............................................................................................................................. 421
import rec-path ...................................................................................................................................... 422
show rec-path ........................................................................................................................................ 424
export backup-rec-path .......................................................................................................................... 427
show backup-rec-path-information ........................................................................................................ 429
convert rec-path ..................................................................................................................................... 430
measure rec-round-trip-time .................................................................................................................. 432
set rec-round-trip-time ........................................................................................................................... 434
set rec-multiplicity ................................................................................................................................. 435
set rec-buffer .......................................................................................................................................... 437
delete rec-buffer .................................................................................................................................... 441
show rec-buffer ...................................................................................................................................... 442
create rec-disk-buffer ............................................................................................................................. 443
set rec-disk-buffer .................................................................................................................................. 445
delete rec-disk-buffer ............................................................................................................................. 446
show rec-disk-buffer ............................................................................................................................... 447
format rec-disk-buffer ............................................................................................................................ 449
release rec-disk-buffer ........................................................................................................................... 450
Network Management .................................................................................................... 451
Network Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 451
set network ............................................................................................................................................ 452
show network ......................................................................................................................................... 458
set firewall ............................................................................................................................................. 463
show firewall .......................................................................................................................................... 466
SNMP ........................................................................................................................................................... 468
set snmp ................................................................................................................................................ 469
show snmp ............................................................................................................................................. 471
create snmp-manager ............................................................................................................................ 472
set snmp-manager ................................................................................................................................. 473
delete snmp-manager ............................................................................................................................ 474
show snmp-manager ............................................................................................................................. 475
create snmp-view ................................................................................................................................... 476
set snmp-view ........................................................................................................................................ 478
delete snmp-view ................................................................................................................................... 480
show snmp-view .................................................................................................................................... 481
create snmp-user ................................................................................................................................... 483
set snmp-user ........................................................................................................................................ 485
delete snmp-user ................................................................................................................................... 487
show snmp-user ..................................................................................................................................... 489
create community-profile ....................................................................................................................... 491
set community-profile ............................................................................................................................ 493
delete community-profile ....................................................................................................................... 495
show community-profile ........................................................................................................................ 496
set snmp-trap ......................................................................................................................................... 498
13
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
delete snmp-trap ................................................................................................................................... 500
show snmp-trap ..................................................................................................................................... 501
test snmp-trap ....................................................................................................................................... 502
export enhanced-mib ............................................................................................................................. 503
E-mail Notification ...................................................................................................................................... 505
set email-notification ............................................................................................................................. 506
show email-notification ......................................................................................................................... 511
test email ............................................................................................................................................... 513
Event Notification ........................................................................................................................................ 514
set event-notification ............................................................................................................................. 515
show event-notification ......................................................................................................................... 522
set lcd-suppress ...................................................................................................................................... 524
show lcd-suppress .................................................................................................................................. 526
SMI-S ........................................................................................................................................................... 527
set smi-s ................................................................................................................................................. 528
show smi-s ............................................................................................................................................. 529
SSH/SSL Security Configuration .................................................................................................................... 530
create ssh-server-key ............................................................................................................................. 533
create ssl-certificate ............................................................................................................................... 534
export ssl-certificate-request .................................................................................................................. 536
import ssl-certificate .............................................................................................................................. 540
AIS Connect Settings .................................................................................................................................... 541
set ais-connect ....................................................................................................................................... 542
show ais-connect .................................................................................................................................... 547
set ais-connect-remote-session .............................................................................................................. 549
test ais-connect ...................................................................................................................................... 550
send ais-connect-log .............................................................................................................................. 551
test ais-connect-event-notification ........................................................................................................ 552
import ais-ssl-certificate ......................................................................................................................... 553
Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................. 554
Date, Time and NTP ..................................................................................................................................... 554
set date .................................................................................................................................................. 555
show date .............................................................................................................................................. 558
set ntp .................................................................................................................................................... 559
show ntp ................................................................................................................................................ 560
ETERNUS DX Disk Storage System Name ...................................................................................................... 561
set storage-system-name ....................................................................................................................... 562
show storage-system-name ................................................................................................................... 563
Encryption Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 564
set encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 565
show encryption ..................................................................................................................................... 566
Box ID .......................................................................................................................................................... 567
set boxid ................................................................................................................................................ 568
show boxid ............................................................................................................................................. 569
14
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
Power Synchronization ................................................................................................................................ 570
set power-synchronization ..................................................................................................................... 571
show power-synchronization .................................................................................................................. 574
Self-Encrypted Disk (SED) Authentication Settings ...................................................................................... 576
set sed-authentication ........................................................................................................................... 577
show sed-authentication ........................................................................................................................ 578
Syslog Server Settings .................................................................................................................................. 579
set syslog-notification ............................................................................................................................ 580
show syslog-notification ......................................................................................................................... 582
Audit Log Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 583
set audit ................................................................................................................................................. 584
show audit ............................................................................................................................................. 586
Key Management Server Linkage Function .................................................................................................. 587
set sed-key-machine-name .................................................................................................................... 589
show sed-key-machine-name ................................................................................................................ 590
set sed-key-server .................................................................................................................................. 591
show sed-key-servers ............................................................................................................................. 592
import ssl-kmip-certificate ..................................................................................................................... 593
create sed-key-group ............................................................................................................................. 594
set sed-key-group .................................................................................................................................. 596
delete sed-key-group ............................................................................................................................. 598
show sed-key-groups ............................................................................................................................. 599
change sed-key ...................................................................................................................................... 601
recover sed-key-group ............................................................................................................................ 602
Shutdown/Restart System ............................................................................................................................ 603
shutdown ............................................................................................................................................... 604
Chapter 5
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
Information Settings and Display
605
Performance ................................................................................................................... 605
Performance Information ............................................................................................................................ 605
start performance ................................................................................................................................... 606
stop performance ................................................................................................................................... 607
show performance .................................................................................................................................. 608
Performance Tuning Parameters ................................................................................................................. 616
set raid-tuning ....................................................................................................................................... 617
show raid-tuning .................................................................................................................................... 619
set cache-parameters ............................................................................................................................. 620
show cache-parameters ......................................................................................................................... 622
Event Log Information .................................................................................................... 623
show events ........................................................................................................................................... 624
delete events ......................................................................................................................................... 626
15
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 627
Hardware Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 627
hot expansion ........................................................................................................................................ 628
show btu-date ........................................................................................................................................ 630
Remote Directory ......................................................................................................................................... 631
show remote-dir ..................................................................................................................................... 632
Controller Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 634
show firmware-version ........................................................................................................................... 635
Log .............................................................................................................................................................. 636
export log ............................................................................................................................................... 637
Panic Dump ................................................................................................................................................. 640
export panic-dump ................................................................................................................................. 641
show panic-dump ................................................................................................................................... 644
Configuration Information ........................................................................................................................... 645
export config-information ...................................................................................................................... 646
show config-information ........................................................................................................................ 648
Error Information ......................................................................................................................................... 649
show disk-error ...................................................................................................................................... 650
clear disk-error ....................................................................................................................................... 651
show port-error ...................................................................................................................................... 652
Bad Data Information in Volumes ................................................................................................................ 655
show bad-data-info ................................................................................................................................ 656
Utility .............................................................................................................................. 658
Diagnosis Utilities ........................................................................................................................................ 658
show diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 659
LED .............................................................................................................................................................. 665
set led .................................................................................................................................................... 666
show led ................................................................................................................................................. 667
Other Notification ........................................................................................................................................ 668
set event-parameters ............................................................................................................................. 669
show event-parameters ......................................................................................................................... 670
Sub-system Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 671
set subsystem-parameters ..................................................................................................................... 672
show subsystem-parameters .................................................................................................................. 674
Reservations ................................................................................................................................................ 675
release reservation ................................................................................................................................. 676
show reservation .................................................................................................................................... 677
Cache Utilities .............................................................................................................................................. 679
show pinned-data .................................................................................................................................. 680
16
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Table of Contents
Chapter 6
6.1
CLI Original Function
682
CLI Environment .............................................................................................................. 682
set clienv-force-unlock ........................................................................................................................... 683
set clienv-idle-timeout ........................................................................................................................... 684
logoff/logout/exit ................................................................................................................................... 685
help ........................................................................................................................................................ 686
Appendix A
Error Messages
688
Appendix B
List of Supported Commands
703
B.1
List of Supported Commands ........................................................................................... 703
B.2
List of Supported Commands (Policies)............................................................................ 712
B.3
List of Supported Commands (Default Roles)................................................................... 722
Appendix C
Firmware Version Support for Commands
731
Appendix D
Basic Setting Examples
739
D.1
D.1.1
D.1.2
D.2
D.2.1
D.2.2
D.2.3
D.3
D.3.1
D.3.2
D.3.3
D.3.4
D.3.5
D.3.6
D.3.7
D.3.8
Settings When Using Volumes ......................................................................................... 739
RAID Configuration Setting Procedure ......................................................................................................... 740
Host Access Setting Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 741
Settings for Various Host Accesses ................................................................................... 742
Specifying a Host and Performing Mapping (Host Affinity Mode)................................................................ 743
Specifying a Port Group and Performing LUN Mapping................................................................................ 744
Specifying a Port and Setting LUN Mapping ................................................................................................ 745
Setting Cancellation......................................................................................................... 746
Canceling Mapping......................................................................................................................................
Deleting Affinity Groups ..............................................................................................................................
Deleting LUN Groups ...................................................................................................................................
Deleting Port Groups ...................................................................................................................................
Deleting Host Groups...................................................................................................................................
Deleting Registered Hosts ...........................................................................................................................
Deleting Volumes ........................................................................................................................................
Deleting RAID Groups ..................................................................................................................................
Appendix E
Default Value List
747
747
748
748
748
749
749
749
750
17
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1
Overview
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system command line interface (hereinafter referred to as "CLI") is installed in
controllers of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. CLI is used for performing settings and maintenance via
commands and command scripts.
This chapter describes the outlines for the CLI.
1.1
Accessing CLI
The CLI software embedded in each ETERNUS DX Disk storage system controller module enables storage
systems to be configured, monitored, and managed. This may be done via LAN connection to the controller
module's Ethernet port, using telnet, an SSH application, or a terminal emulator on a remote administrator
client. For telnet connection, a user name and password are required. For SSH, in addition to a user name and
password, SSH public key authentication is also supported. For details, refer to the "import ssh-public-key"
command.
Default IP address, user name, and password are as follows:
IP address:
192.168.1.1
user name:
root
password:
root
CLI will display the following pre-login message on the terminal:
ETERNUS login is required. [2010-01-01 05:38:00]
The date and time are the local values. However, this message may not be displayed when logged in with
SSH. This is due to the fact it depends on terminal software.
18
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
1.2
The Command Syntax
This section explains command syntax.
1.2.1
Command Format
The command format is as follows:
Command name Parameter Parameter . . . Parameter
command-name: Verb section + Object section (Ex: create volume)
parameter: Hyphen(-) + Parameter name section + Operand section (Ex: -n 80)
• Basically, a command name consists of a verb section and an object section (Example: "create volume").
However, there are also some commands that consist of one word (Example: "logoff" and "shutdown").
• A parameter consists of a parameter name section and an operand section. A parameter name is
appended with a hyphen (-) before it (Example: "-name").
• An operand is always required after a parameter name (Example: "-name abcdef").
1.2.2
Keywords and Parameters
Command and parameter names are not case-sensitive and can be entered in either or both uppercase and
lowercase. Operands, however, are case-sensitive. Any of the printable ASCII codes 0x20 – 0x7e (hexadecimal
notation) are allowed as input characters. Note that the following additional restrictions apply:
• Question marks (?) cannot be used.
• When spaces ( ) are used as characters, they must be enclosed by double quotation marks (") (Example:
"ABC DEF","ABC DEF,GHIJKL").
• When double quotation marks (") and single quotation marks (') are used as characters, they must be
backslash(\) escaped. Example: "\"
1.2.3
Disk Syntax
The format that can used for disk drive numbers is either "xxyy" or "xyy". "xx" or "x" indicates the enclosure
number. "xx" indicates a 2-digit number for the enclosure number and "x" indicates a one digit number for the
enclosure number. When a 2-digit enclosure number is specified, the format "xxyy" must be used. When a 1digit enclosure number is specified, either format can be specified. For example, "1yy" can be specified for a 1digit number. However, if the format "xx" is used, 0 must be specified before the enclosure number. For
example, when an enclosure number is 1, "01yy" must be specified. For ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, 00 or 0
indicates the controller enclosure. The "yy" is the disk drive number (a 2-digit decimal). For a 3.5" disk drive,
between 00 and 11 (a 2-digit decimal) can be specified for "yy". For a 2.5" disk drive, between 00 and 23 can
be specified for "yy".
19
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
Disk numbers can be combined as follows:
•
•
•
•
1.2.4
A single disk number: 1003
A list of disk numbers: 1003,004
A hyphenated range of disk numbers from a to z: 0210-0211
A list of disk numbers, disk ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not permitted before or after
commas: 0003,0006,010-011
Alias Name Syntax
The format of an alias is a character string that has a maximum of 16 ASCII characters. Usable characters are
those given in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19) of the document overview. Commas (,) cannot be
used.
1.2.5
Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax
There are two methods for specifying Thin provisioning pool identifiers; Thin provisioning pool numbers or
Thin provisioning pool names.
• Thin provisioning pool number
A Thin provisioning pool number is automatically created by the system when a Thin provisioning pool is
created. This is a decimal number. Thin provisioning pool numbers can be displayed by using the "show
thin-pro-pools" command.
Thin provisioning pool numbers can be combined as follows:
-
A single Thin provisioning pool number: 1
A list of Thin provisioning pool numbers: 1,8,12
A hyphenated range of Thin provisioning pool numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of Thin provisioning pool numbers, Thin provisioning pool ranges, or both, separated by commas.
Spaces are not permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• Thin provisioning pool name
A Thin provisioning pool name must be specified when creating a Thin provisioning pool. For details about
the syntax, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list
of Thin provisioning pool names. A Thin provisioning pool name and a Thin provisioning pool number
cannot both be specified in the same command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
• Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
• Since Thin provisioning pools and Flexible Tier Sub Pools use the same resource, the same number and
name cannot be used for both a Thin provisioning pool and a Flexible Tier Sub Pool. If the Thin
Provisioning pool number or the Thin Provisioning Pool name that is specified for a command is already
used for an FTSP, the command is not executed.
20
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
1.2.6
Flexible Tier Pool Syntax
There are two methods for identifying an entered Flexible Tier Sub Pool; Flexible Tier Pool numbers or Flexible
Tier Pool names.
• Flexible Tier Pool number
A Flexible Tier Pool number is automatically created by the system when a Flexible Tier Pool is created.
This is a decimal number. Flexible Tier Pool numbers can be displayed by using the "show flexible-tierpools" command.
Flexible Tier Pool numbers can be combined as follows:
-
A single Flexible Tier Pool number: 1
A list of Flexible Tier Pool numbers: 1,8,12
A hyphenated range of Flexible Tier Pool numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of Flexible Tier Pool numbers, ranges, or both, separated by commas: 1,3,10-12
• Flexible Tier Pool name
A Flexible Tier Pool name must be specified when creating a Flexible Tier Pool. For details about the
syntax, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of
Flexible Tier Pool names. A Flexible Tier Pool name and a Flexible Tier Pool number cannot both be
specified in the same command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.7
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Syntax
There are two methods for identifying an entered Flexible Tier Sub Pool; Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers or
Flexible Tier Sub Pool names.
• Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
A Flexible Tier Sub Pool number is automatically created by the system when a Flexible Tier Sub Pool is
created. This is a decimal number. Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers can be displayed by using the "show
flexible-tier-sub-pools" command.
Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers can be combined as follows:
-
A single Flexible Tier Sub Pool number: 1
A list of Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers: 1,8,12
A hyphenated range of Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of Flexible Tier Sub Pool numbers, ranges, or both, separated by commas: 1,3,10-12
• Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
A Flexible Tier Sub Pool name must be specified when creating a Flexible Tier Sub Pool. For details about
the syntax, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list
of Flexible Tier Sub Pool names. A Flexible Tier Sub Pool name and a Flexible Tier Sub Pool number cannot
both be specified in the same command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
21
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
• Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
• Since Thin provisioning pools and Flexible Tier Sub Pools use the same resource, the same number and
name cannot be used for both a Thin provisioning pool and a Flexible Tier Sub Pool. If the FTSP number or
FTSP name that is specified for a command is already used for a Thin Provisioning Pool, the command is
not executed.
1.2.8
RAID Group Syntax
There are two methods for specifying RAID group identifiers; RAID group numbers or RAID group names.
• RAID group number
A RAID group number is automatically created by the system when a RAID group is created. This is a
decimal number. RAID group numbers can be displayed by using the "show raid-groups" command.
RAID group numbers can be combined as follows:
-
A single RAID group number: 1
A list of RAID group numbers: 1,8,12
A hyphenated range of RAID group numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of RAID group numbers, RAID group ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• RAID group name
A RAID group name must be specified when creating a RAID group. For details about the syntax, refer to
"1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of RAID group
names. A RAID group name and a RAID group number cannot both be specified in the same command. Do
not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.9
Volume Syntax
There are two methods to specify a volume identifier; a volume number or a volume name.
• Volume number
A volume number is automatically created by the system when a volume is created. This is a decimal
number. Volume numbers can be displayed by using the "show volumes" command.
Volume numbers may be combined as follows:
-
A volume number: 1
A list of volume numbers: 5,10
A hyphenated range of volume numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of volume numbers, volume ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not permitted
before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
22
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
• Volume name
A volume name must be specified when creating a volume. For details about the syntax, refer to "1.2.4
Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of volume names. A
volume name and a volume number cannot both be specified in the same command. Do not include
spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.10
Host Syntax
There are two methods to specify a host identifier; a host number or a host name.
• Host number
A host number is automatically created by the system when a host identifier or a host alias is registered.
This is a decimal number.
The following types of host identifier are available:
- Host WWN name (FC)
- SAS address (SAS)
- iSCSI host name (iSCSI)
The identifier can be displayed by using the following commands:
- "show host-wwn-names"
- "show host-sas-addresses"
- "show host-iscsi-names"
Host numbers may be combined as follows:
-
A single host number: 1
A list of host numbers: 2,3
A hyphenated range of host numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of host numbers, host ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not permitted before or
after commas: 1,3,10-12
• Host name
A host alias must be specified when registering a host identifier. For details about the syntax, refer to
"1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of host names. A
host name and a host number cannot both be specified in the same command. Do not include spaces
before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
23
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
1.2.11
Affinity Group Syntax
There are two methods to specify an affinity group identifier; an affinity group number or an affinity group
name.
In GUI, "LUN group number" and "LUN group name" is respectively displayed instead of "affinity group
number" and "affinity group name".
• Affinity group number
An affinity group number is automatically created by the system when an affinity group is created. This is a
decimal number. Affinity group numbers can be displayed by using the "show affinity-groups" command.
Affinity group numbers can be combined as follows:
-
A single affinity group number: 1
A list of affinity group numbers: 2,8
A hyphenated range of affinity group numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of affinity group numbers, affinity group ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• Affinity group name
An affinity group name must be specified when creating an affinity group. For details about the syntax,
refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of affinity
group names. An affinity group name and an affinity group number cannot both be specified in the same
command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.12
Host Response Syntax
There are two methods to specify a host response identifier; a host response number or a host response name.
• Host response number
The host response number can be assigned by the user. This is a decimal number. A host response number
of "#0" is the system default and it cannot be assigned by the user. However, the parameters for host
response #0 can be changed. Host response settings can be displayed by using the "show host-response"
command.
Host response numbers may be combined as follows:
-
A single host response number: 1
A list of host response numbers: 2,5
A hyphenated range of host response numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of host response numbers, host response ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
24
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
• Host response name
A host response name must be specified when registering a host response. For details about the syntax,
refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of host
response names. A host response name and a host response number cannot both be specified in the same
command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.13
ECO Schedule Syntax
There are two methods to specify an ECO schedule identifier; an ECO schedule number or an ECO schedule
name.
• ECO schedule number
A schedule number is automatically created by the system when an ECO schedule is created. This is a
decimal number. ECO schedule numbers can be displayed by using the "show eco-schedule" command.
ECO schedule numbers may be combined as follows:
-
A single ECO schedule number: 1
A list of ECO schedule numbers: 2,5
A hyphenated range of ECO schedule numbers from a to z: 2-5
A list of ECO schedule numbers, ECO schedule ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• ECO schedule name
An ECO schedule name must be specified when creating an ECO schedule. For details about the syntax,
refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of ECO
schedule names. An ECO schedule name and an ECO schedule number cannot both be specified in the
same command. Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.14
Host Interface Port Syntax
A fixed 3-digit "xyz" numbering format is used. "x" indicates the controller module (CM) number, "y" indicates
the channel adapter (CA) number, and "z" indicates the host interface port number. For example, "110"
indicates CM#1-CA#1-Port#0. Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma. To
indicate both CM#0-CA#0-Port#0 and CM#1-CA#1-Port#0, specify "-port 000,110".
25
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 The Command Syntax
1.2.15
Port Group Syntax
There are two methods to specify an port group identifier; an port group number or an port group name.
• Port group number
An port group number is automatically created by the system when an port group is created. This is a
decimal number. Port group numbers can be displayed by using the "show port-groups" command.
Port group numbers may be combined as follows:
- A single port group number: 1
- A list of port group numbers: 2,8
- A hyphenated range of port group numbers from a to z: 2-5
- A list of port group numbers, port group ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• Port group name
An port group name must be specified when creating an port group. For details about the syntax, refer to
"1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of port group
names. An port group name and an port group number cannot both be specified in the same command.
Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
1.2.16
Host Group Syntax
There are two methods to specify an host group identifier; an host group number or an host group name.
• Host group number
An host group number is automatically created by the system when an host group is created. This is a
decimal number. Host group numbers can be displayed by using the "show host-groups" command.
Host group numbers may be combined as follows:
- A single host group number: 1
- A list of host group numbers: 2,8
- A hyphenated range of host group numbers from a to z: 2-5
- A list of host group numbers, host group ranges, or both, separated by commas. Spaces are not
permitted before or after commas: 1,3,10-12
• Host group name
An host group name must be specified when creating an host group. For details about the syntax, refer to
"1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). Some commands accept a comma-separated list of host group
names. An host group name and an host group number cannot both be specified in the same command.
Do not include spaces before or after commas.
Two or more parameters might not be able to be specified for several commands. For details, refer to the
command descriptions.
26
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3 Size of Devices and Logical Units
1.3
Size of Devices and Logical Units
The size of disks and logical units (such as RAID groups and volumes) are presented in base 2 (binary)
formats.
Unit
1.4
Size in binary
Kilobyte (KB)
1024 bytes
Megabyte (MB)
1024KB (1,048,576 bytes)
Gigabyte (GB)
1024MB (1,073,741,824 bytes)
Terabyte (TB)
1024GB (109,951,162,776 bytes)
Command Auto-complete and History Recall
CLI supports an auto-complete command function and also a command history recall function. When using
the auto-complete command function, if too few letters are entered to uniquely identify a keyword, the CLI
lists keywords that match the entered string and redisplays the string so it can be completed. The autocomplete function applies to a command name, a parameter name and an operand name. It does NOT apply
when two or more operands are used that are separated with a comma. Except for operand names, even if not
all the letters of the keyword are not entered, once enough letters are entered to identify a unique keyword, it
is handled as a complete character string.
The history contains all the commands entered in the active CLI session. A command from the history can be
recalled, edited, and run.
For details about usable keys, refer to "1.5 Command Editing Hotkeys" (page 28).
27
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.5 Command Editing Hotkeys
1.5
Command Editing Hotkeys
The following table lists the CLI command editing functions:
To
Press
Complete a partially entered keyword
Tab
Get previous command from history
Up Arrow, Ctrl-P, or Ctrl-p
Get next command from history
Down Arrow, Ctrl-N, or Ctrl-n
Move cursor left
Left Arrow, Ctrl-B, or Ctrl-b
Move cursor right
Right Arrow, Ctrl-F, or Ctrl-f
Move back one word
Esc-B or Esc-b
Move forward one word
Esc-F or Esc-f
Move cursor to start of line
Ctrl-A or Ctrl-a
Move cursor to end of line
Ctrl-E or Ctrl-e
Transpose current and previous character
Ctrl-T or Ctrl-t
Delete current character
Ctrl-D or Ctrl-d
Delete previous character
Ctrl-H or Ctrl-h
Delete word up to cursor
Ctrl-W or Ctrl-w
Delete rest of word
Esc-D or Esc-d
Delete text up to cursor
Ctrl-U or Ctrl-u
Delete the rest of a line
Ctrl-K or Ctrl-k
Convert the rest of a word to uppercase
Esc-C or Esc-c
Convert the rest of a word to lowercase
Esc-L or Esc-l
Enter command and redisplay prompt
Ctrl-Z or Ctrl-z
Refresh input line
Ctrl-L or Ctrl-l
28
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.6 Viewing Command Help
1.6
Viewing Command Help
By inputting a question mark (?) after the CLI command name or the parameter name, a brief description can
be displayed. By using the "help" command, the command syntax can also be displayed. For further
information, refer to the "help" command.
# If a question mark [?] is entered by itself, the entire verb list is displayed.
CLI> ?
copy
create
delete
discover
exit
... (snip)
-
copy
create
delete
discover
Exit the CLI sessions.
# If [s?] is entered, all the verbs beginning with "s" are displayed.
CLI> s?
set
show
start
stop
# # If [show ?] is entered (note the space between the "show" and "?"), only the "show" command is
possible, so all the "show" command objects are displayed.
CLI> show ?
advanced-copy-licens
advanced-copy-parame
advanced-copy-policy
advanced-copy-sessio
affinity-groups
group.
... (snip)
-
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
the Extended Advanced Copy license status.
the Advanced Copy parameters.
the currently registered Advance Copy policy.
the list of Advance Copy sessions.
a list of affinity groups or display the details of a specified affinity
# If [show m?] is entered, all the "show" command objects beginning with "m" are displayed.
CLI> show m?
mapping
migration
# If [create raid-group ?] is entered (note the space between the "create raid-group" and "?"), the
parameters that can be specified for the "create raid-group" command are displayed.
# Bracketed parameters are optional. All other parameters are required.
# Bracketed parameters are optional. All other parameters are required.
CLI> create raid-group ?
-name
- Name of a RAID group
-disks
- Disks to use in the RAID group
-level
- RAID level
[-assigned-cm]
- Assigned controller for the RAID group
# Long parameters and command names are truncated at 20 characters, as in the following example.
# Note that one or more spaces are required before a question mark.
CLI> ?
[-host-response-num - Host response numbers to display details
[-host-response-nam - Host response names to display details
1.7
Error Message Format
This section explains the CLI error messages format. When the CLI command ends normally, there is no output
on the terminal and the CLI prompt is returned to the next line. If an error occurs, an error message is
29
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.8 Multiple Sessions
displayed. For further details of the error messages, refer to "Appendix A Error Messages" (page 688).
Error: E0019 Inconsistent parameter.
A
B
[001C-0002] -disks 003
C
D
A:
B:
C:
D:
Error message number (fixed 4 digits)
Error message (human-readable message)
Internal error code (fixed 4 digits + hyphen + fixed 4 digits)
Details (the specified parameters, etc.)
Note that there are messages without an error message number. The location of the error is indicated by a
circumflex (^). This will display where there is a syntax error. Check the input parameters and the error
message as indicated by the circumflex (^).
The following are examples.
CLI> create raid-group -a
^
Error: Missing parameter data
CLI> show disks -de 1 -de 2
^
1.8
Multiple Sessions
A maximum of 16 CLI sessions can run on a single system simultaneously (including accesses with the
Software role). A session for an exclusive resource may conflict with a GUI session or another CLI session.
When a resource is locked by exclusive access control, the command terminates with an error message. If this
occurs, wait until the GUI session or another CLI session that uses the locked resource completes, and then
execute the command again. Resources can be forcibly released by using the "set clienv-force-unlock"
command. This is useful when a terminal is suddenly disconnected or unexpected errors occur.
1.9
Slave Controller Logins
For dual controller ETERNUS DX Disk storage system models, at any given time one of the controllers is the
master and the other the slave. Normal logins are to the master controller, and are able to access all the
normal functions. However, if the master controller becomes inaccessible, a redundant IP address function is
available that allows a (reduced functionality) login to the slave controller. Slave controller login is only
possible if a redundant IP address has been preset, and only some of the "show" commands to check the
status of components are available. It also allows the "change master" command to be used to forcibly swap
the master-slave relationship of the two controllers. This command can only be used from the slave controller.
Commands that are not supported by the current login type will fail with an error message if attempted. For
further details, refer to "Appendix B List of Supported Commands" (page 703).
30
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 1 Overview
1.10 CLI User Authority
1.10
CLI User Authority
User authority is determined by the role and user policy. For details on roles and user policies, refer to "4.1
User Management" (page 356).
1.11
Note for Specifying FTP Server
If an FTP server is specified by domain name format, name resolution is performed by the DNS servers
assigned to the specified Ethernet port. If an FTP server is specified by an IP address, an appropriate Ethernet
port is automatically assigned by the system. Even though designation of an Ethernet port by using CLI is not
required, doing so allows the operator to specify which network the FTP server belongs to.
1.12
Command Descriptions
This section explains the commands in a functional order. Each command topic includes one or more of the
following sections.
• Description
A description of the command
• Syntax
The command syntax
• Parameters
A description of parameter(s)
• Output (only for reference commands)
A description of information displayed by the command
• Example(s)
One or more examples of the command
31
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2
Status Display
This chapter explains the commands related to storage system status.
2.1
Storage System Status
This section explains the commands that display the status of the system or a system component.
Display Items
The command syntax
Summary status of the system
show status
Summary status of each enclosure
show enclosure-status
Controller enclosure status
show enclosure-status -type ce
Drive enclosure status
show enclosure-status -type de
-de {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}
Controller enclosure and the status of all drive enclosure
show enclosure-status -type all
Controller module status
show fru-ce -type
{cm0|cm1|cm2|cm3|cm4|cm5|cm6|cm7}
PSU status in controller enclosures
show fru-ce -type
{psu0|psu1|psu2|psu3|psu4|psu5}
FRT status in controller enclosures
show fru-ce -type {frt0|frt1|frt2|frt3}
BRT status in controller enclosures
show fru-ce -type
{brt0|brt1|brt2|brt3|brt4|brt5|brt6|brt7}
SVC status in controller enclosures
show fru-ce -type {svc0|svc1}
The status of all components in controller enclosures
show fru-ce
IOM status in a specific drive enclosure
show fru-de
-de {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9} -type {exp0|exp1}
All expander status in all drive enclosure
show fru-de -type {exp0|exp1}
PSU status in a specific drive enclosure
show fru-de
-de {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9} -type {psu0|psu1}
The status of all PSUs in all drive enclosures
show fru-de -type {psu0|psu1}
The status of all components in a specific drive enclosure
show fru-de -de {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}
The status of all components in all drive enclosures
show fru-de
The status of all undefined disks
show disks -type undefined
The status of all disks in the controller enclosure
show disks -type ce
The status of all disks in a specific drive enclosure
show disks -type de -de
{1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9}
Details of specific disks
show disks -disks disks
Details of all disks
show disks -disks all
Product IDs of all disks'
show disks -disks productid
Hardware information
show hardware-information
32
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show status
show status
This command displays a summary of the system status. It will display if any components in the system are in
an error or warning condition. It does not indicate if host servers are able to access the system.
■ Syntax
show status
■ Parameters
No parameters.
■ Output
Summary status
Summary of the system status.
Empty
The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is not defined or installed.
Normal
The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is in normal state.
Pinned Data
PIN data exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Unused
An undefined component is installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Warning
A component that is the target for preventive maintenance exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system.
Maintenance Maintenance is currently being performed on the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Error
A component with an error exists in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Loop Down
The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is in BackEnd Down state.
Not Ready
"Not Ready" is a status where an abnormality is detected at a power-off, and I/O access
from the host cannot be received.
Subsystem Down
The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is not available.
Change Assigned CM
Hot expansion and recovery of the controller is required.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of the system status:
CLI> show status
Summary Status [Normal]
CLI> show status
Summary Status [Error]
CLI> show status
Summary Status [Warning]
33
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
show enclosure-status
This command displays a summary of the controller enclosure or the drive enclosure status. Details will be
displayed if the type of enclosure is specified.
■ Syntax
show enclosure-status [-type { all|ce|de [-de enclosure_number]} ]
■ Parameter
-type
-de
Optional. This parameter specifies the enclosure type. If the type is omitted, only summary
information will be displayed.
all
Detailed status of both the controller enclosure and all the drive enclosures are
displayed.
ce
Detailed status of the controller enclosure is displayed.
de
Detailed status of the specified drive enclosure is displayed.
Optional. This parameter can specify the drive enclosure number only when a drive enclosure
type is specified. If this parameter is omitted, all of the drive enclosures are selected. Other
enclosure types cannot be specified.
Example: -type de -de 1
(When requesting drive enclosure #1 details)
■ Output
The following information is the output information when all the parameters are omitted:
Name
Series name of the system
Model Upgrade Status
Model upgrade status. This indicates whether or not the model can or has been upgraded. If
the model can and has been upgraded, [Upgraded] is displayed. If the model can but has not
been upgraded yet, [Not Upgraded] is displayed. If the model cannot be upgraded, [Not
Possible] is displayed.
Model Name
Model name of the system
Serial Number
Serial number of the system
Device Identification Number
Device identification number used by the Fujitsu Multipath Driver or other external software to
identify the storage system.
Status
Status of the system
34
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
Cache Mode
The cache control mode (Write Back Mode or Write Through Mode)
Remote Support
The remote support state (Operating, Maintenance, Stopping, or Not yet Set)
Stopping indicates a temporarily stopped status.
Operation Mode
The operation mode (Maintenance mode or normal operation mode)
CLI Connecting Controller Module
Controller module that has an active CLI connection.
Firmware Version
Current firmware version
Controller Enclosure
Controller enclosure status
Drive Enclosure #n
Indicates the number of the drive enclosure and its status
Example: Drive Enclosure #1 [ status ]
(giving the status of drive enclosure)
System Message
Messages that identify the error events that have occurred in the system.
The following information is output for the controller enclosure components:
Intake Temp
Intake temperature status, status code, and intake temperature values. Each controller has
two redundant intake temperature sensors, and both temperature values is displayed in
Celsius. If a sensor fails, "Failed" is displayed.
Exhaust Temp
Exhaust temperature status and the status code.
Note that exhaust temperature values are not displayed.
CM#n
Controller Module # status and the status code. The "#n" in the field indicates the controller
module number.
Example: CM#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For controller module#1)
FRT#n
Front End Router status and the status code (only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2). The "#n" in the
field indicates the Front End Router number.
Example: FRT#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For Front End Router#1)
BRT#n
Back End Router status and the status code (only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2). The "#n" in the
field indicates the Back End Router number.
Example: BRT#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For Back End Router#1)
35
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
SVC#n
Service Controller status and the status code (only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2). The "#n" in the
field indicates the Service Controller number.
Example: SVC#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For Service Controller#1)
FANU#n
Fan Unit status and the status code (only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2). The "#n" in the field
indicates the Fan Unit number.
Example: FANU#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For Fan Unit#1)
OPNL
Operation Panel status and the status code (only for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2).
PSU#n
Power Supply Unit status and the status code. The "#n" in the field indicates the Power Supply
Unit number.
Example: PSU#1 [Status / Status Code]
(For Power Supply Unit#1)
DISK#xyy
Disk status (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
Example: CE-Disk#1 [ status ]
(Disk #001 status)
(For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).)
The following information is displayed if the device enclosure is specified:
Intake Temp
Intake TempIntake temperature status, status code, and intake temperature values. Each
controller has two redundant intake temperature sensors, and both temperature values is
displayed in Celsius. If a sensor fails, "Failed" is displayed.
Exhaust Temp
Exhaust temperature status and the status code.
Note that exhaust temperature values are not displayed.
IOM#0
I/O module #0 status and the status code
IOM#1
I/O module #1 status and the status code
PSU#0
Power Supply Unit #0 status and the status code
PSU#1
Power Supply Unit #1 status and the status code
DISK#xyy
Disk status
Example: DE#1-Disk#1 [ status ]
(Disk #101 status)
(For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).)
36
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
■ Example(s)
The following information is displayed when no parameters are specified:
CLI> show enclosure-status
Enclosure View
Name
Model Upgrade Status
Model Name
Serial Number
Device Identification Number
Status
Cache Mode
Remote Support
Operation Mode
CLI Connecting Controller Module
Firmware Version
Controller Enclosure (3.5")
Drive Enclosure #1 (3.5")
Drive Enclosure #2 (3.5")
[ETERNUS DX80]
[Not Possible]
[ET06F21A]
[000000]
[010000]
[Normal]
[Write Back Mode]
[Not yet Set]
[Maintenance]
[CM#0]
[V10L11-0000]
[Normal]
[Error]
[Error]
System Message
No. Message
1 P 100000XX-XXXXX
2 P 500000XX-XXXXX
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the controller enclosure is specified for
the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type ce
Controller Enclosure Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
-
Controller Enclosure Status
Controller Module Status/Status Code
CM#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Disk Status
CE-Disk#0
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
CE-Disk#2
[Available
]
CE-Disk#4
[Available
]
CE-Disk#6
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
CE-Disk#8
[Present
]
CE-Disk#10
[Present
]
CE-Disk#1
CE-Disk#3
CE-Disk#5
CE-Disk#7
CE-Disk#9
CE-Disk#11
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
[Broken
]
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
[Present
]
[Present
]
[Spare
]
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the controller enclosure is specified for
the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type ce
Controller Enclosure Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
-
Controller Enclosure Status
Controller Module Status/Status Code
CM#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
37
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
The following example shows the information that is displayed when the controller enclosure is specified for
the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type ce
Controller Enclosure Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Temperature
25 (C)
-
Controller Enclosure Status
Controller Module Status/Status Code
CM#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#6
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#7
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Front End Router Status/Status Code
FRT#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Back End Router Status/Status Code
BRT#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#6
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#7
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Service Controller Status/Status Code
SVC#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SVC#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FAN Unit Status/Status Code
FANU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#2 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#3 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Operation Panel Status/Status Code
OPNL
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
The following example shows the information that is displayed when drive enclosure #1 is specified:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type de -de 1
Drive Enclosure #1 Information
Location
Status
Error Code Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Drive Enclosure #1 Status
Expander Status/Status Code
EXP#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
EXP#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Disk Status
DE#1-Disk#0 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#2 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#4 [Rebuild/Copyback
]
DE#1-Disk#6 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#8 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#10 [Available(Predictive Failure)]
DE#1-Disk#1
DE#1-Disk#3
DE#1-Disk#5
DE#1-Disk#7
DE#1-Disk#9
DE#1-Disk#11
[Available
]
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
[Available
]
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
[Available
]
[Broken
]
38
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
The following example shows the information that is displayed when all of the enclosures are specified for
the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and the ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type all
Controller Enclosure Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
-
Controller Enclosure Status
Controller Module Status/Status Code
CM#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Disk Status
CE-Disk#0
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
CE-Disk#2
[Available
]
CE-Disk#4
[Available
]
CE-Disk#6
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
CE-Disk#8
[Present
]
CE-Disk#10
[Present
]
Drive Enclosure #1 Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
CE-Disk#1
CE-Disk#3
CE-Disk#5
CE-Disk#7
CE-Disk#9
CE-Disk#11
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
[Broken
]
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
[Present
]
[Present
]
[Spare
]
Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
-
Drive Enclosure #1 Status
Expander Status/Status Code
EXP#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
EXP#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Disk Status
DE#1-Disk#0 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#2 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#4 [Rebuild/Copyback
]
DE#1-Disk#6 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#8 [Available
]
DE#1-Disk#10 [Available(Predictive Failure)]
DE#1-Disk#1
DE#1-Disk#3
DE#1-Disk#5
DE#1-Disk#7
DE#1-Disk#9
DE#1-Disk#11
[Available
]
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
[Available
]
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
[Available
]
[Broken
]
39
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show enclosure-status
The following example shows the information that is displayed when all of the enclosures are specified for
the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
CLI> show enclosure-status -type all
Controller Enclosure Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Temperature
25 (C)
-
Controller Enclosure Status
Controller Module Status/Status Code
CM#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#6
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM#7
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Front End Router Status/Status Code
FRT#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FRT#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Back End Router Status/Status Code
BRT#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#6
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BRT#7
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Service Controller Status/Status Code
SVC#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SVC#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FAN Unit Status/Status Code
FANU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#2 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#3 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Operation Panel Status/Status Code
OPNL
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#3
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#4
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#5
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Drive Enclosure #0 Information
Location
Status
Error Code
Intake Temp
Normal
0x0000
Exhaust Temp Normal
0x0000
Sensor 1 / Sensor 2
25 (C)
/ 25 (C)
-
Drive Enclosure #0 Status
I/O Module Status/Status Code
IOM#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
IOM#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Power Supply Unit Status/Status Code
PSU#0 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
PSU#1 [Normal
/ 0xE001]
Disk Status
DE#00-Disk#0
[Available
DE#00-Disk#2
[Available
DE#00-Disk#4
[Rebuild/Copyback
DE#00-Disk#6
[Available
DE#00-Disk#8
[Available
DE#00-Disk#10 [Available
DE#00-Disk#12 [Available
DE#00-Disk#14 [Available
DE#00-Disk#16 [Available
DE#00-Disk#18 [Available
DE#00-Disk#20 [Available
DE#00-Disk#22 [Available
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
DE#00-Disk#1
DE#00-Disk#3
DE#00-Disk#5
DE#00-Disk#7
DE#00-Disk#9
DE#00-Disk#11
DE#00-Disk#13
DE#00-Disk#15
DE#00-Disk#17
DE#00-Disk#19
DE#00-Disk#21
DE#00-Disk#23
[Available
]
[Rebuild/Copyback
]
[Available
]
[Available(Predictive Failure)]
[Available
]
[Broken
]
[Available
]
[Available
]
[Available
]
[Available
]
[Available
]
[Available
]
40
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
show fru-ce
This command displays the status of components (Field Replaceable Units) of the controller enclosure.
■ Syntax
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERUS DX8100 S2:
show fru-ce [-type {cm0|cm1|psu0|psu1}]
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
show fru-ce [-type {cm0 | cm1 | cm2 | cm3 | cm4 | cm5 | cm6 | cm7 | frt0 | frt1 | frt2 | frt3 | brt0 | brt1 |
brt2 | brt3 | brt4 | brt5 | brt6 | brt7 | svc0 | svc1 | psu0 | psu1 | psu2 | psu3 | psu4 | psu5}]
■ Parameter
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the target component (FRU) name. The details and status of
each component embedded in the controller enclosure will be displayed. Only one parameter
can be specified. If this parameter is omitted, all of the FRUs are displayed.
ETERNUS For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS
DX8100 S2:
cm0
Details and status of the Controller Module Unit #0 and the sub-components
cm1
Details and status of the Controller Module Unit #1 and the sub-components
psu0
Details and status of the Power Supply Unit #0
psu1
Details and status of the Power Supply Unit #1
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0 to cm7 Details and status of the Controller Module Unit #n and the sub-components
frt0 to frt3
Details and status of the Front End Router #n
brt0 to brt7 Details and status of the Back End Router #n and the sub-components
svc0 to svc1
Details and status of the Service Controller#n
psu0 to psu5
Details and status of the Power Supply Unit#n
■ Output
The following table shows the output information when the controller module and the sub-components are
specified:
CM#n Information (n: The controller module number)
CPU#n Status/Status Code
Controller Module (CM#n) status and the Status Code
41
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
Memory Size
Memory size of a controller module.
Parts Number
Parts number
Serial Number
Serial number
Hardware Revision
Hardware version
CPU#n Clock
CPU clock frequency
CM Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
CM Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle)
BIOS Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
BIOS Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle)
CM EXP Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware) (only for the ETERNUS
DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2)
CM EXP Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle) (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and
ETERNUS DX8100 S2)
CM#n Internal Parts Status and Status Code (n: The controller module number)
Memory#
Memory status and the status code
Memory# Parts Number
Memory parts number
Memory# Serial Number
Memory serial number
Memory# Hard Revision
Memory hard revision
BUD#
BUD (Bootup and Utility Device) status and the status code
42
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
BUD# Parts Number
BUD parts number
BUD# Serial Number
BUD serial number
BUD# Hard Revision
BUD hard revision
CM FAN
CM FAN status and the status code (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 only)
CA# Parts Number
CA parts number
CA# Serial Number
CA serial number
CA# Hard Revision
CA hard revision
CA Slot#
CA Slot status and the status code
DMA Port#
DMA Port status and the status code
BIOS#
BIOS status and the status code
CM EXP#
CM EXP status and the status code (ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2,
and ETERNUS DX8100 S2 only)
CM EXP# InPort#
CM EXP InPort status and the status code
(ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2 only)
SAS Cable# (OUT)
SAS Cable# (OUT) status and the status code
(ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2 only)
CM RTC
CM RTC status and the status code
CM NVRAM
CM NVRAM status and the status code
CM FPGA
CM FPGA status and the status code
CM LAN Port#
CM LAN Port status and the status code ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440
S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2 only
DI Port#
DI Port status and the status code
NAND Controller
NAND controller status and the status code
(ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 only)
43
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
SCU
SCU (System Capacitor Unit) status and the status code (ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 only)
SCU: This word stands for System Capacitor Unit: SCUs are electric double layer capacitors
embedded in a controller module that provides the power to move the cache data to the NAND
flash memory if there is a power outage.
SCU Voltage
Charging voltage of SCU (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
CM MMC
CM MMC status and the status code (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
CM MMC Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2
only)
CM MMC Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
CM MMC Firmware Version
CM MMC firmware version (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
PCH
PCH status and the status code
CM#n CA#m Port#l Information (n: The controller module number, m: The Channel Adapter number, l:
The port number)
(For FC, iSCSI, FCoE, and SAS)
Port Type
It shows if the host interface port type is FC, iSCSI, FCoE, or SAS.
Port Mode
It shows if the host interface port mode is CA, RA, CA/RA auto, or Initiator.
Status/Status Code
Host interface Port (Port#m) status and the status code
CA Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
CA Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle)
Connection
Connection condition
Loop ID
Loop ID
Transfer Rate
Transfer rate (A value specified by the operator)
Link Status
Link status (Link Up, Link Down, or if requesting auto negotiation, then the actual transfer rate
is displayed.)
Port WWN
Port World-Wide-Name
44
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
Node WWN
Node World-Wide-Name
iSCSI Name
iSCSI Name
iSCSI Alias Name
iSCSI Alias Name
Host Affinity
It shows if Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
Host Response
Host response information assigned to this port
iSNS Server Port No
iSNS Server Port Number
TCP Port No
TCP Port Number
TCP Window Size
TCP Window Size
FC Frame Size
FC Frame Size
VLAN ID
VLAN ID
Header Digest
Header Digest
Date Digest
Date Digest
Bandwidth Limit
Bandwidth Limit
Target Portal Group Number
Target Portal Group Number
CmdSN Count
CmdSN Count
Err Recovery Lvl
Error Recovery Level
Task Retain Time
The time required for processes stopped due to disconnection to restart from where they were
stopped after reconnection
Reconnection Wait Time
The time required to reconnect the TCP connection
45
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
Fabric Name
Fabric Name
SFP Type
SFP Type
SFP Information (For FC, iSCSI 10G, and FCoE)
Temperature
Temperature (Present, Warning(Low/High), and Alarm(Low/High))
Voltage
Voltage (Present, Warning(Low/High), and Alarm(Low/High))
Current
Current (Present, Warning(Low/High), and Alarm(Low/High))
TX Power
Transmitter power (Present, Warning(Low/High), and Alarm(Low/High))
RX Power
Receiver power (Present, Warning(Low/High), and Alarm(Low/High))
CM#n CA#m Port#l Information (n: The controller module number, m: The Channel Adapter number, l:
The port number)
(For FCLINK and OCLINK)
Port Type
Host interface port type (FCLINK or OCLINK)
Status/Status Code
Host interface Port (Port#m) status and the status code
FRT#n Information (n: The front end router number) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
Status/Status Code
FRT status and the status code
Parts Number
FRT Parts Number
Serial Number
FRT Serial Number
Hard Revision
FRT Hard Revision
BRT#n Information (n: The back end router number) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
Parts Number
BRT Parts Number
Serial Number
BRT Serial Number
46
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
Hard Revision
BRT Hard Revision
BRT#n Internal Parts Status and Status Code (n: The back end router number)
(ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
EXP#
BRT Expander status and the status code
EXP# Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
EXP# Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle)
EXP# Firmware Version
BRT Expander firmware version
InPort#
BRT Expander InPort status
QSFP Cable#(OUT)
BRT QSFP Cable status and the status code
SVC#n Information (n: The service controller number) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2 only)
Parts Number
SVC Parts Number
Serial Number
SVC Serial Number
Hard Revision
SVC Hard Revision
MAC Address(MNT)
SVC MAC address (MNT)
MAC Address(RMT)
SVC MAC address (RMT)
MAC Address(FST)
SVC MAC address (FST)
LAN Control
SVC LAN Control (Master or Slave)
Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the next
power cycle)
Firmware Version
SVC firmware version
47
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
SVC#n Internal Parts Status and Status Code (n: The service controller number) (ETERNUS DX8700 S2
only)
MNT Port
SVC LAN Port status and the status code (MNT)
RMT Port
SVC LAN Port status and the status code (RMT)
FST Port
SVC LAN Port status and the status code (FST)
PCIe Switch
SVC PCIe Switch status and the status code
SVC RCI board
SVC RCI board status and the status code
BCU/BTU Information
(The following information is displayed for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)
BCU Status/Status Code
BCU status and the status code
BCU Status/Status Code
BTU status and the status code
BCU# ChargeRate
Charging rate of BCU
BCU# Expires
Expiry date of the BCU
BCU# Parts Number
BCU Parts Number
BCU# Serial Number
BCU serial number
BCU# Hard Revision
BCU hard revision
BBU#n Information
(The following information is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
Status/Status Code
BBU status and the status code
ChargeRate
Charging rate of BBU
Expires
Expiry date of the BBU
48
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
SCCI#n Information or PCC#m Information (n: SCCI number, m: PCC number)
(The following information is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2)
Status/Status Code
SCCI or PCC status and the status code
FANU#n Information
(The following information is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
Status/Status Code
FAN Unit status and the status code
Parts Number
FAN Unit Parts number
Serial Number
FAN Unit Serial Number
Hard Revision
FAN Unit Hard Revision
OPNL Information
(The following information is displayed for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
Status/Status Code
Operation Panel status and the status code
Parts Number
Operation Panel Parts number
Serial Number
Operation Panel Serial Number
Hard Revision
Operation Panel Hard Revision
The following table shows the output information of the power supply units.
Status/Status Code
Power supply unit (PSU#n) status and the status code
49
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the status and details of controller module #0 for FC (for the ETERNUS DX80
S2/DX90 S2 and ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type cm0
CM#0 Information
CPU#0 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CPU#1 Status/Status Code [Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory Size
[1.5GB]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
CPU#0 Clock
[2.00GHz]
CPU#1 Clock
[0.00GHz]
CM Active EC
[EC#1]
CM Next EC
[EC#1]
BIOS Active EC
[EC#0]
BIOS Next EC
[EC#0]
CM EXP Active EC
[EC#1]
CM EXP Next EC
[EC#1]
CM#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
Memory#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Memory#0 Parts Number
[18JSF25672PZ-1G1F0]
Memory#0 Serial Number
[0951D864C0D0]
Memory#0 Hard Revision
[4631]
Memory#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#1 Parts Number
[]
Memory#1 Serial Number
[]
Memory#1 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#2
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#2 Parts Number
[]
Memory#2 Serial Number
[]
Memory#2 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#3
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#3 Parts Number
[]
Memory#3 Serial Number
[]
Memory#3 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#4
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#4 Parts Number
[]
Memory#4 Serial Number
[]
Memory#4 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#5
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#5 Parts Number
[]
Memory#5 Serial Number
[]
Memory#5 Hard Revision
[]
BUD
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BUD Parts Number
[QEMU HARDDISK
QM00]
BUD Serial Number
[QM00002
0 10]
BUD Hard Revision
[0 10 6 ]
CM FAN
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA#0 Parts Number
[]
CA#0 Serial Number
[]
CA#0 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#0-0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Slot#0-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA#1 Parts Number
[]
CA#1 Serial Number
[]
CA#1 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#1-0
[Undefined
/ 0x4000]
CA Slot#1-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA#2 Parts Number
[]
CA#2 Serial Number
[]
CA#2 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#2-0
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA Slot#2-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA#3 Parts Number
[]
CA#3 Serial Number
[]
CA#3 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#3-0
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA Slot#3-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
DMA Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DMA Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BIOS#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BIOS#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
50
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
CM EXP#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM EXP#0 InPort#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM EXP#0 InPort#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SAS Cable#0(OUT)
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SAS Cable#1(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1 InPort#0
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1 InPort#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SAS Cable#2(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SAS Cable#3(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM RTC
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM NVRAM
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM FPGA
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#2
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
DI Port#3
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
NAND Controller
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SCU
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SCU Voltage
[10.80V]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
51
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
BCU/BTU Information
BCU#0 Status/Status
BTU#0 Status/Status
BCU#0 ChargeRate
BCU#0 Expires
BCU#0 Parts Number
BCU#0 Serial Number
BCU#0 Hard Revision
BCU#1 Status/Status
BTU#1 Status/Status
BCU#1 ChargeRate
BCU#1 Expires
BCU#1 Parts Number
BCU#1 Serial Number
BCU#1 Hard Revision
BCU#2 Status/Status
BTU#2 Status/Status
BCU#2 ChargeRate
BCU#2 Expires
BCU#2 Parts Number
BCU#2 Serial Number
BCU#2 Hard Revision
SCCI#0 Information
Status/Status Code
SCCI#1 Information
Status/Status Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
[Normal
[Normal
[0%]
[0-00]
[]
[]
[]
[Normal
[Normal
[0%]
[0-00]
[]
[]
[]
[Normal
[Normal
[0%]
[0-00]
[]
[]
[]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
The following example displays the status and details of controller module #0 (for the ETERNUS DX8100 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type cm0
CM#0 Information
CPU#0 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CPU#1 Status/Status Code [Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory Size
[1.5GB]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
CPU#0 Clock
[2.00GHz]
CPU#1 Clock
[0.00GHz]
CM Active EC
[EC#1]
CM Next EC
[EC#1]
BIOS Active EC
[EC#0]
BIOS Next EC
[EC#0]
CM EXP Active EC
[EC#1]
CM EXP Next EC
[EC#1]
CM#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
Memory#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Memory#0 Parts Number
[18JSF25672PZ-1G1F0]
Memory#0 Serial Number
[0951D864C0D0]
Memory#0 Hard Revision
[4631]
Memory#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#1 Parts Number
[]
Memory#1 Serial Number
[]
Memory#1 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#2
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#2 Parts Number
[]
Memory#2 Serial Number
[]
Memory#2 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#3
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#3 Parts Number
[]
Memory#3 Serial Number
[]
Memory#3 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#4
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#4 Parts Number
[]
Memory#4 Serial Number
[]
Memory#4 Hard Revision
[]
Memory#5
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#5 Parts Number
[]
Memory#5 Serial Number
[]
Memory#5 Hard Revision
[]
52
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
BUD#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BUD#0 Parts Number
[QEMU HARDDISK
QM00]
BUD#0 Serial Number
[QM00002
0 10]
BUD#0 Hard Revision
[0 10 6 ]
BUD#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BUD#1 Parts Number
[QEMU HARDDISK
QM00]
BUD#1 Serial Number
[QM00002
0 10]
BUD#1 Hard Revision
[0 10 6 ]
CM FAN
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA#0 Parts Number
[]
CA#0 Serial Number
[]
CA#0 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#0-0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Slot#0-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CA#1 Parts Number
[]
CA#1 Serial Number
[]
CA#1 Hard Revision
[]
CA Slot#1-0
[Undefined
/ 0x4000]
CA Slot#1-1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
DMA Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DMA Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BIOS#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
BIOS#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM EXP#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM EXP#0 InPort#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM EXP#0 InPort#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SAS Cable#0(OUT)
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SAS Cable#1(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1 InPort#0
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM EXP#1 InPort#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SAS Cable#2(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SAS Cable#3(OUT)
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
CM RTC
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM NVRAM
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM FPGA
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM LAN Port#2
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#1
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
DI Port#2
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
DI Port#3
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
NAND Controller
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
SCU
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SCU Voltage
[10.80V]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
53
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
BCU/BTU Information
BCU#0 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BTU#0 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BCU#0 ChargeRate
[0%]
BCU#0 Expires
[0-00]
BCU#0 Parts Number
[]
BCU#0 Serial Number
[]
BCU#0 Hard Revision
[]
BCU#1 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BTU#1 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BCU#1 ChargeRate
[0%]
BCU#1 Expires
[0-00]
BCU#1 Parts Number
[]
BCU#1 Serial Number
[]
BCU#1 Hard Revision
[]
BCU#2 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BTU#2 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
BCU#2 ChargeRate
[0%]
BCU#2 Expires
[0-00]
BCU#2 Parts Number
[]
BCU#2 Serial Number
[]
BCU#2 Hard Revision
[]
SCCI#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SCCI#1 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
The following example displays the status and details of controller module #0 (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type cm0
CM#0 Information
CPU#0 Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CPU#1 Status/Status Code [Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory Size
[ 12.0GB]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
CPU#0 Clock
[2.53GHz]
CPU#1 Clock
[2.53GHz]
CM Active EC
[EC#1]
CM Next EC
[EC#1]
BIOS Active EC
[EC#1]
BIOS Next EC
[EC#1]
CM#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
Memory#0
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Memory#0 Parts Number
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
Memory#0 Serial Number
[1040DC6FBAAC]
Memory#0 Hard Revision
[4631]
Memory#1
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
Memory#1 Parts Number
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
Memory#1 Serial Number
[1040DC6FBAAB]
Memory#1 Hard Revision
[4631]
54
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
Memory#2
Memory#2 Parts Number
Memory#2 Serial Number
Memory#2 Hard Revision
Memory#3
Memory#3 Parts Number
Memory#3 Serial Number
Memory#3 Hard Revision
Memory#4
Memory#4 Parts Number
Memory#4 Serial Number
Memory#4 Hard Revision
Memory#5
Memory#5 Parts Number
Memory#5 Serial Number
Memory#5 Hard Revision
BUD#0
BUD#0 Parts Number
BUD#0 Serial Number
BUD#0 Hard Revision
BUD#1
BUD#1 Parts Number
BUD#1 Serial Number
BUD#1 Hard Revision
CA#0 Parts Number
CA#0 Serial Number
CA#0 Hard Revision
CA Slot#0-0
CA Slot#0-1
CA#1 Parts Number
CA#1 Serial Number
CA#1 Hard Revision
CA Slot#1-0
CA Slot#1-1
CA#2 Parts Number
CA#2 Serial Number
CA#2 Hard Revision
CA Slot#2-0
CA Slot#2-1
CA#3 Parts Number
CA#3 Serial Number
CA#3 Hard Revision
CA Slot#3-0
CA Slot#3-1
DMA Port#0
DMA Port#1
DMA Port#2
DMA Port#3
BIOS#0
BIOS#1
CM RTC
CM NVRAM
CM FPGA
DI Port#0
DI Port#1
DI Port#2
DI Port#3
DI Port#4
DI Port#5
DI Port#6
DI Port#7
DI Port#8
DI Port#9
DI Port#10
DI Port#11
DI Port#12
DI Port#13
DI Port#14
DI Port#15
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
[1040DC6FBAAA]
[4631]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
[1040DC6FBAAE]
[4631]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
[1040DC6FBAAF]
[4631]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[36JSZF51272PZ1G1F1]
[1040DC6FBAA0]
[4631]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[TOSHIBA THNSFC12 ]
[
51TY10EV]
[CJFA020351TY10EV]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[TOSHIBA THNSFC12]
[
51TY10KY]
[CJFA020351TY10KY]
[]
[]
[]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[]
[]
[]
[Undefined
/ 0x4000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[]
[]
[]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[]
[]
[]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
[Undefined
/ 0x0000]
55
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
CM MMC
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
CM MMC Active EC
[EC#1]
CM MMC Next EC
[EC#2]
CM MMC Firmware Version
[V10L20-0000]PCH
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[ShortWave]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
CM#0 CA#4 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Link Down]
Port WWN
[500000E0D4000080]
Node WWN
[500000E0D4000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[SFP+]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
56
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
CM#0 CA#4 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Connection
[Loop]
Loop ID
[0x00]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
[Link Down]
Port WWN
[500000E0D4000081]
Node WWN
[500000E0D4000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
SFP Type
[SFP+]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
BBU#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
ChargeRate
[0%]
Expires
[2011-10]
BBU#1 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
ChargeRate
[0%]
Expires
[2011-10]
BBU#2 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
ChargeRate
[0%]
Expires
[2011-10]
BBU#3 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
ChargeRate
[0%]
Expires
[2011-10]
SCCI#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
SCCI#1 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FANU#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
FANU#1 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
FANU#2 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
FANU#3 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
OPNL Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
The following example displays the status and details of controller module #0 (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type frt0
FRT#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
/ 0xE001]
57
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
The following example displays the status and details of BRT#0 (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type brt0
BRT#0 Information
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
BRT#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
EXP#0
[Normal
/
EXP#0 Active EC
[EC#1]
EXP#0 Next EC
[EC#2]
EXP#0 Firmware Version
[V10L20-0000]
EXP#1
[Normal
/
EXP#1 Active EC
[EC#1]
EXP#1 Next EC
[EC#2]
EXP#1 Firmware Version
[V10L20-0000]
InPort#0
[Normal
/
InPort#1
[Normal
/
InPort#2
[Normal
/
InPort#3
[Normal
/
InPort#4
[Normal
/
InPort#5
[Normal
/
InPort#6
[Normal
/
InPort#7
[Normal
/
InPort#8
[Normal
/
InPort#9
[Normal
/
InPort#10
[Normal
/
InPort#11
[Normal
/
InPort#12
[Normal
/
InPort#13
[Normal
/
InPort#14
[Normal
/
InPort#15
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#0(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#1(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#2(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#3(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#4(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#5(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#6(OUT)
[Normal
/
QSFP Cable#7(OUT)
[Normal
/
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
0xE001]
The following example displays the status and details of SVC#0 (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show fru-ce -type svc#0
SVC#0 Information
Parts Number
[]
Serial Number
[]
Hard Revision
[]
MAC Address (MNT)
[00-16-E6-10-84-61]
MAC Address (RMT)
[00-16-E6-10-84-62]
MAC Address (FST)
[00-16-E6-10-84-63]
LAN Control
[Master]
Active EC
[EC#1]
Next EC
[EC#2]
Firmware Version
[V10L20-0000]
SVC#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
MNT Port
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
RMT Port
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
FST Port
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
PCIe Switch
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
RCI Board
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
58
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
For SAS, iSCSI, and FCoE, outputs differ from an FC host interface output at the "CM#x CA#x Port#x
Information" level.
For SAS information, the following information is displayed:
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[SAS]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
PHY#0[Link Down
] PHY#1[Link Down
PHY#2[Link Down
] PHY#3[Link Down
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000011]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[3]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[SAS]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[Auto Negotiation]
Link Status
PHY#0[Link Down
] PHY#1[Link Down
PHY#2[Link Down
] PHY#3[Link Down
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000011]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[3]
]
]
]
]
For iSCSI information, the following information is displayed:
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[iSCSI]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[1Gbps/Auto]
Link Status
[Link Down]
iSCSI Name
[iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dxl:00000000]
iSCSI Alias Name
[]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
iSNS Server Port No [0x0000]
TCP Port No
[0x0000]
TCP Window Size
[0x00]
VLAN ID
[-]
Header Digest
[OFF]
Data Digest
[OFF]
Bandwidth Limit
[-]
Target Portal Group No [0x0000]
CmdSN Count
[Unlimited]
Err Recovery Lvl
[0x00]
Task Retain Time
[-]
Reconnection Wait Time [-]
SFP Type
[SFP+]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Alarm(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
[-30.00C/128.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
[2.00V/7.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
59
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[iSCSI]
Port Mode
[CA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[1Gbps/Auto]
Link Status
[Link Down]
iSCSI Name
[iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dxl:00000000]
iSCSI Alias Name
[]
Host Affinity
[Disable]
Host Response
[0]
iSNS Server Port No [0x0000]
TCP Port No
[0x0000]
TCP Window Size
[0x00]
VLAN ID
[-]
Header Digest
[OFF]
Data Digest
[OFF]
Bandwidth Limit
[-]
Target Portal Group No [0x0000]
CmdSN Count
[Unlimited]
Err Recovery Lvl
[0x00]
Task Retain Time
[-]
Reconnection Wait Time [-]
SFP Type
[SFP+]
SFP Information
Present
Temperature
[40.11C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
Current
[10.25mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
Warning(Low/High)
[-15.00C/100.00C]
[3.00V/5.00V]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
For FCoE information, the following information is displayed:
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FCoE]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[10Gbps]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000010]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[-]
Host Response
[-]
FC Frame Size
[Unknown]
VLAN ID
[0x0000]
Fabric Name
[-]
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[FCoE]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
CA Active EC
[EC#0]
CA Next EC
[EC#0]
Transfer Rate
[10Gbps]
Link Status
[Unknown]
Port WWN
[500000E0D1000010]
Node WWN
[500000E0D1000000]
Host Affinity
[-]
Host Response
[-]
FC Frame Size
[Unknown]
VLAN ID
[0x0000]
Fabric Name
[-]
SFP Type
[SFP+]
SFP Information
Present
Warning(Low/High)
Temperature
[40.11C]
[-15.00C/100.00C]
Voltage
[4.24V]
[3.00V/5.00V]
Current
[10.25mA]
[5.00mA/12.00mA]
TX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
RX Power
[1.35mW]
[0.50mW/1.50mW]
Alarm(Low/High)
[-30.00C/128.00C]
[2.00V/7.00V]
[2.00mA/15.00mA]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
[0.00mW/1.80mW]
60
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-ce
For FCLINK, OCLINK, and RFCF-RA information, the following information is displayed:
CM#0 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FCLINK]
Status/Status Code [Normal
CM#0 Port#1 Information
Port Type
[OCLINK]
Status/Status Code [Normal
CM#1 Port#0 Information
Port Type
[FC]
Port Mode
[RFCF-RA]
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
For SCU Information, the following information is displayed:
SCU Information
SCU#0 Status/Status Code
SCU#0 Voltage
SCU#0 Expires
SCU#0 Parts Number
SCU#0 Serial Number
SCU#0 Hard Revision
SCU#1 Status/Status Code
SCU#1 Voltage
SCU#1 Expires
SCU#1 Parts Number
SCU#1 Serial Number
SCU#1 Hard Revision
[Normal
[9.40V]
[0-00]
[]
[]
[]
[Normal
[9.40V]
[0-00]
[]
[]
[]
/ 0xE001]
/ 0xE001]
The following example displays the status of PSU#0:
CLI> show fru-ce -type psu0
CE PSU#0 Information
Status/Status Code [Normal
/ 0xE001]
61
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-de
show fru-de
This command displays the status of the components (Field Replaceable Units) in the drive enclosures.
■ Syntax
show fru-de [-de enclosure_number] [-type {iom0|iom1|psu0|psu1}]
■ Parameter
-de
Optional. This parameter specifies the drive enclosure number. Only one parameter can be
specified. If this parameter is omitted, all of the connected drive enclosures are displayed.
Example: -de 1
(Only the drive enclosure #1)
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the target component (FRU) name. The sub components
embedded in a drive enclosure will also be displayed. Only one parameter can be specified. If
this parameter is omitted, all of the FRUs are displayed.
iom0
Details and status of the I/O module #0
iom1
Details and status of the I/O module #1
psu0
Details and status of the Power Supply Unit #0
psu1
Details and status of the Power Supply Unit #1
■ Output
The following table shows the output information for the IOM.
DE#n IOM#m Information (n: The drive enclosure number, m: The IOM number)
Status/Status Code
IOM#n status and the status code
Error Code
Error code to identify error events that have occurred in an expander.
This information is only displayed when the Status is not "Normal" or "Undefined".
WWN
World Wide Name
Active EC
An EC number of the active firmware (The current operating firmware)
Next EC
An EC number of the stand-by firmware (The generation number of the firmware after the
next power cycle)
62
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show fru-de
DE#n IOM#m Internal Parts Status/Status Code
SAS Cable #0(IN) (IOM Port #0)
SAS Cable #0(IN)(IOM port #0) status and the status code
Error Code
Error code to identify error events that have occurred in port#0
This information is only displayed when the Status is not "Normal" or "Undefined".
SAS Cable #1(IN) (IOM Port #1)
SAS Cable #1(OUT)(IOM port #1) status and the status code
Error Code
Error code to identify error events that have occurred in that port#1
The following table shows the output information for the power supply units.
Status/Status Code
Power supply unit (PSU#n) status and the status code
Error Code
Error code to identify error events that occurred in a power supply unit
This information is only displayed when the Status is not "Normal" or "Undefined".
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the status of I/O module #0 in drive enclosure #1:
CLI> show fru-de -de 1 -type iom0
DE#1 IOM#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
WWN
[500000E0D060C4FF]
Active EC
[EC#1]
Next EC
[EC#1]
DE#1 IOM#0 Internal Parts Status/Status Code
SAS Cable(Expander Port)#0(IN) [Normal
/ 0xE001]
SAS Cable(Expander Port)#1(OUT) [Normal
/ ]
The following example displays the status of PSU#0 in drive enclosure #2:
CLI> show fru-de -de 2 -type psu0
DE#2 PSU#0 Information
Status/Status Code
[Normal
/ 0xE001]
63
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show disks
show disks
This command displays the details and status of the disk. As an option, an enclosure (all disks contained in
the specified enclosure), specific disks, or all the undefined disks can be specified.
■ Syntax
show disks [ -type {undefined | ce | de -de enclosure_number } | -disks {disks | all | productid} ]
■ Parameter
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies which disk information will be displayed. This parameter
cannot be specified with the "-disks" parameter. If all of the parameters are omitted, all disks
registered in the system will be displayed. undefined
undefined
All the undefined disks
ce
All disks in the controller enclosure (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
de
All disks in the specified drive enclosure
When using this parameter, the "-de" parameter and the drive enclosure number
must also be specified.
-de
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of the drive enclosure for which details are to be
obtained. This parameter cannot be used for other category types.
-disks
Optional. This parameter specifies which disk number to display the detailed information of
the disk for. One or more parameters can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax"
(page 19) Specifying "all" will display the details of all disks. When using the "productid"
parameter, the product ID list of all disks is displayed. This function is useful when updating
disk firmware.
all
Details of all disks
productid
The Product ID list of all disks
■ Output
For summary, the following items are displayed.
Location
Disk slot number
Status
Disk status
Size
Disk capacity
Type
Disk type
Speed
Rotating speed (unit: rpm)
Usage
Disk usage
Example: Data, Spare, System, etc.
64
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show disks
For details, the following items are displayed.
Location
Disk slot number
Status
Disk status
Error Code
Error Code to identify error events that occurred in a disk.
This information is only displayed when the Status is not "Available".
Size
Disk capacity
Type
Disk type
Disk factor (2.5" or 3.5")
Speed
Rotating speed (unit: rpm)
Usage
Disk usage
Example: Data, Spare, System, etc.
RAID Group
RAID group to which this disk belongs
Motor Status
Disk motor status by ECO functions
Rebuild/Copy back Progress
Progress status of Rebuild and Copy back
Vendor ID
Vendor ID
Product ID
Product ID
Serial Number
Serial number
WWN
World Wide Name
Firmware Revision
Disk firmware version
For the product ID list, the following items are displayed:
Product ID
Product ID
Revision
Disk firmware version
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the disks:
CLI> show disks
Location
Status
CE-Disk#0
Available
CE-Disk#1
Available
Size
73GB
73GB
Type
3.5" SAS
3.5" SAS
Speed(rpm)
15000
15000
Usage
System
System
65
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show disks
The following example displays a summary of all the disks in the controller enclosure:
CLI> show disks -type ce
Location
Status
CE-Disk#0
Available
CE-Disk#1
Available
CE-Disk#2
Available
CE-Disk#3
Available(Predictive Failure)
CE-Disk#4
Available
CE-Disk#5
Available
CE-Disk#6
Available
CE-Disk#7
Available
CE-Disk#8
Available
CE-Disk#9
Available
CE-Disk#10
Available
CE-Disk#11
Available
Size
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
Type
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
Speed(rpm)
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
15000
Usage
System
System
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Present
Global Hot Spare
Dedicated Hot Spare
The following example displays a summary of all the disks in drive enclosure #1:
CLI> show disks -type de -de 1
Location
Status
DE#1-Disk#0 Available(Predictive Failure)
DE#1-Disk#1 Available
DE#1-Disk#2 Available
DE#1-Disk#3 Available
DE#1-Disk#4 DE#1-Disk#5 Available
DE#1-Disk#6 DE#1-Disk#7 DE#1-Disk#8 DE#1-Disk#9 Available
DE#1-Disk#10 Available
DE#1-Disk#11 Available
Size
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
Type
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
Speed(rpm)
15000
15000
15000
15000
Usage
Data
Data
Data
Data
146GB
3.5" SAS
15000
Data
146GB
146GB
146GB
3.5" SAS
3.5" SAS
3.5" SAS
15000
15000
15000
Data
Global Hot Spare
Dedicated Hot Spare
Speed(rpm)
15000
15000
15000
15000
Usage
Data
Data
Data
Data
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
The following example displays a summary of all the undefined disks:
CLI> show disks -type undefined
Location
Status
DE#4-Disk#0 Available
DE#4-Disk#1 Available
DE#5-Disk#1 Available
DE#6-Disk#11 Available(Predictive Failure)
Size
146GB
146GB
146GB
146GB
Type
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
3.5"
SAS
SAS
SAS
SAS
The following example displays the details of disk #100 (disk #00 in drive enclosure #1):
CLI> show disks -disks 100
Drive Enclosure #1 Disk #0 Information
Location
[DE#1-Disk#0]
Status
[Error](Error Code : 0x0010)
Size
[146GB]
Type
[3.5" SAS]
Speed
[7200rpm]
Usage
[Data]
RAID Group
[1000 : RGP001]
Motor Status
[Active]
Rebuild/Copyback Progress [-]
Vendor ID
[FUJITSU]
Product ID
[FT373207C-K]
Serial Number
[1234567890]
WWN
[1111111111111111]
Firmware Revision
[12CD]
The following example displays the product ID list:
CLI> show disks -disks productid
Product ID
Revision
ST373455SS
12CD
ST99999999
3456
66
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show hardware-information
show hardware-information
This command displays the hardware information for each enclosure and sub-component.
■ Syntax
show hardware-information
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
For each enclosure, the following items are displayed. All possible drive enclosures are displayed,
irrespective of whether or not they are currently installed. Drive enclosures that do not exist are indicated by
hyphens.
Serial No.
Serial number embedded in the enclosure
Other Information
Individual identifier embedded in the controlling Fujitsu enclosure.
For each component, the following items are displayed. For single controller models, both controller module
#1 and expander module #1 are indicated by hyphens. Information is not displayed for drive enclosures that
do not exist.
Part No.
Part number embedded in the component
Serial No.
Serial number embedded in the component
Version
Hardware revision of the component
For each component, the following items are displayed. For single controller models, both BRT#1 and
QSFP#1 are indicated by hyphens. Information is not displayed for BRT that do not exist.
Part No.
Part number embedded in the component
Serial No.
Serial number embedded in the component
Vendor Name
Vendor Name embedded in the component
67
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 2 Status Display
2.1 Storage System Status > show hardware-information
■ Example(s)
For FC system configurations with a single drive enclosure, the following hardware information is displayed:
CLI> show hardware-information
Enclosure
Serial No.
Controller Enclosure ST35CE000012
Drive Enclosure#1
ST35DE000009
Drive Enclosure#2
ST35DE000011
Drive Enclosure#3
ST35DE000019
Drive Enclosure#4
ST35DE000018
Drive Enclosure#5
ST35DE000023
Drive Enclosure#6
Drive Enclosure#7
Drive Enclosure#8
Drive Enclosure#9
-
Other Information
35CE000012
35DE000009
35DE000011
35DE000019
35DE000018
35DE000023
-
Component
CM#0
CM#1
PSU#0
PSU#1
DE#1-IOM#0
DE#1-IOM#1
DE#1-PSU#0
DE#1-PSU#1
DE#2-IOM#0
DE#2-IOM#1
DE#2-PSU#0
DE#2-PSU#1
DE#3-IOM#0
DE#3-IOM#1
DE#3-PSU#0
DE#3-PSU#1
DE#4-IOM#0
DE#4-IOM#1
DE#4-PSU#0
DE#4-PSU#1
DE#5-IOM#0
DE#5-IOM#1
DE#5-PSU#0
DE#5-PSU#1
SVC#0
SVC#1
FRT#0
FRT#1
BRT#0
BRT#1
Part No.
CA07111-C631
CA07111-C631
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
Serial No.
PP09280285
PP0928028A
FA09060095
FA09060088
PP085100Z7
PP085100YT
FA09030006
FA08520078
PP085100YP
PP085100YW
FA08520085
FA08520084
PP085100Z9
PP085100ZD
FA09050024
FA09050025
PP085100Z0
PP085100YZ
FA09040009
FA09040011
PP085102T0
PP085102T1
FA09060036
FA09060038
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
Version
AA
AA
06A
06A
AA
AA
05A
05A
AA
AA
05A
05A
AA
AA
06A
06A
AA
AA
06A
06A
AA
AA
06A
06A
06A
06A
06A
06A
06A
06A
Component
BRT#0-QSFP#0
BRT#0-QSFP#1
Part No.
CA07111-C661
CA07111-C661
Serial No.
PP085102T0
PP085102T0
Vendor Name
fujitsu
fujitsu
For SAS and iSCSI system configurations with no drive enclosures, the following hardware information is
displayed:
CLI> show hardware-information
Enclosure
Serial No.
Controller Enclosure ST35CE000012
Drive Enclosure#1
Drive Enclosure#2
Drive Enclosure#3
Drive Enclosure#4
Drive Enclosure#5
Drive Enclosure#6
Drive Enclosure#7
Drive Enclosure#8
Drive Enclosure#9
-
Other Information
35CE000012
-
Component
CM#0
CM#1
PSU#0
PSU#1
Serial No.
PP09280285
PP0928028A
FA09060095
FA09060088
Part No.
CA07111-C631
CA07111-C631
CA05954-0860
CA05954-0860
Version
AA
AA
06A
06A
68
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3
Configuration Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands used for basic settings of the storage system. These set-tings include Thin
Provisioning Pool management, Flexible Tier management, RAID group man-agement, and host interface
management.
3.1
Thin Provisioning Pool Management
This chapter explains the commands used for the following settings:
• Thin provisioning pool settings
• ECO settings
3.1.1
Thin Provisioning Pool
This section explains the commands used for Thin provisioning pool management.
• Creating a Thin provisioning pool
• Deleting Thin provisioning pools
• Changing an existing Thin provisioning pool
• Expanding a Thin provisioning pool
• Formatting a Thin provisioning pool
■ Summary of Thin provisioning pools settings through CLI
The steps involved in setting the Thin provisioning pools (TPP) using CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
License management
Before creating TPPs, the license for the Thin provisioning function should be registered to the system.
Use the "set thin-pro-license" command to register the license and use the "show thin-pro-license"
command to confirm it.
When the Thin provisioning function is not being used, the license can be deleted. Use the "delete
thin-pro-license" command to delete the license.
69
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management
2
TPP management
Use the "create thin-pro-pool" command to create a TPP.
Use the "show thin-pro-pool" command to confirm the creation of a TPP. After a TPP is created, use the
"set thin-pro-pool" command to change the settings of a created TPP.
A TPP can be deleted by using the "delete thin-pro-pool" command.
3
Expanding TPP
Use the "expand thin-pro-pool" command to expand a TPP area.
4
Thin provisioning Volume (TPV) management
Prepare a TPP and a TPV. A TPV can be created from a TPP. A TPV can be created in the same way as a
normal volume is created by using the "create volume" command. It can be delete using the "delete
volume" command. When expanding a volume, use the "expand volume" command.
• A TPV can be deleted by using the "delete volume" command.
• A TPV can be expanded by using the "expand volume" command.
End of procedure
The following figure shows the relationship between TPPs and TPVs:
TPV
create volume
(Create TPV)
TPP
show thin-pro-pools
(Show TPP)
delete thin-pro-pool
(Delete TPP)
create thin-pro-pool
(Create TPP)
70
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > set thin-pro-license
set thin-pro-license
This command registers the Thin provisioning license.
■ Syntax
set thin-pro-license -key key
■ Parameter
-key
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning license key. The license key length is 16 letters
(fixed).
■ Example(s)
The following example registers the Thin provisioning license:
CLI> set thin-pro-license -key 8628569802345756
71
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > delete thin-pro-license
delete thin-pro-license
This command deletes the registered Thin provisioning license.
The Thin provisioning license cannot be deleted in the following situations:
• When the Thin provisioning license is not registered
• When a Thin provisioning pool is registered
■ Syntax
delete thin-pro-license -execution {yes|no}
■ Parameter
-execution
This parameter confirms that the operation should proceed. The Thin provisioning license is
deleted only when "yes" is specified for this parameter.
yes
The already registered Thin provisioning license is deleted.
no
No operation.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the already registered Thin provisioning license:
CLI> delete thin-pro-license -execution yes
72
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show thin-pro-license
show thin-pro-license
This command displays the registration status of the Thin provisioning license.
■ Syntax
show thin-pro-license
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Thin provisioning License [Registered]
A
A:
The registration status of Thin provisioning license
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the registration status of the Thin provisioning license:
CLI> show thin-pro-license
Thin provisioning License [Registered]
CLI> show thin-pro-license
Thin provisioning License [Not Registered]
73
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > create thin-pro-pool
create thin-pro-pool
This command creates a Thin provisioning pool with the specified Thin provisioning pool name, disk attribute,
reliability, encryption, and a RAID group. The Thin provisioning pool is formatted automatically after it is
created. When registering a hot spare, refer to the "set global-spare" or the "set dedicated-spare" command.
■ Syntax
create thin-pro-pool -name alias_name -attribute {online|nearline|ssd|sed}
-level {0|1|5|6|10} [-warning warning] [-attention attention]
-rg-mode {auto|manual} [-capacity capacity] [-disks disks]
[-assigned-cm {0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1|cm2cpu0|cm2cpu1|cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1|
cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1|cm6cpu0|cm6cpu1|cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1| auto}]
[-encryption {enable|disable}] [-stripe-depth { 64kb | 128kb | 256kb | 512kb | 1024kb }]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the alias name of a Thin provisioning pool. Only one name can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-attribute
This parameter specifies the disk attribute of a Thin provisioning pool.
-level
online
Online disks
nearline
Nearline disks
ssd
SSDs
sed
SEDs
This parameter specifies the RAID level.
0
RAID0
1
RAID1
5
RAID5
6
RAID6
10
RAID1+0
-warning
Optional. This parameter specifies the warning level of the Thin provisioning pool. The settable
range is 5 – 99%. If this parameter is omitted, the default value (90%) is set. The warning level
range should be equal to or higher than the "-attention" setting range.
-attention
Optional. This parameter specifies the attention level of the Thin provisioning pool. The
settable range is 5 – 80%. If this parameter is omitted, the default value (75%) is set. The
attention level range should be equal to or lower than the "-warning" setting range.
-rg-mode
This parameter specifies the method of selecting the disk when creating the RAID group.
auto
The disk is automatically allocated. The capacity of the disk is specified with the capacity parameter.
manual
The disk is manually allocated. The disk is specified with the -disks parameter.
74
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > create thin-pro-pool
-capacity
Optional. This parameter specifies the disk capacity that is used to create a RAID group. This
parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode auto" is selected.
-disks
Optional. This parameter specifies which disks are used to configure the RAID group. This
parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode manual" is selected. One or more disks can
be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned controller for the specified RAID group. This
parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode manual" is selected. If "auto" is specified, the
fixed controller, which is calculated automatically by the system, is assigned. If this parameter
is omitted, "auto" mode is selected.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module #0
1
Controller module #1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module #0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module #0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module #1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module #1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module #2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module #2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module #3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module #3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module #4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module #4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module #5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module #5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module #6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module #6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module #7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module #7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
75
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > create thin-pro-pool
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies whether the encryption by a CM is performed. When
"enable" is selected, the specified pool volume data is encrypted. If omitted, then it is handled
as if "disable" is selected.
enable
The pool volume data is encrypted.
disable
The pool volume data is not encrypted.
-stripe-depth
Optional. This parameter specifies the stripe depth for the Thin provisioning pool that is to be
created. If omitted, then it is handled as if "64kb" is selected. The available values vary
depending on the RAID level and the number of drives. When "auto" is specified for the "-rgmode" parameter, only "64kb" can be specified.
64kb
64k Byte
128kb
128k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 10 or more disks, RAID0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
256kb
256k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 9 or less disks, RAID0 configurations,
and RAID1+0 configurations)
512kb
512k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 5 or less disks, RAID0 configurations,
and RAID 1+0 configurations)
1024kb
1024k Byte (Only for RAID0 configurations and RAID1+0 configurations)
■ Example(s)
The following example creates a Thin provisioning pool named "TPP001" that uses four online disks (#003 to
#006):
CLI> create thin-pro-pool -name TPP001 -attribute online
80 -rg-mode manual -disks 003-006 -assigned-cm cm0cpu0
-encryption enable -level 0 -warning 90 -attention
76
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > set thin-pro-pool
set thin-pro-pool
This command changes the information of an existing Thin provisioning pool (Thin provisioning pool name, a
Thin provisioning pool warning, and a Thin provisioning pool attention).
■ Syntax
set thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name } [-name name]
[-warning warning] [-attention attention]
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifier. Only one Thin provisioning pool
identifier can be specified.
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new Thin provisioning pool name. If this parameter is
omitted, the name is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-warning
Optional. This parameter specifies the warning level of the Thin provisioning pool. The settable
range is 5 – 99%. If this parameter is omitted, the warning level is not changed. The warning
level range should be equal to or higher than the "-attention" setting range.
-attention
Optional. This parameter specifies the attention level of the Thin provisioning pool. The
settable range is 5 – 80%. If this parameter is omitted, the attention level is not changed. The
attention level range should be equal to or lower than the "-warning" setting range.
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the Thin provisioning pool name from "TPP0001" to "TPP0010":
CLI> set thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP0001 -name TPP0010
The following example changes the attention to 60% and the warning to 80% for Thin provisioning pool #02:
CLI> set thin-pro-pool -pool-number 02 -attention 60 -warning 80
77
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > delete thin-pro-pool
delete thin-pro-pool
This command deletes an existing Thin provisioning pool(s). A Thin provisioning pool cannot be deleted if one
or more volumes exist in the pool. All volumes in the specified Thin provisioning pool must be deleted before
the Thin provisioning pool is deleted.
■ Syntax
delete thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_numbers | -pool-name pool_names }
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin provisioning
pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax"
(page 20).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes Thin provisioning pool #01:
CLI> delete thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01
The following example deletes the Thin provisioning pool named TPP05:
CLI> delete thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP05
78
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show thin-pro-pools
show thin-pro-pools
This command displays a summary list of all the Thin provisioning pools or the details of the specified Thin
provisioning pool(s).
■ Syntax
show thin-pro-pools [-pool-number pool_numbers | -pool-name pool_names ]
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin
provisioning pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool
Syntax" (page 20). If the Thin provisioning pool identifier is omitted, a summary list of all the
Thin provisioning pools is displayed.
■ Output
#Thin Pro
#No. Name
#00 TPP01
A
B
Disk
attribute
Online
C
#<Raid Group
#
#Raid Group
#No. Name
#01 RG001
#02 RG002
L
M
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
S:
RAID
Status
Level
RAID1+0 Available
D
E
Total
Capa
100 TB
F
Used
Capa
50 MB
G
Used
status
Normal
H
warning(%)
80
I
Attention(%)
60
J
Encryption
Enable
K
List>
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
RAID1+0
N
Assigned
CM
CM#0
CM#1
O
Status
Spare in Use
Available
P
Total
Capa
500TB
500TB
Q
Free
Capa
250GB
250GB
R
Stripe
Depth
128KB
128KB
S
Thin provisioning pool number
Thin provisioning pool name
Disk attribute that composes the Thin provisioning pool (Online/Nearline)
RAID level
Thin provisioning pool status
Total capacity of the Thin provisioning pool
Used capacity of the Thin provisioning pool
Alarm status (Normal/Warning/Attention)
Warning level range
Attention level range
Encryption status (Enable/Disable)
RAID group number
RAID group name
RAID level
Assigned CM
RAID group status
Total capacity of RAID group (Unit: MB)
Free capacity of RAID group (Unit: MB)
Stripe Depth (Unit: KB) (Except for 64KB)
79
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show thin-pro-pools
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary list of all the Thin provisioning pools registered in the system:
CLI> show thin-pro-pools
Thin Pro
Disk
RAID
No. Name
attribute Level
0 TPP01
Online
RAID1+0
1 TPP02
Nearline RAID1+0
2 TPP03
Online
RAID1+0
Status
Available
Available
Available
Total
Capacity
95.25 GB
95.25 GB
95.25 GB
Used
Capacity
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
Alarm
status
Normal
Normal
Normal
warning(%)
80
80
99
Attention(%)
60
75
75
Encryption
Enable
Disable
Enable
The following example displays the details of the Thin provisioning pool named "TPP001":
CLI> show thin-pro-pools
Thin Pro
Disk
RAID
Status
Total
No. Name
attribute Level
Capacity
00 TPP01
Online
RAID1+0 Available 95.25 GB
<Raid Group List>
RAID Group
RAID
Assigned Status
No. Name
Level
CM
1 RG001
RAID1+0 CM#0
Spare in Use
Used
Capacity
0.00 MB
Alarm
status
Normal
Total
Capacity
95.25 GB
warn- Attening(%) tion(%)
80
60
Encryption
Enable
Free
Capacity
0.00 MB
The following example displays the details of Thin provisioning pool #0:
CLI> show thin-pro-pools
Thin Pro
Disk
RAID
Status
Total
No. Name
attribute Level
Capacity
00 TPP01
Online
RAID1+0 Available
95.25 GB
<Raid Group List>
RAID Group
RAID
Assigned Status
No. Name
Level
CM
1 RG001
RAID1+0 CM#0
Spare in Use
Used
Capacity
0.00 MB
Total
Capacity
95.25 GB
Alarm
status
Normal
warn- Atten- Encryping(%) tion(%) tion
80
60
Enable
Free
Capacity
0.00 MB
80
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show thin-pro-pool-progress
show thin-pro-pool-progress
This command displays the formatting progress of the Thin provisioning pool.
■ Syntax
show thin-pro-pool-progress [-pool-number pool_numbers | -pool-name pool_names ]
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin
provisioning pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool
Syntax" (page 20). If the Thin provisioning pool identifier is omitted, a progress list of all the
Thin provisioning pool is displayed.
■ Output
#Thin Pro
#No. Name
#
# 0 TPP01
# 1 TPP02
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
Status
Format
Progress(%)
Available
Available
C
30
50
D
A Thin provisioning pool number
A Thin provisioning pool name
Thin provisioning pool status
Format progress
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the formatting progress for all the Thin provisioning pools:
CLI> show thin-pro-pool-progress
Thin Pro
Status
No. Name
0 TPP001
Available
1 TPP002
Available
2 TPP003
Available
Format
Progress(%)
30
50
80
The following example displays only the progress status of Thin provisioning pool#1:
CLI> show thin-pro-pool-progress -pool-number 1
Thin Pro
Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
1 TPP002
Available
50
81
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show thin-pro-pool-progress
The following example displays the progress status of the Thin provisioning pools named "TPP001" and
"TPP002":
CLI> show thin-pro-pool-progress -rg-name TPP001,TPP002
Thin Pro
Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
0 TPP001
Available
30
1 TPP002
Available
50
82
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > expand thin-pro-pool
expand thin-pro-pool
This command expands the capacity of an existing Thin provisioning pool with the specified disks and
assigned cm. A Thin provisioning pool can be expanded by adding a new RAID group.
■ Syntax
expand thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name }
-rg-mode {auto|manual} [-disks disks] [-capacity capacity]
[-assigned-cm {0 | 1 | cm0cpu0 | cm0cpu1 | cm1cpu0 | cm1cpu1 | cm2cpu0 | cm2cpu1 | cm3cpu0 |
cm3cpu1 | cm4cpu0 | cm4cpu1 | cm5cpu0 | cm5cpu1 | cm6cpu0 | cm6cpu1 | cm7cpu0 | cm7cpu1 | auto}]
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers.
Only one Thin provisioning pool identifier can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin
Provisioning Pool Syntax" (page 20).
-rg-mode
This parameter specifies the method of selecting the disk when creating the new RAID group.
auto
The disk is automatically allocated. The capacity of the disk is specified with the capacity parameter.
manual
The disk is manually allocated. The disk is specified with the -disks parameter.
-disks
Optional. This parameter specifies which disks are used to configure the RAID group. This
parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode manual" is selected. One or more disks can
be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19). When -disks is
specified, -capacity cannot be specified.
-capacity
Optional. This parameter specifies the total capacity of the disks that are used to create a RAID
group. This parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode auto" is specified. The disk that
corresponds to the capacity is automatically set. When -capacity is specified, -disks cannot be
specified.
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned controller (CM number) of the specified RAID
group. This parameter can only be specified when "-rg-mode manual" is specified. If "auto" is
specified, the fixed controller, which is calculated automatically by the system, is assigned. If
omitted, the "auto" mode is set.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module#0
1
Controller module#1
auto
Automatically (default)
83
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > expand thin-pro-pool
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
CM#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module#2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module#2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module#3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module#3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module#4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module#4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module#5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module#5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module#6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module#6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module#7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module#7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
■ Example(s)
The following example expands Thin provisioning pool#01 by adding a RAID group (disks 001 to 004/CM#0CPU#0):
CLI> expand thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01
-disks 001-004
-assigned-cm cm0cpu0
The following example expands Thin provisioning pool#02 by adding a RAID group (capacity 900GB/CM#1CPU#1):
CLI> expand thin-pro-pool -pool-number 02
-capacity 900G -assigned-cm cm1cpu1
84
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > format thin-pro-pool
format thin-pro-pool
This command will format the Thin provisioning pool(s).
■ Syntax
format thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name } -mode {all|unformatted}
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin provisioning
pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax"
(page 20).
-mode
This parameter specifies the range of the format.
all
All the areas are formatted (all of the data is deleted).
unformatted Unformatted areas are formatted. When there are no unformatted areas, the
command ends normally (no action from the command is performed).
When the "-mode all" parameter is specified to format all of the areas, all of the existing data is
deleted. Normally, the "-mode unformatted" parameter is used to format only unformatted
areas.
■ Example(s)
The following example formats all the area of Thin provisioning pool#01:
CLI> format thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01 -mode all
The following example formats the unformatted area of the Thin provisioning pool named "TPP05":
CLI> format thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP05 -mode unformatted
85
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management
3.1.2
Thin Provisioning Pool ECO Management
This section explains the commands that are related to the ECO functions of a Thin provisioning pool. They are
only applicable when the ECO mode is enabled using the "set eco-mode" command.
The three steps involved in enabling the ECO functions are as follows:
Procedure
1
Enable the ECO mode.
2
Create an ECO schedule.
3
Assign the ECO schedule to Thin provisioning pools.
End of procedure
For the ECO mode and ECO schedule settings, refer to "3.3.3 ECO Management" (page 128).
■ Summary of Thin provisioning pool ECO settings through CLI
Setting of the Thin provisioning pools (TPP) with ECO using CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
Assign the ECO mode to a TPP.
To assign an ECO mode schedule to TPP, use the "set eco-thin-pro-pool" command.
To check the ECO mode schedule, use the "show eco-thin-pro-pool" command. An ECO mode schedule
can be released from an assigned TPP by using the "release eco-thin-pro-pool" command.
End of procedure
The following figure shows Thin provisioning ECO setting management:
TPP (Thin Provisioning Pool)
show eco-thin-pro-pool
(Show associated ECO
schedule)
set eco-thin-pro-pool
(Associate ECO schedule)
release eco-thin-pro-pool
(Release associated ECO schedule)
eco
create eco-schedule
(Create ECO schedule)
schedule
every-day
10:00 - 20:00
86
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > set eco-thin-pro-pool
set eco-thin-pro-pool
This command is used to associate an ECO schedule with a specified Thin provisioning pool(s). When
registering a ECO schedule, refer to the "create eco-schedule" command. ECO mode may not be used for Thin
provisioning pool(s) that contain SSD drives.
■ Syntax
set eco- thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_numbers | -pool-name pool_names }
[-schedule-number schedule_number | -schedule-name schedule_name] -action {enable|disable}
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin provisioning
pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax"
(page 20).
-schedule-number
or
-schedule-name
Optional. This parameter specifies an ECO schedule identifier. Only one ECO schedule number
can be specified.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.13 ECO Schedule
Syntax" (page 25).
-action
This parameter specifies whether the associated definition is enabled.
enable
The associated definition is enabled.
disable
The associated definition is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example associates the ECO schedule named "SC001" with Thin provisioning pool#01:
CLI> set eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01 -schedule-name SC001 -action enable
The following example associates the ECO schedule named "SC001" with thin provisioning pool #01 - #05 at
the same time:
CLI> set eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01-05 -schedule-name SC001 -action enable
The following example disables the ECO function of the Thin provisioning pool named "TPP01":
CLI> set eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP01 -action disable
87
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > set eco-thin-pro-pool
The following example associates ECO schedule #1 with the Thin provisioning pool named "TPP001". The
second command associates the ECO schedule #2 with the same Thin provisioning pool. executions result in
ECO schedule #1 being released:
CLI> set eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP001 -schedule-number 1 -action enable
CLI> set eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP001 -schedule-number 2 -action enable
88
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > release eco-thin-pro-pool
release eco-thin-pro-pool
This command releases the ECO schedule that is associated with a specific Thin provisioning pool(s).
■ Syntax
release eco- thin-pro-pool {-pool-number pool_numbers | -pool-name pool_names }
■ Parameter
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers. One or more Thin provisioning
pool identifiers can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax"
(page 20).
■ Example(s)
The following example releases an ECO schedule associated with the Thin provisioning pool named
"TPP001":
CLI>release eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-name TPP01
The following example releases an ECO schedule associated with Thin provisioning pool #01- #05 at the
same time:
CLI>release eco-thin-pro-pool -pool-number 01-05
89
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.1 Thin Provisioning Pool Management > show eco-thin-pro-pool
show eco-thin-pro-pool
This command displays the list of ECO schedules that are associated with Thin provisioning pools.
■ Syntax
show eco-thin-pro-pool
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
#Thin Pro
#No. Name
#
#00 TPP01
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
Disk
attribute
Online
C
reliability
High
D
Status
ECO Schedule
Available
E
Action No. Name
[ON]
1 SC001
F
G H
Motor
Status
Control
Status
Active
I
[OFF]
J
Thin provisioning pool number
Thin provisioning pool name
Disk attribute that composes the Thin provisioning pool (Online/Nearline)
Reliability of the Thin provisioning pool (High/Middle/None)
Thin provisioning pool status
ECO schedule action. Whether the ECO schedule is associated is displayed.
ECO schedule number
(In the case of a schedule by a cooperative software, [128] is displayed.)
ECO schedule name
(In the case of a schedule by a cooperative software, [External] is displayed.)
Current status of a disk motor
Control status by a control command
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the Thin provisioning pools that have an ECO schedule associated
with them:
Thin Pro
No. Name
00
01
05
TPP01
TPP02
TPP05
Disk
attribute
Online
Online
Online
reliability
High
Middle
High
Status
ECO Schedule
Available
Available
Available
Action No. Name
[ON]
1 SC001
[ON]
2 SC002
[ON]
5 SC005
Motor
Status
Control
Status
Active
Active
Active
[OFF]
[OFF]
[OFF]
90
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management
3.2
Flexible Tier Management
3.2.1
Flexible Tier Pools
This section explains the commands used for Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) management.
• Deleting FTRPs
• Changing an existing Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP)
For details about Flexible Tier Volume (FTV) management, refer to "3.4.2 Flexible Tier Volumes" (page 175).
91
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-mode
show flexible-tier-mode
This command displays the setting status of the Flexible Tier function.
■ Syntax
show flexible-tier-mode
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Flexible Tier Mode [Enable]
A
A:
It shows whether the Flexible Tier function is enabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the setting status of the Flexible Tier function:
CLI> show flexible-tier-mode
Flexible Tier Mode [Disable]
CLI> show flexible-tier-mode
Flexible Tier Mode [Enable]
92
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > delete flexible-tier-pool
delete flexible-tier-pool
This command deletes the Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs) that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system. All Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs) in the target FTRPs are also deleted. If a volume is
registered in the specified FTRP, the FTRP cannot be deleted.
Delete all volumes in the target FTRP before deleting the FTRP.
■ Syntax
delete flexible-tier-pool {-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name }
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP identifiers that are to be deleted. Multiple FTRPs can be
deleted in a single command.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes FTRP#01:
CLI> delete flexible-tier-pool -ftrp-number 01
The following example deletes an FTRP that is named "FTRP005":
CLI> delete flexible-tier-pool -ftrp-name FTRP05
93
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-pools
show flexible-tier-pools
This command displays an overview list of Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs) that are already registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and detailed information for a specified FTRP. When the FTRP number or the
FTRP name is specified, information is displayed for the specified FTRP and the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP)
that is registered in the specified FTRP. When the FTRP number or the FTRP name is omitted, a list of the FTRPs
that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.
■ Syntax
show flexible-tier-pools [-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name ]
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTRP identifier to display detailed information for.
Multiple parameters can be selected in a single command.
If omitted, a list of all the FTRPs that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system is displayed.
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted
# Flexible Tier Pool
# No. Name
#
0 FTRP_NAME#0
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Status
Available
C
Total
Used
Used
Capacity
Capacity
Status
129.00 MB
0.00 MB Normal
D
E
F
Warn- Attening(%) tion(%)
90
75
G
H
Encryption
Disable
I
Flexible Tier Pool number
Flexible Tier Pool name
Flexible Tier Pool status
Total capacity of the Flexible Tier Pool
Used capacity of the Flexible Tier Pool
Alarm status (Normal/Warning/Attention)
Warning level range
Attention level range
Encryption status (Enable/Disable)
94
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-pools
When the parameter is specified
# Flexible Tier Pool
Status
# No. Name
#
0 FTRP_NAME#0
Available
A
B
C
# <Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
# Flexible Tier Sub Pool Disk
# No. Name
Attribute
#
0 FTSP
Online
J
K
L
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Total
Used
Used
Capacity
Capacity
Status
129.00 MB
0.00 MB Normal
D
E
F
RAID
Level
RAID0
M
Status
Available
N
Warn- Attening(%) tion(%)
90
75
G
H
Encryption
Disable
I
Total
Used
Capacity
Capacity
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
O
P
Flexible Tier Pool number
Flexible Tier Pool name
Flexible Tier Pool status
Total capacity of the Flexible Tier Pool
Used capacity of the Flexible Tier Pool
Alarm status (Normal/Warning/Attention)
Warning level range
Attention level range
Encryption status (Enable/Disable)
Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
Disk attribute that composes the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (Online/Nearline/SSD)
RAID Level
Flexible Tier Sub Pool status
Total capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
Used capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
■ Example(s)
The following example displays an overview list of the FTRPs that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system:
CLI> show flexible-tier-pools
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
0 FTRP001
Available
1 FTRP_NAME#0
Available
Total
Used
Capacity
Capacity
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
Used
Status
Normal
Normal
Warn- Attening(%) tion(%)
90
75
90
75
Encryption
Disable
Disable
The following example displays the detailed information of an FTRP that is named "FTRP001":
CLI> show flexible-tier-pools -ftrp-name FTRP001
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
Total
Used
Used
Warn- Atten- EncrypNo. Name
Capacity
Capacity
Status
ing(%) tion(%) tion
0 FTRP001
Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB Normal
90
75 Disable
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Disk
RAID
Status
Total
Used
No. Name
Attribute Level
Capacity
Capacity
0 FTSP
Online
RAID0
Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
95
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-pools
The following example displays detailed information for FTRP#00:
CLI> show flexible-tier-pools -ftrp-number 0
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
Total
Used
Used
Warn- Atten- EncrypNo. Name
Capacity
Capacity
Status
ing(%) tion(%) tion
0 FTRP001
Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB Normal
90
75 Disable
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Disk
RAID
Status
Total
Used
No. Name
Attribute Level
Capacity
Capacity
0 FTSP
Online
RAID0
Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
96
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-pool-progress
show flexible-tier-pool-progress
This command displays the progress rate of formatting Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs) that are already registered
in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. When the FTRP number or the FTRP name is specified, the progress
rates for the specified FTRPs are displayed. Note that the progress rate is not displayed when a specified FTRP
is not being formatted. When the FTRP number or the FTRP name is omitted, a list of the progress rates for the
FTRPs being formatted that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.
■ Syntax
show flexible-tier-pool-progress [-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name ]
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTRP identifier to display detailed information for.
Multiple parameters can be selected in a single command.
If omitted, a list of all the FTRPs that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system and that are being formatted is displayed.
■ Output
#Flexible Tier Pool Status
#No. Name
# 0 FTRP001
Available
A
B
C
#<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
#Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
#No. Name
Progress(%)
# 1 FTSP001
Available 50
# 2 FTSP002
Available 35
D
E
F
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
Flexible Tier Pool number
Flexible Tier Pool name
Flexible Tier Pool status
Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
Flexible Tier Sub Pool status
Format progress
97
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-pool-progress
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the Flexible Tier Pools that are being formatted:
CLI> show flexible-tier-pool-progress
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
0 FTRP000
Available
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
0 FTSP0000
Available 84
1 FTSP0001
Available 20
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
3 FTRP003
Available
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
16 FTSP0016
Available 99
The following example displays the progress rate of formatting for an FTRP that is named "FTRP001":
CLI> show flexible-tier-pool-progress -ftrp-name FTRP001
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
1 FTRP001
Available
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
4 FTSP0004
Available 50
The following example displays the progress rate of formatting for FTRP#00 and FTRP#02:
CLI> show flexible-tier-pool-progress -ftrp-number 0,2
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
0 FTRP000
Available
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
0 FTSP0000
Available 84
1 FTSP0001
Available 20
Flexible Tier Pool
Status
No. Name
2 FTRP002
Available
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Status
Format
No. Name
Progress(%)
17 FTSP0017
Available 99
18 FTSP0018
Available 10
19 FTSP0019
Available 0
98
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > set flexible-tier-sub-pool
set flexible-tier-sub-pool
This command changes the information for the Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs) that are already registered in
the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Syntax
set flexible-tier-sub-pool {-ftsp-number ftsp_number | -ftsp-name ftsp_name }
[-assigned-cm{0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1|cm2cpu0|cm2cpu1|cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1|
cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1|cm6cpu0|cm6cpu1|cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1|auto}]
■ Parameter
-ftsp-number
or
-ftsp-name
This parameter specifies the FTSP identifier. Only one FTSP identifier can be specified in a
single command.
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned CM for the RAID group that is added to the
target FTSP. When "auto" is specified, the assigned CM is automatically determined by the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. If omitted, the assigned CM is not changed.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module#0
1
Controller module#1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
99
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > set flexible-tier-sub-pool
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module#2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module#2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module#3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module#3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module#4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module#4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module#5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module#5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module#6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module#6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module#7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module#7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
■ Example(s)
The following example automatically sets the assigned CM for FTSP0001:
CLI> set flexible-tier-sub-pool -ftsp-name FTSP0001 -assigned-cm auto
100
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-sub-pools
show flexible-tier-sub-pools
This command displays an overview list of the Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs) that are already registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and detailed information for a specified FTSP. When the FTSP number or the
FTSP name is specified, information on the specified FTSP and the RAID group (RLU) that are registered in the
specified FTSP is displayed. When the FTSP number or the FTSP name is omitted, a list of the FTSPs that are
already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.
■ Syntax
show flexible-tier-sub-pools [-ftsp-number ftsp_number | -ftsp-name ftsp_name ]
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTSP identifier to display detailed information for.
Multiple parameters can be selected in a single command.
If omitted, a list of all the FTSPs that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system is displayed.
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted:
#Flexible Tier Sub Pool
#No. Name
# 1 FTSP001
# 2 FTSP002
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Flexible Tier Pool
No. Name
0 FTRP000
1 FTRP001
C
D
Disk
Attribute
Online
SSD
E
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
RAID1+0
F
Status
Total
Capacity
Available 500 GB
Available 500 GB
G
H
Used
Capacity
250 GB
250 GB
I
Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
Assigned Flexible Tier Pool number
Assigned Flexible Tier Pool name
Disk attribute that composes the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (Online/Nearline/SSD/SED)
RAID Level
Flexible Tier Sub Pool status
Total capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
Used capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
101
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-sub-pools
When the parameter is specified:
#Flexible Tier Sub Pool
#No. Name
# 1 FTSP001
# 2 FTSP002
A
B
#<Raid Group
#Raid Group
#No. Name
# 1 RG001
# 2 RG002
J
K
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
List>
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
RAID1+0
L
Flexible Tier Pool
No. Name
0 FTRP000
1 FTRP001
C
D
Assigned
CM
CM#0
CM#1
M
Disk
Attribute
Online
SSD
E
Status
Spare in Use
Available
N
Total
Capacity
500 GB
500 GB
O
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
RAID1+0
F
Status
Available
Available
G
Total
Capacity
500 GB
500 GB
H
Used
Capacity
250 GB
250 GB
I
Used
Stripe
Capacity
Depth
250 GB 1024 KB
250 GB 1024 KB
P
Q
Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
Assigned Flexible Tier Pool number
Assigned Flexible Tier Pool name
Disk attribute that composes the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (Online/Nearline/SSD)
RAID Level
Flexible Tier Sub Pool status
Total capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
Used capacity of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool
RAID Group number
RAID Group name
RAID Level
Assigned CM
RAID Group status
Total capacity of RAID Group
Used capacity of RAID Group
Stripe depth
■ Example(s)
The following example displays an overview list of the Flexible Tier Sub Pools that are already registered in
the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system:
CLI> show flexible-tier-sub-pools
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Flexible Tier Pool
No. Name
No. Name
0 FTSP0000
0 FTRP000
10 FTSP0010
0 FTRP000
53 FTSP0053
0 FTRP000
Disk
Attribute
Online
Nearline
SSD
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
RAID5
RAID6
Status
Available
Available
Available
Total
Capacity
250 GB
500 GB
250 GB
Used
Capacity
125 GB
250 GB
64 GB
The following example displays detailed information for an FTSP that is named "FTSP0000":
CLI> show flexible-tier-sub-pools -ftsp-name FTSP0000
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Flexible Tier Pool Disk
No. Name
No. Name
Attribute
0 FTSP0000
0 FTRP000
Online
<Raid Group
Raid Group
No. Name
4 RLI004
List>
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
Assigned
Status
CM
CM#0CPU#0 Available
RAID
Level
RAID1+0
Status
Available
Total
Capacity
250 GB
Used
Capacity
125 GB
Total
Used
Capacity Capacity
250 GB
125 GB
102
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show flexible-tier-sub-pools
The following example displays detailed information for FTSP#10:
CLI> show flexible-tier-sub-pools -ftsp-number 10
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Flexible Tier Pool Disk
No. Name
No. Name
Attribute
10 FTSP0010
0 FTRP000
Nearline
<Raid Group
Raid Group
No. Name
1 RLI001
10 RLI010
53 RLI053
73 RLI073
List>
RAID
Level
RAID5
RAID5
RAID5
RAID5
Assigned
CM
CM#0CPU#0
CM#0CPU#0
CM#7CPU#1
CM#0CPU#0
Status
Available
Available
Available
Available
Total
Capacity
250 GB
100 GB
75 GB
75 GB
RAID
Level
RAID5
Status
Available
Total
Capacity
500 GB
Used
Capacity
250 GB
Used
Capacity
150 GB
75 GB
25 GB
0 GB
103
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management
3.2.2
FTRPE Migration
This section explains the commands used for FTRPE (Flexible Tier Pool Element) Migration management.
• Checking the FTRPE Migration status
■ Summary of FTRPE Migration settings through CLI
The steps involved in settings the FTRPE Migration using CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
FTRPE Migration
Use the "show ftrpe-migration" command to check the status of FTRPE Migration.
Only user accounts with the Software Control policy can execute FTRPE Migration and check the status
of FTRPE Migration. User accounts without the Software Control policy cannot use the FTRPE Migration
function.
FTRPE Migration uses the same session table that is used by RAID Migration, Flexible Tier Migration,
and Thin Provisioning Volume balancing. Since up to only 32 sessions can be registered in this session
table and the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system can have up to 512 FTRPE Migration sessions, other
Migration sessions are in a state of waiting for registration while FTRPE Migration is being executed.
End of procedure
104
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show ftrpe-migration
show ftrpe-migration
This command displays information for the FTRPE Migration sessions that are not complete. Completed FTRPE
Migration sessions cannot be displayed.
This command is only used to display information for migration sessions in which the destination is a Flexible
Tier Sub Pool (FTSP).
■ Syntax
show ftrpe-migration
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# CLI> show ftrpe-migration
# FTRPE
Destination
# ID
Flexible Tier Sub Pool
#
No. Name
2 FTSP0002
#
7
A
B
C
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
Migration Progress Error Source
Status
Code RAID Group
No. Name
Active
50%
0x05
6 RLU006
D
E
F
G
H
Source
Volume
Start LBA
No. Name
0x0010000000000000
3 FTV0003
I
J
K
The move FTRPE ID
The move destination Flexible Tier Sub Pool number
The move destination Flexible Tier Sub Pool name
The FTRPE migration status
The FTRPE migration progress
The FTRPE migration error code
The move source RAID Group number
The move source RAID Group name
The move source RAID Group LBA count
The move source volume number
The move source volume name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays FTRPE Migration session information:
CLI> show ftrpe-migration
FTRPE
Destination
ID
Flexible Tier Sub Pool
No. Name
10000
5 FTSP0005
5000
5 FTSP0005
Migration Progress Error Source
Status
Code RAID Group
No. Name
Start LBA
Active
99%
0x00
2 RLU0002 0x00100000000000
Reserve
0%
0x01
14 RLU0014 0x00200000000000
Source
Volume
No. Name
1 VOL0001
58 VOL0058
105
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management
3.2.3
FTV Balancing
This section explains the commands that are used for balancing Flexible Tier Volume (FTV) allocation among
RAID groups.
• Starting Flexible Tier Volume balancing
• Stopping Flexible Tier Volume balancing
• Checking the Flexible Tier Volume balancing status
106
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > start balancing-flexible-tier-pool
start balancing-flexible-tier-pool
This command starts evenly relocating the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) among RAID groups.
Specify the FTRP that is to be balanced.
■ Syntax
start balancing-flexible-tier-pool {-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name}
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP to which the FTV to start balancing is allocated. For details,
refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
■ Example(s)
The following example starts balancing FTRP01:
CLI> start balancing-flexible-tier-pool -ftrp-name FTRP01
107
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > stop balancing-flexible-tier-pool
stop balancing-flexible-tier-pool
This command stops evenly relocating the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) among RAID groups.
Specify the FTRP that is being balanced.
■ Syntax
stop balancing-flexible-tier-pool {-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name}
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP to which the FTV to stop balancing is allocated. For details,
refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
■ Example(s)
The following example stops balancing FTRP01:
CLI> stop balancing-flexible-tier-pool -ftrp-name FTRP01
108
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show balancing-flexible-tier-pools
show balancing-flexible-tier-pools
This command displays balancing information for the Flexible Tier Pools (FTRPs) that are registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. When an FTRP number or an FTRP name is specified, this command displays
balancing information for the specified FTRP and the Flexible Tier Sub Pools (FTSPs) that are registered in this
FTRP. When the FTRP number or the FTRP name is omitted, this command displays the balancing information
of all the FTRPs that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Syntax
show balancing-flexible-tier-pools [-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name]
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
Optional. This parameter specifies which FTRP to display the balancing information for. Only
one FTRP can be specified at the same time. If omitted, the balancing information of all the
FTRPs that are registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is displayed.
For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted
# Flexible Tier Pool
# No. Name
#
0 FTRP_NAME#0
#
1 FTRP_NAME#1
#
2 FTRP_NAME#2
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
Balancing
Level
High
Medium
Low
C
Balancing Process
Status Progress(%)
Active
50
Error
30
D
E
Error
code
0x00
0x73
F
FTRP number
FTRP name
Balancing level (High/Medium/Low/-) of each FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when an Not Ready error or a Subsystem Down error occurs in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system)
Balancing status (Active/Error/-) for the FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not being performed)
Balancing progress for the FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not being performed)
Error code of an FTRP balancing process status error
(0x00 is displayed when no error occurs during balancing and a hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not
being performed)
109
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.2 Flexible Tier Management > show balancing-flexible-tier-pools
When the parameter is specified
# Flexible Tier Pool
Balancing Balancing Process
# No. Name
Level
Status Progress(%)
#
1 FTRP_NAME#1
Low
Active
50
A
B
C
D
E
#<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
#Flexible Tier Sub Pool Balancing
#No. Name
Level
# 0 FTSP000
Medium
# 1 FTSP001
Medium
# 2 FTSP002
Low
# 3 FTSP003
Medium
# 4 FTSP004
Low
G
H
I
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Error
code
0x00
F
FTRP number
FTRP name
Balancing level (High/Medium/Low/-) of each FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when an Not Ready error or a Subsystem Down error occurs in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system)
Balancing status (Active/Error/-) for the FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not being performed)
Balancing progress for the FTRP
(A hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not being performed)
Error code of an FTRP balancing process status error
(0x00 is displayed when no error occurs during balancing and a hyphen (-) is displayed when balancing is not
being performed)
FTSP number (This item only appears when an FTRP is specified)
FTSP name (This item only appears when an FTRP is specified)
Balancing level (High/Medium/Low/-) of each FTSP (This item only appears when an FTRP is specified)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the balancing information of all the FTRPs that are registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system:
CLI> show balancing-flexible-tier-pools
Flexible Tier Pool
Balancing Balancing Process
No. Name
Level
Status Progress(%)
1 FTRP_NAME001
Low
Active
70
2 FTRP_NAME002
Medium
Active
33
3 FTRP_NAME003
Low
Active
10
4 FTRP_NAME004
High
-
Error
code
0x00
0x00
0x00
-
The following example displays detailed balancing information for an FTRP that is named FTRP_NAME#1:
CLI> show balancing-flexible-tier-pools -ftrp-name FTRP_NAME#1
Flexible Tier Pool
Balancing Balancing Process Error
No. Name
Level
Status Progress(%) code
1 FTRP_NAME#1
Low
Active
50 0x00
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Balancing
No. Name
Level
0 FTSP000
Medium
1 FTSP001
Medium
2 FTSP002
Low
110
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management
3.3
RAID Group Management
This chapter explains the commands used for the following settings:
• RAID group settings
• Hot spares settings
• ECO mode settings
3.3.1
RAID Group
This section explains the commands used for RAID group management.
All disks contained in a RAID group must be the same disk type.
The functions to control RAID groups are as follows:
• Creating a RAID group
• Deleting RAID groups
• Changing an existing RAID group
• LDE, Logical Device Expanding (expanding a RAID group)
111
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > create raid-group
create raid-group
This command creates a RAID group with the specified RAID group name, RAID level and disks. When
registering a hot spare, refer to the "set global-spare" or the "set dedicated-spare" command.
■ Syntax
create raid-group -name alias_name -disks disks -level {0|1|5|6|10|50}
[-assigned-cm {0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1|cm2cpu0|cm2cpu1|
cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1|cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1|cm6cpu0|cm6cpu1|
cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1|auto}] [-stripe-depth { 64kb | 128kb | 256kb | 512kb | 1024kb }]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the alias name of a RAID group. Only one name can be specified. For
details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-disks
This parameter specifies which disks will form the RAID group. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk
Syntax" (page 19).
-level
This parameter specifies the RAID level.
0
RAID0
1
RAID1
5
RAID5
6
RAID6
10
RAID1+0
50
RAID5+0
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned controller (CM number) of the specified RAID
group. If "auto" is specified, the fixed controller, which is calculated automatically by the
system, is assigned. If this parameter is omitted, the "auto" mode is set.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module#0
1
Controller module#1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
112
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > create raid-group
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module#2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module#2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module#3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module#3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module#4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module#4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module#5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module#5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module#6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module#6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module#7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module#7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
-stripe-depth
Optional. This parameter specifies the stripe depth for the RAID group that is to be created. If
omitted, then it is handled as if "64kb" is selected. The available values vary depending on the
RAID level and the number of drives.
64kb
64k Byte
128kb
128k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 10 or more disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
256kb
256k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 9 or less disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
512kb
512k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 5 or less disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
1024kb
1024k Byte (Only for RAID0 configurations and RAID1+0 configurations)
■ Example(s)
The following example creates a RAID group named "RGP001". RAID1 level is assigned using disks #003 and
#004:
CLI> create raid-group -name RGP001 -level 1 -disks 003,004
113
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set raid-group
set raid-group
This command changes the information of an existing RAID group.
■ Syntax
set raid-group {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name } [-name name]
[-assigned-cm {0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1| cm2cpu0|
cm2cpu1|cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1| cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1|
cm6cpu0|cmc6pu1|cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1|auto}]
[-key-group {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies RAID group identifiers.
or
Only one RAID group identifier can be specified when changing a RAID group alias name. One
-rg-name
or more RAID group identifiers can be specified when changing the assigned CM. For details,
refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new RAID group name. If this parameter is omitted, the
name is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned controller module number of the RAID group. If
"auto" is specified, the fixed controller, which is calculated automatically by the system, is
assigned. If this parameter is omitted, the assigned CM is not changed.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module#0
1
Controller module#1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
114
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set raid-group
For the DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
-key-group
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module#2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module#2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module#3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module#3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module#4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module#4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module#5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module#5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module#6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module#6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module#7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module#7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to use the key group. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
enable
The key group is used (the SED authentication key that is managed by the key
server is used).
disable
The key group is not used (the common key in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system is used).
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the RAID group named "RGP001". The new name is "RAID002":
CLI> set raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -name RAID002
The following example changes the CM number that is associated with the RAID group named "RGP001". The
new CM number is "CM#1":
CLI> set raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -assigned-cm 1
The following example changes the CM number that is associated with RAID groups #2 and #4. The new CM
number is "CM#1":
CLI> set raid-group -rg-number 2,4 -assigned-cm 1
115
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set raid-group
The following example sets a key group for RAID groups #2 and #4:
CLI> set raid-group -rg-number 2,4 -key-group enable
116
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > delete raid-group
delete raid-group
This command deletes an existing RAID group(s). A RAID group cannot be deleted if one or more volumes
exist in the RAID group.
• RAID groups cannot be deleted until the expansion process is complete.
• All volumes in a specified RAID group must be deleted before the RAID group is deleted.
■ Syntax
delete raid-group {-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }
■ Parameter
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
This parameter specifies RAID group identifiers. One or more RAID group identifiers can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the RAID group named "R1":
CLI> delete raid-group -rg-name R1
The following example deletes consecutive RAID groups #1 - #8:
CLI> delete raid-group -rg-number 1-8
117
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show raid-groups
show raid-groups
This command displays a summary list of all the RAID groups or the details of a specified RAID group(s).
■ Syntax
show raid-groups [-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names ]
■ Parameter
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
Optional. This parameter specifies RAID group. One or more RAID groups can be specified.
For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22). If the RAID group identifier is
omitted, a summary list of all the RAID groups is displayed.
■ Output
# RAID Group
RAID
# No. Name
Level
#
1 RAIDGROUP001 RAID1+0
A
B
C
# <Disk List>
#
Disk
Status
Available
#
CE-Disk#3
J
K
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
Assigned Status
Total
Free
Stripe
CM
Capacity(MB) Capacity(MB) Depth(KB)
CM#0
Spare in Use
134656
132535
1024
D
E
F
G
H
Usage
Data
L
Key
Group
Enable
I
Mirroring
CE-Disk#5
M
A RAID group number
A RAID group name
A RAID level
Assigned CM number, CM number to control a RAID group
RAID group status
Total capacity (Unit: MB)
Free capacity (Unit: MB)
Stripe Depth (Unit: MB) (Only when viewing details and the stripe size is not 64KB)
Usage status of the key groups (Only when viewing details)
Disk location included in a RAID group (Only when viewing details)
Disk status included in a RAID group (Only when viewing details)
Disk usage included in a RAID group (Only when view details)
Pair disk information in case of RAID1 or RAID1+0 (Only when viewing details)
118
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show raid-groups
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary list of all the disks registered in the system:
CLI> show raid-groups
RAID Group
RAID
No. Name
Level
1 RAIDGROUP001
RAID1+0
2 RAIDGROUP002
RAID5
3 RAIDGROUP003
RAID5
Assigned
CM
CM#0
CM#1
CM#1
Status
Spare in Use
Available
SED Locked
Total
Capacity(MB)
134656
134656
134656
Free
Capacity(MB)
132535
132532
132532
The following example displays details of the RAID5(4+1) RAID group named "R1". In this example, two disks
have failed and two hot spares are in use. These hot spare disks have also failed. When multiple disks fail,
the disk in "Failed Usable" status indicates the last disk that has failed:
CLI>show raid-groups -rg-name R1
RAID Group
RAID
Assigned Status Total
Free
Stripe
Key
No. Name
Level
CM
Capacity(MB) Capacity(MB) Depth(KB) Group
0 R1
RAID5
CM#0
Broken
1116160
1116136
64 Enable
<Disk List>
Disk
Status
Usage
CE-Disk#0
Available
System
CE-Disk#1
Available
System
CE-Disk#2
Available
Data
CE-Disk#3
Broken
Data
CE-Disk#4
Broken
Data
CE-Disk#5
Broken
Dedicated Hot Spare
CE-Disk#6
Failed Usable
Global Hot Spare
The following example displays the details of RAID group #0. When the RAID level is RAID1 or RAID1+0, the
mirroring information is also displayed:
CLI> show raid-groups -rg-number 0
RAID Group
RAID
Assigned Status
Total
Free
Stripe
Key
No. Name
Level
CM
Capacity(MB) Capacity(MB) Depth(KB) Group
0 RAIDGROUP1 RAID1+0 CM#0
Spare in Use
560128
60104
64 Disable
<Disk List>
Disk
Status
Usage
Mirroring
CE-Disk#2
Broken
Data
CE-Disk#3
Available
Data
CE-Disk#5
CE-Disk#4
Available
Data
CE-Disk#7
CE-Disk#5
Available
Data
CE-Disk#3
CE-Disk#7
Available
Global Hot Spare
CE-Disk#4
119
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show raid-group-progress
show raid-group-progress
This command displays the progress of the Rebuild/Copy back process and the expansion process of all RAID
groups. Individual RAID groups can also be specified.
■ Syntax
show raid-group-progress [-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names ]
■ Parameter
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
Optional. This parameter specifies RAID group identifiers. If the RAID group identifier is
omitted, a progress list of all the RAID groups is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID
Group Syntax" (page 22).
■ Output
# RAID Group
# No. Name
#
0 RAIDGROUP001
#
1 RAIDGROUP012
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Status
Rebuild/Copyback
Progress
87%
D
Copyback
Available
C
Expanding
Progress
19%
E
A RAID group number
A RAID group name
RAID group status
Progress status of Rebuild/Copyback
Progress status of expanding RAID groups (Logical Device Expansion)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a progress list of all the RAID groups:
CLI> show raid-group-progress
RAID Group
Status
No. Name
0 RAIDGROUP001
Copyback
1 RAIDGROUP012
Available
2 RAIDGROUP013
Available
3 RAIDGROUP014
SED Locked
Rebuild/Copyback
Progress
87%
87%
0%
Expanding
Progress
19%
-
The following example displays only the progress status of the RAID group #1:
CLI> show raid-group-progress -rg-number 1
RAID Group
Status
No. Name
1 RAIDGROUP012
Available
Rebuild/Copyback
Progress
-
Expanding
Progress
19%
120
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show raid-group-progress
The following example displays the progress status of the RAID group named "RAIDGROUP001" and
"RAIDGROUP012":
CLI> show raid-group-progress -rg-name RAIDGROUP001,RAIDGROUP012
RAID Group
Status
Rebuild/Copyback
No. Name
Progress
0 RAIDGROUP001
Copyback
87%
1 RAIDGROUP012
Available
-
Expanding
Progress
19%
121
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > expand raid-group
expand raid-group
This command expands a RAID group (Logical Device Expansion). The capacity of an existing RAID group is
expanded by adding new disks to the RAID group. A new RAID level can also be specified. Any volumes in the
existing RAID group are relocated to the new RAID group.
• RAID5+0 is not supported, not even for pure capacity expansion operations
• Expanding a RAID level other than RAID0 to RAID0 is not supported.
• When RAID group capacity is expanded without changing the RAID level, specify only the new disks to be added for the
"-disks" parameter.
• If the RAID level is changed with RAID group expansion, at least one disk that is already configured in an expansion
source RAID group and all the new disks that are to be added must be specified for the '-disks' parameter.
■ Syntax
expand raid-group {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name }
-disks disks [-level {0|5|6|10}] [-name name]
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies a RAID group identifier. Only one RAID group identifier can be
or
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
-rg-name
-disks
This parameter specifies the disks to add to a RAID group. One or more parameters can be
specified. This parameter specifies the disk numbers for the disks that configure the RAID
group before expansion and the numbers for the disks that are to be added. For details, refer
to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).
-level
Optional. This parameter specifies the new RAID level of the expanded RAID group. RAID5+0
level is not supported.
-name
0
RAID0
5
RAID5
6
RAID6
10
RAID1+0
Optional. This parameter specifies the new RAID group name to be used for the expanded RAID
group. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
■ Example(s)
The following example expands the RAID group named "RGP001" using six disks, and changes the RAID level
to RAID5:
CLI> expand raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -disks 101-103,201-203 -level 5
122
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management
3.3.2
Hot Spares
This section explains the commands that are related to hot spares. There are two types of hot spares:
• Global Hot Spare (Global HS)
A hot spare that can be used by all RAID groups (except RAID0)
• Dedicated Hot Spare (Dedicated HS/DHS)
A hot spare that can be used by one specific RAID group
Hot spares must be of the same disk type and must have the same (or larger) capacity as the disks in the
assigned RAID group. A list of registered hot spare disks can be displayed by using the "show disks" command.
123
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set global-spare
set global-spare
This command assigns a disk as a Global Hot Spare. A Global Hot Spare is used as a substitute for a disk that
has failed in a RAID group. A Global Hot Spare is shared by all of the existing RAID groups (except for RAID0
level). A list of registered hot spare disks can be displayed by using the "show disks" command.
■ Syntax
set global-spare -disks disks
■ Parameter
-disks
This parameter specifies the disks to be registered as Global Hot Spares. One or more disks can
be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).
■ Example(s)
The following example registers disks #101 and #102 as Global Hot Spares:
CLI> set global-spare -disks 101,102
In the following example, disks #101 and #102 are assigned as Global Hot Spares and disk #103 is then
added to the available Global Hot Spare pool. Adding additional Global Hot Spares does not remove any hot
spares that are previously set:
CLI> set global-spare -disks 101,102
CLI> set global-spare -disks 103
124
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > release global-spare
release global-spare
This command releases Global Hot Spare(s). The disk will then have an unassigned (present) status.
■ Syntax
release global-spare -disks disks
■ Syntax
-disks
This parameter specifies the disks to be released from the Global Hot Spare. One or more disks
can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).
■ Example(s)
The following example releases disk #011 from the Global Hot Spares:
CLI> release global-spare -disks 011
The following example releases disks #101 to #105 from the Global Hot Spares:
CLI> release global-spare -disks 101-105
125
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set dedicated-spare
set dedicated-spare
This command assigns a disk as a Dedicated Hot Spare. A Dedicated Hot Spare is used as a substitute for a disk
that has failed in a specific RAID group. If there are no dedicated hot spares assigned (or available) to a RAID
group, a global hot spare is used. A dedicated hot spare can only be assigned to a single RAID group.
However, one RAID group can have one or more dedicated hot spares.
■ Syntax
set dedicated-spare -disks disks {-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }
■ Parameter
-disks
This parameter specifies the disks to be registered as Dedicated Hot Spares. One or more disks
can be specified. If two or more parameters are specified, they must be specified in the same
order as the associated RAID group identifier parameters. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk
Syntax" (page 19).
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifiers to which the Dedicated Hot Spares will be
or
assigned. One or more RAID group identifiers can be specified. If two or more RAID group
-rg-name
identifiers are specified, they must be specified in the same order as the associated disk
parameters. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The example assigns disk #110 as a dedicated hot spare to the RAID group "R1":
CLI> set dedicated-spare -disks 110 -rg-name R1
The following example assigns disks #110 and #111 as dedicated hot spares to the RAID group named
"RGP001":
CLI> set dedicated-spare -disks 110,111 -rg-name RGP001
The following example assigns two different disks to two different RAID groups. Disk #110 is assigned as a
Dedicated Hot Spare to the RAID group named "RGP1". Disk #111 is assigned as a Dedicated Hot Spare to the
RAID group named "RGP2":
CLI> set dedicated-spare -disks 110,111 -rg-name RGP1,RGP2
In the following example, disk #101 is assigned as a Dedicated Hot Spare. Disk #102 is then added as a
Dedicated Hot Spare to the same RAID group. Adding additional Dedicated Hot Spares does not remove any
hot spares that are previously set:
CLI> set dedicated-spare -disks 101 -rg-name RGP1
CLI> set dedicated-spare -disks 102 -rg-name RGP1
126
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > release dedicated-spare
release dedicated-spare
This command releases a dedicated hot spare(s). The disk will then have an unassigned (present) status.
■ Syntax
release dedicated-spare -disks disks
■ Parameter
-disks
This parameter specifies the disks that are registered as Dedicated Hot Spares. One or more
disks can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19).
■ Example(s)
The following example releases Dedicated Hot Spare #110:
CLI> release dedicated-spare -disks 110
The following example releases Dedicated Hot Spares #110 and #111:
CLI> release dedicated-spare -disks 110,111
127
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management
3.3.3
ECO Management
This section explains the commands that are related to the ECO functions. They are only applicable when the
ECO mode is enabled using the "set eco-mode" command.
The three steps involved in enabling the ECO functions are as follows:
Procedure
1
Enable the ECO mode.
2
Create an ECO schedule.
3
Assign the ECO schedule to RAID groups.
End of procedure
128
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-mode
set eco-mode
This command enables or disables the ECO mode. The ECO mode is a power saving function that will turn off
the disk motor when the disks are not being accessed. The ECO function cannot be used unless the ECO mode
is enabled.
■ Syntax
set eco-mode [-mode {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies if the ECO mode is enabled. If omitted, the existing setting
is not changed.
enable
ECO mode is enabled.
disable
ECO mode is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example enables the ECO mode.
CLI> set eco-mode
-mode enable
The following example disables the ECO mode:
CLI> set eco-mode
-mode disable
129
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show eco-mode
show eco-mode
This command displays the current ECO mode status and parameter settings.
■ Syntax
show eco-mode
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
CLI> show eco-mode
# Mode
[Enable]
A
# Host I/O Monitoring Time
[60 min.]
B
# Disk Motor Control Limit Count [5]
C
A:
B:
C:
ECO mode
The monitoring interval time of the host I/O
The number of times that a disk motor will power off and on in one day
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the current ECO mode settings:
CLI> show eco-mode
Mode
[Enable]
Host I/O Monitoring Time
[60 min.]
Disk Motor Control Limit Count [5]
130
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > create eco-schedule
create eco-schedule
An ECO schedule is a schedule that applies ECO functions. The ECO schedule specifies the time that a disk
motor is rotated (it does NOT specify when the motor will be turned off). A maximum of 64 ECO schedules can
be created. One ECO schedule consists of a maximum of 8 ECO schedule events (at least one ECO schedule
event is required in one ECO schedule). This command can create one ECO schedule and only one ECO
schedule event. If two or more ECO schedule events are created and defined, use the "set eco-schedule"
command. Refer to the following:
Max 64
...
ECO Schedule
ECO Schedule
Schedule-Event #1
Schedule-Event #2
Schedule-Event #3
Schedule-Event #4
Schedule-Event #5
Schedule-Event #6
Schedule-Event #7
Schedule-Event #8
■ Syntax
create eco-schedule -name schedule_name -event-type {every-day |
every-week,{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun} | specific-day,MMDD,R |
specific-week,MM,{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun}}
-event-from hhmm -event-to hhmm
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the ECO schedule name. Only one ECO schedule name can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.13 ECO Schedule Syntax" (page 25).
-event-type This parameter specifies the ECO schedule event type.
every-day
The ECO schedule is applied to every day. A suboperand is not required.
Example: -event-type every-day
every-week The ECO schedule is applied to every week. This format is "every-week,STA,END".
The start day of the week (STA) and the end day of the week (END) are separated
by a comma. The day of the week must be specified in the following format. The
end day of the week must be after the start day of the week. The first day starts
from Monday.
131
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > create eco-schedule
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,fri
(from Monday to Friday is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type every-week,fri,tue
(from Friday to Tuesday is not OK)
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,mon
(only Monday is OK)
mon Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
specific-day The ECO schedule is applied to a specific day. This format is "specificday,MMDD,R". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific day DD (01 –
31) are separated by a comma (when every month is required, specify "em"
instead of 01 – 12). When the last day of the month is required, specify "99"
instead of 01-31. The number of days that the schedule will apply is specified as
R, and a value between 1 – 7 can be set.
Example: -event-type specific-day,0501,3
(For three days, from May 1st to May 3rd)
Example: -event-type specific-day,0630,2
(For two days, from June 30th to July 1st)
specific-week
The ECO schedule is applied to a specific week. This format is "specificweek,MM,W,STA,END". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific week W
(1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or last) are separated by a comma (when every month is
required, specify "em" instead of 01 – 12). The start day of the week (STA) and
the end day of the week (END) are separated by a comma. The day of the week
must be specified in the following format. The end day of the week must be after
the start day of the week. The first day starts from Monday.
Example: Correct -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,mon,wed
(from the 3rd Monday to the 3rd Wednesday in May is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,wed,mon
(from the 3rd Wednesday to the 3rd Monday in May is not OK)
(When May 1st is a Monday)
mon
Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
132
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > create eco-schedule
-event-from This parameter specifies that the ECO schedule will apply to a specific starting time. The format
is "hhmm". "hh" is the starting hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the starting minute (00 or 30).
A disk motor will power ON at the time specified by this parameter.
-event-to
This parameter specifies that the ECO schedule will end at a specific time. The format is
"hhmm". "hh" is the ending hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the ending minute (00 or 30).
■ Example(s)
The following example creates an ECO schedule. The ECO schedule name is "SC001". The ECO schedule will
apply every day from 06:00 to 18:00:
CLI> create eco-schedule -name SC001 -event-type every-day -event-from 0600 -event-to 1800
133
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-schedule
set eco-schedule
This command is used to add ECO events or make changes to the specified ECO schedule.
■ Syntax
set eco-schedule {-schedule-number schedule_number | -schedule-name schedule_name}
[-name schedule_name] [-event-number {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8}]
[-event-type {every-day | every-week,{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun} |
specific-day,MMDD,R | specific-week,MM,{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},
{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun}}] [-event-from hhmm] [-event-to hhmm]
■ Parameter
-schedule-number
or
-schedule-name
This parameter specifies an ECO schedule identifier. Only one ECO schedule identifier can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.13 ECO Schedule Syntax" (page 25).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a new ECO schedule name. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-event-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the ECO schedule event number to change or to add the ECO
schedule event to the ECO schedule. The ECO schedule event number is a value from 1 to 8.
Only one number can be specified. The ECO schedule event number can be displayed by using
the "show eco-schedule" command. If omitted, the ECO schedule event specified by this
parameter value is not changed.
-event-type Optional. This parameter specifies the ECO schedule event type. If omitted, the existing setting
is not changed.
every-day
The ECO schedule is applied to every day. A suboperand is not required.
Example: -event-type every-day
every-week The ECO schedule is applied to every week. This format is "every-week,STA,END".
The start day of the week (STA) and the end day of the week (END) are separated
by a comma. The day of the week must be specified in the following format. The
end day of the week must be after the start day of the week. The first day starts
from Monday.
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,fri
(from Monday to Friday is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type every-week,fri,tue
(from Friday to Tuesday is not OK)
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,mon
(only Monday is OK)
134
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-schedule
mon
Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
specific-day The ECO schedule is applied to a specific day. This format is "specificday,MMDD,R". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific day DD (01 –
31) are separated by a comma (when every month is required, specify "em"
instead of 01 – 12). When the last day of the month is required, specify "99"
instead of 01 – 31. The number of days that the schedule will apply is specified
as R, and a value between 1 – 7 can be set.
Example: -event-type specific-day,0501,3
(For three days, from May 1st to May 3rd)
Example: -event-type specific-day,0630,2
(For two days, from June 30th to July 1st)
specific-week
The ECO schedule is applied to a specific week. This format is "specificweek,MM,W,STA,END". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific week W
(1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or last) are separated by a comma (when every month is
required, specify "em" instead of 01 – 12). The start day of the week (STA) and
the end day of the week (END) are separated by a comma. The day of the week
must be specified in the following format. The end day of the week must be after
the start day of the week. The first day starts from Monday.
Example: Correct -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,mon,wed
(from the 3rd Monday to the 3rd Wednesday in May is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,wed,mon
(from the 3rd Wednesday to the 3rd Monday in May is not OK)
(When May 1st is a Monday)
mon
Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
-event-from Optional. This parameter specifies that the ECO schedule will apply to a specific starting time.
The format is "hhmm". "hh" is the starting hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the starting minute (00
or 30). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
A disk motor will power ON at the time specified by this parameter.
135
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-schedule
-event-to
Optional. This parameter specifies that the ECO schedule will end at a specific time. The format
is "hhmm". "hh" is the ending hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the ending minute (00 or 30). If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example adds ECO schedule event #2 in the ECO schedule named "SC001":
CLI> set eco-schedule -schedule-name SC001 -event-number 2 -event-type every-day -event-from 0600 -event-to
1800
The following example changes the ECO schedule name. The new ECO schedule name is "SC002_NEW":
CLI> set eco-schedule -schedule-name SC001 -name SC002_NEW
136
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > delete eco-schedule
delete eco-schedule
This command deletes an ECO schedule(s) or a single ECO schedule event. One or more ECO schedules can be
deleted at the same time. Only one ECO schedule event can be deleted at the same time.
■ Syntax
delete eco-schedule {-schedule-number schedule_numbers | -schedule-name schedule_names}
[-event-number {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8}]
■ Parameter
-schedule-number
or
-schedule-name
This parameter specifies the ECO schedule identifier. One or more parameters can be specified.
However; if an event-number is also specified, then only one ECO schedule identifier can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.13 ECO Schedule Syntax" (page 25).
-event-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the ECO schedule event number to be deleted. The ECO
schedule event number is a value from 1 to 8 and can be displayed by using the "show ecoschedule" command. Only one event number can be specified. If the event-number is omitted,
the ECO schedule is deleted.
■ Example(s)
The following example will delete the ECO schedule named "SC002":
CLI> delete eco-schedule -schedule-name SC002
The following example will delete ECO schedule event #2 in the ECO schedule named "SC001":
CLI> delete eco-schedule -schedule-name SC001 -event-number 2
The following example will delete both the ECO schedule named "SC002" and "SC003" at the same time:
CLI> delete eco-schedule -schedule-name SC002,SC003
137
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show eco-schedule
show eco-schedule
This command displays a summary of all of the ECO schedules, and ECO schedule events or detailed
information if one or more ECO schedules are specified.
■ Syntax
show eco-schedule [-schedule-number schedule_numbers | -schedule-name schedule_names]
■ Parameter
-schedule-number
or
-schedule-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the ECO schedule identifier to display details. One or more
ECO schedule identifiers can be specified. If this parameter is omitted, all the ECO schedules
are displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.13 ECO Schedule Syntax" (page 25).
■ Output
# ECO Schedule
# No. Name
#
0 SC001
A
B
# Event
# No. Type
Details
Time
#
1 Specific-week December 1st week Monday-Friday from [06:00] to [18:00]
C
D
E
F
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
An ECO schedule number
An ECO schedule name
An ECO schedule event number
An ECO schedule event type
An explanation for the ECO schedule event type
A starting ECO schedule time
An ending ECO schedule time
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the registered ECO schedules:
CLI> show eco-schedule
ECO Schedule
No. Name
0 SC001
1 SC002
2 SC003_TEMP
138
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show eco-schedule
The following example displays the schedule information of the ECO schedule named "SC001":
CLI> show eco-schedule -schedule-name SC001
ECO Schedule
No. Name
0 SC001
Event
No. Type
Details
1 Every-day
2 Every-week
Monday-Friday
3 Specific-day 6days from December 13
4 Specific-week December 1st week Monday-Friday
Time
from
from
from
from
[06:00]
[06:00]
[06:00]
[06:00]
to
to
to
to
[18:00]
[18:00]
[18:00]
[18:00]
The following example displays the schedule information of the ECO schedules named "SC002" and
"SC003_TEMP" at the same time:
CLI> show eco-schedule -schedule-name SC002,SC003_TEMP
ECO Schedule
No. Name
2 SC002
Event
No. Type
Details
Time
1 Every-day
from [06:00] to [18:00]
2 Every-week
Monday-Friday
from [06:00] to [18:00]
ECO Schedule
No. Name
3 SC003_TEMP
Event
No. Type
Details
Time
1 Specific-day 6days from December 13
from [06:00] to [18:00]
2 Specific-week December 1st week Monday-Friday from [06:00] to [18:00]
139
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-raid-group
set eco-raid-group
This command is used to associate an ECO schedule with a specified RAID group(s).
The ECO mode cannot be used for RAID groups that contain SSDs.
■ Syntax
set eco-raid-group {-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names}
[-schedule-number schedule_number | -schedule-name schedule_name] -action {enable|disable}
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies a RAID group identifier. One or more parameters can be specified. For
or
details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
-rg-name
RAID groups in which there are no volumes cannot be specified.
-schedule-number
or
-schedule-name
Optional. This parameter specifies an ECO schedule identifier. Only one ECO schedule number
can be specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.13
ECO Schedule Syntax" (page 25).
To set software linkage, specify "128" for "-schedule-number". In this case, "External" is
automatically set as the schedule name.
-action
This parameter specifies whether the associated definition is enabled.
enable
The associated definition is enabled.
disable
The associated definition is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example associates the ECO schedule named "SC001" with the RAID group named "RGP001":
CLI> set eco-raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -schedule-name SC001 -action enable
The following example associates the ECO schedule named "SC001" with the RAID groups #1-10 at the same
time:
CLI> set eco-raid-group -rg-number 1-10 -schedule-name SC001 -action enable
The following example disables the ECO function of the RAID group named "RGP001":
CLI> set eco-raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -action disable
140
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > set eco-raid-group
The following example associates ECO schedule #1 with the RAID group named "RGP001". The second
command associates the ECO schedule #2 with the same RAID group. These executions result in ECO
schedule #1 being released:
CLI> set eco-raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -schedule-number 1 -action enable
CLI> set eco-raid-group -rg-name RGP001 -schedule-number 2 -action enable
141
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > release eco-raid-group
release eco-raid-group
This command releases the ECO schedule that is associated with a specific RAID group(s).
■ Syntax
release eco-raid-group {-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names}
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies a RAID group identifiers. One or more parameters can be specified.
or
For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
-rg-name
■ Example(s)
The following example releases an ECO schedule associated with the RAID group named "RGP001":
CLI> release eco-raid-group -rg-name RGP001
The following example releases an ECO schedule associated with RAID groups #1 – #10 at the same time:
CLI> release eco-raid-group -rg-number 1-10
142
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.3 RAID Group Management > show eco-raid-group
show eco-raid-group
This command displays a list of the ECO schedules that are associated with RAID groups.
■ Syntax
show eco-raid-group
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# RAID Group
# No. Name
# 28 RGP028
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
Level
Status
RAID1
C
Available
D
Assigned
CM
CM#0
E
Capacity ECO Schedule
(MB)
Action No. Name
53647 [ON ]
1 SC001
F
G
H
I
Motor
Status
Active
J
Control
Status
[OFF]
K
A RAID group number
A RAID group name
A RAID level
RAID group status
A Controller module to be assigned to a RAID group
RAID group capacity
An ECO schedule action, It means whether the ECO schedule is associated, or not
An ECO schedule number
(In the case of a schedule by a cooperative software, [128] is displayed.)
An ECO schedule name
(In the case of a schedule by a cooperative software, [External] is displayed.)
Current status of a Disk motor
Determent status by a control command
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the RAID groups that have an ECO schedule associated with them:
CLI> show eco-raid-group
RAID Group
Level
Status
No. Name
28 RGP028
RAID1
Available
29 RGP029
RAID1+0 Available
30 RGP030
RAID5
Available
31 RGP031
RAID0
Present
Assigned
CM
CM#0
CM#0
CM#1
CM#1
Capacity
(MB)
53647
60000
89654
22301
ECO Schedule
Action No.Name
[ON ]
1 SC001
[ON ]
1 SC001
[OFF] 128 External
[OFF]
2 SC002
Motor
Status
Active
Active
Active
Active
Control
Status
[OFF]
[OFF]
[OFF]
[OFF]
143
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management
3.4
Volume Management
This chapter explains the commands related to the management of volumes.
For details on the commands relating to volumes (Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs)) that are assigned to Flexible
Tier Pools (FTRPs), refer to "3.4.2 Flexible Tier Volumes" (page 175).
3.4.1
Volume
This section explains the details of the commands that are related to the management of volumes.
• Creating volumes
• Deleting volumes
• Changing existing volume information
• Formatting volumes
• Encrypting volumes
• LUN concatenation (expanding volumes)
• RAID migration (moving volumes)
• Balancing TPVs
• Starting Zero Reclamation
• Stopping Zero Reclamation
144
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create volume
create volume
This command creates volumes in the specified RAID group. When creating two or more volumes at a time,
they can be created in one RAID group based on the "-name" and the "-count" parameters. The created
volumes are formatted automatically.
The "create flexible-tier-volume" command is used to create Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs).
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
create volume -name name {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name }
{-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name } -type {open|standard|sdv|sdpv|tpv|wsv}
[-size {size{tb|gb|mb}|max}| -virtual-size virtual_size{tb|gb|mb}] [-count count]
[-copy-protection {enable | disable}] [-attention attention] [-encryption {enable|disable}]
[-wide-stripe-size {normal | small}] [-concatenation-order {auto | manual}]
[-volume-number volume_number ]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a volume name. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page
20).
-rg-number This parameter specifies a RAID group identifier to create new volumes. Note that multiple
or
RAID groups can be specified when "-type wsv" is set. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group
-rg-name
Syntax" (page 22). This parameter cannot be specified when the "-type tpv" parameter is
specified.
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies a Thin provisioning pool identifier to create new volumes. For details,
refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax" (page 20). This parameter can be specified when
the "-type tpv" parameter is specified.
-type
This parameter specifies the volume type.
open
A Standard volume (OPEN) A created "open" type volume is displayed as a
"standard" volume.
standard
A normal/open volume (Standard)
sdv
A Snap Data Volume (SDV) for Advanced Copy functions
sdpv
A Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV) for Advanced Copy functions
tpv
A Thin provisioning volume
wsv
A Wide Striping Volume
145
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create volume
-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume size.
size
Volume capacity
Select whether terabytes (TB), gigabytes (GB), or megabytes (MB) are used
for the capacity.
Example: 1tb, 120gb, 512mb
max
The specified number of volumes is created with the maximum capacity that
can be allocated in the free space of the specified RAID groups.
When creating volumes that are used for Advanced Copy, specify the volume capacity without
specifying "max".
The capacity is secured in KBs for volumes that were created with "max". The capacity is secured
in MBs for volumes that were created by specifying the capacity. Therefore, when using a volume that was created with "max" for Advanced Copy, the capacity of the copy source volume
may not match the capacity of the copy destination volume, resulting in a copy failure.
• If a standard volume or a TPV is selected, the volume capacity can be specified (from 24MB to
128TB).
• If a SDV is selected, this parameter cannot be specified.
• If SDPV is selected, a pool volume size that is smaller than (or equal to) 2TB can be specified.
• SDPV must be specified in units of GB.
• If "max" is specified, volumes are created in the largest free space of the RAID group. The
number of volumes that is created is the value that is specified for the "-count" parameter.
For standard type volumes, the volume capacity is determined so that the capacity of each
created volume is equal and is a multiple of the basic size (stripe size) for the RAID group. If
no volumes are created in the specified RAID groups, the capacity of the volumes is
determined by dividing the RAID group capacity by the number of volumes that are to be
created. The "max" option can be specified for standard (open) volumes, SDPVs, and WSVs.
The method for determining the volume capacity for each volume type is as follows.
- standard
The remaining capacity is assigned by units of stripe size.
- sdpv
The remaining capacity is assigned by units of SDPE resolution.
- wsv
The largest free space is determined by the smallest free capacity among the
concatenated RAID groups. This largest free space is then used to create WSVs in each of
the concatenated RAID groups. The remaining capacity is assigned by units of Wide Stripe
Size.
If the specified RAID groups has the capacity that is larger than the maximum capacity of
the volume in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, this command terminates with an
error.
146
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create volume
-virtual-size Optional. This parameter must be specified when selecting an SDV type, and can specify the
volume size. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. In addition, this parameter cannot
be specified when selecting a type other than SDV.
-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of volumes to be created. If omitted, a single
volume is created with the name determined by the "-name" parameter. Requesting two or
more volumes results in the creation of volumes with names determined by the "-name"
parameter with a trailing index number, starting from "0". Only "1" can be specified when "concatenation-order manual" is specified.
Example: For "-count 3 -name abc", the volumes named "abc0", "abc1", and "abc2" are created.
If these volumes already exist, the names of the created volumes use incrementing index
numbers.
-copy-protection
Optional. This parameter protects a volume from being specified for the copy destination. It is
possible to set it even when there is already a copy session. The copy license is necessary for
this setting. If this parameter is omitted, "disable" is set.
-attention
enable
Volume is protected at the copy destination.
disable
Volume is not protected at the copy destination.
Optional. This parameter specifies the attention level of the Thin provisioning volume (TPV).
This parameter can be specified when the "-type tpv" parameter is specified. The settable
range is 1 – 200%. If this parameter is omitted, attention is not changed.
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies whether the encryption by a CM is performed. When
"enable" is selected, the specified volume data is encrypted. If the option is omitted, "default"
is set.
enable
The volume data is encrypted.
disable
The volume data is not encrypted.
-wide-stripe-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the Wide Stripe Size for the Wide Striping Volume that is to
be created. This parameter can only be specified when the "-type wsv" parameter is set. If
omitted, then it is handled as if "normal" is selected.
normal
The Wide Stripe Size for the Wide Striping Volume is set to 16MB.
small
The Wide Stripe Size for the Wide Striping Volume is set to 2MB. Note that if
the Stripe Size of the RAID group exceeds 2MB, the actual Stripe Size of the
RAID group is used for the WSV that is to be created.
-concatenation-order
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to manually set the concatenation order for the
RAID groups of a Wide Stripe Volume that is to be created. This parameter can only be specified
when the "-type wsv" parameter is set.
If omitted, then it is handled as if "auto" is selected.
auto
The concatenation order for the RAID groups is automatically set.
manual
The RAID groups are concatenated in the order specified by the "rg-number" or
"-rg-name" parameter.
147
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create volume
-volume-number
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the volume number is assigned automatically or
manually. Only one volume number can be specified. If omitted, the volume number is
automatically assigned. This parameter cannot be specified when a value that is "2" or more is
set for the "-count" parameter. If an existing volume number is set, an error occurs.
■ Example(s)
The following example creates a volume named "VOL001" in the RAID group named "RGP001". The volume
type is Standard. The volume size is 2TB:
CLI> create volume -name VOL001 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size 2tb
The following example creates consecutive Standard volumes named "VOL0" – "VOL9" in the RAID group
named "RGP001":
CLI> create volume -name VOL -count 10 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size 20gb
The following example creates a volume named "SDV1" in the RAID group named "RGP002". The volume type
is SDV, the physical size is 20GB, and the logical size is 100GB:
CLI> create volume -name SDV1 -rg-name RGP002 -type sdv -size 20gb -virtual-size 100gb
The following example creates a volume named "SDPV-ALL" in RAID group #11. The volume type is SDPV and
the pool size is 1GB:
CLI> create volume -name SDPV-ALL -rg-number 11 -type sdpv -size 1gb
The following example creates an encrypted and copy protected volume:
CLI> create volume -name VOL001 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size 2tb -encryption enable -copy-protection
enable
The following example creates Standard volumes named " VOL0" – "VOL9" with the maximum capacity that
can be allocated in the free space of the RAID group named "RGP001":
CLI> create volume -name VOL -count 10 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size max
The following example creates a Thin provisioning volume named "TPV1" in Thin provisioning pool#01. The
volume type is tpv, and attention is 80%:
CLI> create volume -name TPV1 -pool-number 01 -type tpv -attention 80
148
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set volume
set volume
This command changes the name and/or the encryption setting of an existing volume.
The "set flexible-tier-volume" command is used to change a Flexible Tier Volume (FTV).
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
set volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name }
[-name name] [-copy-protection {enable | disable}]
[-attention attention] [-encryption {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifier to be changed. Only one volume can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new volume name. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-copy-protection
Optional. This parameter protects a volume from being specified for the copy destination. It is
possible to set it even when there is already a copy session. The copy license is necessary for
this setting. If this parameter is omitted, "disable" is set.
-attention
enable
Volume is protected at the copy destination.
disable
Volume is not protected at the copy destination.
Optional. This parameter specifies the attention level of the Thin provisioning volume (tpv).
This parameter can be specified when the volume type is tpv. The settable range is 1 – 200%. If
this parameter is omitted, attention is not changed.
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies whether the encryption by a CM is performed. When
"enable" is selected, the specified volume data is encrypted. If omitted, then it is handled as if
"disable" is selected. This does not mean that the volume data is decrypted when "disable" is
selected.
enable
The volume data is encrypted.
disable
No operation.
149
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set volume
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the volume named "VOL003". The new name is "VOLUME003":
CLI> set volume -volume-name VOL003 -name VOLUME003
The following example changes the volume named "VOL003" to "VOLUME003", enables copy protection, and
changes the attention level to 80:
CLI> set volume -volume-name VOL003 -name VOLUME003 -copy-protection enable -attention 80
150
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > delete volume
delete volume
This command deletes existing volume(s). Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV) cannot be deleted using this
command. SDPVs must be deleted using the "delete snap-data-pool-volume" command.
• All mappings associated with the host must be released before a specified volume is deleted.
• All migrating volumes (RAID migration) must be stopped before a specified volume is deleted.
• Advanced Copy sessions to be deleted must be stopped before specified volume is deleted.
The "delete flexible-tier-volume" command is used to delete Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs).
■ Syntax
delete volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to be deleted. One or more RAID groups can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes both the volume named "VOL001" and "VOL002" at the same time:
CLI> delete volume -volume-name VOL001,VOL002
151
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > delete all-volumes
delete all-volumes
This command deletes all volumes from the specified RAID group and Thin provisioning pool, except for snap
data pool volumes. If the designated RAID group includes an expanded volume source, the expanded
destination is also deleted, if the designated RAID group includes an expanded volume destination, the
command fails with an error message. In this case, try again after deleting the expanded volume from the
source side. The Thin provisioning volume (tpv) cannot be deleted with the "-rg-number" or the "-rg-name"
parameters. For the Thin provisioning volume, the "-pool-number" or the "-pool-name" parameters are used.
The "delete all-flexible-tier-volumes" command is used to delete all of the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) in a
Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP).
■ Syntax
delete all-volumes {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name }
{-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name }
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifiers to delete all the volumes contained in the
or
RAID groups. Only one RAID group can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9
-rg-name
Volume Syntax" (page 22).
This parameter cannot be specified with the "-pool-number" or the "-pool-name" parameter.
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifiers to delete all the volumes
contained in the Thin provisioning pools. Only one Thin provisioning pool can be specified at
the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax" (page 20).
This parameter cannot be specified with the "-rg-number" or the "-rg-name" parameter.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes all the volumes contained in the RAID group named "RGP001":
CLI> delete all-volumes -rg-name RGP001
The following example deletes all the volumes contained in the Thin provisioning pool named "TPP001":
CLI> delete all-volumes -pool-name TPP001
152
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volumes
show volumes
This command lists details of all the existing volumes or specified volumes.
This command is also used to display the details of Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs).
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
show volumes [{-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name} |
{-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name } |
{-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name } |
-type {standard|sdv|sdpv|tpv|ftv|wsv} | -mode {expansion|uid|wsv|ftv|default}]
■ Parameter
-rg-number Optional. This parameter specifies RAID group identifiers. The details of the volumes in a RAID
or
group will be displayed. If the RAID group identifier is omitted, a summary of all the volumes
-rg-name
that exist in the system is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22).
• Only one parameter can be specified.
• Other parameters (except for "-mode default") cannot be specified at the same time.
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the Thin provisioning pool identifier. The details of the
volumes on a Thin provisioning pool will be displayed. If omitted, a summary of all the
volumes that exist in the system is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool
Syntax" (page 20).
• Only one parameter can be specified.
• Other parameters (except for "-mode default") cannot be specified at the same time.
153
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volumes
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP) identifier. The details of the
volumes on a FTRP will be displayed. If omitted, a summary of all the volumes that exist in the
system is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
• Only one parameter can be specified.
• Other parameters (except for "-mode default" and "-mode ftv") cannot be specified at the
same time.
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume type to display the specific type. If the volume
type is omitted, it is handled as selecting all types.
• Only one parameter can be specified.
• Other parameters (except for "-mode default") cannot be specified at the same time.
standard
A normal/open volume (Standard)
sdv
A Snap Data Volume (SDV) for Advanced Copy functions
sdpv
A Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV) for Advanced Copy functions
tpv
A Thin Provisioning Volume (TPV)
ftv
A Flexible Tier Volume (FTV)
wsv
A Wide Striping Volume (WSV)
154
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volumes
-mode
Optional. This parameter toggles the extended output mode. If the mode is omitted, "default"
is set.
• Only one parameter can be specified.
• When the "-mode expansion", "-mode uid" or "-mode wsv" parameter is specified, other
parameters cannot be specified at the same time.
expansion
Detailed information of the configuration of an expanded volume (LUN
concatenation volume) can be displayed.
uid
NAA identifiers (UIDs) are displayed.
wsv
The information for the concatenated RAID groups of the WSV are displayed.
ftv
The usage status of the FTSPs for the FTV is displayed.
The FTSPs are listed in the following order according to disk type; SSDs, SEDs,
Nearline disks, and then Online disks. This option can be specified together with
the "-ftsp-number" parameter or the "-ftsp-name" parameter. "Used Capacity"
indicates the total used capacity for the FTSPs. "Volume Used Capacity" indicates
the used capacity for the FTSPs of an FTV. "Usage Rate" indicates (Volume Used
Capacity)/(total capacity of all the FTVs)  100. The result for this formula is
rounded down to the nearest whole number. This may result in the sum of the
displayed "Usage Rate" values not being 100% even when the actual value is
100%. When no FTSPs are used, the "Usage Rate" is 0%.
default
The same result as when this parameter is omitted.
■ Output
#Volume
Status
Type Encryption Expansion
#No. Name
(Concatenation)
10
# 1 VOL001 Available SDV CM
#A B
C
D
E
F
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
RG or TPP Size(MB) Reserved Copy
No. Name
Deletion Protection
10 RGP010
32768 NO
disable
G H
I
J
K
Used Measurements Attention Balancing Priority Used
Status
(%)
Level
Capacity(MB)
Normal
32
70
High
0
0
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Volume number
Volume name
Volume status
Volume type
Encryption status
The number that configures volume if expanded
RAID group, Thin Provisioning Pool or Flexible Tier Pool number
RAID group, Thin Provisioning Pool or Flexible Tier Pool name
Volume size. For SDVs, Virtual-size is displayed.
Reserved deletion sign for SDPV only
Copy protection
Used Status for TPV or FTV
Measurements for TPV or FTV
Attention level for TPV or FTV
Balancing level for TPV only
FTRP number to which the FTV is preferentially allocated
Used Capacity for TPV or FTV
155
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volumes
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the volumes that exist in the system:
CLI> show volumes
Volume
No. Name
1 VOL001
2 VOL002
3 V0L003
4 V0L004
5 VOL005
6 V0L006
7 V0L007
8 VOL008
9 VOL009
10 VOL010
Status
Type
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Standard
Standard
SDV
SDPV
Standard
SDPV
TPV
FTV
MVV(G)
WSV
Encryption Expansion
(Concatenation)
CM
10
Encrypting
Decrypting
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
CM
CM
CM
OFF
-
RG or TPP or FTRP
No. Name
10 RGP010
10 RGP010
12 RGP-#12
13 RGP-#13
10 RGP010
14 RGP-#14
01 TPP001
01 FTRP001
15 RGP-#15
16 RGP-#16
Size(MB) Reserved Copy
Deletion protection
enable
disable
enable
No
disable
enable
No
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
134217728
512
2048
1024
3072
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
The following example displays a list of all the volumes that exist in the RAID group named "RGP010". Free
space information is also displayed:
CLI> show volumes -rg-name RGP010
Volume
Status
No. Name
1 VOL001
Available
2 VOL002
Available
5 VOL005
Available
Type
Encryption Expansion
(Concatenation)
1/10
1/ 3
Standard CM
Standard Encrypting
Standard OFF
RG or TPP or FTRP
No. Name
10 RGP010
10 RGP010
10 RGP010
Size(MB) Reserved
Deletion
2048
512
1024
Copy
protection
enable
disable
enable
The following example displays a list of all the mainframe volumes that exist in the RAID group named
"RGP011". Free space information is also displayed:
CLI> show volumes -rg-name RGP011
Volume
No. Name
----- -------------------------------- - - -
Status
Type
------------------------Available
Available
Available
-------MLU
MLU
MLU
RG or TPP
Size(MB) Copy
No. Name
protection
--- -------------------------------- --------- ---------11 RGP011
- 11 RGP011
- 11 RGP011
- -
The following example only displays a list of SDPV type volumes:
CLI> show volumes -type sdpv
Volume
Status
No. Name
4 V0L004
Available
6 V0L006
Available
Type
SDPV
SDPV
Encryption Expansion
(Concatenation)
OFF
OFF
-
RG or TPP or FTRP
No. Name
13 RGP-#13
14 RGP-#14
Size(MB) Reserved
Deletion
1024
No
1024
No
Copy
protection
disable
disable
The following example only displays a list of TPV type volumes:
CLI> show volumes -type tpv
Volume
Status
Type Encryption RG or TPP or FTRP Size(MB) Copy
Used
Measurements Attention Balancing
No. Name
No. Name
Protection Status
(%)
Level
7 V0L007 Available TPV CM
01 TPP001
1024 disable
Normal
100
70
High
8 VOL008 Available TPV CM
01 TPP002
1024 disable
Attention >500
80
Low
Used
Capacity(MB)
0
0
The following example only displays a list of FTV type volumes:
CLI> show volumes -type ftv
Volume
Status
Type Encryption RG or TPP or FTRP Size(MB) Copy
Used
Measurements Attention Priority Used
No. Name
No. Name
Protection Status
(%)
Capacity(MB)
9 FTV009 Available FTV CM
01 FTRP001
1024 disable
Normal
100
70
0
0
10 VOL010 Available FTV CM
01 FTRP002
1024 disable
Attention >500
80
1
0
The following example only displays a list of WSV type volumes:
CLI> show volumes -type wsv
Volume
Status
No. Name
0 OLU#0
Available
1 OLU#1
Available
2 OLU#2
Available
Type
WSV
WSV
WSV
Encryption Wide Stripe RG or TPP or FTRP
Size
No. Name
OFF
Normal
0 RLU#0
OFF
Normal
1 RLU#1
OFF
Small
2 RLU#2
Size(MB) Reserved
Deletion
256
256
256
Copy
Protection
Disable
Disable
Disable
156
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volumes
The following example displays a list of all the volumes that exist in the Thin provisioning pool named
"TPP001":
CLI> show volumes -pool-name TPP001
Volume
Status
Type Encryption RG or TPP or FTRP Size(MB) Copy
Used
No. Name
No. Name
Protection Status
7 V0L007 Available TPV CM
01 TPP001
1024
disable
Normal
Measurements Attention Balancing Used
(%)
Level
Capacity(MB)
100
70
High
0
The following example displays the detailed information for expanded volumes:
CLI> show volumes -mode expansion
Volume
Status
No. Name
1 VOL001
Available
5 VOL005
Available
Type
Encryption Expansion
(Concatenation)
10
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
10/10
Standard OFF
3
1/ 3
2/ 3
3/ 3
Standard CM
RG or TPP or FTRP
No. Name
10 RGP010
10 RGP010
1 RGP001
2 RGP002
1 RGP001
1 RGP001
11 RGP011
13 RGP-#13
13 RGP-#13
14 RGP-#14
14 RGP-#14
10 RGP010
10 RGP010
11 RGP011
10 RGP010
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Size(MB) Reserved
Deletion
32768
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
2048)
3072
1024)
1024)
1024)
Copy
protection
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
The following example displays an NAA Identifier (UID):
CLI> show volumes -mode uid
Volume
Status
No. Name
1 VOL001
Available
Type
RG or TPP or FTRP
No. Name
Standard 10 RGP010
Size(MB) UID
32768 12345678901234567890123456789012
The following example displays information on an FTV:
CLI> show volumes -mode ftv
Volume
Status
Type Encryption RG or TPP or FTRP Size(MB) Copy
Used
Measurements Priority Attention Used
No. Name
No. Name
Protection Status
(%)
Capacity(MB)
9 FTV009 Available FTV ON
01 FTRP001
1024 disable
Normal
100
70
0
0
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Disk
RAID
Status
Total
Used
Usage
No. Name
Attribute Level
Capacity
Capacity
Rate
0 FTSP#0
SSD
RAID0 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB 60%
1 FTSP#1
Online
RAID0 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB 40%
2 FTSP#2
NearLine RAID5 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
0%
Volume
Status
Type Encryption RG or TPP or FTRP Size(MB) Copy
Used
Measurements Priority Attention Used
No. Name
No. Name
Protection Status
(%)
Capacity(MB)
10 VOL010 Available FTV ON
01 FTRP002
1024 disable
Attention >500
80
1
0
<Flexible Tier Sub Pool List>
Flexible Tier Sub Pool Disk
RAID
Status
Total
Used
Volume Used Usage
No. Name
Attribute Level
Capacity
Capacity
Capacity
Rate
4 FTSP#0
SSD
RAID0 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
0 %
5 FTSP#1
Online
RAID0 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
0 %
6 FTSP#2
NearLine RAID5 Available
129.00 GB
0.00 MB
0.00 MB
0 %
The following example displays WSV concatenation information:
CLI> show volumes -mode wsv
Volume
Status
No. Name
0 OLU#0
Available
1 OLU#1
Available
Wide Stripe WSV Concatenation RG or TPP or FTRP
Size
No. Name
Normal
3 1 RLU#1
1/ 3 1 RLU#1
2/ 3 2 RLU#2
3/ 3 3 RLU#3
Normal
3 1 RLU#1
1/ 3 1 RLU#1
2/ 3 2 RLU#2
3/ 3 3 RLU#3
157
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volume-progress
show volume-progress
This command displays the progress of formatting, migration (RAID Migration), encryption, balancing, and
Zero Reclamation for volumes.
This command is also used to display the progress of Flexible Tier Volume (FTV) processes.
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
show volume-progress [ -volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names ]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. If the volume identifier is omitted, the progress status of all the
volumes is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Output
# show volume-progress -volume-number 1
#Volume
Status
Formatting
#No. Name
Progress
Available
100%
# 1 VOL001
A
B
C
D
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
Migrating
Progress
E
Encrypting
Progress
F
Balancing
Progress
G
Zero Reclamation
Progress
H
Volume number
An alias name of volume
Volume status
Progress status of formatting
Progress status of migrating
Progress status of encrypting
Progress status of balancing
Progress status of Zero Reclamation
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the progress status of volume #1:
CLI> show volume-progress -volume-number 1
Volume
Status
Formatting
No. Name
Progress
1 VOL001
Available
80%
Migrating
Progress
-
Encrypting
Progress
-
Balancing
Progress
-
Zero Reclamation
Progress
-
158
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volume-progress
The following example displays the progress status of the volumes named "VOL001" and "VOL012":
CLI> show volume-progress -volume-name VOL001,VOL012
Volume
Status
Formatting Migrating
No. Name
Progress
Progress
1 VOL001
Available
80%
12 VOL012
Rebuild
80%
-
Encrypting
Progress
-
Balancing
Progress
-
Zero Reclamation
Progress
-
Balancing
Progress
80%
-
Zero Reclamation
Progress
60%
-
The following example displays the progress status of all the volumes:
CLI> show volume-progress
Volume
Status
No. Name
1 VOL001
Available
2 VOL002
Available
3 TPV003
Rebuild
4 VOL004
Rebuild
10 VOL010
Available
Formatting
Progress
80%
90%
80%
Migrating
Progress
40%
Encrypting
Progress
10%
-
159
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volume-mapping
show volume-mapping
This command displays the LUNs (Logical Unit Numbers) that are mapped to volumes.
■ Syntax
show volume-mapping
[-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names ] [-mode {all| host-lun | default}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. If the volume identifier is omitted, the progress status of all the
volumes is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-mode
Optional. This parameter toggles the extended output mode. If the mode is omitted,
"default" is set.
all
In addition to the normal display items, the information of the LUNs that
can be accessed from the host of each connected CA port is also displayed.
host-lun
Only the information of the LUNs that can be accessed from the host of
each connected CA port is displayed.
default
A list of all of the volumes is displayed.
■ Output
#Volume
Type
UID
#No.
Name
#
0 OLU#0
Standard 600000000100000002A2AAA00000000
# A
B
C
D
#<Mapping>
# LUN Affinity/LUN Group
Port
#
No. Name
#
0
0 LG#0
# E
F
G
H
#<Host LUN>
# LUN Port
Host
Affinity/LUN Group
#
No. Name
No. Name
#
0 CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
0 FC#0
0 LG#0
# E
H
I
J
F
G
160
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show volume-mapping
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
Volume number
Volume name
Volume type
Volume UID (Universally Unique Identifier)
LUN
LUN group number/Affinity group number
LUN group name/Affinity group name
CA port
Host number
Host name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the LUNs that are mapped to volume #0:
CLI> show volume-mapping -volume-number 0
No.
Name
Type
0 OLU#0
Standard
<Mapping>
LUN Affinity/LUN Group
Port
No. Name
0
0 LG#0
0
1 LG#1
-
UID
600000000100000002A2AAA00000000
The following example displays the information of only the LUNs for volume #0 that can be accessed from
the host:
CLI> show volume-mapping -mode host-lun -volume-number 0
No.
Name
Type
UID
0 OLU#0
Standard
600000000100000002A2AAA00000000
<Host LUN>
LUN Port
Host
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
No. Name
0 CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
- 0 LG#0
100 CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
- - 0 CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
0 FC#0
0 LG#0
The following example displays the information of all the LUNs for volume #0:
CLI> show volume-mapping -mode all -volume-number 0
No.
Name
Type
UID
0 OLU#0
Standard
600000000100000002A2AAA00000000
<Mapping>
LUN Affinity/LUN Group
Port
No. Name
0
0 LG#0
0
1 LG#1
<Host LUN>
LUN Port
Host
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
No. Name
0 CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
- 0 LG#0
100 CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
- - 0 CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
0 FC#0
0 LG#0
161
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > format volume
format volume
This command will format volume(s).
The "format flexible-tier-volume" command is used to format Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs).
■ Syntax
format volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to be formatted. One or more RAID groups can
be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example only formats the volume named "VOL001":
CLI> format volume -volume-name VOL001
The following example formats consecutive volumes #80 - #99 at the same time:
CLI> format volume -volume-number 80-99
162
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > expand volume
expand volume
This command executes volume expansion (LUN concatenation). It adds free space to expand the capacity of
a currently registered volume, allowing free space to be assigned efficiently. In addition, this command can
expand the capacity of Thin provisioning volume (TPV). SDVs, SDPVs, and WSVs cannot be expanded.
The "expand flexible-tier-volume" command is used to expand Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs).
■ Syntax
expand volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
[{-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }] -size size{tb|gb|mb}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifier to be expanded. Only one volume can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-rg-number Optional. This parameter specifies the RAID group identifiers to which the volume will belong
or
after expansion. One or more RAID groups can be specified at the same time (up to a
-rg-name
maximum of 15). If two or more RAID groups are specified, they must be specified in the same
order as the expansion size parameter. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page
22).
This parameter cannot be specified for a Thin provisioning volume (TPV).
This parameter should be specified when the volume type is NOT a Thin provisioning volume
(TPV).
-size
This parameter specifies the capacity that is to be added when expanding a volume. When
expanding a TPV, specify the capacity that is required after expansion is performed. Terabytes
(TB), gigabytes (GB), or megabytes (MB) can be specified. For volume expansion,
concatenated source volumes and volumes that are to be concatenated must be 1GB or more.
Multiple parameters can be specified, but these parameters must match the equivalent RAID
group identifiers that are specified in the previous parameter.
Example: 1tb, 120gb, 512mb
■ Example(s)
The following example expands the volume named "VOL001" as a new 800GB area in RAID group #5:
CLI > expand volume -volume-name VOL001 -rg-number 5 -size 800gb
163
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > expand volume
The following example expands the volume named "VOL001" as a new 800GB area in RAID group #5 and a
new 400GB area in RAID group #6:
CLI > expand volume -volume-name VOL001 -rg-number 5,6 -size 800gb,400gb
The following example expands the Thin provisioning volume named "TPV001" as a new 800GB area:
CLI > expand volume -volume-name TPV001 -size 800gb
164
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start migration
start migration
This command starts RAID migration, which moves the currently registered volume to another RAID group or
Thin Provisioning Pool (TPP). The capacity of a volume can also be expanded at the same time.
The "start flexible-tier-migration" command is used to perform RAID Migration in which the destination is a
Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP).
■ Syntax
start migration {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
{-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name | -pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name}
-size size{tb|gb|mb} [-encryption {enable | disable}] [-zero-reclamation {enable | disable}]
[-wide-stripe-size {normal | small}] [-concatenation-order {auto | manual}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifier to be moved. Only one volume can be specified
at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies a RAID group or Thin provisioning pool as the volume migration
destination. Only one Thin provisioning pool can be specified at the same time. Use the "-rgnumber" or the "-rg-name" parameter to specify the RAID group as the migration destination.
Note that when multiple RAID groups are specified, the migration destination becomes a Wide
Stripe Volume. Use the "-pool-number" or the "-pool-name" parameter to specify the Thin
provisioning pool as the migration destination. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax"
(page 22) or "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax" (page 20).
-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume size of the migration destination. A different
volume size from the source size can only be specified for the destination when performing
migration between RAID groups with a volume size that is larger than the source size. If the
volume size that is specified for the destination is smaller than the source size, a parameter
error occurs. If omitted, the same size as the source volume is set. Select whether terabytes
(TB), gigabytes (GB), or megabytes (MB) are used for the capacity. The size cannot be changed
when the migration destination is a Thin provisioning pool.
Example: 1tb, 120gb, 200mb
165
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start migration
-encryption
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the encryption by a CM is performed. When
"enable" is selected, the specified volume data is encrypted. If omitted, then it is handled as if
"disable" is selected.
enable
The volume data is encrypted
disable
The volume data is not encrypted.
-zero-reclamation
This parameter specifies whether Zero Reclamation is performed after migration is complete. If
omitted, then it is handled as if "disable" is selected. This parameter cannot be set when the
migration destination is a RAID group. "enable" cannot be specified while Zero Reclamation is
being performed for a migration source volume.
enable
Zero Reclamation is started after migration is complete.
disable
Zero Reclamation is not started after migration is complete.
-wide-stripe-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the Wide Stripe Size of a migration source Wide Striping
Volume. This parameter can only be specified when the migration source is a Wide Striping
Volume. If omitted, then it is handled as if "normal" is selected.
normal
The Wide Stripe Size for the Wide Striping Volume is set to 16MB.
small
The Wide Stripe Size for the Wide Striping Volume is set to 2MB. Note that if
the Stripe Size of the RAID group exceeds 2MB, the actual Stripe Size of the
RAID group is used for the WSV that is to be created.
-concatenation-order
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to manually set the concatenation order for the
RAID groups of a migration source Wide Stripe Volume. This parameter can only be set when
the migration source is a Wide Striping Volume. If omitted, then it is handled as if "auto" is
selected.
auto
The concatenation order for the RAID groups is automatically set.
manual
The RAID groups are concatenated in the order specified by the "rg-number" or
"-rg-name" parameter.
■ Example(s)
The following example moves the volume named "VOL003" to the RAID group named "RGP004". The new
volume size is 512GB:
CLI> start migration -volume-name VOL003 -rg-name RGP004 -size 512gb
166
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > stop migration
stop migration
This command can be used to stop the RAID migration progress if it has commenced. The migration source/
destination volumes cannot be deleted unless the RAID migration has been stopped or has completed.
This command is also used for RAID Migration in which the destination is a Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP).
■ Syntax
stop migration {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the migration source volume numbers or names corresponding to an
already started migration. Details can be displayed using the "show migration" command. One
or more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume
Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example stops the RAID migration of volume #1:
CLI> stop migration -volume-number 1
167
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show migration
show migration
This command displays a list of the migrating volumes that are undergoing migration.
This command is also used for RAID Migration in which the destination is a Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP).
■ Syntax
show migration
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Migration Source Volume Migration Progress Error Work Volume
# No. Name
Status
Code No.
#
7 vol0007
Active
50%
0x05
6
A
B
C
D
E
F
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
The move source volume number
The move source volume name
The volume migration status
The volume migration progress
The volume migration error code
Working volume number (In order to be used as a move destination)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all migrating volumes:
CLI> show migration
Migration Source Volume
No. Name
- 1 Volume-Number#01
2 Volume-Number#02
3 Volume-Number#03
Migration Progress Error Work Volume
Status
Code No.
Reserve
Error
20%
0x16
5
Suspend
10%
0x1c
6
Active
90%
0x00
4
168
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start balancing-thin-pro-volume
start balancing-thin-pro-volume
This command starts evenly relocating the Thin provisioning volumes (TPVs) among RAID groups.
■ Syntax
start balancing-thin-pro-volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the TPV to start balancing. Only one parameter can be specified. For
details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example starts balancing TPV01:
CLI> start balancing-thin-po-bolume -volume-name TPV01
169
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > stop balancing-thin-pro-volume
stop balancing-thin-pro-volume
This command stops evenly relocating the TPVs among RAID groups. Specify the TPV that is being balanced.
■ Syntax
stop balancing-thin-pro-volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the TPV to stop balancing. One or more parameters can be specified at
the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example stops balancing TPV01 and TPV02:
CLI> stop balancing-thin-pro-volume -volume-name TPV01,TPV02
170
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show balancing-thin-pro-volumes
show balancing-thin-pro-volumes
This command displays information such as the status and progress of TPV balancing. The information of only
TPVs that are being balanced is displayed.
■ Syntax
show balancing-thin-pro-volumes [-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of volumes that is to be displayed (filtering).
Only one number can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
Example: -volume-number 1
An error occurs when a volume other than a TPV is specified.
■ Output
# Volume
# No.
Name
#
0 TPV00
#
1 TPV01
#
2 TPV02
A
B
# <RAID Group List>
# RAID Group
# No. Name
I
J
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
Balancing
Level
High
Medium
Low
C
Balancing Process
Status Progress(%)
Active 99
Active 50
Error 30
D
E
Work Volume Error
No.
code
1023
0x00
2047
0x00
4095
0x73
F
G
Elapsed
Time
02h34min50sec
01h23min45sec
00h30min30sec
H
Used
Capacity(MB)
K
Volume number
Volume name
Balancing level
Balancing process status
Balancing process progress
Working volume number
Error code
Elapsed time
RAID Group Number (Only when specifying Volume)
RAID Group Name (Only when specifying Volume)
Used Capacity(Unit : MB) (Only when specifying Volume)
171
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show balancing-thin-pro-volumes
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all migrating volumes:
CLI> show balancing-thin-pro-volumes
Volume
Balancing Balancing Process
No.
Name
Level
Status Progress(%)
0 TPV00
High
Active 99
1 TPV01
Medium
Active 50
2 TPV02
Low
Error 30
Work Volume Error
No.
code
1023
0x00
2047
0x00
4095
0x73
Elapsed
Time
02h34min50sec
01h23min45sec
00h30min30sec
The following example displays the specified volume:
CLI> show balancing-thin-pro-volumes -volume-number
Volume
Balancing Balancing Process
No.
Name
Level
Status Progress(%)
1 TPV01
Medium
Active 50
<RAID Group List>
RAID Group
Used
No. Name
Capacity(MB)
1 RAIDGROUP001
1344
2 RAIDGROUP002
2688
1
Work Volume Error Elapsed
No.
code Time
2047
0x00 01h23min45sec
172
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start zero-reclamation
start zero-reclamation
This command starts Zero Reclamation. Zero Reclamation affects Thin Provisioning and Flexible Tier Pools
(FTRP) by releasing physical allocations in consecutive 32MB 0 data blocks in TPVs and FTPs as unused areas.
To stop or display the progress of a Zero Reclamation process that is started by this command, use the "stop
zero-reclamation" and "show volume-progress" commands.
■ Syntax
start zero-reclamation {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameters specifies the volume number or alias name of a volume for which Zero
Reclamation is to be started. Multiple volumes can be specified in a single command. For
details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example starts Zero Reclamation for a TFV that is named "FTV0001":
CLI> start zero-reclamation -volume-name FTV0001
The following example starts Zero Reclamation for volumes #80 – #99 at the same time:
CLI> start zero-reclamation -volume-number 80-99
173
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > stop zero-reclamation
stop zero-reclamation
This command stops Zero Reclamation. To display the progress of a Zero Reclamation process that is stopped
by this command, use the "show volume-progress" command.
■ Syntax
stop zero-reclamation {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameters specifies the volume number or alias name of a volume for which Zero
Reclamation is to be stopped. Multiple volumes can be set in a single command. For details,
refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example stops Zero Reclamation for a TFV that is named "FTV0001":
CLI> stop zero-reclamation -volume-name FTV0001
The following example stops Zero Reclamation for volumes #80 – #99 at the same time:
CLI> stop zero-reclamation -volume-number 80-99
174
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management
3.4.2
Flexible Tier Volumes
This section explains the details of the commands that are related to the management of volumes that is
used by the Flexible Tier function.
In the same way as normal volumes, use the "show volumes" command to display a list of the Flexible Tier
Volumes and the "show volume-progress" command to display the formatting progress of Flexible Tier
Volumes.
In the same way as RAID Migration, use the "stop migration" command to stop Flexible Tier Migration and the
"show migrations" command to display a list of the migrating volumes for Flexible Tier Migration.
Functions to control Flexible Tier Volumes are as follows:
• Creating volumes
• Deleting volumes
• Changing an existing volume information
• Formatting volumes
• Expanding volumes
• Flexible Tier migration (migrating volumes)
The commands that are used for normal volumes and FTVs are shown below.
Command used for normal
volumes
Command used for FTVs
create volume
create flexible-tier-volume
set volume
set flexible-tier-volume
Formatting volumes
format volume
format flexible-tier-volume
Expanding volumes
expand volume
Function
Creating volumes
Changing volume settings
Expanding volumes
expand flexible-tier-volume
show volumes
Displaying the progress of volume
processes
show volume-progress
Deleting volumes
Starting RAID Migration
delete volume
delete flexible-tier-volume
delete all-flexible-tier-volume
start migration
start flexible-tier-migration
Stopping RAID Migration
stop migration
Displaying a list of volumes undergoing
RAID Migration
show migrations
175
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create flexible-tier-volume
create flexible-tier-volume
This command creates a Flexible Tier Volume (FTV) in the specified Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP). Multiple FTVs can
be created in the same FTRP by using the "-count" parameter. This command has the same function as the
"create volume" command, except that an FTV is created in an FTRP.
■ Syntax
create flexible-tier-volume -name alias_name {-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name }
-size size {tb|gb|mb} [-priority {ftsp_number|auto}] [-count count] [-attention attention]
[-copy-protection {enable | disable}] [-volume-number volume_number ]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the FTV name. Only one name can be specified. For details, refer to
"1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP identifier to which the FTV that is to be created is allocated.
For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
-size
This parameter specifies the FTV size. Select whether terabytes (TB), gigabytes (GB), or
megabytes (MB) are used for the capacity.
Example: 1tb, 120gb, 512mb
-priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTRP number of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP) to
which the FTV that is to be created is preferentially allocated.
If this parameter is omitted or "auto" is specified for this parameter, the allocated FTSP is
determined automatically.
-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of FTVs that are to be created. If omitted, only
one FTV is created with the name that is specified by the "-name" parameter.
When two or more is specified for the "-count" parameter, a sequential number starting from 0,
such as 0,1, and 2, is added after the FTV name that is specified by the "-name" parameter.
Example: When "-name abc -count 3" is specified, FTVs "abc0", "abc1", and "abc2" are created. If
these volumes already exist, the names of the created volumes use incrementing index
numbers.
-attention
Optional. This parameter specifies the threshold (Caution) for the FTV. A value between 1%
and 200% can be set. If omitted, the default value (10%) is set.
176
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create flexible-tier-volume
-copy-protection
Optional. This parameter prevents the FTV from being specified as the copy destination. When
"enable" is specified, the FTV cannot be specified as the copy destination. If this parameter is
omitted or "auto" is specified for this parameter, the FTV can be specified as the copy
destination.
enable
The FTV is protected.
disable
The FTV is not protected.
-volume-number
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the volume number is assigned automatically or
manually. Only one volume number can be specified. If omitted, the volume number is
automatically assigned. This parameter cannot be specified when a value that is "2" or more is
set for the "-count" parameter. If an existing volume number is set, an error occurs.
■ Example(s)
The following example creates an FTV. FTRP#0 is set for the FTRP to which the FTV is preferentially allocated,
80% is set for the Attention level threshold, and the copy destination volume protection function is enabled:
CLI> create flexible-tier-volume -name FTV0002 -ftrp-number 0 -attention 80 -copy-protection enable
177
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set flexible-tier-volume
set flexible-tier-volume
This command modifies the information for the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) that are already registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Syntax
set flexible-tier-volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
[-name name] [-priority {ftsp_number|auto}] [-attention attention] [-copy-protection {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the FTV identifier for which the settings are to be changed. Only one
parameter can be specified in a single command. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax"
(page 22).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new name of the target FTV. For details, refer to "1.2.4
Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). If omitted, the alias name of the target FTV remains
unchanged.
-priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTRP number of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP) to
which the target FTV is preferentially allocated.
If "auto" is specified for this parameter, the allocated FTSP is determined automatically. If
omitted, this parameter is not changed.
-attention
Optional. This parameter specifies the threshold (Caution) for the target FTV. A value between
1% and 200% can be set. If omitted, this parameter is not changed.
-copy-protection
Optional. This parameter prevents the FTV from being specified as the copy destination. When
"enable" is specified, the target FTV cannot be specified as the copy destination. When
"disable" is specified, the target FTV can be specified as the copy destination. If omitted, the
setting remains unchanged.
enable
The FTV is protected.
disable
The FTV is not protected.
■ Example(s)
The following example renames an FTV named "FTV0003" to "FTV_0003":
CLI> set flexible-tier-volume -volume-name FTV0003 -name FTV_0003
178
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set flexible-tier-volume
The following example changes the FTSP to which the target FTV is preferentially allocated to volume#03,
sets the Attention level threshold to 60%, and enables the copy destination volume protection function for
volume#02 (FTV):
CLI> set flexible-tier-volume -volume-number 2 -priority 3 -attention 60 -copy-protection enable
179
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > format flexible-tier-volume
format flexible-tier-volume
This command formats the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system.
■ Syntax
format flexible-tier-volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the FTV identifiers that are to be formatted. Multiple FTVs can be
formatted in a single command. This command results in an error response if a non-FTV
volume is specified. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example formats an FTV named "FTV0001".
CLI> format flexible-tier-volume -volume-name FTV0001
The following example formats consecutive volumes #80 – #99 at the same time:
CLI> format flexible-tier-volume -volume-number 80-99
180
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > expand flexible-tier-volume
expand flexible-tier-volume
This command expands the capacity of the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) that are already registered in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Syntax
expand flexible-tier-volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
-size size{tb|gb|mb}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume number or the alias name of the FTVs for which the
capacity is to be expanded. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume size after capacity expansion. Select whether
terabytes (TB), gigabytes (GB), or megabytes (MB) are used for the capacity.
Example: 1tb, 120gb, 512mb
■ Example(s)
The following example expands the FTV named "FTV0001" as a new 800GB area:
CLI > expand flexible-tier-volume -volume-name FTV0001 -size 800gb
181
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > delete flexible-tier-volume
delete flexible-tier-volume
This command deletes the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system. This command can only delete volumes that are FTVs.
• All mappings associated with the host must be released before specified FTVs are deleted.
• All migrating FTVs (Flexible Tier migration) must be stopped before specified FTVs are deleted.
• Advanced Copy sessions to be deleted must be stopped before specified FTVs are deleted.
■ Syntax
delete flexible-tier-volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the FTV identifiers that are to be deleted. Multiple FTVs can be deleted
in a single command. This command results in an error response if a non-FTV volume is
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes an FTV named "FTV0001":
CLI> delete flexible-tier-volume -volume-name FTV0001
The following example deletes consecutive volumes #80 – #99 at the same time:
CLI> delete flexible-tier-volume -volume-number 80-99
182
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > delete all-flexible-tier-volumes
delete all-flexible-tier-volumes
This command collectively deletes the Flexible Tier Volumes (FTVs) for which the specified Flexible Tier Pool
(FTRP) is allocated and that are already registered in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
• All mappings associated with the host must be released before specified FTVs are deleted.
• All migrating FTVs (Flexible Tier migration) must be stopped before specified FTVs are deleted.
• Advanced Copy sessions to be deleted must be stopped before specified FTVs are deleted.
■ Syntax
delete all-flexible-tier-volumes {-ftrp-number ftrp_numbers | -ftrp-name ftrp_names }
■ Parameter
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP identifier that is allocated to the FTVs that are to be
deleted. Only one parameter can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool
Syntax" (page 21).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes all the FTVs for which a FTRP that is named "FTRP001" is allocated.
CLI> delete all-flexible-tier-volumes -ftrp-name FTRP001
183
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start flexible-tier-migration
start flexible-tier-migration
This command starts Flexible Tier Migration. Flexible Tier Migration is RAID Migration in which the migration
destination is a Flexible Tier Pool (FTRP). The "start migration" command is used for normal RAID Migration in
which the migration destination is not an FTRP.
• The capacity of volumes cannot be changed during Flexible Tier Migration.
• The migrated volume type is changed to FTV.
In the same way as RAID Migration, use the "stop migration" command to stop Flexible Tier Migration that is
started by executing this command and the "show migrations" command to show a list of the migrating
volumes for Flexible Tier Migration that is started by executing this command.
■ Syntax
start flexible-tier-migration {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
{-ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name} [-priority {ftsp_number|auto}]
[-zero-reclamation {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the migration source volume. For details, refer to
"1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the FTRP identifier for the volume migration destination. Only one
parameter can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21).
-priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the FTRP number of the Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP) to
which the migrated FTV is preferentially allocated.
If this parameter is omitted or "auto" is specified for this parameter, the allocated FTSP is
determined automatically by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
-zero-reclamation
This parameter specifies whether Zero Reclamation is performed after migration is complete. If
omitted, then it is handled as if "disable" is selected. "enable" cannot be specified while Zero
Reclamation is being performed for a migration source volume.
enable
Zero Reclamation is started after migration is complete.
disable
Zero Reclamation is not started after migration is complete.
184
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > start flexible-tier-migration
■ Example(s)
The following example migrates an FTV named "FTV0003" to an FTRP named "FTRP000".( The volume type of
the FTV that is named "FTV0003" remains FTV:)
CLI> start flexible-tier-migration -volume-name FTV0003 -ftrp-name FTRP000
The following example migrates OLU Volume#0005 to FTRP#003 and the migrated volumes is preferentially
allocated to FTSP#0004. (The volume type of Volume#0005 is changed to FTV:)
CLI> start flexible-tier-migration -volume-number 5 -ftrp-number 3 -priority 4
The following example migrates OLU Volume#0005 to FTRP#003 and the migrated volumes is preferentially
allocated to FTSP#0004. (The volume type of the FTV that is named "FTV0001" remains FTV. The name of the
volume remains unchanged.)
CLI> start flexible-tier-migration -volume-name TPV000A -ftrp-number 4 -priority auto
185
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management
3.4.3
ODX Buffer Volume
This section describes the commands that are related to the management of volumes for the backup area that
is used for Offloaded Data Transfer (ODX).
The functions to control ODX Buffer volumes are as follows:
• Setting the ODX mode
• Displaying the ODX mode
• Creating an ODX Buffer volume
• Setting an ODX Buffer volume
• Deleting an ODX Buffer volume
The commands that are used for ODX Buffer volumes are shown below.
Function
Command
Creating volumes
create odx-buffer-volume
Changing volume settings
set odx-buffer-volume
Formatting volumes
format volume
Expanding volumes
expand volume
Displaying a list of volumes
show volumes
Displaying the progress of volume processes
show volume-progress
Deleting volumes
delete odx-buffer-volume
Starting RAID Migration
start migration
Stopping RAID Migration
stop migration
Displaying a list of volumes undergoing RAID Migration
show migrations
186
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set odx-mode
set odx-mode
This command specifies the operation mode for the Offloaded Data Transfer function.
■ Syntax
set odx-mode -mode {enable|disable}
■ Parameter
-mode
This parameters specifies whether to enable or disable the Offloaded Data Transfer function.
enable
The Offloaded Data Transfer function is enabled.
disable
The Offloaded Data Transfer function is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example enables the Offloaded Data Transfer function:
CLI> set odx-mode -mode enable
The following example disables the Offloaded Data Transfer function:
CLI> set odx-mode -mode disable
187
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > show odx-mode
show odx-mode
This command displays the operation mode for the Offloaded Data Transfer function.
■ Syntax
show odx-mode
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Offloaded Data Transfer Mode [Enable]
A
A:
Operation mode for the Offloaded Data Transfer function
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the operation mode for the Offloaded Data Transfer function:
CLI> show odx-mode
Offloaded Data Transfer Mode [Disable]
CLI> show odx-mode
Offloaded Data Transfer Mode [Enable]s
188
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create odx-buffer-volume
create odx-buffer-volume
This command creates the ODX Buffer volume. The ODX mode setting must be enabled. Only one ODX Buffer
volume can be registered for an ETERNUS Disk storage system (multiple ODX Buffer volume cannot be
created).
■ Syntax
create odx-buffer-volume -name name {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name |
-pool-number pool_number | -pool-name pool_name | -ftrp-number ftrp_number | -ftrp-name ftrp_name }
-type {open|standard|tpv|ftv} -size {size{tb|gb|mb}|max} [-priority {ftsp_number|auto}]
[-attention attention] [-encryption {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the name for the ODX Buffer volume. Only one name can be
specified. For details about the contents that can be entered, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name
Syntax" (page 20).
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the RAID group in which the ODX Buffer volume is
to be created. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group Syntax" (page 22). This parameter can
be set when "open" or "standard" are set for the "-type" parameter.
-pool-number
or
-pool-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the TPP in which the ODX Buffer volume is to be
created. For details, refer to "1.2.5 Thin Provisioning Pool Syntax" (page 20). This parameter
can be specified when "tpv" is set for the "-type" parameter.
-ftrp-number
or
-ftrp-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the FTRP in which the ODX Buffer volume is to be
created. For details, refer to "1.2.6 Flexible Tier Pool Syntax" (page 21). This parameter can
be specified when "ftv" is set for the "-type" parameter.
-type
This parameter specifies the volume type of the ODX Buffer volume.
-size
open
Standard volume (Standard). "open" type volumes that are created are
displayed as standard volumes.
standard
Normal open volumes (Standard)
tpv
Thin Provisioning Volume (TPV)
ftv
Flexible Tier Volume (FTV)
This parameter specifies the size of the ODX Buffer volume. Select whether terabytes (TB),
gigabytes (GB), or megabytes (MB) are used for the capacity. From 1GB to 1TB can be
specified.
Example: 1tb (1TB), 120gb (120GB), 1024mb (1024MB)
max
Specify this option to create an ODX Buffer volume with the same capacity as
the largest free capacity in the specified RAID group. This option can be specified only when the volume type is Standard (Open).
189
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > create odx-buffer-volume
-priority
Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the volume type of the ODX Buffer volume is
FTV. Specify the FTSP number to set the priority for allocating a Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP)
to the FTV that is to created. If this parameter is omitted or "auto" is specified, the FTSP is
automatically allocated.
-attention
Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the volume type of the ODX Buffer volume is
TPV or FTV. Specify the threshold (attention level) for the TPV or FTV. From 1% to 200% can
be specified.
If this parameter is omitted, the default value (10%) is set.
-encryption
Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the volume type of the ODX Buffer volume is
Open (Standard). Specify this parameter to encrypt a volume. If "enable" is specified, the
volume data that is specified is encrypted. If this parameter is omitted, "disable" is specified.
enable
The volume data is encrypted.
disable
No operation.
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the ODX Buffer volume that is named "VOL001" in a RAID group that is named
"RGP001". The volume size is 1GB:
CLI> create odx-buffer-volume -name VOL001 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size 1gb
The following example creates an encrypted ODX Buffer volume:
CLI> create odx-buffer-volume -name VOL001 -rg-name RGP001 -type standard -size 1tb -encryption enable
The following example creates the ODX Buffer volume called TPV1 in TPP#01. The volume type of the ODX
Buffer volume is TPV and the attention level is 80%:
CLI> create odx-buffer-volume -name TPV1 -pool-number 01 -type tpv -attention 80
The following example creates the ODX Buffer volume that is called FTV0002 and allocates the ODX Buffer
volume to FTRP#0. The volume type of the ODX Buffer volume is FTV and the attention level being set to
80%:
CLI> create odx-buffer-volume -type ftv -name FTV0002 -ftrp-number 0 -attention 80
190
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > set odx-buffer-volume
set odx-buffer-volume
This command changes the information of the ODX Buffer volume that is registered in the ETERNUS Disk
storage system.
■ Syntax
set odx-buffer-volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name}
[-name name] [-priority {ftsp_number|auto}] [-attention attention] [-encryption {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameters specifies the identifier of the ODX Buffer volume for which the settings are to
be changed. Only one volume can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9
Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new name for the ODX Buffer volume. For details about
the contents that can be entered, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). If omitted, the
alias name of the target volume is not changed.
-priority
Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the type of the ODX Buffer volume is FTV.
Specify the FTSP number to set the priority for allocating a Flexible Tier Sub Pool (FTSP) to the
target FTV.
If "auto" is input, the FTSP is automatically allocated. If omitted, the priority is not changed.
-attention
Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the type of the ODX Buffer volume is TPV or FTV.
Specify the threshold (attention level) for the TPV or FTV. From 1% to 200% can be specified. If
omitted, the threshold value is not changed.
-encryption Optional. This parameter is only enabled when the type of the ODX Buffer volume is Open
(Standard). Specify this parameter to encrypt a volume. If "enable" is specified, the data of the
specified ODX Buffer volume is encrypted. If this parameter is omitted, "disable" is specified.
enable
The data of the ODX Buffer volume is encrypted.
disable
No operation.
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the ODX Buffer volume name from "FTV0003" to "FTV_0003":
CLI> set odx-buffer-volume -volume-name FTV0003 -name FTV_0003
The following example changes the attention to "60%" and the priority for FTSP allocation for the ODX Buffer
volume #02 (FTV) to FTPS #3:
CLI> set odx-buffer-volume -volume-number 2 -priority 3 -attention 60
191
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.4 Volume Management > delete odx-buffer-volume
delete odx-buffer-volume
This command deletes an ODX Buffer volume that is registered in the ETERNUS Disk storage system.
• The RAID Migration function and the balancing TPV function for RAID groups must be stopped.
• Copy sessions for the ODX Buffer volume must be stopped.
■ Syntax
delete odx-buffer-volume {-volume-number volume_number | -volume-name volume_name }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the ODX Buffer volume that is to be deleted. Only one
volume can be specified. If a volume other than the ODX Buffer volume is specified, an error
occurs. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes an ODX Buffer volume that is named "ODTV001".
CLI> delete odx-buffer-volume -volume-name ODTV001
192
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5
Host Interface Management
This section explains the commands related to the management of the host interface.
The functions to manage the host interface are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Host identifiers (Host Alias)
Affinity group
Mapping (associating an affinity group with a host identifier)
Mapping (associating volumes with LUNs)
Host response
Host sense
Resetting group
iSCSI Ping
Port Groups
Host Groups
Host LU QoS
■ Host interface type
There are four host interface types; Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) and Internet Small
Computer System Interface (iSCSI), and Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE).
The speed for each type of host interface is as follows:
Host interface
Speed
Fibre Channel (FC)
16Gbit/s, 8Gbit/s, 4Gbit/s, 2Gbit/s
Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)
10Gbit/s
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
6Gbit/s, 3Gbit/s, 1.5Gbit/s
Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI)
10Gbit/s, 1Gbit/s, 100Mbit/s
■ Host Affinity Mode
There are two mapping methods to associate volumes with host LUNs. They should be separated and used
depending on whether Host Affinity Mode is enabled. Host Affinity Mode can be set to each host interface port
respectively. When Host Affinity Mode is enabled, it can associate an affinity group (the definition to associate
volumes with host LUNs) with the host HBA. When Host Affinity Mode is disabled, it does not require an
affinity group, and can associate volumes with the host LUNs from all the hosts. This mode can be set with the
"set fc-parameters" command.
■ Affinity group
If only Host Affinity Mode is enabled, affinity groups can be created. The affinity group is a definition to
associate volumes with host LUNs.
193
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
■ Mapping method
The following is an example when Host Affinity Mode is enabled:
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
set fc-parameters -port 000 -host-affinity enable
create raid-group -name r1 -level 1 -disks 006,007
create volume -name v -count 3 -rg-name r1 -type open -size 256mb
create affinity-group -name a1 -volume-name v0,v1,v2 -lun 0-2
create host-wwn-name -name h1 -wwn a00000e0d0100000
set host-affinity -host-name h1 -ag-name a1 -port 000
Procedure
1
Enable Host Affinity Mode of host interface port 000. (FC)
2
Create a RAID group named "r1".
3
Create volumes named "v0", "v1" and "v2" in the RAID group named "r1".
4
Create an affinity group named "a1", the mapping relation of volume named v0/v1/v2 and
LUN 0/1/2.
5
Register a host WWN named "h1" (FC).
6
Use mapping (host affinity mode) to set the relationship between host interface port 000,
the affinity group named "a1", and the host identifier named "h1".
End of procedure
The following is an example when Host Affinity Mode is disabled:
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
CLI>
set fc-parameters -port 000,001 -host-affinity disable
create raid-group -name r1 -level 1 -disks 006,007
create volume -name v -count 3 -rg-name r1 -type open -size 256mb
set mapping -volume-name v0,v1,v2 -lun 0-2 -port 000,001
Procedure
1
Disable the Host Affinity Mode (FC).
2
Create a RAID group named "r1".
3
Create volumes named "v0", "v1" and "v2" in the RAID group named "r1".
4
Use mapping to set the relationship between host interface ports 000 and 001, volumes v0,
v1, and v2, and LUNs 0, 1, and 2.
End of procedure
194
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.1
Host Interface Port Parameters
This section explains the commands related to setting up parameters for each host interface.
195
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fc-parameters
set fc-parameters
This command sets up the parameters to control each Fibre Channel (FC) host interface port. Host Affinity
Mode can be changed by using this command.
For a change of host port mode, refer to the "set host-port-mode" command.
■ Syntax
set fc-parameters -port {xyz|all }
[-host-affinity {enable | disable}] [-connect {loop | fabric}]
[-rate {auto|1g|2g|4g|8g|16g}]
[-loop-id-assign {auto-ascending | auto-descending | manual}]
[-loop-id loop_id] [-frame-size {512|1024|2048}]
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name]
[-reset-scope {initiator-lun | target-lun}] [-reserve-cancel {enable | disable}]
[-rec-line-no rec_line_no]
[-rec-transfer-sync {enable|disable}]
[-rec-transfer-stack {enable|disable}]
[-rec-transfer-consistency {enable|disable}]
[-rec-transfer-through {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the FC interface port number to be set up. Two or more parameters
can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,110
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the FC port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
all
All FC interface ports
-host-affinity
Optional. This parameter specifies the Host Affinity Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
The host affinity is the security capability of the system against host servers. The access from
hosts can be limited by enabling Host Affinity Mode. If the RA mode or Initiator mode is being
set for the specified ports, this parameter cannot be specified.
-connect
enable
Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
disable
Host Affinity Mode is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies the connection condition of the FC port. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. The default value is a loop (FC-AL) connection.
Specify "fabric" for 16Gbit/s direct connections.
196
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fc-parameters
-rate
loop
Loop connection (default)
fabric
Fabric connection
Optional. This parameter specifies the FC transfer rate. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
auto Auto negotiation
1g
1Gbit/s (Not supported)
2g
2Gbit/s
4g
4Gbit/s
8g
8Gbit/s
16g
16Gbit/s
Specify "auto", "2g", "4g", "8g", or "16g" for the transfer rate. Note that "1g" is not supported.
-loop-id-assign
Optional. This parameter specifies how to assign the loop ID. It is only applicable when
"-connect loop" is specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
auto-ascending
It automatically assigns ascending order.
auto-descending
It automatically assigns descending order.
manual
-loop-id
It assigns manually.
Optional. This parameter specifies the loop ID (a hexadecimal number). This is only applicable
when "-loop-id-assign manual" is specified. The range of values is between 0x00 and 0x7d (a
hexadecimal number). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-frame-size Optional. This parameter specifies the FC frame size. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. If the RA mode or Initiator mode is being set for the specified ports, this parameter
cannot be specified.
512
512 byte.
1024
1024 byte.
2048
2048 byte.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a host response identifier. Only one host response identifier
can be specified at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If the RA
mode or Initiator mode is being set for the specified ports, this parameter cannot be specified.
For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
197
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fc-parameters
-reset-scope Optional. This parameter specifies the range of reset action. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. If the RA, Initiator mode is set, this parameter cannot be specified.
initiator-lun Reset (Cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
target-lun
Reset (Cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
-reserve-cancel
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not SCSI reservation (persistent reservation) is
canceled when host interface ports are reset. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If
the RA mode is set for the specified port, this parameter cannot be specified.
enable
Reservations are canceled.
disable
Reservations are not canceled.
-rec-line-no Optional. This parameter specifies the REC line number. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
0 – 127
Specify the REC line number.
-rec-transfer-sync
Optional. This parameter specifies the synchronous mode for the copy transfer mode. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in synchronous transfer mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in synchronous transfer mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-stack
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous stack mode for the copy transfer mode. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous stack mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous stack mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-consistency
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous consistency mode for the copy transfer
mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only
when the RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous consistency mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous consistency mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-through
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous through mode for the copy transfer mode.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the
RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous through mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous through mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
198
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fc-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the parameters to control FC interface port #0 on CM#1 CA#1. Host Affinity
Mode is disabled:
CLI> set fc-parameters -port 110 -host-affinity disable
The following example sets up the parameters to control FC interface port #1 on CM#0 CA#0. The FC port is a
fabric connection:
CLI> set fc-parameters -port 001 -connect fabric
199
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fc-parameters
show fc-parameters
This command displays the parameters of each FC host interface port.
■ Syntax
show fc-parameters
■ Parameter
No parameters.
200
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fc-parameters
■ Output
# Port
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
CM#0 CA#0 Port#3
# Port Mode
CA
CA
RA
Initiator
# Connection
FC-AL
FC-AL
Fabric
Fabric
# Loop ID Assign
Manual(0x01)
Auto(Ascending)
Auto(Descending)
Manual(0x01)
# Transfer Rate
Auto Negotiation
4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s
# Frame Size
2048bytes
512bytes
-
-
# Host Affinity
Disable
Enable
-
-
# Host Response No.
# Host Response Name
5
HP05
-
-
-
# Reset Scope
I_T_L
I_T_L
-
-
# Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
Disable
Enable
-
-
# REC Line No.
-
-
127
-
# REC Transfer Mode Sync
-
-
Enable
-
# REC Transfer Mode Stack
-
-
Disable
-
# REC Transfer Mode Consistency -
-
Enable
-
# REC Transfer Mode Through
-
Disable
-
 Each host interface port number
 It shows if either CA or RA mode is set. The RA mode is used for Remote Equivalent Copy.
 Connection condition of each FC port (loop connection (FC-AL) or fabric connection)
 How to assign the loop ID (Loop ID is shown only when selecting manual.)
(Either ascending order or descending order is shown when selecting automatic.)
 FC transfer rate (Auto Negotiation / 1Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / 4Gbit/s / 8Gbit/s / 16Gbit/s)
 FC frame size (512bytes/1024bytes/2048bytes)
 Host affinity mode of each host interface port
 Host response number (The hyphen is shown when the host affinity mode is enabled.)
 Range of reset action I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) or T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
 It shows whether reservations are canceled or not when a host interface port is reset.
 REC line number (0 – 127)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Synchronous mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Asynchronous stack mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Asynchronous consistency mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
-
 Asynchronous through mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
201
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fc-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example shows the parameters displayed for each FC interface port.
In this example, each CA has 2 ports and each CM has 2 CAs:
CLI> show fc-parameters
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
RA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
-
I_T_L
Disable
-
127
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
RFCF-RA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
-
I_T_L
Enable
-
-
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
RA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
-
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
CA/RA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
0
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
I_T_L
Disable
1
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
Initiator
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
-
I_T_L
Enable
-
202
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fc-parameters
The following example shows the parameters displayed for each FC interface port.
In this example, each CA has 4 ports and each CM has 2 CAs:
CLI> show fc-parameters
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
RA
Fabric
Auto(Descending)
1Gbit/s
0
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#3
RA
Fabric
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
1
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#0 CA#1 Port#2
RFCF-RA
Fabric
Auto(Descending)
1Gbit/s
-
CM#0 CA#1 Port#3
RFCF-RA
Fabric
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
-
I_T_L
Enable
-
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
CA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Enable
-
-
-
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
I_T_L
Enable
-
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
CA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#1 CA#0 Port#2
CA
Fabric
Auto(Descending)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#1 CA#0 Port#3
CA
Fabric
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Enable
-
Port
Port Mode
Connection
Loop ID Assign
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency
REC Transfer Mode Through
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
CA
FC-AL
Manual(0x01)
Auto Negotiation
2048bytes
Enable
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
CA
FC-AL
Auto(Ascending)
1Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Disable
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#2
Initiatot
Fabric
Auto(Descending)
1Gbit/s
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#3
Initiator
Fabric
Manual(0x01)
1Gbit/s
-
203
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set sas-parameters
set sas-parameters
This command sets up the parameters of each SAS interface port. It can also be used to change Host Affinity
Mode.
■ Syntax
set sas-parameters -port {xyz|all} [-host-affinity {enable | disable}] [-rate {auto | 1.5g | 3g | 6g}
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name]
[-reset-scope {initiator-lun | target-lun}] [-reserve-cancel {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which SAS interface port is to be set.
Example: -port 000
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the SAS port
number.
Example: 110 (CM#1 ,CA1 , SAS port#0)
all
All SAS interface ports
-host-affinity
Optional. This parameter specifies Host Affinity Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. Host affinity is a security mechanism used to restrict access by a given host to only a
specific set of LUNs.
-rate
enable
Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
disable
Host Affinity Mode is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies the SAS transfer rate. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
auto Auto negotiation
1.5g
1.5Gbit/s
3g
3Gbit/s
6g
6Gbit/s
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier. Only one identifier can be
specified at any given time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to
"1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
204
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set sas-parameters
-reset-scope
Optional. This parameter specifies the range of reset action. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed.
initiator-lun Reset (Cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
target-lun
Reset (Cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
-reserve-cancel
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not reservations are canceled when a host
interface port is reset. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Reservations are canceled.
disable
Reservations are not canceled.
■ Example(s)
The following example disables Host Affinity Mode for SAS interface port#0 on CM#1 CA#0 :
CLI> set sas-parameters -port 100 -host-affinity disable
The following example sets the initiator LUN as the reset scope for SAS interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#1:
CLI> set sas-parameter -port 010 -reset-scope initiator-lun
205
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show sas-parameters
show sas-parameters
This command displays the parameters of each SAS host interface port.
■ Syntax
show sas-parameters
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Port
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
# Host Affinity
Disable
Enable
# Transfer Rate
3Gbit/s
3Gbit/s
# Host Response No.
# Host Response Name
5
HP05
6
HP06
# Reset Scope
I_T_L
I_T_L
# Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
Disable
Enable
-> Each host interface port number
-> Host affinity mode of each host interface port
-> SAS Transfer rate (Auto Negotiation / 1.5Gbit/s / 3Gbit/s / 6Gbit/s)
-> Host response number (The hyphen is shown when the host affinity mode is enabled.)
-> Range of reset action I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L:LUN) or T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
-> It shows whether reservations are canceled or not when a host interface port is reset.
206
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show sas-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the parameters of all SAS host interface ports:
CLI> show sas-parameters
Port
Host Affinity
Transfer Rate
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
Disable
3Gbit/s
5
HP05
T_L
Enable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
Disable
3Gbit/s
6
HP06
T_L
Enable
Port
Host Affinity
Transfer Rate
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
Disable
6bit/s
7
HP07
T_L
Enable
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
Disable
6Gbit/s
8
HP08
T_L
Enable
Port
Host Affinity
Transfer Rate
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
Disable
3Gbit/s
9
HP09
T_L
Enable
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
Disable
3Gbit/s
10
HP10
T_L
Enable
Port
Host Affinity
Transfer Rate
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
Disable
6Gbit/s
11
HP11
T_L
Enable
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
Disable
6Gbit/s
12
HP12
T_L
Enable
207
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
set iscsi-parameters
This command sets up the parameters of each iSCSI host interface port. It can also be used to change Host
Affinity Mode.
■ Syntax
set iscsi-parameters -port {xyz | all}
[-host-affinity {enable | disable}]
[-iscsi-name iscsi_name]
[-alias-name alias_name]
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name]
[-reset-scope {initiator-lun | target-lun}] [-reserve-cancel {enable | disable}]
[-ipv4-flag {enable | disable}] [-ip ip_address] [-netmask netmask] [-gateway gateway]
[-ipv6-flag {enable | disable}] [-link-local-ip ip_address] [-connect-ip {ip_address | auto}]
[-ipv6-gateway {gateway | auto}]
[-tcp-port tcp_port_number] [-tcp-window-scale tcp_window_scale]
[-congestion-control-option {enable | disable}]
[-isns-server-ip isns_server_ip] [-isns-server {enable | disable}]
[-isns-server-port isns_server_port_number]
[-chap {enable | disable}] [-chap-user chap_user_name]
[-header-digest {enable | disable}] [-data-digest {enable | disable}]
[-jumbo-frame {enable|disable}]
[-rate {auto|1gauto|10gauto|1gfull|100mfull}] [-cmdsn-count {unlimited|20|40|80|120|180}]
[-vlan-id {enable | disable}] [-vlan-id-value {0 - 4095}]
[-mtu mtu_size]
[-bandwidth bandwidth_limit]
[-chap-ca {enable | disable}]
[-chap-user-ca chap_user_name-ca]
[-chap-ra {enable | disable}]
[-chap-user-ra chap_user_name-ra]
[-rec-line-no rec-line-no]
[-rec-transfer-sync {enable|disable}] [-rec-transfer-stack {enable|disable}]
[-rec-transfer-consistency {enable|disable}] [-rec-transfer-through {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which iSCSI interface port is to be set. Multiple comma-separated
ports may be specified.
Example: -port 000,110
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the iSCSI port
number.
Example: 110 (CM#1, CA#1, iSCSI port#0)
all
All iSCSI interface ports
208
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-host-affinity
Optional. This parameter specifies the Host Affinity Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. Host affinity is a security mechanism used to restrict access by a given host to only a
specific set of LUNs. This parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
enable
Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
disable
Host Affinity Mode is disabled.
-iscsi-name Optional. This parameter specifies the iSCSI name for the specified host interface port. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified for iSCSI-RA,
which is only used for connecting older models.
• Up to 223 alphanumerical characters including, hyphen minus (-), full stop (.), and colon
(:), can be used to specify this parameter.
• "iqn." or "eui." must be added in front of the character string.
• Characters are not case-sensitive.
-alias-name Optional. This parameter specifies an alias to the iSCSI name that corresponds to the "-iscsiname" parameter. A maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters can be used. The available
characters are the ones that is shown in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19), except for
a comma (,). Specify consecutive double quotations (-alias-name "") for this parameter to
remove the alias name.
This name is not used for control purposes. It is only handled as a comment corresponding to
the iSCSI name.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier. Only one identifier can be
specified at any given time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to
"1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24). This parameter cannot be specified when the port is
set to the RA mode.
-reset-scope
Optional. This parameter specifies the range of reset action. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
initiator-lun Reset (Cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
target-lun
Reset (Cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
-reserve-cancel
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not reservations are canceled when a host
interface port is reset. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be
specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
enable
Reservations are canceled.
disable
Reservations are not canceled.
209
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-ipv4-flag
-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to use an IPv4 address. "disable" cannot be
specified for this parameter if "disable" is specified for the "-ipv6-flag" parameter.
enable
An IPv4 address is used.
disable
An IPv4 address is not used.
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address that is used to connect to an iSCSI network
using IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string). If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed.
Example: -ip 192.168.1.1
-netmask
Optional. This parameter specifies the subnet mask that is used to connect to an iSCSI network
using IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string). If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed.
Example: -netmask 255.255.255.0
-gateway
Optional. This parameter specifies the gateway server address using IPv4 standard notation (a
base 256 "d.d.d.d" string). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -gateway 10.1.0.250
-ipv6-flag
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to use an IPv6 address. "disable" cannot be
specified for this parameter if "disable" is specified for the "-ipv4-flag" parameter.
enable
An IPv6 address is used.
disable
An IPv6 address is not used.
-link-local-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies a link local address in IPv6 format. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. If IPv6 addresses are used and a link local address is not set when this
parameter is omitted, an IP address is automatically created and set based on the WWN of the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Example: -link-local-ip fe80::250
-connect-ip Optional. This parameter specifies a global address (including 6to4 addresses) or a unique
local address in IPv6 format. To delete an IP address that is already set, specify ALL0 (an IP
address with all zero bits).
Example: -connect-ip 2000:100::10:1:0:250
Example: -connect-ip ::
Example: -connect-ip auto
auto
The global address or the unique local address is automatically set in IPv6 format.
210
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-ipv6-gateway
Optional. This parameter specifies the gateway server address in IPv6 format. The types of IP
addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local
addresses, and unique local addresses. To delete an IP address that is already set, specify ALL0
(an IP address with all zero bits).
Example: -ipv6-gateway 10.1.0.250
Example: -ipv6-gateway 0::0
Example: -ipv6-gateway auto
auto
-tcp-port
The gateway IP address is automatically set in IPv6 format.
Optional. This parameter specifies TCP port number for iSCSI Target function. The default TCP
port number value is 3260.
0 – 28671
TCP port number
-tcp-window-scale
Optional. This parameter specifies the TCP window scale expansion.
This parameter cannot be specified for iSCSI-RA, which is only used for connecting older
models.
0 – 14
TCP Window scale
Note that expected performance may not be possible under a high
I/O load when "0" or "1" is specified. Even if "8" or more is specified for the value,
the operation is performed the same as when "7" is specified.
-congestion-control-option
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to use the TCP congestion control option.
enable
The TCP congestion control option enabled.
disable
The TCP congestion control option disabled.
-isns-server-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address of an iSNS server (*1) using IPv4 standard
notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 format. The types of IP addresses that can be
specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. IP addresses in IPv4 format can be specified when "enable" is specified for the
"-ipv4-flag" parameter. IP addresses in IPv6 format can be specified when "enable" is specified
for the "-ipv6-flag" parameter. The iSNS server must belong to the same iSCSI network as the
one to which the iSCSI interface port specified by the "-port" parameter belongs. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the
RA mode.
*1:
iSNS server: Internet Storage Name Server
Example: -isns-server-ip 10.1.1.12
Example: -isns-server-ip fe80::250
211
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-isns-server Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not an iSNS server is used. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
enable
An iSNS server is used.
disable
An iSNS server is not used.
-isns-server-port
Optional. This parameter specifies iSNS server port number. The default iSNS server port
number value is 3205. This parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
0 – 65535
-chap
-chap-user
iSNS server port number
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not CHAP authentication is used. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
enable
A CHAP authentication is used.
disable
A CHAP authentication is not used.
Optional. This parameter specifies the user name for CHAP authentication. It is only applicable
if CHAP authentication is used. Up to 255 alphanumerical characters and symbols for CA ports
and up to 63 alphanumerical characters and symbols for RA ports can be used. If this
parameter is specified, then the command displays a CHAP user password prompt. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. To delete a currently registered CHAP user name, specify
consecutive double quotations (-chap-user "") without any spaces.
-header-digest
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not the PDU header's CRC32C checksum is
validated. The initial value is set to disabled. Specify "disable" for the "-header-digest"
parameter to disable the Digest function. When "enable" is specified for the "-header-digest"
parameter, data transfer may fail. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This
parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
enable
PDU header is validated by CRC32C.
disable
PDU header is not validated.
-data-digest
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not the PDU data's CRC32C checksum is
validated. The initial value is set to disabled. Specify "disable" for the "-data-digest" parameter
to disable the Digest function. When "enable" is specified for the "-data-digest" parameter,
data transfer may fail. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot
be specified when the port is set to the RA mode.
enable
PDU data is validated by CRC32C.
disable
PDU data is not validated.
-jumbo-frame
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not jumbo frame can be specified. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. The initial value is set to disabled. This parameter cannot
be specified when the port is in RA mode or CA/RA auto mode.
enable
The jumbo frame is accepted.
disable
The jumbo frame is not accepted.
212
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-rate
Optional. This parameter specifies the connection speed of the iSCSI port. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. The default value is 1Gbit/s for 1Gbit/s iSCSI and iSCSI-RA (for
connecting older models) and 10Gbit/s for 10Gbit/s iSCSI.
For 1Gbit/s iSCSI
1gauto
1Gbit/s / Auto
For 1Gbit/s iSCSI CA/RA auto mode
For 10Gbit/s iSCSI
10gauto
10Gb/s / Auto
For 10Gbit/s iSCSI CA/RA auto mode
For iSCSI-RA (for connecting older models)
auto
Auto negotiation.
1gfull
1Gbit/s / Full Duplex
100mfull
100Mbit/s / Full Duplex
-cmdsn-count
Optional. For Advanced authority users, this parameter specifies the number of commands
that are simultaneously acceptable from a host. The initial value is set to unlimited. This
parameter cannot be specified when the port is set to the RA mode. Use this parameter only
when instructed by our service engineer. Standard and Monitor authority users cannot be
used.
unlimited The number of commands is not limited.
-vlan-id
20
Limited to a maximum of 20 commands.
40
Limited to a maximum of 40 commands.
80
Limited to a maximum of 80 commands.
120
Limited to a maximum of 120 commands.
180
Limited to a maximum of 180 commands.
Optional. This parameter specifies VLAN connection enable or disabled. When "enable" sets,
must be set the "-vlan-id-value" parameter. To set "enable", the "-vlan-id-value" parameter
must be set.
enable
VLAN connection enabled.
disable
VLAN connection disabled.
-vlan-id-value
Optional. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID value for connect to VLAN. When "-vlan-id
enable" is done, this parameter must be set. "-vlan-id" must be set to "enable" for this
parameter.
0 – 4095
VLAN ID value
213
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-mtu
Optional. Specify the MTU size when RA is used. The specified value is only valid when the RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode is used. The initial value is 1300. From 576 to 9000 can be specified
when IPv6 is disabled, from 1280 to 9000 can be specified when IPv6 is enabled, and from
1000 to 1400 (increments of 50) or 1438 can be specified when iSCSI-RA, which is only used for
connecting older models, is used. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-bandwidth Optional. This parameter specifies the bandwidth limit when iSCSI-RA, which is only used for
connecting older models, is used. The specified value is only valid for iSCSI-RA, which is only
used for connecting older models. The initial value is 400Mbit/s. The allowed range is from 10
to 400. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-chap-ca
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not CHAP authentication is used. If omitted, this
setting is not changed. This parameter is used for the CA setting of CA/RA dual-purpose ports.
enable
A CHAP authentication is used.
disable
A CHAP authentication is not used.
-chap-user-ca
Optional. This parameter specifies the user name for CHAP authentication. It is only applicable
if CHAP authentication is used. If omitted, this setting is not changed. Up to 255
alphanumerical characters and symbols can be used. When this parameter is specified, a
prompt that requires entering the CHAP user pass-word appears. To delete a currently
registered CHAP user name, specify consecutive double quotations (-chap-user "") without any
spaces. This parameter is used for the CA setting of CA/RA dual-purpose ports.
-chap-ra
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not CHAP authentication is used. this setting is
not changed. This parameter is used for the RA setting of CA/RA dual-purpose ports.
enable
A CHAP authentication is used.
disable
A CHAP authentication is not used.
-chap-user-ra
Optional. This parameter specifies the user name for CHAP authentication. It is only applicable
if CHAP authentication is used. If omitted, this setting is not changed. Up to 63 alphanumerical
characters and symbols can be used. When this parameter is specified, a prompt to require
entering CHAP user password. To delete a currently registered CHAP user name, specify the
consecutive double quotations (-chap-user "") without any spaces. This parameter is used for
the RA setting of CA/RA dual-purpose ports.
If this parameter is enabled, make sure the jumbo frame is supported by devices when
connected via iSCSI.
-rec-line-no Optional. This parameter specifies the REC line number. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
0 – 127
Specify the REC line number.
214
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
-rec-transfer-sync
Optional. This parameter specifies the synchronous mode for the copy transfer mode. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in synchronous transfer mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in synchronous transfer mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-stack
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous stack mode for the copy transfer mode. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous stack mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous stack mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-consistency
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous consistency mode for the copy transfer
mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only
when the RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous consistency mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous consistency mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
-rec-transfer-through
Optional. This parameter specifies the asynchronous through mode for the copy transfer mode.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can be specified only when the
RA mode or CA/RA auto mode is used.
enable
An REC in asynchronous through mode is permitted for the target CA port.
disable
An REC in asynchronous through mode is suppressed for the target CA port.
■ Example(s)
The following example disables Host Affinity Mode for iSCSI interface port#0 on CM#1 CA#0:
CLI> set iscsi-parameters -port 100 -host-affinity disable
The following example sets "192.168.1.1" for the IP address, "255.255.255.0" for the subnet mask, and
"user01" for the CHAP user name of iSCSI interface port#1 on CM#0 CA#1:
CLI> set iscsi-parameters -port 001 -ip 192.168.1.1 -netmask 255.255.255.0 -chap-user user01
Password :
Confirm Password :
The following example enables the jumbo frame function on all iSCSI interface ports:
CLI> set iscsi-parameters -port all -jumbo-frame enable
215
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set iscsi-parameters
The following example forcibly sets the iSCSI transfer rate of all the interface ports to 100Mbit/s full-duplex:
CLI> set iscsi-parameters -port all -rate 100mfull
The following example automatically sets the IP address and the gateway IP address to connect to iSCSI
interface port#1 on CM#0 CA#0:
CLI> set iscsi-parameters -port 001 -connect-ip auto -ipv6-gateway auto
Connect Address List :
0. Cancel
1. 2001:1:2:3:4:5:6:7
2. 2002:1:2:3:4:5:6:7
3. 2003:1:2:3:4:5:6:7
4. 2004:1:2:3:4:5:6:7
5. 2005:1:2:3:4:5:6:7
Please specify the number of an address to set up from a Connect Address List.
Input the number (0/1-5)> 2
IPv6 Gateway Address List :
0. Cancel
1. 2001:1000:120::1234:0
2. 2001:1000:120::1234:1111
3. 2001:1000:120::1234:6000
Please specify the number of an address to set up from an IPv6 Gateway Address List.
Input the number (0/1-3)> 2
216
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show iscsi-parameters
show iscsi-parameters
This command displays the parameters of each iSCSI host interface port.
■ Syntax
show iscsi-parameters
■ Parameter
No parameters.
217
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show iscsi-parameters
■ Output
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
# Port Mode
# Host Affinity
# iSCSI Name
# Alias Name
# Host Response No.
# Host Response Name
# Reset Scope
CA
Disable
iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus_dxl:000000
1
HP1
I_T_L
 I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) or T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
IPv4
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
IPv6
Link Local IP Address
Connect IP Address
IPv6 Gateway Address
MAC Address
TCP Port Number
TCP Window Size
TCP Congestion Control Option
iSNS Server
iSNS Server IP Address
iSNS Server Port Number
CHAP
CHAP User Name
Header Digest
Data Digest
Jumbo Frame
Disable
Enable
192.168.2.64
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
Enable
FE80::290:CCFF:FEA4:3A49
2001:DB8::8:800:200C:417A
FE80::2AA:FF:FE9A:21B8
01:02:03:04:05:06
3260
0
Disable
Disable
3205
Disable
user00
CRC32
OFF
Disable
#
Transfer Rate
1Gbit/s
#
Link Status
1Gbit/s Link Up
#
#
CmdSN Count
VLAN ID
#
#
#
MTU
Limit Band width
REC Line No.
Unlimited
Enable
4090
-
#
REC Transfer Mode Sync
-
#
REC Transfer Mode Stack
-
#
REC Transfer Mode Consistency -
#
REC Transfer Mode Through
 The above information shows whether or not the iSCSI jumbo frame is supported.
In this case, the jumbo frame is not accepted.
 The above information shows the transfer speed (Auto Negotiation / 100Mbit/s / 1Gbit/s / 10Gbit/s).
 The above information shows the actual transfer speed and "Link Up" or "Link Down" is displayed for the link status.
 REC line number (0 – 127)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Synchronous mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Asynchronous stack mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
 Asynchronous consistency mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
-
 Asynchronous through mode for the REC transfer mode (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
(A hyphen (-) is displayed in the field when the port mode is not the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode.)
218
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show iscsi-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the parameters of all the iSCSI interface ports:
CLI> show iscsi-parameters
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
Port Mode
CA
Host Affinity
Disable
iSCSI Name
iqn.2000-09.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus_dxl:000000
Alias Name
ALIAS00
Host Response No.
1
Host Response Name
HP0
Reset Scope
I_T_L
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset Disable
IPv4
Enable
IP Address
192.168.2.64
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
IPv6
Enable
Link Local IP Address
FE80::290:CCFF:FEA4:3A49
Connect IP Address
2001:DB8::8:800:200C:417A
IPv6 Gateway Address
FE80::2AA:FF:FE9A:21B8
MAC Address
01:02:03:04:05:06
TCP Port Number
3260
TCP Window Size
0
TCP Congestion Control Option Disable
iSNS Server
Disable
iSNS Server IP Address
iSNS Server Port Number
3205
CHAP
Disable
CHAP User Name
user00
Header Digest
CRC32
Data Digest
OFF
Jumbo Frame
Enable
Transfer Rate
Auto Negotiation
Link Status
1Gbit/s Link Up
CmdSN Count
80
VLAN ID
Enable
4090
MTU
Limit Band width
REC Line No.
REC Transfer Mode Sync
REC Transfer Mode Stack
REC Transfer Mode Consistency REC Transfer Mode Through
. . . continue
219
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fcoe-parameters
set fcoe-parameters
This command sets up the parameters to control each Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) host interface port.
Host Affinity Mode can be changed by using this command.
■ Syntax
set fcoe-parameters -port {xyz|all } [-host-affinity {enable|disable}] [-rate {10g}]
[-frame-size {512|1024|2048}] [-host-response-number host_response_number |
-host-response-name host_response_name] [-reset-scope {initiator-lun | target-lun}]
[-reserve-cancel {enable | disable}] [-fcf-vlan-id {enable | disable}] [-fcf-vlan-id-value {0 - 4095}]
[-fcf-fabric-name {enable | disable}] [-fcf-fabric-name-value WWN ]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the FCoE interface port number to be set up. Two or more parameters
can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,110
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the FCoE port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
all
All the FCoE interface ports
-host-affinity
Optional. This parameter specifies the Host Affinity Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
The host affinity is the security capability of the system against host servers. By enabling Host
Affinity Mode, it can limit the access from hosts. If the Initiator mode is being set for the
specified ports, this parameter cannot be specified.
-rate
enable
Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
disable
Host Affinity Mode is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies the FC transfer rate. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
10g
10Gbit/s
-frame-size Optional. This parameter specifies the FC frame size. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. If the RA mode or Initiator mode is being set for the specified ports, this parameter
cannot be specified.
512
512 byte.
1024
1024 byte.
2048
2048 byte.
220
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fcoe-parameters
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a host response identifier. Only one host response identifier
can be specified at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If the RA
mode or Initiator mode is being set for the specified ports, this parameter cannot be specified.
For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
-reset-scope Optional. This parameter specifies the range of reset action. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. If the RA, Initiator mode is set, this parameter cannot be specified.
initiator-lun Reset (Cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
target-lun
Reset (Cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
-reserve-cancel
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not SCSI reservation (persistent reservation) is
canceled when host interface ports are reset. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If
the RA mode is set for the specified port, this parameter cannot be specified.
-fcf-vlan-id
enable
Reservations are canceled.
disable
Reservations are not canceled.
Optional. This parameter specifies the FCF VLAN ID setting disable or enable. To set "enable",
the "-fcf-vlan-id_value" parameter must be set.
enable
FCF VLAN ID manual setting.
disable
FCF VLAN ID auto setting
-fcf-vlan-id-value
Optional. This parameter specifies the FCF VLAN ID for connection to FCF (FCoE switch). This
parameter must be set to set "-fcf-vlan-id" to "enable".
0 – 4095
FCF VLAN ID
-fcf-fabric-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the FCF Fabric Name (WWN) setting disable or enable. To
set "enable", the "-fcf-fabric-name-value" parameter must be set.
enable
Connection check for FCF using FCF Fabric Name (WWN).
disable
Connection check nothing.
-fcf-fabric-name-value
Optional. This parameter specifies the FCF Fabric Name for connect check to FCF (FCoE switch).
This parameter must be set to set "-fcf-fabric-name" to "enable".
WWN
WWN value (8 byte)
221
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set fcoe-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the parameters to control the FCoE interface port #0 on CM#1 CA#1. Host
Affinity Mode is disabled:
CLI> set fcoe-parameters -port 110 -host-affinity disable
The following example sets up the parameters to control the FCoE interface port #1 on CM#0 CA#0. The FC
frame size is 2048 bytes, FCF VLAN ID 55, FCF Fabric name 0001000100010001:
CLI> set fcoe-parameters -port 001 -frame-size 2048 -fcf-vlan-id enable -fcf-vlan-id-value 55
-fcf-fabric-name enable -fcf-fabric-name-value 0001000100010001
222
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fcoe-parameters
show fcoe-parameters
This command displays the parameters of each FCoE host interface port.
■ Syntax
show fcoe-parameters
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Port
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
CM#0 CA#0 Port#3
# Port Mode
CA
CA
CA
CA
# Transfer Rate
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
# Frame Size
2048bytes
512bytes
2048bytes
2048bytes
# Host Affinity
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
# Host Response No.
# Host Response Name
5
HP05
6
HP06
7
HP07
8
HP08
# Reset Scope
I_T_L
I_T_L
I_T_L
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
100
-> Each host interface port number
-> Each port mode (CA)
-> FC transfer rate (10Gbit/s)
-> FC frame size (512/1024/2048 byte)
-> Host affinity mode of each host interface port
-> Host response number (The hyphen is shown when the host affinity mode is enabled.)
-> Range of reset action I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN) or T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
# Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
# FCF VLAN ID
Disable
Disable
-> FCF VLAN ID Enable/Disable and setting value.
#FCF Fabric Name
Disable
-> FCF Fabric Name Enable/Disable and setting value.
Enable
Enable
55
Enable
Disable
0001000100010001
Enable
0002000200020002
223
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fcoe-parameters
■ Example(s)
The following example shows the parameters displayed for each FCoE interface port.
In this example, each CA has 2 ports and each CM has 2 CAs:
CLI> show fcoe-parameters
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
1
HP01
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
RA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
2
HP02
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
I_T_L
Disable
Enable
55
Enable
0001000100010001
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
100
Enable
0002000200020002
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
1024bytes
Disable
3
HP03
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
1024bytes
Disable
4
HP04
I_T_L
Enable
Disable
Disable
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
1024bytes
Disable
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
1024bytes
Enable
-
I_T_L
Disable
Enable
56
Enable
0003000300030003
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
101
Enable
0004000400040004
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
FCF Fabric Name
224
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show fcoe-parameters
The following example shows the parameters displayed for each FCoE interface port.
In this example, each CA has 4 ports and each CM has 2 CAs:
CLI> show fcoe-parameters
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Enable
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Enable
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
7
HP07
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#0 Port#3
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
8
HP08
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
55
Enable
0001000100010001
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
100
Enable
0002000200020002
CM#0 CA#1 Port#2
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
7
HP07
I_T_L
Disable
Enable
1000
Enable
0003000300030003
CM#0 CA#1 Port#3
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
8
HP08
I_T_L
Disable
Enable
2000
Enable
0004000400040004
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Enable
Disable
Disable
CM#1 CA#0 Port#2
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
CM#1 CA#0 Port#3
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
5
HP05
I_T_L
Disable
Disable
Disable
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
CA
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
-
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
CA
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
6
HP06
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
3000
Enable
0006000600060006
CM#1 CA#1 Port#2
Initiatot
10Gbit/s
2048bytes
Enable
I_T_L
Enable
3500
Enable
0007000700070007
CM#1 CA#1 Port#3
Initiator
10Gbit/s
512bytes
Disable
I_T_L
Enable
4010
Enable
0008000800080008
Port
Port Mode
Transfer Rate
Frame Size
Host Affinity
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
Reset Scope
Reserve Cancel at Chip Reset
FCF VLAN ID
FCF Fabric Name
FCF Fabric Name
I_T_L
Enable
Disable
Disable
I_T_L
Enable
Enable
2500
Enable
0005000500050005
225
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.2
Host Identifiers (Host Alias)
This section explains commands related to the definition of host identifiers.
226
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-wwn-name
create host-wwn-name
This command registers the host alias that corresponds to the WWN (World Wide Name) that identifies FC or
FCoE type HBAs (Host Bus Adapters). Only one WWN can be registered at the same time. The maximum
number of available definitions depends on the number of available host interface ports and the model type.
This enables the alias to be used instead of the numeric WWN when mapping volumes to host servers.
■ Syntax
create host-wwn-name -wwn wwn -name name
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name ]
[-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name |
-new-host-group-name new_host_group_name ]
■ Parameter
-wwn
This parameter specifies the WWN that corresponds to an HBA. The WWN is a 16-byte
hexadecimal number.
Example: -wwn 40000000abc80e38
-name
This parameter specifies the host WWN alias. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax"
(page 20).
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier. Two or more parameters
cannot be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page
24). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host group number or the host group name. Only one
host group can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax"
(page 26).
-new-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a new host group name. Only one host group can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
■ Example(s)
The following example registers host alias "HBA1". The WWN
is "e000000000e0e000" and host response #1 is assigned:
CLI> create host-wwn-name -wwn e000000000e0e000 -name HBA1 -host-response-number 1
227
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-wwn-name
The following example registers host alias "HBA1". The WWN is "e000000000e0e000". The registered host
alias is added to host group "HG1":
CLI> create host-wwn-name -wwn e000000000e0e000 -name HBA1 -host-group-name HG1
The following example registers host alias "HBA1". The WWN is "e000000000e0e000" and host response #1
is assigned. The registered host alias is added to host group "HG2", which is created in host response #1:
CLI> create host-wwn-name -wwn e000000000e0e000 -name HBA1 -host-response-number 1 -new-host-group-name HG2
228
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-wwn-name
set host-wwn-name
This command changes an existing FC or FCoE host identifier.
■ Syntax
set host-wwn-name {-host-number host_number | -host-name host_name } [-wwn wwn]
[-name name] [-host-response-number host_response_number |
-host-response-name host_response_name ]
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the FC or FCoE host identifier to be changed. If only the host response
identifier is being set, then two or more FC or FCoE host identifiers can be specified at the same
time. If not, then only one can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
-wwn
Optional. This parameter specifies the WWN to be changed. The WWN is a 16-byte
hexadecimal number. Only one parameter can be specified at the same time. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
Example: -wwn 40000000abc78856
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host WWN alias. Only one parameter can be specified at
the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier to be changed. One or more
parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response
Syntax" (page 24). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the host response definition of the host named "HBA1":
CLI> set host-wwn-name -host-name HBA1 -host-response-number 2
The following example changes the host response definition of the FC hosts with consecutively numbered
identifiers #1 – #10 at the same time:
CLI> set host-wwn-name -host-number 1-10 -host-response-number 5
The following example changes the host named "HBA1". The new alias is "HBA123":
CLI> set host-wwn-name -host-name HBA1 -name HBA123
229
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-wwn-name
delete host-wwn-name
This command deletes existing FC or FCoE host identifier(s).
■ Syntax
delete host-wwn-name {-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names }
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the FC or FCoE host identifiers to be deleted. One or more parameters
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the FC hosts with consecutively numbered identifiers #1-#3:
CLI> delete host-wwn-name -host-number 1-3
The following example only deletes the host named "HBA2":
CLI> delete host-wwn-name -host-name HBA2
230
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-wwn-names
show host-wwn-names
This command displays a list of all the existing FC or FCoE host identifiers.
■ Syntax
show host-wwn-names
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Host
# No. Name
#
1 HBA1
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
WWN
Host Response
No. Name
aabbccddeeff0011
1 HP01
C
D
E
Host number
Host WWN nickname
World-Wide-Name
Assigned the host response number
Assigned the host response name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the existing host identifiers:
CLI> show host-wwn-names
Host
WWN
Host Response
No. Name
No. Name
1 HBA1
aabbccddeeff0011
0 Default
2 HBA2
aabbccddeeff0012
1 HP01
3 HBA33
ffeeffeeffeeff03
1 HP01
231
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > discover host-wwn-names
discover host-wwn-names
This command displays a list of the host World-Wide-Names (WWNs) discovered from the specified FC and
FCoE interface ports.
■ Syntax
discover host-wwn-names [-port {xyz|all|all-fc|all-fcoe}]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the FC and FCoE interface ports to discover host WWN
names. Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma. If
omitted, all the FC and FCoE interface ports are selected.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: 110 (FC port#0 of CA#1 on CM#1)
all
All the FC/FCoE interface ports (default)
all-fc
All the FC interface ports
all-fcoe
All the FCoE interface ports
■ Output
# 0123456789abcdef (FC-CA)
A
A:
Discovered World-Wide-Name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the host WWNs discovered from all the FC and FCoE interface ports
on CM#0 (FC 4 ports model):
CLI> discover host-wwn-names -port 000,011
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (FC-CA)
aabbccddeeff0011
aabbccddeeff0012
ffeeffeeffeeff03
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1 (FCoE)
aabbccddeeff0011
aabbccddeeff0012
ffeeffeeffeeff03
232
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-sas-address
create host-sas-address
This command registers a host alias for the SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) address that is used to identify a SAS
type HBA (Host Bus Adapter). This alias can then be used instead of a numeric SAS address when mapping
volumes to hosts.
Only one SAS address can be specified at any given time. The maximum number of available definitions
depends on the number of available host interface ports and the model.
■ Syntax
create host-sas-address -address address -name name
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name ]
[-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name |
-new-host-group-name new_host_group_name ]
■ Parameter
-address
This parameter specifies the SAS address, which is a 16 character hexadecimal number that
corresponds to a HBA.
Example: -address 500605b000b5f344
-name
This parameter specifies the SAS address alias. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax"
(page 20).
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a host response identifier. Only one identifier can be
specified at any given time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24). If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host group identifier. The "-host-group-number" or the
"-host-group-name" parameter must be specified. Only one host group can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
-new-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a new host group name. Only one host group can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
■ Example(s)
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the HBA with SAS address "500605b000b5f344":
CLI> create host-sas-address -address 500605b000b5f344 -name HBA1
233
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-sas-address
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the HBA with SAS address "500605b000b5f344". The
registered host alias is added to host group "HG1":
CLI> create host-sas-address -address 500605b000b5f344 -name HBA1 -host-group-name HG1
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the HBA with SAS address "500605b000b5f344". The
registered host alias is added to host group "HG2", which is created in host response #1:
CLI> create host-sas-address -address 500605b000b5f344 -name HBA1 -host-response-number 1 -new-host-groupname HG2
234
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-sas-address
set host-sas-address
This command changes the details of an existing SAS host.
■ Syntax
set host-sas-address {-host-number host_number | -host-name host_name }
[-address address] [-name name] [-host-response-number host_response_number |
-host-response-name host_response_name ]
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the SAS host whose details are to be changed. If only
the host response identifier is being set, then one or more SAS host identifiers can be specified
at the same time. If not, then only one SAS host identifier can be specified. For details, refer to
"1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
-address
Optional. This parameter specifies the SAS address, which is a 16 character hexadecimal
number that corresponds to a HBA. Only one SAS address can be specified at any given time. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -address 500605b000b5f344
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new SAS address alias. Only one name can be specified
at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20). If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a host response identifier. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24). If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the host named "HBA1", assigning it host response number "2":
CLI> set host-sas-address -host-name HBA1 -host-response-number 2
The following example changes the host response definition of all the hosts with consecutively numbered
identifiers #1 to #10 at the same time:
CLI> set host-sas-address -host-number 1-10 -host-response-number 5
235
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-sas-address
The following example changes the host named "HBA1", assigning it the new alias "HBA123":
CLI> set host-sas-address -host-name HBA1 -name HBA123
236
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-sas-address
delete host-sas-address
This command deletes existing SAS host identifier(s).
■ Syntax
delete host-sas-address {-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names }
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies which SAS host identifiers are to be deleted. One or more identifiers
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the SAS hosts with consecutively numbered identifiers #1 – #3:
CLI> delete host-sas-address -host-number 1-3
The following example only deletes the host named "HBA2":
CLI> delete host-sas-address -host-name HBA2
237
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-sas-addresses
show host-sas-addresses
This command displays a list of all the SAS host identifiers in the system.
■ Syntax
show host-sas-addresses
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Host
# No. Name
#
1 HBA1
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
SAS Address
Host Response
No. Name
500605b000b5f344
1 HP001
C
D
E
Host number
Host nickname
SAS address
Assigned the host response number
Assigned the host response name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all registered SAS host identifiers:
CLI> show host-sas-addresses
Host
SAS Address
Host Response
No. Name
No. Name
1 HBA1
500605b000b5f344
1 HP001
2 HBA2
500605b000b5f348
1 HP001
3 HBA3
500605b000b5f34c
1 HP001
238
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > discover host-sas-addresses
discover host-sas-addresses
This command displays a list of the SAS addresses that have been discovered for the specified SAS interface
port(s).
■ Syntax
discover host-sas-addresses [-port {xyz|all}]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the SAS interface port(s) whose discovered host SAS
addresses are to be listed. If this parameter is omitted, the hosts discovered for all SAS host
interface ports are displayed.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the SAS port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-SAS Port#3
all
All the SAS interface ports (default)
■ Output
# 500605b000b5f144
A
A:
The discovered SAS Address
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the SAS Addresses discovered for all the SAS interface ports on both
CMs:
CLI> discover host-sas-addresses -port all
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
500605b000b5d8e4
500605b000b5e004
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
500605b000b5f144
500605b000b5f244
500605b000b5f344
239
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-iscsi-name
create host-iscsi-name
This command registers a host alias for the iSCSI (internet Small Computer System Interface) name and the IP
address used to identify an iSCSI-type HBA (Host Bus Adapter).
Only one iSCSI name can be specified at a time. The maximum number of available definitions depends on
the number of available host interface ports and the model. This command enables an alias to be used
instead of a long iSCSI name when mapping volumes to hosts.
The following three types of parameters are used for registering an iSCSI identifier:
1. -iscsi-name. This parameter is used to specify the name that corresponds to a HBA.
2. -alias-name. This parameter is used to specify an alias for the "-iscsi-name" parameter. This parameter is only used as a
user comment and is not used for control purposes.
3. -name. This parameter is used to specify the alias name. A unique name can be used.
■ Syntax
create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iscsi_name [-alias-name alias_name]
[-ip-version {ipv4 | ipv6}] [-ip ip_address] -name name [-chap-user chap_user]
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name]
[-cmdsn-count {unlimited | 20 | 40 | 80 | 120 | 180}]
[-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name |
-new-host-group-name new_host_group_name ]
■ Parameter
-iscsi-name This parameter specifies the iSCSI name that corresponds to a HBA.
• Between 4 and 223 alphanumerical characters, including hyphens (-), dots (.), and colons
(:), can be used.
• "iqn." or "eui." must be added in front of the character string.
• Characters are not case-sensitive.
-alias-name Optional. This parameter specifies an alias to the iSCSI name that corresponds to the "-iscsiname" parameter. A maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters can be used. Usable characters
are those given in the "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19) of the document overview.
Commas (,) cannot be used.
This name is not used for control purposes. It is only handled as a comment corresponding to
the iSCSI name.
-ip-version
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address format for the host that is to be registered. If
omitted, it is handled as if "ipv4" is specified.
ipv4
IPv4 format
ipv6
IPv6 format
240
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-iscsi-name
-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies an IP address for the corresponding HBA. Only IPv4 standard
notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) and IPv6 format are allowed for the character string. The
types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses),
link local addresses, and unique local addresses.
Example: -ip 192.168.1.10
Example: -ip fe80::223:4567:89ab:cdef
If omitted, any IP addresses are allowed. With the same iSCSI name designation, a specific IP
address is distinguished from the omitted one.
-name
This parameter specifies the iSCSI host alias. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax"
(page 20).
-chap-user
Optional. When using CHAP authentication, this parameter is used to specify a CHAP user
name. Up to 255 alphanumerical characters and symbols can be used. If this parameter is
specified, then the command displays a CHAP user password prompt.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a host response identifier. Only one identifier can be
specified at any given time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24). If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-cmdsn-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of commands that can be accepted at the same
time.
unlimited
Unlimited
20
20 commands
40
40 commands
80
80 commands
120
120 commands
180
180 commands
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host group identifier. The "-host-group-number" or the
"-host-group-name" parameter must be specified. Only one host group can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
-new-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a new host group name. Only one host group can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
241
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-iscsi-name
■ Example(s)
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the iSCSI host "iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft", and the
iSCSI ip address "10.111.10.1". The host response number #1 is also assigned:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -ip 10.111.10.1 -name
HBA1 -host-response-number 1
The following example registers an iSCSI host to both of the NICs that are in a single server. The iSCSI name is
the property of the server and is the same for both NICs. Each NIC has a different IP address. The following
commands register "HBA11" and "HBA12" as the respective alias for each NIC. When two iSCSI HBAs are used,
the iSCSI names will also be different:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -ip 10.1.0.1 -name HBA11
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -ip 10.1.1.1 -name HBA12
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the iSCSI host "iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft", and any IP
addresses are allowed by omitting the "-ip" parameter:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -name HBA1
In addition to the above example, IP addresses with the same iSCSI name can be specified as a different
alias:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -name HBA1
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -ip 10.1.0.1 -name HBA2
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the iSCSI host "iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft". The
registered host alias is added to host group "HG1":
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -name HBA1 -host-groupname HG1
The following example registers the alias "HBA1" for the iSCSI host "iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft". The
registered host alias is added to host group "HG2", which is created in host response #1:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv4 -name HBA1 -hostresponse-number 1 -new-host-group-name HG2
The following example registers alias "HBA1" for iSCSI host "iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft", and iSCSI IP address
"fe80::223:4567:89ab:cdef", which is using standard IPv6 notation. Host response number #1 is also
assigned:
CLI> create host-iscsi-name -iscsi-name iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft -ip-version ipv6 -ip
fe80::223:4567:89ab:cdef -name HBA1 -host-response-number 1
242
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-iscsi-name
set host-iscsi-name
This command changes the details of an existing iSCSI host.
■ Syntax
set host-iscsi-name {-host-number host_number | -host-name host_name } [-iscsi-name iscsi_name]
[-alias-name alias_name] [-ip-version {ipv4|ipv6}] [-ip ip_address] [-name name]
[-chap-user chap_user]
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name ]
[-cmdsn-count {unlimited | 20 | 40 | 80 | 120 | 180}]
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the host whose details are to be changed. If only the
host response identifier is being set, then one or more identifiers can be specified at the same
time. If not, then only one host identifier can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host
Syntax" (page 23).
-iscsi-name Optional. This parameter specifies the iSCSI name that corresponds to an HBA. Between 4 and
223 alphanumerical characters, including hyphens (-), dots (.), and colons (:), can be used. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Only one name can be specified at the same
time.
-alias-name Optional. This parameter specifies an alias to the iSCSI name that corresponds to the "-iscsiname" parameter. A maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters can be used. Usable characters
are those given in the "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19) of the document overview.
Commas (,) cannot be used. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Only one name can
be specified at the same time.
This name is not used for control purposes. It is only handled as a comment corresponding to
the iSCSI name.
-ip-version
Optional. This parameter specifies the format of the IP address after the setting change. If this
parameter is omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If this parameter is omitted and the
"-ip" parameter is specified, a parameter value that corresponds to the format of the IP address
that is specified for the "-ip" parameter is specified.
ipv4
IPv4 format
ipv6
IPv6 format
243
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-iscsi-name
-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address for the HBA using IPv4 standard notation (a
base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 format. This parameter can also change the IP address format
to a different format, such as from IPv4 to IPv6. The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique local
addresses. Only one IP address can be specified at any given time. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
Example: -ip 192.168.1.10
Example: -ip fe80::223:4567:89ab:cdef
When changing the access from a specific IP address to any IP address, delete relevant host
name using the "delete host-iscsi-name" command, and then create the same host name
again using the "create host-iscsi-name" command (without specifying the "-ip" parameter).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new iSCSI-host alias. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias
Name Syntax" (page 20). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Only one name can
be specified at the same time.
-chap-user
Optional. When using CHAP authentication, this parameter is used to specify a CHAP user
name. Up to 255 alphanumerical characters and some symbols can be used. If this parameter
is specified, then the command displays a CHAP user password prompt. To delete an existing
CHAP user name, specify the operand as "" (two consecutive double quotations with no
intervening space). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Only one user can be
specified at any given time.
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier. One or more identifiers can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24). If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-cmdsn-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of commands that can be accepted at the same
time.
unlimited
Unlimited
20
20 commands
40
40 commands
80
80 commands
120
120 commands
180
180 commands
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the host named "HBA21", assigning it the new IP address "10.1.1.2" (the IP
address format can also be changed to a different format, such as from IPv4 to IPv6):
CLI> set host-iscsi-name -host-name HBA21 -ip 10.1.1.2
244
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-iscsi-name
The following example changes the host named "HBA21", assigning it host response number "2":
CLI> set host-iscsi-name -host-name HBA21 -host-response-number 2
The following example changes the host response definition of all the hosts with consecutively numbered
identifiers #1-#10 at the same time:
CLI> set host-iscsi-name -host-number 1-10 -host-response-number 5
The following example changes the host named "HBA21". The new alias name is "HBA22" and the number of
commands that can be accepted at the same time is 80.
CLI> set host-iscsi-name -host-name HBA21 -name HBA22 -cmdsn-count 80
The following example changes the format of the 0 (almighty) IP address for a host to IPv6 (IP address for
HBA21 = 0.0.0.0):
CLI> set host-iscsi-name -host-name HBA21 -ip-version ipv6
245
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-iscsi-name
delete host-iscsi-name
This command deletes existing iSCSI host identifier(s).
■ Syntax
delete host-iscsi-name {-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names }
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the iSCSI host identifiers to be deleted. One or more identifiers can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the iSCSI hosts with consecutively numbered identifiers #1 - #3:
CLI> delete host-iscsi-name -host-number 1-3
The following example only deletes the host named "HBA2":
CLI> delete host-iscsi-name -host-name HBA2
246
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-iscsi-names
show host-iscsi-names
This command displays a list of the iSCSI hosts registered in the system. When iSCSI host identifiers are
specified, iSCSI host details of the specified iSCSI host identifiers are displayed:
■ Syntax
show host-iscsi-names [-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names ]
■ Parameter
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies which iSCSI host identifier(s) details are to be displayed.
One or more identifiers can be specified at the same time. If omitted, a summary list is
displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
■ Output
When the iSCSI host identifier parameter is omitted, then an iSCSI host summary list for all the iSCSI host
identifiers is displayed:
# Host
# No. Name
#
1 HBA-ISCSI-001
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
Host Response
No. Name
1 HP01
C
D
IP Address
iSCSI Name
CmdSN Count
192.168.1.1
E
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
F
80
G
Host number
Host nickname
Assigned the host response number
Assigned the host response name
IP address which corresponds to a HBA. If the IP address is not specified, the * mark is displayed. When the IP
address format is IPv4, "*(IPv4)" is displayed. When the IP address format is IPv6, "*(IPv6)" is displayed.
iSCSI host name which corresponds to a HBA
CmdSN Count
When iSCSI host identifiers are specified, iSCSI host details of the specified iSCSI host identifiers are
displayed:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Host No.
Host Name
iSCSI Name
Alias Name
IP Address
Chap User Name
Host Response No.
Host Response Name
CmdSN Count
1
HBA1
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
IQN-DXL1
10.1.1.1
User01
0
Default
Unlimited
247
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-iscsi-names
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the iSCSI host summary list:
"*" mark on IP Address stands for any IP addresses:
CLI>
Host
No.
1
2
3
show host-iscsi-names
Host Response
Name
No. Name
HBA-ISCSI-001
1 HP01
HBA-ISCSI-002
1 HP01
HBA-ISCSI-003
1 HP01
IP Address
iSCSI Name
CmdSN Count
192.168.1.1
2001:DB8::8:800:200C:417A
*(IPv6)
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
iqn.1993-05.com.microsoft
iqn.1993-05.com.microsoft
20
120
Unlimited
The following example displays the iSCSI host details of the host named "HBA1":
CLI> show host-iscsi-names -host-name HBA1
Host No.
1
Host Name
HBA1
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
Alias Name
IQN-DXL
IP Address
10.1.1.1
Chap User Name
User01
Host Response No.
1
Host Response Name
HP01
CmdSN Count
180
248
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > discover host-iscsi-names
discover host-iscsi-names
This command displays a list of the iSCSI host names that have been discovered for the specified iSCSI port(s).
The iSCSI parameters must be set up first using the "set-iscsi-parameters" command.
• An iSNS server definition must be set to use this command.
• Host Affinity Mode must be enabled to use this command.
• Even if an iSNS server is defined, expected IP addresses may not be displayed.
- If multiple hosts run one of the following host OSes, have an identical iSCSI name, and have different
IP addresses, the IP address of only one of the hosts can be displayed.
•Windows Server 2008 R2
•Windows Server 2008
•Windows Server 2003
•Solaris 10
• Host information cannot be displayed if the host is running Solaris 11.
■ Syntax
discover host-iscsi-names [-port {xyz|all}]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the iSCSI interface port(s) whose discovered host iSCSI
names are to be listed. One or more host interface ports can be specified at the same time. If
this parameter is omitted, the hosts that are discovered for all the iSCSI interface ports are
displayed.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the iSCSI port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-iSCSI Port#3
all
All the iSCSI interface ports (default)
■ Output
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
A
# Alias
# IQN-DXL1
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
C
IP Address
2001::123:1234:2309:0001
D
The target host interface port
The alias of the iSCSI host discovered
The discovered iSCSI name
The IP address of the discovered iSCSI host
249
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > discover host-iscsi-names
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the iSCSI hosts that are discovered for the iSCSI interface ports #0
and #1 on CM#0 CA#0:
CLI> discover host-iscsi-names -port 000,001
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
Alias
iSCSI Name
IQN-DXL1
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
IP Address
2001::123:1234:2309:0001
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
Alias
IQN-DXL1
IQN-DXL2
IP Address
10.17.31.234
2001::123:1234:2309:0102
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
iqn.1993-05.com.microsoft
250
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.3
Affinity Groups
This section explains the commands related to affinity groups. An affinity group is used to associate volumes
with LUNs (as seen from the host). It is only valid when Host Affinity Mode is enabled.
In GUI, "LUN group number" and "LUN group name" is respectively displayed instead of "affinity group
number" and "affinity group name".
251
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create affinity-group
create affinity-group
This command creates an affinity group. The maximum number of available groups depends on the number
of available host interface ports and the model type. Usually a LUN can be assigned a value from 0 – 255.
Note that this does not apply in the following environments:
• HP-UX host environment
From 0 – 1023 can be assigned. The resource combines two affinity groups.
• BS2000 environment
From 0 – 4095 can be assigned. The resource combines eight affinity groups.
■ Syntax
create affinity-group -name name
{-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names } -lun luns
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a name of the affinity group. Only one name can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to associate volumes with host LUNs. One or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax"
(page 22). If two or more LUNs are specified, these parameters must also be specified in the
same order.
Example:
-volume-number 10-12 -lun 1-3
-> The volume #10 and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume #11 and LUN 2 are pairs.
-> The volume #12 and LUN 3 are pairs.
-volume-name v1,v2 -lun 1-2
-> The volume named "v1" and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume named "v2" and LUN 2 are pairs.
-lun
This parameter specifies the LUNs to associate volumes with host LUNs. If two or more volumes
are specified, these parameters must be specified in the same order.
Example: -lun 0,1 -lun 0-10 -lun 0,1-10
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the affinity group named "AG001". It will associate volume #8 with LUN #10:
CLI> create affinity-group -name AG001 -volume-number 8 -lun 10
252
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create affinity-group
The following example creates the affinity group named "AG001". It will associate consecutive volumes #0 –
#10 with LUNs #0 – #10:
CLI> create affinity-group -name AG001 -volume-number 0-10 -lun 0-10
253
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set affinity-group
set affinity-group
This command changes an existing affinity group and can also be used to add a definition to the affinity
group.
■ Syntax
set affinity-group {-ag-number source_ag_number | -ag-name source_ag_name } [-name name]
[{-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names} {-lun luns}]
■ Parameter
-ag-number This parameter specifies the affinity group identifier to be changed. Only one affinity group
or
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group Syntax" (page 24).
-ag-name
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new affinity group name. Only one name can be
specified at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to add a definition to the specified
affinity group, and is paired with the "-lun" parameter. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to
"1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22). If two or more LUNs are specified, these parameters must
also be specified in the same order as the associated volumes. Any already assigned
definitions cannot be specified.
Example:
-volume-number 10-12 -lun 1-3
-> The volume #10 and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume #11 and LUN 2 are pairs.
-> The volume #12 and LUN 3 are pairs.
-volume-name v1,v2 -lun 1-2
-> The volume named "v1" and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume named "v2" and LUN 2 are pairs.
-lun
Optional. This parameter specifies LUNs to add a definition to the specified affinity group, and
is paired with volume identifiers. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If two or more
volume identifiers are specified, these parameters must be specified in the same order as the
associated LUNs. Any already assigned definitions cannot be specified.
Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma, a hyphen, or
both.
Example: -lun 0,1 -lun 0-10 -lun 1,6-8
254
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set affinity-group
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the affinity group named "AGP001". The new name is "NEW_AGP002":
CLI> set affinity-group -ag-name AGP001 -name NEW_AGP002
In the following example, the first command creates an affinity group that is named "AGP001". This affinity
group will contain a definition of the association of consecutive volumes #0 – #10 and consecutive LUNs #0
– #10. The second command will add other definitions to the affinity group (existing definitions will not
change). Consecutive volumes #101 – #105 will be associated with LUNs #11 – #15:
CLI> create affinity-group -name AGP001 -volume-number 0-10 -lun 0-10
CLI> set affinity-group -ag-name AGP001 -volume-number 101-105 -lun 11-15
255
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > copy affinity-group
copy affinity-group
This command copies information from one affinity group to another affinity group.
■ Syntax
copy affinity-group -name name
{-source-ag-number source_ag_number | -source-ag-name source_ag_name }
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the affinity group name of the target affinity group. Only one name
can be specified at the same time.
-source-ag-number
or
-source-ag-name
This parameter specifies the affinity group identifier which is the source of the copy. Only one
affinity group can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group
Syntax" (page 24).
■ Example(s)
The following example copies the definitions contained in the affinity group named "AG001", and creates a
new affinity group named "AG002" with those same definitions:
CLI> copy affinity-group -name AG002 -source-ag-name AG001
256
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete affinity-group
delete affinity-group
This command deletes the specified affinity group(s), or releases a definition from the specified affinity group.
■ Syntax
delete affinity-group {-ag-number ag_numbers | -ag-name ag_names } [-lun luns]
■ Parameter
-ag-number This parameter specifies the affinity group identifiers to be deleted. One or more parameters
or
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group Syntax" (page 24).
-ag-name
By specifying the "-lun" parameter, one or more definitions included in the affinity group can
be deleted. In this case, the Affinity group is not deleted.
-lun
Optional. This parameter specifies the LUNs that will be removed from the affinity group
definitions. Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma, a
hyphen or both. If omitted, the specified affinity groups are deleted.
Example: -lun 1,2 -lun 1-3 -lun 1-3.5
■ Example(s)
The following example only deletes affinity group #1:
CLI> delete affinity-group
-ag-number 1
The following example deletes affinity groups #1 and #2:
CLI> delete affinity-group
-ag-number 1,2
The following example only releases the definition of LUN #1 associated with the affinity group named
"AGP001":
CLI> delete affinity-group
-ag-name AGP001 -lun 1
The following example only releases the definitions of LUN #1 and #2 associated with the affinity groups
named "AGP001":
CLI> delete affinity-group
-ag-name AGP001 -lun 1,2
The following example respectively releases the definitions of LUN #1 and #2 that are associated with the
affinity group named "AGP001" and "AGP002":
CLI> delete affinity-group
-ag-name AGP001,AGP002 -lun 1,2
257
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show affinity-groups
show affinity-groups
This command displays a list of existing affinity groups. If there are no parameters specified, the summary list
of all the existing affinity groups is displayed. If affinity groups are specified, then the details of the associated
volumes and LUNs are displayed.
Multi-group volume information, which indicates whether or not the same volume is defined for multiple
affinity groups, is a status flag.
■ Syntax
show affinity-groups [-ag-number ag_numbers | -ag-name ag_names ]
■ Parameter
-ag-number
or
-ag-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the affinity group identifiers that will be displayed in
detail. One or more parameters can be specified. If omitted, a summary of all the existing
affinity groups will be displayed.
■ Output
When the parameter is specified, the details of the specified affinity group are displayed.
# Affinity Group
# No. Name
#
6 AG006
A
B
A:
B:
C:
Multi-Group
Volumes
Yes
C
Affinity group number
Affinity group name
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between affinity groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target affinity groups. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
258
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show affinity-groups
When the parameter is specified, the details of the specified affinity group are displayed.
# Affinity Group No.6
A
# Affinity Group Name
# LUN Volume
#
No. Name
#
3
3 VOLUME_003
C
D
E
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
AG006
B
Status
Size(MB) Multi-Group
Volume
32 No
G
H
Available
F
Affinity group number
Affinity group name
Logical unit number (LUN)
Serial number
Volume name
Volume status
Volume size
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between affinity groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target volumes. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the existing affinity groups. The multi-group volume
information flag is also displayed:
CLI> show affinity-groups
Affinity Group
Multi-Group
No. Name
Volumes
4 AG004
Yes
5 AG005
No
6 AG006
Yes
The following example displays details of affinity group #6:
CLI> show affinity-groups -ag-number 6
Affinity Group No.6
Affinity Group Name AG006
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
1
1 VOLUME_001
Available
2
2 VOLUME_002
Available
3
3 VOLUME_003
Available
4095
5 VOLUME_005
Available
Size(MB) Multi-Group
Volume
32 No
32 No
32 No
32 No
259
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.4
LUN Groups
This section explains the commands used for LUN group control. A LUN group is a definition of the association
between LUNs as seen from the host and volumes. LUN groups are only valid when the Host Affinity Mode is
enabled.
The definition of LUN groups is the same as affinity groups, except that the name is different.
260
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create lun-group
create lun-group
This command creates a LUN group. The maximum number of available groups depends on the number of
available host interface ports and the model type. Usually a LUN can be assigned a value from 0 – 255. Note
that this does not apply in the following environments:
• HP-UX host environment
From 0 – 1023 can be assigned. The resource combines two LUN groups.
• BS2000 environment
From 0 – 4095 can be assigned. The resource combines eight LUN groups.
■ Syntax
create lun-group -name name
{-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names } -lun luns
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a name of the LUN group. Only one name can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to associate volumes with host LUNs. One or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax"
(page 22). If two or more LUNs are specified, these parameters must be specified in the same
order.
Example:
-volume-number 10-12 -lun 1-3
-> The volume #10 and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume #11 and LUN 2 are pairs.
-> The volume #12 and LUN 3 are pairs.
-volume-name v1,v2 -lun 1-2
-> The volume named "v1" and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume named "v2" and LUN 2 are pairs.
-lun
This parameter specifies the host LUNs to associate volumes with. Two or more parameters can
be specified by separating them with a comma, a hyphen, or both. If two or more volumes are
specified, these parameters must be specified in the same order.
Example: -lun 0,1 -lun 0-10 -lun 0,1-10
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the LUN group named "AG001". It will associate volume #8 with LUN #10:
CLI> create lun-group -name AG001 -volume-number 8 -lun 10
261
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create lun-group
The following example creates the LUN group named "AG001". It will associate consecutive volumes #0-#10
with LUNs #0 – #10:
CLI> create lun-group -name AG001 -volume-number 0-10 -lun 0-10
262
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lun-group
set lun-group
This command changes an existing LUN group and can also be used to add a definition to the LUN group.
■ Syntax
set lun-group {-lg-number source_lg_number | -lg-name source_lg_name } [-name name]
[{-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names} {-lun luns}]
■ Parameter
-lg-number This parameter specifies the LUN group identifier to be changed. Only one LUN group can be
or
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group Syntax" (page 24).
-lg-name
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new LUN group name. Only one name can be specified
at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers to add a definition to the specified
LUN group, and is paired with the "-lun" parameter. One or more parameters can be specified
at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.9
Volume Syntax" (page 22). If two or more LUNs are specified, these parameters must also be
specified in the same order as the associated volumes. Any already assigned definitions
cannot be specified.
Example:
-volume-number 10-12 -lun 1-3
-> The volume #10 and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume #11 and LUN 2 are pairs.
-> The volume #12 and LUN 3 are pairs.
-volume-name v1,v2 -lun 1-2
-> The volume named "v1" and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume named "v2" and LUN 2 are pairs.
-lun
Optional. This parameter specifies LUNs to add a definition to the specified LUN group, and is
paired with volume identifiers. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. If two or more
volume identifiers are specified, these parameters must be specified in the same order as the
associated LUNs. Any already assigned definitions cannot be specified.
Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma, a hyphen, or
both.
Example: -lun 0,1 -lun 0-10 -lun 1,6-8
263
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lun-group
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the LUN group named "AGP001". The new name is "NEW_AGP002":
CLI> set lun-group -lg-name AGP001 -name NEW_AGP002
In the following example, the first command creates the LUN group named "AGP001". This LUN group will
contain a definition of the association of consecutive volumes #0 – #10 and consecutive LUNs #0 – #10. The
second command adds other definitions to the LUN group. Consecutive volumes #101 – #105 will be
associated with LUNs #11 – #15. Existing definitions are retained after the second command is executed.
Only the definitions specified in the second command are added:
CLI> create lun-group -name AGP001 -volume-number 0-10 -lun 0-10
CLI> set lun-group -lg-name AGP001 -volume-number 101-105 -lun 11-15
264
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > copy lun-group
copy lun-group
This command copies information from one LUN group to another LUN group.
■ Syntax
copy lun-group -name name
{-source-lg-number source_lg_number | -source-lg-name source_lg_name }
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the LUN group name of the target LUN group. Only one name can be
specified at the same time.
-source-lg-number
or
-source-lg-name
This parameter specifies the LUN group identifier which is the source of the copy. Only one LUN
group can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group Syntax"
(page 24).
■ Example(s)
The following example copies the definitions contained in the LUN group named "AG001", and creates a new
LUN group named "AG002" with those same definitions:
CLI> copy lun-group -name AG002 -source-lg-name AG001
265
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete lun-group
delete lun-group
This command deletes the specified LUN groups, or releases a definition from the specified LUN group.
■ Syntax
delete lun-group {-lg-number lg_numbers | -lg-name lg_names } [-lun luns]
■ Parameter
-lg-number
or
-lg-name
This parameter specifies the LUN group identifies to be deleted. One or more parameters
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group Syntax" (page
24). By specifying the "-lun" parameter, one or more definitions included in the LUN group
can be deleted. In this case, the LUN group is not deleted.
-lun
Optional. This parameter specifies the LUNs that will be removed from the LUN group
definitions. Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma, a
hyphen, or both. If omitted, the specified LUN groups are deleted.
Example: -lun 1,2 -lun 1-3 -lun 1-3,5
■ Example(s)
The following example only deletes LUN group #1:
CLI> delete lun-group
-lg-number 1
The following example deletes LUN groups #1 and #2:
CLI> delete lun-group
-lg-number 1,2
The following example only releases the definition of LUN #1 associated with the LUN group named
"AGP001":
CLI> delete lun-group
-lg-name AGP001 -lun 1
The following example only releases the definitions of LUN #1 and #2 associated with the LUN groups
named "AGP001":
CLI> delete lun-group
-lg-name AGP001 -lun 1,2
The following example respectively releases the definitions of LUN #1 and #2 that are associated with the
LUN group named "AGP001" and "AGP002":
CLI> delete lun-group
-lg-name AGP001,AGP002 -lun 1,2
266
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show lun-groups
show lun-groups
This command displays a list of existing LUN groups. If no parameters are specified, a summary list of all the
existing LUN groups is displayed. If LUN groups are specified, then the details of the associated volumes and
LUNs are displayed.
Multi-group volume information, which indicates whether or not the same volume is defined for multiple
LUN groups, is a status flag.
■ Syntax
show lun-groups [-lg-number lg_numbers | -lg-name lg_names ]
■ Parameter
-lg-number
or
-lg-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the LUN group identifiers that will be displayed in detail.
One or more parameters can be specified. If omitted, a summary of all the existing LUN
groups will be displayed.
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted, a summary of all the existing LUN groups is displayed.
# LUN Group
# No. Name
#
6 AG006
A
B
A:
B:
C:
Multi-Group
Volumes
Yes
C
LUN group number
LUN group name
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between LUN groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target LUN groups. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
267
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show lun-groups
When the parameter is specified, the details of the specified LUN group are displayed.
# LUN Group No.6
A
# LUN Group Name
AG006
B
# LUN Volume
#
No. Name
#
3
3 VOLUME_003
C
D
E
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
Status
Size(MB) Multi-Group
Volume
32 No
G
H
Available
F
LUN group number
LUN group name
Logical unit number (LUN)
Volume number
Volume name
Volume status
Volume size
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between LUN groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target volumes. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the existing LUN groups. In addition, the multi-group
volume information flag is displayed:
CLI> show lun-groups
LUN Group
Multi-Group
No. Name
Volumes
4 AG004
Yes
5 AG005
No
6 AG006
Yes
The following example displays details of LUN group #6:
CLI> show lun-groups -lg-number 6
LUN Group No.6
LUN Group Name AG006
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
1
1 VOLUME_001
Available
2
2 VOLUME_002
Available
3
3 VOLUME_003
Available
4095
5 VOLUME_005
Available
Size(MB) Multi-Group
Volume
32 No
32 No
32 No
32 No
268
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-path-state
set host-path-state
This command changes the access availability status from hosts that are associated to the specified host
interface port that is defined in the mapping and changes the path access status.
■ Syntax
set host-path-state -port xyz {-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names}
-state {offline|online}
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface port. Multiple parameters can be set by
separating each one by a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host
port number.
Example: 123 (host port#3 of CA#2 on CM#1)
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the identifier of the related host. Multiple parameters can be set at
the same time. For details on the contents that can be entered, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax"
(page 23).
When multiple parameters are set, the parameters must be set to correspond to the order of
the parameters that are specified for the "-port" parameter.
-state
This parameter specifies whether to allow access from the target host.
offline
Access is not allowed.
online
Access is allowed.
■ Example(s)
The following example does not all allow access for the host#0 of the host interface port (CM#1 CA#0
Port#0):
CLI> set host-path-state -port 100 -host-number 0 -state offline
269
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-path-state
show host-path-state
This command displays the path status (access availability status from the target host) that is defined in the
mapping of the associated host interface ports that are set.
■ Syntax
show host-path-state [-port {xyz|all}
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the host interface port that is to be displayed. Multiple
parameters can be set by separating each one by a comma. If omitted, the process is
performed as if all of the host interface ports are selected.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host
port number.
Example: 123 (host port#3 of CA#2 on CM#1)
all
All of the host interface ports (default)
■ Output
#
#
#
#
#
#
Port
CM#0
CM#0
CM#0
CM#0
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
CA#0
CA#0
CA#0
CA#0
Port#0
Port#0
Port#1
Port#1
Host
No.
0
1
0
1
B
Path State
Name
FC#0
FC#1
FC#0
FC#1
C
Online
Online
Online
Offline
D
Port number
Host number
Host name
Access availability status from the target host
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the status of all of the paths for all of the associated host interface ports:
CLI> show host-path-state
Port
Host
No. Name
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
0 FC#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
1 FC#1
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
0 FC#0
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
1 FC#1
Path State
Online
Online
Online
Offline
270
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-path-state
The following example displays the status of all of the paths associated with host interface port (CM#1 CA#0
Port#0):
CLI> show host-path-state port 100
Port
Host
No. Name
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
0 FC#0
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
1 FC#1
Path State
Online
Offline
271
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.5
Mapping (When Affinity Groups are Used)
This section explains the commands related to the mapping function that are available when Host Affinity
Mode is enabled or LUN groups, port groups, or host groups are used. An affinity group must be defined and
created before commands are used.
272
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-affinity
set host-affinity
This command associates affinity groups with host identifiers through an individual host interface port. This is
used to provide security from unauthorized access. The maximum number of host affinity definitions depends
on the number of available host interface ports and the system model.
■ Syntax
set host-affinity { -port xyz {-ag-number ag_numbers | -ag-name ag_names |
-lg-number lg_numbers | -lg-name lg_names }
{-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names } |
{ -port-group-number port_group_number | -port-group-name port_group_name }
{ -ag-number ag_number | -ag-name ag_name | -lg-number lg_number | -lg-name lg_name }
{ -host-group-number host_group_numbers | -host-group-name host_group_names |
-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name }
}
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface port to associate affinity groups with host servers.
Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
-ag-number This parameter specifies the affinity group identifiers that will be associated. One or more
or
parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group
-ag-name
Syntax" (page 24). If two or more affinity groups are specified, the associated host identifier
parameters must be specified in the same order.
-lg-number This parameter specifies the LUN group identifiers that will be associated. One or more
or
parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group
-lg-name
Syntax" (page 24). If two or more LUN groups are specified, the associated host identifier
parameters must be specified in the same order.
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the host identifiers to be associated. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23). If two or more
host identifiers are specified, the affinity group identifier parameters must be specified in the
same order.
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
This parameter specifies the port group number or the port group name. Only one port group
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group Syntax" (page 26)
273
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-affinity
-ag-number (When this parameter is used with the "-port-group-number" or the "-port-group-name"
or
parameter) Optional. This parameter specifies the affinity group identifiers that will be
-ag-name
associated. Only one parameter can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11
Affinity Group Syntax" (page 24).
-lg-number (When this parameter is used with the "-port-group-number" or the "-port-group-name"
or
parameter) Optional. This parameter specifies the LUN group identifiers that will be
-lg-name
associated. Only one parameter can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11
Affinity Group Syntax" (page 24).
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
or
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies the host group number, the host group name, the host response
number, or the host response name. Only one host group or host response can be specified at
the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24) and "1.2.16 Host
Group Syntax" (page 26).
R
No
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
—
*
No
No
No
No
No
No
* (*1)
-host-name
-host-number
-host-response-name
-ag-name (-lg-name)
-host-response-number
—
-host-group-name
R
-host-group-number
-ag-number (-lg-number)
-port-group-name
—
-port-group-number
-port
-ag-name
(-lg-name)
-port
Parameter
-ag-number
(-lg-number)
The available combinations for optional parameters are shown below.
-host-number
R
* (*1)
—
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-host-name
R
* (*1)
No
—
No
No
No
No
No
No
-port-group-number
No
*
No
No
—
No
*
*
-port-group-name
No
*
No
No
No
—
*
*
-host-group-number
No
*
No
No
*
—
No
No
No
-host-group-name
No
*
No
No
*
No
—
No
No
-host-response-number
No
* (*2)
No
No
*
No
No
—
No
-host-response-name
No
* (*2)
No
No
*
No
No
No
—
No: Not available R: Required Yes: Available (the options can be omitted) *: Either one of these options
must be specified
*1:
*2:
Both of the parameter combinations can be omitted when a path is set in a host affinity that is already set with a
port group. Therefore, an error occurs when an affinity group is not specified and the port group and the host group
are not associated with the host affinity setting.
The "-ag-number" parameter or the "-ag-name" parameter cannot be specified when LUN mapping is already set
with a port group and the host response for LUN mapping will be changed. Therefore, a host response must be
specified when an affinity group is not specified ("Default" must be specified to set the default host response).
274
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-affinity
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the relationship between host interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#0, affinity group #1,
and host #1:
CLI> set host-affinity -port 000 -ag-number 1 -host-number 1
The following example sets the relationship between host interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#1, affinity groups
#1 – #3, and host #1 – #3:
CLI> set host-affinity -port 100 -ag-number 1-3 -host-number 1-3
The following example sets the relationship between the same affinity group #1 and both host #1 and #2:
CLI> set host-affinity -port 000 -ag-number 1 -host-number 1,2
The following example sets the relationship between the host interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#1 and CA#0
Port#1 on CM#1, the affinity group named "AGP001", and the host named "HBA001":
CLI> set host-affinity -port 100,101 -ag-name AGP001 -host-name HBA001
(identical with the following)
CLI> set host-affinity -port 100 -ag-name AGP001 -host-name HBA001
CLI> set host-affinity -port 101 -ag-name AGP001 -host-name HBA001
The following example sets the relationship between the port group named "PG001", the affinity group
named "AG001", and the host group named "HG001":
CLI> set host-affinity -port-group-name PG001 -ag-name AG001 -host-group-name HG001
The following example sets the relationship between port group #1, all of the hosts, and affinity group #1.
Host response #1 is assigned to port group #1:
CLI> set host-affinity -port-group-number 1 -ag-number 1 -host-response-number 1
The following example sets the relationship between port group #1, all of the hosts, and LUN group #1. Host
response #1 is assigned to port group #1:
CLI> set host-affinity -port-group-number 1 -lg-number 1 -host-response-number 1
275
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > copy host-affinity
copy host-affinity
This command copies the mapping definition from one specified host interface port to another host interface
port. This command cannot be used when Host Affinity Mode is disabled for the host interface port.
■ Syntax
copy host-affinity -source-port {xyz} -destination-port {xyz|all}
■ Parameter
-source-port This parameter specifies the host interface port of the copy source. Only one parameter can be
specified at the same time.
Example-source-port 000
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
-destination-port
This parameter specifies the host interface ports of the copy destination. Two or more
parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -destination-port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
If "all" is selected, all of the host interface ports will be changed.
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
all
All the ports with the same type as the port that is specified using the "-source-port"
parameter.
■ Example(s)
The following example copies the host affinity definition from host interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#0 to host
interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#1:
CLI> copy host-affinity -source-port 000 -destination-port 100
The following example copies the host affinity definition from host interface CA#0 Port #0 on CM#0 to all the
host interface ports:
CLI> copy host-affinity -source-port 000 -destination-port all
276
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > release host-affinity
release host-affinity
This command releases the associated affinity groups from the host identifiers. This command cannot be used
when Host Affinity Mode is disabled for the host interface port.
■ Syntax
release host-affinity
{ -port {xyz [-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names ] | all} |
{-port-group-number port_group_number | -port-group-name port_group_name }
{-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name }
}
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface ports to be released. Two or more parameters can
be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
If this parameter is specified together with the host identifier, only the mapping definition for
the specified host identifiers is released.
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2- Host port#3
all
All the host interface ports
The settings for all of the ports are released. When this parameter is specified, the "host-number" or "-host-name" parameter cannot be specified.
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host identifiers that are released from the host identifiers of the specified host interface port. One or more parameters can be specified at the same
time. If omitted, all definitions of the specified host interface ports are released.
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
This parameter specifies the port group number or the port group name. Only one port group
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group Syntax" (page 26)
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
This parameter specifies the host group number or the host group name. Only one host group
can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26)
277
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > release host-affinity
—
—
No
No
-host-group-name
-port all
**
-host-group-number
—
-port-group-name
—
-port-group-number
-port all
-port xyz
-host-name
-port xyz
Parameter
-host-number
The available combinations for optional parameters are shown below.
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-host-number
R
No
—
No
No
No
No
No
-host-name
R
No
No
—
No
No
No
No
-port-group-number
No
No
No
No
—
No
**
-port-group-name
No
No
No
No
No
—
**
-host-group-number
No
No
No
No
*
—
No
-host-group-name
No
No
No
No
*
No
—
No: Not available R: Required Yes: Available (the options can be omitted) *: Either one of these options
must be specified **: Either one of these options is available
■ Example(s)
The following example releases all of the host affinity settings that have been made on host interface CA#0
Port #0 on CM#1:
CLI> release host-affinity
-port 100
The following example only releases the host affinity settings of the host named "H1" on CA#0 Port #1 on
CM#0:
CLI> release host-affinity
-port 001 -host-name H1
The following example releases the host affinity settings of the host named "H1" on host interface CA#1
Ports #0 and #1 on CM#0:
CLI> release host-affinity
-port 010,011 -host-name H1
The following example respectively releases the host affinity settings of the host named "H1" and "H2" on
CA#0 ports #0 and #1 on CM#1:
CLI> release host-affinity
-port 100,101 -host-name H1,H2
The following example respectively releases the host affinity settings of host #1 and #2 on the host interface
CA#0 Port#0 on CM#0:
CLI> release host-affinity
-port 000 -host-number 1,2
278
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-affinity
show host-affinity
This command displays a list of affinity groups associated with host identifiers. Individual affinity groups, port
groups, host groups, host identifiers or host interface ports can be specified. However, if the ports with Host
Affinity Mode "disabled" belong to a port group for which LUN mapping is set, the ports are displayed.
Multi-group volume information, which indicates whether or not the same volume is defined for multiple
affinity groups, is a status flag.
■ Syntax
show host-affinity [-port {xyz|all}]
[-ag-number ag_numbers | -ag-name ag_names | -lg-number lg_numbers | -lg-name lg_names]
[-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names ]
[-port-group-number port_group_number | -port-group-name port_group_name]
[-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the host interface ports to be narrowed down. Two or more
parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma. If omitted, all the host
interface ports are selected.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
all
All the host interface ports (default)
-ag-number Optional. This parameter specifies the affinity group identifiers to be narrowed down. One or
or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group
-ag-name
Syntax" (page 24). If omitted, this parameter is ignored.
-lg-number Optional. This parameter specifies the LUN group identifiers to be narrowed down. One or
or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.11 Affinity Group
-lg-name
Syntax" (page 24). If omitted, this parameter is ignored.
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host identifiers to be narrowed down. One or more
parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page
23). If omitted, this parameter is ignored.
279
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-affinity
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the port group identifiers to be narrowed down. One or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group
Syntax" (page 26). If omitted, this parameter is ignored.
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host group identifiers to be narrowed down. One or
more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group
Syntax" (page 26). If omitted, this parameter is ignored.
■ Output
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
# Host
# No. Name
#
1 HBA1
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
Volumes
4 AG004
No
C
D
E
Host number
Host name
Affinity group number or LUN group number
Affinity group name or LUN group name
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between affinity groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target affinity groups. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
When a host affinity is set for the port group (Host Affinity Mode is enabled)
# Port Group
# No. Name
#
2 pg01
A
B
# <Connection List>
#
Port
#
#
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
#
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
H
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
G:
H:
K:
Host Group
No. Name
1 FCoE
C
D
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
1 ag2
E
F
Multi-Group
Volumes
No
G
Host
No. Name
7 FCoE#2
I
J
Port group number
Port group name
Host group number
Host group name
Affinity group number or LUN group number
Affinity group name or LUN group name
It shows whether or not the same volume identifier is defined between affinity groups.
If the same definitions exist, "Yes" is displayed in target affinity groups. Otherwise, "No" is displayed.
Port number
Host number
Host name
280
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-affinity
When a host affinity is set for the port group (Host Affinity Mode is disabled)
# Port Group
# No. Name
#
4 FCoEPG#0
A
B
# <Port List>
#
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
G
#
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
Host Response
No. Name
250 Solaris MPxIO
C
D
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
10 ag2
E
F
Port group number
Port group name
Host response number
Host response name
Affinity group number or LUN group number
Affinity group name or LUN group name
Port number
■ Example(s)
The following example displays all of the existing mappings:
CLI> show host-affinity
Port Group
Host Group
No. Name
No. Name
1 pg1
0 hg
<Connection List>
Port
Host
No. Name
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
0 A
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
1 B
Port Group
No. Name
2 pg01
<Connection List>
Port
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
Port Group
No. Name
4 FCoEPG#0
<Port List>
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
Host Group
No. Name
1 FCoE
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
0 ag1
Multi-Group
Volumes
No
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
1 ag2
Multi-Group
Volumes
No
Host
No. Name
7 FCoE#2
Host Response
No. Name
250 Solaris MPxIO
Affinity/LUN Group
No. Name
10 ag2
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group
Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
8 FCoE#3
0 ag1
No
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
281
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-affinity
The following example displays all of the mappings that is set to host interface port CA#0 Port#1 on CM#0:
CLI> show host-affinity -port 001
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
1 HBA1
4 AG004
No
The following example only displays the mapping that is set to affinity group #4:
CLI> show host-affinity -ag-number 4
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
1 HBA1
4 AG004
No
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
1 HBA1
4 AG004
No
The following example only displays the mapping that is set to the host named "HBA5":
CLI> show host-affinity -host-name HBA5
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
5 HBA5
6 AG006
No
The following is an example of multi-group volumes. This means the same volume identifier in the "AG001"
affinity group is defined in the "AG002" affinity group. In this case, "Yes" is displayed for both the "AG001"
and "AG002" affinity groups. In other affinity groups, "No" is displayed:
CLI> show host-affinity -port 000
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
Host
Affinity/LUN Group Multi-Group
No. Name
No. Name
Volumes
1 HBA1
1 AG001
Yes
1 HBA2
2 AG002
Yes
1 HBA3
3 AG003
No
282
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.6
Mapping (When Host Affinity Mode is Not Used)
This section explains the commands for mapping when Host Affinity Mode is disabled. When Host Affinity
Mode is not enabled, mapping is the definition of the associated volumes with the host LUNs that applies for
all the connected host servers.
283
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set mapping
set mapping
This command is a mapping method that is available when Host Affinity Mode is disabled and associates the
specified volumes with the host LUNs (logical unit number) through the specified host interface port. Usually
a LUN can be assigned a value from 0-255. However, for an HP-UX host environment, a value from 0-511 can
be assigned. This command cannot used when the Host Affinity Mode of the host interface port is enabled.
■ Syntax
set mapping -port {xyz} {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
-lun luns
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface ports to be associated volumes with LUNs. Two or
more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies volumes identifiers to be associated. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22). If two or more
LUNs are specified, these parameters must be specified in the same order.
Example:
-volume-number 10-12 -lun 1-3
-> The volume #10 and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume #11 and LUN 2 are pairs.
-> The volume #12 and LUN 3 are pairs.
-volume-name v1,v2 -lun 1-2
-> The volume named "v1" and LUN 1 are pairs.
-> The volume named "v2" and LUN 2 are pairs.
-lun
This parameter specifies the LUNs to be associated. If two or more volumes are specified, these
parameters must be specified in the same order.
Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma, a hyphen, or
both.
Example: -lun 1,2 -lun 0-10 -lun 1,2-9
284
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set mapping
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the relationship between host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#1, the volume
named "VOL001", and LUN #1:
CLI> set mapping
-port 010 -volume-name VOL001 -lun 1
The following example sets the relationship between host interface port #0 and #1 on CM#0 CA#0, the
volume named "VOL002", and LUN #2:
CLI> set mapping
-port 000,001 -volume-name VOL002 -lun 2
(identical with the following)
CLI> set mapping -port 000 -volume-name VOL002 -lun 2
CLI> set mapping -port 001 -volume-name VOL002 -lun 2
The following example sets the relationship between host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#0, volumes #0 - #9,
and LUNs #0 – #9:
CLI> set mapping
-port 000 -volume-number 0-9 -lun 0-9
285
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > copy mapping
copy mapping
This command copies the mapping definition from one specified host interface port to others. This command
cannot be used when Host Affinity Mode for the host interface port is enabled.
■ Syntax
copy mapping -source-port {xyz} -destination-port {xyz|all}
■ Parameter
-source-port This parameter specifies the host interface port of the copy source. Only one parameter can be
specified at the same time.
Example: -source-port 000
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
-destination-port
This parameter specifies the host interface ports to be released. Two or more parameters can
be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -destination-port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
If "all" is selected, all of the host interface ports will be changed.
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
all
All the host interface ports
■ Example(s)
The following example copies the mapping definition from host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#0 to host
interface port #0 on CM#1 CA#0:
CLI> copy mapping -source-port 000 -destination-port 100
The following example copies the mapping definition from host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#0 to host
interface ports #0 and #1 on CM#1 CA#1:
CLI> copy mapping -source-port 000 -destination-port 110,111
286
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > release mapping
release mapping
This command releases the mapping definition of volumes with LUNs. This command cannot be used when
Host Affinity Mode for the host interface port is enabled.
■ Syntax
release mapping -port {xyz|all} [-lun luns]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface ports to be released. Two or more parameters can
be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
If the following LUN parameter is omitted, all mappings associated with the specified host
interface port are released. If this parameter is specified together with a LUN parameter, then
only the mapping definition of the host interface port and the specified LUN is released.
-lun
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host Port#3
all
All the host interface ports
Optional. This parameter specifies which specific LUN mappings will be released from the
mapping associations. Two or more parameters can be specified by separating them with a
comma, a hyphen or both. If omitted, all the definitions of the specified host interface port are
deleted.
Example: -lun 1,2 -lun 1-3 -lun 1-3.5
■ Example(s)
The following example releases all of the mapping that is set to host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#0:
CLI> release mapping -port 000
The following example only releases the mapping definition of LUN #2 that is set to host interface port #1 on
CM#1 CA#1:
CLI> release mapping -port 111 -lun 2
The following example releases all of the mappings that are set to host interface ports #0 and #1 on CM#1
CA#0:
CLI> release mapping -port 100,101
287
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > release mapping
The following example releases all the registered mappings:
CLI> release mapping -port all
288
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show mapping
show mapping
This command displays a list of the mapping definitions of the volumes with host LUNs. Individual volumes or
host interface ports can be specified. This command cannot be used when Host Affinity Mode for the host
interface port is enabled.
■ Syntax
show mapping [-port {xyz|all}] [-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names ]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the host interface ports. Two or more parameters can be
specified by separating them with a comma. If omitted, all the host interface ports are
displayed.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
all
All the host interface ports (default)
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers. One or more parameters can be
specified. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22). If omitted, all the volume
identifiers are displayed.
■ Output
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
A
B
# LUN Volume
Status
#
No. Name
# 100 1001 VOLUME_000000001 Available
C
D
E
F
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
Size(MB)
32
G
Host interface port
Host affinity mode
Logical unit number (LUN)
Volume number
Volume name
Volume status
Volume size
289
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show mapping
■ Example(s)
The following example displays all of the existing mappings:
CLI> show mapping
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
1
1 VOL001
Available
2
2 VOL002
Available
3
3 VOL003
Available
Size(MB)
32
32
32
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
3
1 VOL001
Available
4
2 VOL002
Available
5
3 VOL003
Available
Size(MB)
32
32
32
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1 (Host Affinity Mode Enable)
The following example only displays the mappings associated with the volume named "VOL001":
CLI> show mapping -volume-name VOL001
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
1
1 VOL001
Available
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
3
1 VOL001
Available
Size(MB)
32
Size(MB)
32
The following example displays the mappings associated with host interface port #0 on CM#0 CA#0:
CLI> show mapping -port 000
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 (Host Affinity Mode Disable)
LUN Volume
Status
No. Name
1
1 VOL001
Available
2
2 VOL002
Available
3
3 VOL003
Available
Size(MB)
32
32
32
290
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.7
Host Response
This section explains commands related to set up the host response.
291
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-response
set host-response
This command defines or changes host responses. The maximum number of available host response
definitions depends on the number of available host interface ports and the system model. Host response #0
is reserved by the system as a default. The name of default #0 cannot be changed. However, the values can be
modified.
When initially defining a host response, the host response number must be used and a host response name
must be set.
■ Syntax
set host-response
{-host-response-number host_response_number |
-host-response-name host_response_name }
[-status {busy | queue-full | unit-attention}]
[-inquiry-byte0 {7F | 20 | disable}] [-vpd {type1 | type1-3 | type3}]
[-conflict {enable | disable}] [-name name] [-timeout timeout]
[-version {5|4|3}] [-host-specific-mode {normal | aix | hp-ux | linux | bs2000}]
[-symmetric {active | passive}] [-lun-change {enable | disable}]
[-lun-expand {enable | disable}] [-vendor-unique-sense {enable|disable}]
[-iscsi-disc-rsp {all | port}]
[-tpgs {enable|disable}] [-tpg-referrals {enable|disable}] [-iscsi-rsv-range {port|system}]
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies the host response identifier. The system default is host response #0.
When a new host response is created, an unassigned host response number must be specified.
Check which host response numbers have been assigned using the "show host-response"
command. Only one parameter can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12
Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
Host responses with the following combination of numbers and names cannot be changed.
• No.0 Default
• No.250 Solaris MPxIO
• No.251 HP-UX
• No.252 AIX EMPD
• No.253 AIX VxVM
• No.254 AIX Single Path
• No.255 VS850/SVC
292
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-response
-status
Optional. This parameter specifies the response status responded to host servers. If omitted,
then this parameter is not changed.
busy
Busy status is responded to host servers.
queue-full
Queue-Full status is responded to host servers.
unit-attention
Unit-Attention status is responded to host servers. (default)
-inquiry-byte0
Optional. After the link between the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and the host is
established, the host sends an "Inquiry command" to check the status of the volumes for a
certain period of time. Specify the Byte-0 value of the Inquiry data to respond this Inquiry
command.
Byte-0 in the Inquiry data indicates the volume status. If omitted, this parameter is left
unchanged.
-vpd
-conflict
-name
7F
The Byte-0 value is converted to "0x7f (configuration is not available)" and
responded.
20
The Byte-0 value is converted to "0x20 (configuration is available, unformatted)"
and responded.
disable
The value that is specified in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is responded.
(default)
Optional. This parameter specifies the Vital Product Data (VPD) information type to respond to
the host. VPD information includes the device information (Vender ID, Product ID for each
model, volume number, etc.) for the volume. Type1 and Type3 indicate the data format. If
omitted, this parameter is left unchanged.
type1
type1
type1-3
type1-3
type3
type3 (default)
Optional. This parameter specifies the Reservation Conflict response corresponding to the Test
Unit Ready. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
This function is enabled.
disable
This function is disabled. (default)
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response name for this host response identifier. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified for host
response #0. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
This parameter is required when initially defining a host response.
-timeout
Optional. This parameter specifies the timeout value of a host command. The range of the
values is 10-255 and the unit for timeout is in seconds. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. The initial value is 25 seconds.
293
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-response
-version
Optional. This parameter specifies the data version of the Inquiry Standard. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
5
The data version is 5th. (default)
4
The data version is 4th.
3
The data version is 3rd.
-host-specific-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the host specific mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
• If the HP-UX mode is selected, up to 1024 mappings can be set.
• If the BS2000 mode is selected, up to 4096 mappings can be set.
• For all other modes, up to 256 mappings can be set.
-symmetric
normal
default (default)
aix
AIX Mode. Specify this to prevent the command initialization and performance
degradation.
hp-ux
HP-UX Mode. Specify this to recognize volumes with more than eight LUs.
linux
Linux Mode. Specify this to set up the operation environment for a Linux server.
bs2000
BS2000 Mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the method that is used to access a Logical Unit. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed.
active
ACTIVE/ACTIVE (default value for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
passive
ACTIVE-ACTIVE/PREFERRED-PATH (default value for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90
S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2)
-lun-change Optional. This parameter specifies if the notification is sent when the LUN mapping is
changed. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Notified
disable
Not notified (default)
-lun-expand
Optional. This parameter specifies if a notification is sent when the LUN capacity is changed. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Notified
disable
Not notified (default)
-vendor-unique-sense
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" the vendor
unique sense code to the host. Vendor Unique Sense indicates the unique sense code for each
vendor that is not coincident with host I/O. If omitted, this parameter is left unchanged.
enable
Notified
disable
Not notified (default)
294
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-response
-iscsi-disc-rsp
Optional. This parameter specifies the reply mode for the iSCSI Discovery request.
-tpgs
port
Replies to the server with only the information for the specified iSCSI ports (iSCSI
names and IP addresses).
all
Replies to the server with the information for all the iSCSI ports (iSCSI names and
IP addresses).
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable Target Port Group Support (TPGS) for
Inquiry Standard Data Version 5.
enable
TPGS is enabled (default).
disable
TPGS is disabled.
-tpg-referrals
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable the TPG Referrals. When "enable" is set
for this parameter, TPG Referrals are only performed when TPGS is enabled and Asymmetric/
Symmetric Logical Unit Access is set to ACTIVE/ACTIVE-PRFERRED_PATH.
Set "enable" for this parameter only for connection environments in which the ETERNUS Multipath Driver that is being used supports TPG Referrals.
enable
TPG Referrals is enabled.
disable
TPG Referrals is disabled (default).
-iscsi-rsv-range
Optional. This parameter specifies the reservation management range for iSCSI connections.
port
Each CA port
system
Each storage system
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the host response for host response #1. The new host response name is "winx". The response status is Busy status. The host command timeout is 30 seconds:
CLI> set host-response -host-response-number 1 -name win-x -status busy -timeout 30
295
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-response
delete host-response
This command deletes specified host response.
■ Syntax
delete host-response {
-host-response-number host_response_numbers |
-host-response-name host_response_names }
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies the host response identifiers to be deleted. Host response #0 is the
system default and it cannot be deleted. One or more parameters can be specified at the same
time. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
Host responses with the following combination of numbers and names cannot be deleted.
• No.0 Default
• No.250 Solaris MPxIO
• No.251 HP-UX
• No.252 AIX EMPD
• No.253 AIX VxVM
• No.254 AIX Single Path
• No.255 VS850/SVC
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the host responses with consecutively numbered identifiers #1 - #3:
CLI> delete host-response -host-response-number 1-3
The following example only deletes the host response named "HOSTRESP1":
CLI> delete host-response -host-response-name HOSTRESP1
296
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-response
show host-response
This command displays the host response settings. If the host response name or number is omitted, a
summary of all host responses is displayed. If the host response name or number is included as a parameter,
then the details of the specified host response parameters are displayed.
■ Syntax
show host-response
[-host-response-number host_response_numbers | -host-response-name host_response_names]
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier and detailed information of the
host response is displayed. One or more parameters can be specified. If omitted, a summary
list is displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
■ Output
The following details are displayed when a host response identifier is specified.
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Host Response No.5
Host Response Name
Byte-0 of Inquiry Response
Inquiry VPD ID Type
Inquiry Standard Data Version
Command Timeout Interval
Load Balance Response
Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready
Change Volume Mapping
Volume Capacity Expansion
Vendor Unique Sense Code
Host Specific Mode
Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access
iSCSI Discovery Reply Mode
TPGS Mode
TPG Referrals
iSCSI Reservation Range
am0005
Not conversion (Default)
Type1 + Type3 (Default)
Version 5 (Default)
25 (Default)
Unit Attention (Default)
Normal (Default)
Not report (Default)
Not report (Default)
Not report (Default)
Normal (Default)
ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH
Reply all port (Default)
Enable (Default)
Disable (Default)
Port (Default)
When no parameters are specified, a summary list is displayed.
# Host Response
# No. Name
1 am0001
A
B
A:
B:
Host response number
Host response name
297
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-response
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the details of host response #5:
CLI> show host-response -host-response-number 5
Host Response No.5
Host Response Name
Byte-0 of Inquiry Response
Inquiry VPD ID Type
Inquiry Standard Data Version
Command Timeout Interval
Load Balance Response
Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready
Change Volume Mapping
Volume Capacity Expansion
Vendor Unique Sense Code
Host Specific Mode
Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access
iSCSI Discovery Reply Mode
TPGS Mode
TPG Referrals
iSCSI Reservation Range
am0005
Not conversion (Default)
Type1 + Type3 (Default)
Version 5 (Default)
25 (Default)
Unit Attention (Default)
Normal (Default)
Not report (Default)
Not report (Default)
Not report (Default)
Normal (Default)
ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH
Reply target port only
Enable (Default)
Disable (Default)
Port (Default)
The following example lists a summary of all the existing host responses:
CLI> show host-response
Host Response
No. Name
1 am0001000111
2 am0002
3 am0003
298
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.8
Host Sense Conversion
This section explains the commands related to host sense conversion.
299
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-sense
set host-sense
This parameter specifies the preset host sense corresponding to the specific host operating system.
■ Syntax
set host-sense
{-host-response-number host_response_numbers | -host-response-name host_response_names}
-preset {no-conversion | linux | windows|custom}
[-original-sk original_sk] [-original-asc original_asc] [-original-ascq original_ascq]
[-converted-sk converted_sk] [-converted-asc converted_asc]
[-converted-ascq converted_ascq]
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies the host response identifier that is to be used to set the host sense.
One or more parameters can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax"
(page 24).
-preset
This parameter specifies the preset host sense corresponding to the specific host operating
system.
no-conversion
It will revert to the default host sense value (Default).
linux
Linux host (when Linux GRMPD is not in use).
windows
Windows host (when GR/ETERNUS MPD and its device driver are not in use).
custom
Custom setting. The following sense parameters can be specified only when this
setting is selected.
-original-sk Optional. This parameter specifies the sense key that corresponds to the sense of the
conversion source. This parameter can only be specified when "-preset custom" is selected. This
parameter must be specified by using either a hexadecimal number or the wildcard (*).
-original-asc
Optional. This parameter specifies the sense code, which is an additional sense code, that
corresponds to the sense of the conversion source. This parameter can only be specified when
"-preset custom" is selected. This parameter must be specified by using either a hexadecimal
number or the wildcard (*).
-original-ascq
Optional. This parameter specifies the sub sense code, which is an additional sense code
qualifier that corresponds to the sense of the conversion source. This parameter can only be
specified when "-preset custom" is selected. This parameter must be specified by using either a
hexadecimal number or the wildcard (*).
300
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-sense
-converted-sk
Optional. This parameter specifies the sense key that corresponds to the sense of the
conversion destination. This parameter can only be specified when "-preset custom" is
selected. This parameter must be specified by using either a hexadecimal number or the
wildcard (*).
-converted-asc
Optional. This parameter specifies the sense code, which is an additional sense code that
corresponds to the sense of the conversion destination, This parameter can only be specified
when "-preset custom" is selected. This parameter must be specified by using either a
hexadecimal number or the wildcard (*).
-converted-ascq
Optional. This parameter specifies the sub sense code, which is an additional sense code
qualifier that corresponds to the sense of the conversion destination. This parameter can only
be specified when "-preset custom" is selected. This parameter must be specified by using
either a hexadecimal number or the wildcard (*).
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the preset host sense for ‘Linux’ to host response #1:
CLI> set host-sense -host-response-number 1 -preset linux
In the following example, the host sense that is set to host response #1 reverts to the default value:
CLI> set host-sense -host-response-number 1 -preset no-conversion
301
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-sense
delete host-sense
This command deletes (clears) the specified host sense.
■ Syntax
delete host-sense
{-host-response-number host_response_numbers | -host-response-name host_response_names }
-sense-number sense_numbers
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies host response identifiers to which the host sense to be deleted
belongs. The range is 1 to 127. One or more parameters can be specified at the same time. For
details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
-sense-number
This parameter specifies the host sense number that is to be deleted. The host sense number is
automatically registered in the system when the host sense conversion information is created.
Between 1 to 8 can be specified. The host sense number can be checked by using the "show
host-sense" command. One or more parameters can be specified at the same time.
■ Example(s)
The following example respectively deletes the host sense #1 corresponding to the host response #1 to #3:
CLI> delete host-sense -host-response-number 1-3 -sense-number 1
302
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-sense
show host-sense
This command displays a list of the host responses and the associated sense code conversion information.
Only preset information can be shown.
■ Syntax
show host-sense
{-host-response-number host_response_numbers | -host-response-name host_response_names}
■ Parameter
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
This parameter specifies the host response identifiers whose entries are to be displayed. One
or more host response identifiers can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12
Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
■ Output
# Host Response
# No. Name
#
6 fj0006
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
Sense
No.
1
C
Original
Sense Code
04/**/**
D E F
Converted
Sense Code
06/**/**
(Linux)
G H I
J
Host response number
Host response name
Host sense number
Original sense key
Original sense code (Additional sense code)
Original sub sense code (Additional sense code qualifier)
Converted sense key
Converted sense code (Additional sense code)
Converted sub sense code (Additional sense code qualifier)
Preset function name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the host responses and associated sense conversions:
CLI> show host-sense -host-response-number 1,2
Host Response
Sense Original
Converted
No. Name
No.
Sense Code Sense Code
1 fj0001
1
04/**/**
06/**/**
(Linux)
2 fj0002
1
03/**/**
04/**/**
(Windows)
303
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.9
Reset Group for Host Interface Port
This section explains the commands related to defining the reset groups for each host interface port.
304
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set ca-reset-group
set ca-reset-group
This command sets a reset group of host interface ports (Channel Adapter on controller module). The same
number of reset groups as the host interface ports that are installed in the storage system can be set as the
maximum. One reset group can be set at a time. In the initial state, all host interface ports are set in one reset
group.
■ Syntax
set ca-reset-group [-group xyz]
■ Parameter
-group
This parameter sets up a combination of host interface ports that will be reset as a group. Two
or more host interface ports can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -group 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
If a host interface port in the specified group is already set for another group, this port is
released from the group and reconfigured in the specified group.
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the reset groups. The reset groups are configured with CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 and
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1:
CLI> set ca-reset-group -group 000,001
305
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show ca-reset-group
show ca-reset-group
This command displays a list of the host interface ports that are in each of the reset groups. The number of
reset groups is dependent on the number of host interface ports available.
■ Syntax
show ca-reset-group
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
The following example displays a system that has 4 host interface ports:
#
# Reset Group
# Reset Group
A:
Port
000 001 002 003
100 101 102 103
A
A
A
A
Host interface port #0 in the reset group
■ Example(s)
The following example shows each reset group configured with four host interface ports:
CLI> show ca-reset-group
Port
Reset Group 000 001 002
Reset Group 010 011 012
Reset Group 100 101 102
Reset Group 110 111 112
003
013
103
113
The following example shows a reset group that is configured with 16 host interface ports:
CLI> show ca-reset-group
Port
Reset Group 000 001 002 003 010 011 012 013 100 101
102 103 110 111 112 113
306
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.10
Ping Command for iSCSI hosts
This section explains the ping related commands used in an iSCSI environment.
307
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > test iscsi-ping
test iscsi-ping
This command issues a ping command from the specified host interface port to the specified iSCSI host.
• When a response is successfully returned for the ping command, "Success" is displayed.
• When a response is not returned for the ping command, "Failure" is displayed and this CLI command
abnormally terminates with an error message.
• Note that when a response is not returned for a connection between the host and the specified port fails
to link up, only "Failure" is displayed. No error messages are displayed.
■ Syntax
test iscsi-ping -port xyz -ip iscsi_host [-count count]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the source host interface port used to issue the ping command. Only
one host interface port can be specified at any given time.
Example: -port 000
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the iSCSI port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Host port#3
-ip
This parameter specifies the IP address of the target iSCSI host using IPv4 standard notation (a
base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 format. The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are
global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique local addresses.
Only one iSCSI host can be specified at any given time.
-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of times that the ping command is to be issued.
Any value between 1 and 10 can be specified. If omitted, this parameter value defaults to 1.
■ Example(s)
The following example causes two pings to be issued from port#0 on CM#1 CA#0 to the iSCSI host
192.168.2.10. In this case, a "Success" string is displayed. This result indicates that a normal response was
received to both pings.
CLI> test iscsi-ping -port 100 -ip 192.168.2.10 -count 2
Success
The following example uses the same command as the previous example, but in this case, a "Failure" string
is displayed. This result indicates that a normal response was not received for at least one of the pings.
CLI> test iscsi-ping -port 100 -ip 192.168.2.10 -count 2
Failure
308
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > test iscsi-ping
The following example sends three pings from port#0 on CM#1 CA#0 to iSCSI host
2001:0db8:0020:0003:1000:0100:0020:0003. In this case, a "Success" string is displayed. This result
indicates that a normal response was received for all of the pings.
CLI> test iscsi-ping -port 100 -ip 2001:0db8:0020:0003:1000:0100:0020:0003 -count 3
Success
309
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.11
Port Groups
This section explains the commands related to port groups. The port group is used to control multiple ports as
a group.
310
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create port-group
create port-group
This command creates port groups.
• A port group can be created even when the same ports that belong to an existing port group are to be
specified for the port group.
• A port group can be created even when mapping is already set for all of the specified ports that are in
different groups.
• A port group can be created even when the specified port does not belong to a port group and the host
affinity (LUN mapping) is already set for the port.
• Ports with host affinity "disabled" cannot belong to a port group.
• Up to eight ports can be set for a single port group.
■ Syntax
create port-group -name name {-port xyz }
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a name of the port group. Only one name can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-port
This parameter specifies the host interface port. Two or more parameters can be specified by
separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000, 011
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the port group named "PG0001". The following example sets the parameters
to control FC interface port #1 on CM#0 CA#0 and FC interface port #1 on CM#0 CA#1:
CLI> create port-group -name PG0001 -port 001,011
311
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set port-group
set port-group
This command changes the port group name, adds ports to port groups, and deletes ports from port groups.
• A port can be added to a port group even when this makes the ports that belong to this port group
identical to the ports of another existing port group.
• A port can be added even when mapping is already set for the port in a different group.
• A port can be added to or deleted from a port group for which mapping is set.
• When a port is deleted from a port group, the mapping information for the port is deleted (the
information when the port belongs to the port group is not retained).
• A port cannot be deleted from a port group when no ports belong to the port group after the port is
deleted.
• After a port is deleted from a port group, the port group might not have any logical paths. In this case, the
mapping setting between port groups must be also deleted.
• Up to eight ports can be set for a single port group.
■ Syntax
set port-group { -port-group-number port_group_number | -port-group-name port_group_name }
[-name port_group_name] [-add-port ports | -release-port ports]
■ Parameter
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
This parameter specifies the port group identifier to be changed. Only one port group can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group Syntax" (page 26).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new port group name. Only one name can be specified
at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4
Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-add-port
or
-release-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the host interface port that is to be added or deleted. Two or
more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -add-port 000, 011
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
312
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set port-group
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the port group named "PG001". The new name is "NEW_PG002":
CLI> set port-group -port-group-name PG001 -name NEW_PG002
The first command will create the port group named "PG0001". This port group will contain FC interface port
#1 on CM#0 CA#0 and FC interface port #1 on CM#0 CA#1.
The second command will add other definitions to the port group named "PG0001". FC interface port #1 on
CM#1 CA#0 and FC interface port #1 on CM#1 CA#1 are added to the port group:
CLI> create port-group -port-group-name PG0001 -port 001,011
CLI> set port-group -port-group-name PG0001 -add-port 101,111
313
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete port-group
delete port-group
This command deletes the specified port group(s).
Port groups for which mapping is set cannot be deleted.
■ Syntax
delete port-group {-port-group-number port_group_numbers | -port-group-name port_group_names}
■ Parameter
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
This parameter specifies the port group identifiers to be deleted. One or more parameters can
be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group Syntax" (page 26).
■ Example(s)
The following example only deletes port group #1:
CLI> delete port-group
-port-group-number 1
The following example deletes port group # 1 and port groups #3 to #5:
CLI> delete port-group
-port-group-number 1,3-5
314
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show port-groups
show port-groups
This command displays a list of existing affinity groups.
■ Syntax
show port-groups
[-port-group-number port_group_numbers | -port-group-name port_group_names | -all]
■ Parameter
-port-group-number
or
-port-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the port group identifiers that will be displayed in detail.
One or more parameters can be specified. If omitted, a summary of all the existing port groups
will be displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.15 Port Group Syntax" (page 26).
-all
Optional. When this parameter is specified, the details of all the existing port groups are
displayed.
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted, a summary of all the existing port groups is displayed.
# Port Group
# No. Name
#
0 pg
A
B
#
1 pg1
#
2 pg01
#
3 pg0d1
#
4 FCoEPG#0
A:
B:
C:
CA Type
FC
C
FC
FC
FC
FCoE
Port group number
Port group name
CA type
315
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show port-groups
When the parameter is specified, the details of the specified port group are displayed.
# Port Group
# No. Name
#
0 pg
A
B
# <Port List>
#
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
D
#
# Port Group
# No. Name
#
1 pg1
# <Port List>
#
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
#
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
A:
B:
C:
D:
CA Type
FC
C
CA Type
FC
Port group number
Port group name
CA type
Port number
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the existing port groups:
CLI> show port-groups
Port Group
CA Type
No. Name
0 pg
FC
1 pg1
FC
The following example displays details of port group #0:
CLI> show port-groups -port-group-number 0
Port Group
CA Type
No. Name
0 pg
FC
<Port List>
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
The following example displays the details of all the port groups:
CLI> show port-groups -all
Port Group
CA Type
No. Name
0 pg
FC
<Port List>
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
Port Group
No. Name
1 pg1
<Port List>
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CA Type
FC
316
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.12
Host Groups
This section explains the commands related to host groups. The host group is used to control multiple hosts as
a group.
317
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-group
create host-group
This command creates host groups.
• This command overwrites host responses that are set when the host is registered (when a host response
is not specified, "Default" is set for the host response).
• Up to eight hosts can be set for a single host group.
• Hosts that belong to a host group must have the same host response settings as the host group. When
the same hosts are registered in a new host group A and an existing host group B, the host response
settings for host group B are changed to the host group A settings. In addition, if the same hosts are
registered in host group B and another existing host group C, the host response settings for host group C
are also changed to host group B (and so forth).
■ Syntax
create host-group -name host_group_name
-host-type {fc | iscsi | sas} [-host-response-number host_response_numbes |
-host-response-name host_response_name ]
{-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names}
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a name of the port group. Only one name can be specified at the
same time. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-host-type
This parameter specifies the host type. Only one host type can be specified at the same time.
fc
FC/FCoE
iscsi
iSCSI
sas
SAS
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier that is to be used to set the host
sense. Only one host response can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.12
Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies the host identifiers to be associated. One or more parameters can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
318
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > create host-group
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the host group named "HG001". FC is specified for the "host-type" parameter,
10 is specified for the "host-response-number" parameter, and 1 and numbers 3 to 5 are specified for the
"host-number" parameter:
CLI> create host-group -name HG001 -host-type fc -host-response-number 10 -host-number 1,3-5
319
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-group
set host-group
This command changes the host group name, adds hosts to a host group, and deletes hosts from a host
group.
• A host can be added to or deleted from a host group for which mapping is set.
• A host cannot be deleted from a host group when no hosts belong to the host group after the host is
deleted.
• Up to eight hosts can be set for a single host group.
• Hosts that belong to a host group must have the same host response settings as the host group. When
the same hosts are registered in a new host group A and an existing host group B, the host response
settings for host group B are changed to the host group A settings. In addition, if the same hosts are
registered in host group B and another existing host group C, the host response settings for host group C
are also changed to host group B (and so forth).
• When a host that is added to the new host group A belongs to host group B, the host response settings
for host group B are changed to the host group A settings. In addition, if the same hosts are registered in
host group B and another existing host group C, the host response settings for host group C are also
changed to host group B (and so forth).
■ Syntax
set host-group {-host-group-number host_group_number | -host-group-name host_group_name}
[-host-response-number host_response_number | -host-response-name host_response_name ]
[-name host_group_name ] [-add-host-number host_numbers | -add-host-name host_names |
-release-host-number host_numbers | - release-host-name host_names]
■ Parameter
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
This parameter specifies the host group identifier to be changed. Only one host group can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
-host-response-number
or
-host-response-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host response identifier that is to be used to set the host
sense. Only 1one host response can be specified at the same time. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.12 Host Response Syntax" (page 24).
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the new host group name. Only 1one name can be specified
at the same time. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.2.4
Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
320
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-group
-add-host-number
or
-add-host-name
or
-release-host-number
or
-release-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host that is to be added or deleted. Two or more
parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -add-host-number 1,2
For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the host group named "HG001". The new name is "NEW_HG002". The host
response number is changed to 2:
CLI> set host-group -host-group-name HG001 -host-response-number 2 -name NEW_HG002
The first command will create the host group named "HG0001". Host numbers 1 and 2 belong to this host
group. The second command will add other definitions to the host group. Host number 3 and host numbers
5 to 7 are specified for the host group:
CLI> create host-group -host-group-name HG0001 -host-number 1,2
CLI> set host-group -host-group-name HG0001 -add-host-number 3,5-7
321
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete host-group
delete host-group
This command deletes the specified host group(s).
• When "disable" is selected for the "-keep-host-mode" parameter, the host that belongs to the host group
is also deleted.
• Host groups for which mapping is set cannot be deleted.
■ Syntax
delete host-group {-host-group-number host_group_numbers | -host-group-name host_group_names } [keep-host-mode {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
This parameter specifies the host group identifiers to be deleted. One or more parameters can
be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
-keep-host-mode
This parameter specifies whether the hosts are deleted. If omitted, this parameter is handled
as though "enable" is selected.
enable
Hosts are not deleted.
disable
Hosts are also deleted
■ Example(s)
The following example only deletes host group #1:
CLI> delete host-group
-host-group-number 1
The following example deletes host group # 1 and host groups #3 to #5:
CLI> delete host-group
-host-group-number 1,3-5
322
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-groups
show host-groups
This command displays existing host groups.
■ Syntax
show host-groups
[-host-group-number host_group_numbers | -host-group-name host_group_names | -all]
[-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names]
■ Parameter
-host-group-number
or
-host-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host group identifiers that will be displayed in detail.
One or more parameters can be specified. If omitted, a summary of all the existing host groups
will be displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host Group Syntax" (page 26).
-all
Optional. When this parameter is specified, the details of all the existing host groups are
displayed.
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host that is included in the host group that is to be
displayed in detail. One or more parameters can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.16 Host
Group Syntax" (page 26).
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted, a summary of all the existing host groups is displayed.
# Host Group
# No. Name
#
0 hg
#
1 FCoE
#
2 iscsi
A
B
A
B
C
D
E
Host Response
No. Name
250 Solaris MPxIO
250 Solaris MPxIO
254 AIX Single Path
C
D
Host Type
FC/FCoE
FC/FCoE
iSCSI
E
Host group number
Host group name
Host response number
Host response name
Host type
323
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-groups
When the parameter is specified, the details of the specified host group are displayed.
# Host Group
# No. Name
#
0 hg
A
B
# <Host List>
#
Host
#
No. Name
#
0 A
F G
#
1 B
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Host Response
No. Name
250 Solaris MPxIO
C
D
Host Type
FC/FCoE
E
WWN
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
H
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
Host group number
Host group name
Host response number
Host response name
Host type
Host number
Host name
Host WWN
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the existing host groups:
CLI> show host-groups
Host Group
Host Response
No. Name
No. Name
0 hg
250 Solaris MPxIO
1 FCoE
250 Solaris MPxIO
2 iscsi
254 AIX Single Path
Host Type
FC/FCoE
FC/FCoE
iSCSI
The following example displays details of host group #0:
CLI> show host-groups -host-group-number 0
Host Group
Host Response
Host Type
No. Name
No. Name
0 hg
250 Solaris MPxIO
FC/FCoE
<Host List>
Host
WWN
No. Name
0 A
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
1 B
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
The following example displays the details of all the host groups:
CLI> show host-groups -all
Host Group
Host Response
No. Name
No. Name
0 hg
250 Solaris MPxIO
<Host List>
Host
WWN
No. Name
0 A
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
1 B
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
Host Group
No. Name
1 FCoE
<Host List>
Host
No. Name
7 FCoE#2
Host Response
No. Name
250 Solaris MPxIO
Host Type
FC/FCoE
Host Type
FC/FCoE
WWN
aaaabbbbcccc0002
324
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-groups
The following example displays details of host #0:
CLI> show host-groups -host-number 0
Host Group
Host Response
No. Name
No. Name
0 hg
250 Solaris MPxIO
<Host List>
Host
WWN
No. Name
0 A
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Host Type
FC/FCoE
325
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management
3.5.13
Host LU QoS
This section explains the commands related to Host LU QoS.
326
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-lu-qos-mode
set host-lu-qos-mode
This command sets up the Host-LU QoS function.
■ Syntax
set host-lu-qos-mode -mode {enable|disable}
■ Parameter
-mode
This command specifies whether to enable or disable the Host-LU QoS function.
enable
This parameter enables the Host-LU QoS function.
disable
This parameter disables the Host-LU QoS function.
■ Example(s)
The following example enables the Host-LU QoS function:
CLI> set host-lu-qos-mode -mode enable
The following example disables the Host-LU QoS function:
CLI> set host-lu-qos-mode -mode disable
327
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-mode
show host-lu-qos-mode
This command displays the setting status of the Host-LU QoS function.
■ Syntax
show host-lu-qos-mode
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Host-LU QoS Mode [Enable]
A
A:
Setting status of the Host-LU QoS Mode
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the setting status of the Host-LU QoS function:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-mode
Host-LU QoS Mode [Disable]
CLI> show host-lu-qos-mode
Host-LU QoS Mode [Enable]
328
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lu-qos-group
set lu-qos-group
This command performs detailed settings of the LU QoS Group.
■ Syntax
set lu-qos-group -lu-qos-group lu_qos_group_number -lun luns -bandwidth-limit bandwidth-limit
■ Parameter
-lu-qos-group
This parameter specifies the LU QoS Group number to set for LU QoS.
Any value between 0 to 543 for ETERNUS DX80/DX90 S2, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and
ETERNUS DX8100 S2, or between 0 and 2175 for ETERNUS DX8700 S2, can be specified.
-lun
This parameter specifies the Host-LUN that is to be set. Any value between 0 and 1023 can be
specified. Two or more Host-LUNs can be specified.
Example: -lun 1,2 -lun 0-10 -lun 1,2-9
-bandwidth-limit
This parameter specifies the performance limit value for the Host-LUN. Any value between 0
(unlimited) and 15 (Max) can be specified. Two or more values can be specified. When two or
more values are specified, the same number of values as the Host-LUNs that are specified by
the "-lun" parameter must be specified.
Example: -bandwidth-limit 1,2
-bandwidth-limit 0-10
-bandwidth-limit 1,2-9
The same "-bandwidth-limit" parameter value can be specified for multiple "-lun" parameter
values.
Example: -lun 1,2,4 -bandwidth-limit 1
329
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lu-qos-group
0
Unlimited
1
15,000 IOPS (800MB/s)
2
12,600 IOPS (700MB/s)
3
10,020 IOPS (600MB/s)
4
7,500 IOPS (500MB/s)
5
5,040 IOPS (400MB/s)
6
3,000 IOPS (300MB/s)
7
1,020 IOPS (200MB/s)
8
780 IOPS (100MB/s)
9
600 IOPS (70MB/s)
10
420 IOPS (40MB/s)
11
300 IOPS (25MB/s)
12
240 IOPS (20MB/s)
13
180 IOPS (15MB/s)
14
120 IOPS(10MB/s)
15
60 IOPS (5MB/s)
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the LU QoS Group:
CLI> set lu-qos-group -lu-qos-group 1 -lun 2 -bandwidth-limit 15
CLI> set lu-qos-group -lu-qos-group 1 -lun 1,2 -bandwidth-limit 1
CLI> set lu-qos-group -lu-qos-group 1 -lun 1,2 -bandwidth-limit 1,2
330
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show lu-qos-groups
show lu-qos-groups
This command displays detailed settings of the LU QoS Group.
■ Syntax
show lu-qos-groups [-lu-qos-group lu_qos_group_number] [-lun lun|all]
■ Parameter
-lu-qos-group
Optional. This parameter specifies the LU QoS Group to display detailed information.
-lun
Optional. This parameter specifies which Host LUNs to display detailed information for.
When "all" is specified, the information for the LUNs with "0" (Unlimited) as the Bandwidth
Limit is also displayed. If omitted, the information for the LUNs with "0" (Unlimited) as the
Bandwidth Limit is not displayed.
■ Output
When a list of the LU QoS Groups is displayed
#CLI> show lu-qos-groups
#LU QoS Group
#No.
# 0
# 1
# 2
A
A:
Registered LU QoS Groups
When the LU QoS Groups to display detailed information for are specified
# LU QoS Group No.1
# LUN Bandwidth Limit
#
3
1
#
4
14
A
B
# LU QoS Group No.2
# LUN Bandwidth Limit
#
6
1
A B
A:
B:
Registered LU QoS Groups
Bandwidth Limit value that is set to the LU QoS Group
331
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show lu-qos-groups
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of the LU QoS Groups:
CLI> show lu-qos-groups
LU QoS Group
No.
0
1
2
3
The following example displays the detailed information of the LU QoS Group #1 and #2:
CLI> show lu-qos-groups -lu-qos-group 1,2
LU QoS Group No.1
LUN Bandwidth Limit
0
4
1
11
LU QoS Group No.2
LUN Bandwidth Limit
2
3
332
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > delete lu-qos-group
delete lu-qos-group
This command deletes LU QoS Groups.
■ Syntax
delete lu-qos-group -lu-qos-group lu_qos_group_number
■ Parameter
-lu-qos-group
This parameter specifies the LU QoS Group number that is to be deleted. Two or more LU QoS
Groups can be specified.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes LU QoS Group#1:
CLI> delete lu-qos-group 1
333
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-lu-qos
set host-lu-qos
This command performs detailed settings for the Host-LU QoS function. This command can change the QoS
settings for Port QoS, Host QoS, and LU QoS.
■ Syntax
set host-lu-qos -mode {port-qos|host-qos|lu-qos}
{-port {xyz|all} [-bandwidth-limit bandwidth-limits] [-event-number event-numbers]
[-schedule-number schedule-numbers]}
{-host-type {fc|iscsi|sas} {-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names}
[-bandwidth-limit bandwidth-limits] [-event-number event-numbers]
[-schedule-number schedule-numbers]}
{-port xyz [{-host-number host_numbers | -host-name host_names}]
[-lu-qos-group lu_qos_group_numbers] [-event-number event_numbers]
[-schedule-number schedule_numbers]}
■ Parameter
-mode
-port
This parameter specifies which QoS settings are changed.
port-qos
Port QoS
host-qos
Host QoS
lu-qos
LU QoS
This parameter specifies the host interface port when Port QoS or LU QoS is set.
Example: -port 00
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
• When "lu-qos" is specified for the "-mode" parameter, "all" cannot be specified.
• When "lu-qos" is specified for the "-mode" parameter, the type (FC, iSCSI, SAS) of all the
ports that are specified by the "-host-number" or "-host-name" parameter must be the
same.
334
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-lu-qos
-bandwidth-limit
Optional. This parameter specifies the performance limit value for Port QoS or Host QoS. Any
value between 0 (unlimited) and 15 (Max) can be specified. When multiple values are
specified, the number of values that are specified for this parameter must be the same as the
"-port" parameter or the "-host-number" parameter.
-host-type
Port QoS
Host QoS
0
Unlimited
Unlimited
1
27,000 IOPS (1,000 MB/s)
15,000 IOPS (800 MB/s)
2
21,000 IOPS (850 MB/s)
12,600 IOPS (700 MB/s)
3
15,000 IOPS (700 MB/s)
10,020 IOPS (600 MB/s)
4
10,020 IOPS (600 MB/s)
7,500 IOPS (500 MB/s)
5
8,040 IOPS (500 MB/s)
5,040 IOPS (400 MB/s)
6
6,000 IOPS (400 MB/s)
3,000 IOPS (300 MB/s)
7
5,040 IOPS (300 MB/s)
1,020 IOPS (200 MB/s)
8
4,020 IOPS (250 MB/s)
780 IOPS (100 MB/s)
9
3,000 IOPS (200 MB/s)
600 IOPS (70 MB/s)
10
2,040 IOPS (160 MB/s)
420 IOPS (40 MB/s)
11
1,020 IOPS (125 MB/s)
300 IOPS (25 MB/s)
12
720 IOPS (90 MB/s)
240 IOPS (20 MB/s)
13
480 IOPS (60 MB/s)
180 IOPS (15 MB/s)
14
240 IOPS (30 MB/s)
120 IOPS (10 MB/s)
15
120 IOPS (15 MB/s)
60 IOPS (5 MB/s)
This parameter specifies the type of host to set Host QoS for. The host can be specified by using
the "-host-number" or "-host-name" parameter.
fc
FC/FCoE
iscsi
iSCSI
sas
SAS
-host-number
or
-host-name
This parameter specifies which host to set Host QoS or LU QoS for. refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax"
(page 23).
-lu-qos-group
Optional. This parameter specifies the LU QoS Group number to set for LU QoS.
When multiple values are specified, the number of values that are specified for this parameter
must be the same as the "-port" parameter or the "-host-number" parameter. Specify two
double quotation marks ("") to restore the initial setting.
-event-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the event number for the QoS schedule. A schedule number
is assigned to each event number. Any value between 1 to 7 can be specified. Multiple event
numbers can be specified. When multiple values are specified, the number of values that are
specified for this parameter must be the same as the "-port" parameter or the "-host-number"
parameter. If omitted, the default QoS schedule (event number 0) is set.
335
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-lu-qos
-schedule-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the QoS schedule number. Multiple QoS schedule numbers
can be specified. When multiple values are specified, the number of values that are specified
for this parameter must be the same as the "-port" parameter or the "-host-number"
parameter. Specify two double quotation marks ("") to release the assigned QoS schedule.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the Port QoS and the default QoS schedule for the Port QoS:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode port-qos -port 000 -bandwidth-limit 15
The following example sets the Host QoS and the default QoS schedule for the Host QoS:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode host-qos -host-type iscsi -host-number 12 -bandwidth-limit 0
The following example sets the LU QoS and the default QoS schedule for the LU QoS (for a port with the Host
Affinity mode enabled):
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -host-number 12 -lu-qos-group 1
The following example sets the LU QoS and the default QoS schedule for the LU QoS (for a port with the Host
Affinity mode disabled):
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -lu-qos-group 1
The following example restores the initial setting of the LU QoS and sets the default QoS schedule for the LU
QoS (for a port with the Host Affinity mode enabled):
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -host-number 12 -lu-qos-group ""
The following example restores the initial setting of the LU QoS and sets the default QoS schedule for the LU
QoS for all of the host affinities of the specified port:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -lu-qos-group ""
The following example sets the QoS schedule for the Port QoS:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode port-qos -port 000 -bandwidth-limit 15 -event-number 2 -schedule-number 0
The following example sets the QoS schedule for the Host QoS:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode host-qos -host-type iscsi -host-number 12 -bandwidth-limit 0 -event-number 7 -schedule-number 1
The following example sets the QoS schedule for the LU QoS (for a port with the Host Affinity mode enabled):
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -host-number 12 -lu-qos-group 1 -event-number 2 -schedule-number 4
336
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set host-lu-qos
The following example sets the QoS schedule for the LU QoS (for a port with the Host Affinity mode
disabled):
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos -port 000 -lu-qos-group 1 -event-number 1 -schedule-number 5
The following example restores the initial settings of the QoS schedule for the Port QoS:
CLI> set host-lu-qos -mode port-qos -port 000 -event-number 2 -schedule-number ""
337
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos
show host-lu-qos
This command displays the detailed setting information for the Host-LU QoS function.
■ Syntax
show host-lu-qos [-mode {port-qos|host-qos|lu-qos}] [-port {xyz|all}]
[-host-type {fc|iscsi|sas} -host-number host_number | -host-name host_name]
[-lu-qos-group lu_qos_group_number]
■ Parameter
-mode
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies which QoS settings are displayed.
port-qos
Port QoS
host-qos
Host QoS
lu-qos
LU QoS
Optional. This parameter limits the QoS settings that are to be displayed to those that are
related to the specified port.
Example: -port 000
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
-host-type
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
all
All the host interface ports
Optional. This parameter specifies the type of host to set Host QoS for. The host can be
specified by using the "-host-number" or "-host-name" parameter. Only one host type can be
specified at the same time.
fc
FC/FCoE
iscsi
iSCSI
sas
SAS
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter limits the QoS settings that are to be displayed to those that are
related to the specified host. The "-host-type" parameter must also be specified to use this
parameter. For details, refer to "1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23).
-lu-qos-group
Optional. This parameter limits the QoS settings that are to be displayed to those that are
related to the specified LU QoS Group.
338
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos
■ Output
When the Host-LU QoS settings are displayed
# Port (Bandwidth Limit)
#
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
Host
(Bandwidth Limit)
No. Name
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
C
D
E
LU QoS
Group
2
F
Host interface port
Performance limit value for the host interface port
Host number
Host name
Performance limit value for the host
LU QoS Group number that is set for the LU QoS
When the Host-LU QoS settings are displayed with the target port, the target host, and the target LU QoS
group specified
# Port (Bandwidth Limit) Host
(Bandwidth Limit) LU QoS
#
No. Name
Group
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1) 2
A
B
C
D
E
F
# <Event>
# No. Port
Host
Schedule No. LU QoS
#
Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
Group
#
1
10
5
1
3
15
3
#
2
20
8
3
5
25
4
#
3
30
10
5
7
35
5
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
Host interface port
Performance limit value for the host interface port
Host number
Host name
Performance limit value for the host
LU QoS Group number that is set for the LU QoS
Event number of the QoS schedule
QoS schedule number for the host interface port
Performance limit value of the QoS schedule for the host interface port
QoS schedule number for the host
Performance limit value of the QoS schedule for the host
QoS schedule number for the LU QoS
Performance limit value of the QoS schedule for the LU QoS
When the Port QoS settings are displayed
# Port
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
# CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
A
A:
B:
Bandwidth Limit
B
0
2
Host interface port
Performance limit value for the host interface port
339
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos
When the Port QoS settings are displayed with the target port specified
# Port
# CM#0 CA#1 Port#0
A
# <Event>
# No. Schedule No.
#
1
2
#
3
4
C
D
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Bandwidth Limit
2
B
Bandwidth Limit
3
4
E
Host interface port
Performance limit value for the host interface port
Event number of the QoS schedule
QoS schedule number for the host interface port
Performance limit value of the QoS schedule for the host interface port
When the Host QoS settings are displayed
# Host
# No. Name
#1000 1234567890123456
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Bandwidth Limit Host Type WWN/iSCSI Name/SAS Address
C
12 FC/FCoE
D
E
iqn.1991-05.com microsoft
Host number
Host name
Performance limit value for the host
Host type
WWN (for FC/FCoE), iSCSI name (for iSCSI), or SAS address (for SAS) of the host
When the Host QoS settings are displayed with the target host specified
# Host
Bandwidth Limit Host Type WWN/iSCSI Name/SAS Address
# No. Name
# 1000 1234567890123456
12 FC/FCoE
iqn.1991-05.com microsoft
A
B
C
D
E
# <Event>
# No. Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
#
1
2
3
#
3
4
14
F
G
H
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
Host number
Host name
Performance limit value for the host
Host type
WWN (for FC/FCoE), iSCSI name (for iSCSI), or SAS address (for SAS) of the host
Event number of the QoS schedule
QoS schedule number for the host
Performance limit value of the QoS schedule for the host
340
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos
When the LU Host-LU QoS settings are displayed
# Port (Bandwidth Limit) Host
(Bandwidth Limit) LUN (Bandwidth Limit)
#
No. Name
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 1)
- ( -) 1002 ( 2)
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 (12) 1000 1234567890123456 ( 2) 1001 (11)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
Host interface port
Performance limit value for the host interface port
Host number
Host name
Performance limit value for the host
LUN number
Performance limit value for the LUN
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the LU Host-LU QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos
Port (Bandwidth Limit)
CM#0
CM#0
CM#0
CM#1
CM#1
CM#1
CA#0
CA#0
CA#1
CA#0
CA#0
CA#1
Port#0
Port#0
Port#0
Port#0
Port#0
Port#0
( 0)
( 0)
( 2)
( 3)
( 3)
(15)
Host
(Bandwidth Limit)
No. Name
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
0 Host#iSCSI_0
( 5)
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
0 Host#iSCSI_0
( 5)
LU QoS
Group
2
2
3
3
2
The following example displays the details of the LU Host-LU QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos -port 000,001
Port (Bandwidth Limit) Host
(Bandwidth Limit) LU QoS
No. Name
Group
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
0 Host#FC_0
( 0) <Event>
No. Port
Host
Schedule No. LU QoS
Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
Group
1
10
5
5
3
2
20
8
5
30
10
Port (Bandwidth Limit)
Host
(Bandwidth Limit) LU QoS
No. Name
Group
2 Host#FC_1
( 1) 2
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
<Event>
No. Port
Host
Schedule No. LU QoS
Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
Group
1
10
5
1
3
15
3
2
20
8
3
5
25
4
5
30
10
5
7
35
5
The following example displays the Port QoS settings:
CLI>
Port
CM#0
CM#0
CM#1
CM#1
show host-lu-qos -mode port-qos
Bandwidth Limit
CA#0 Port#0
0
CA#1 Port#0
2
CA#0 Port#0
3
CA#1 Port#0
15
341
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos
The following example displays the details of the Port QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos -mode port-qos -port 000
Port
Bandwidth Limit
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
0
<Event>
No. Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
1
10
5
2
20
8
5
30
10
The following example displays the Host QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos -mode host-qos
Host
Bandwidth Limit Host Type WWN/iSCSI Name/SAS Address
No. Name
0 Host#FC_0
0
FC/FCoE
AABBCCDDEEFF0001
1 Host#FC_1
1
FC/FCoE
AABBCCDDEEFF0011
2 Host#SAS_0
4
SAS
FFAABBCCDDEE0011
0 Host#iSCSI_0
5
iSCSI
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
The following example displays the details of the Host QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos -mode host-qos -host type iscsi -host-number 0
Host
Bandwidth Limit Host Type WWN/iSCSI Name/SAS Address
No. Name
0 Host#iSCSI_0
5 iSCSI
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
<Event>
No. Schedule No. Bandwidth Limit
1
2
3
3
4
14
The following example displays the LU Host-LU QoS settings:
CLI> show host-lu-qos -mode lu-qos
Port (Bandwidth Limit) Host
(Bandwidth Limit)
No. Name
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
0 Host#FC_0
( 0)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 ( 0)
2 Host#FC_1
( 1)
LUN (Bandwidth Limit)
0
1
2
0
1
2
(0)
(0)
(0)
(5)
(5)
(5)
342
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lu-qos-schedule
set lu-qos-schedule
This command sets the details of the QoS schedule.
■ Syntax
set lu-qos-schedule -schedule-number schedule_number
[-event-type
{every-day |
every-week,{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun} |
specific-day,MMDD,R |
specific-week,MM,{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun},
{mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat|sun} | none} ]
[-event-from hhmm]
[-event-to hhmm]
■ Parameter
-schedule-number
This parameter specifies the QoS schedule number. Multiple QoS schedule numbers can only
be specified when "none" is specified for the "-event-type" parameter. From 0 to 511 can be
specified for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2,ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS
DX8100 S2, and from 0 to 2047 for the ETERNUS DX8700S2.
Example: -schedule-number 1,2
-schedule-number 0-10
-schedule-number 1,2-9
-event-type Optional. This parameter specifies the QoS schedule event type.
every-day
The QoS schedule is applied to every day. A suboperand is not required.
Example: -event-type every-day
every-week The QoS schedule is applied to every week. This format is "every-week,STA,END".
The start day of the week (STA) and the end day of the week (END) are separated
by a comma. The day of the week must be specified in the following format. The
end day of the week must be after the start day of the week. The first day starts
from Monday.
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,fri
(from Monday to Friday is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type every-week,fri,tue
(from Friday to Tuesday is not OK)
Example: Correct -> -event-type every-week,mon,mon
(only Monday is OK)
343
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lu-qos-schedule
mon Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
specific-day The QoS schedule is applied to a specific day. This format is "specificday,MMDD,R". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific day DD (01 –
31) are separated by a comma (when every month is required, specify "em"
instead of 01 – 12). When the last day of the month is required, specify "99"
instead of 01 – 31. The number of days that the schedule will apply is specified
as R, and a value between 1 – 7 can be set.
Example: -event-type specific-day,0501,3
(For three days, from May 1st to May 3rd)
Example: -event-type specific-day,0630,2
(For two days, from June 30th to July 1st)
specific-week
The QoS schedule is applied to a specific week. This format is "specificweek,MM,W,STA,END". The specific month MM (01 – 12) and the specific week W
(1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or last) are separated by a comma (when every month is
required, specify "em" instead of 01 – 12). The start day of the week (STA) and
the end day of the week (END) are separated by a comma. The day of the week
must be specified in the following format. The end day of the week must be after
the start day of the week. The first day starts from Monday.
Example: Correct -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,mon,wed
(from the 3rd Monday to the 3rd Wednesday in May is OK)
Example: Incorrect -> -event-type specific-week,05,3rd,wed,mon
(from the 3rd Wednesday to the 3rd Monday in May is not OK)
(When May 1st is a Monday)
none
mon
Monday
tue
Tuesday
wed
Wednesday
thu
Thursday
fri
Friday
sat
Saturday
sun
Sunday
Specify this value to delete the specified QoS schedule.
Example: -event-type none
-event-from Optional. This parameter specifies that the QoS schedule will apply to a specific starting time.
The format is "hhmm". "hh" is the starting hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the starting minute (00,
10, 20, 30, 40, or 50).
344
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > set lu-qos-schedule
-event-to
Optional. This parameter specifies that the QoS schedule will end at a specific time. The format
is "hhmm". "hh" is the ending hour (00 – 23) and "mm" is the ending minute (00, 10, 20, 30,
40, or 50).
■ Example(s)
The following example creates an QoS schedule. The QoS schedule number is 0. The QoS schedule will apply
every day from 06:00 to 18:00:
CLI> set lu-qos-schedule -schedule-number 0 -event-type every-day -event-from 0600 -event-to 1800
The following example deletes the QoS schedule:
CLI> set lu-qos-schedule -schedule-number 0 -event-type none
345
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show lu-qos-schedule
show lu-qos-schedule
This command shows the details of the QoS schedule.
■ Syntax
show lu-qos-schedule [-schedule-number schedule-number]
■ Parameter
-schedule-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the QoS schedule number to display details. One or more
QoS schedule numbers can be specified. If this parameter is omitted, all the QoS schedules are
displayed.
■ Output
# No. Type
#
0 Every-day
#
1 Every-week
#
2 Specific-day
# 512 Specific-day
# 2047 Specific-week
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Details
Monday-Tuesday
1day(s) from Every-month 15
1day(s) from December 31
Every-month last week Monday-Sunday
C
Time
from
from
from
from
from
D
[18:10]
[00:00]
[00:40]
[00:00]
[00:00]
to
to
to
to
to
E
[12:20]
[18:30]
[18:30]
[23:50]
[06:00]
QoS schedule number
QoS schedule event type
Explanation for the QoS schedule event type
Starting QoS schedule time
Ending QoS schedule time
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the QoS schedules:
CLI>
No.
0
1
2
512
2047
show lu-qos-schedule
Type
Details
Every-day
Every-week
Monday-Tuesday
Specific-day 1day(s) from Every-month 15
Specific-day 1day(s) from December 31
Specific-week Every-month last week Monday-Sunday
Time
from
from
from
from
from
[18:10]
[00:00]
[00:40]
[00:00]
[00:00]
to
to
to
to
to
[12:20]
[18:30]
[18:30]
[23:50]
[06:00]
346
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > start host-lu-qos-performance
start host-lu-qos-performance
This command starts the collection of Host-LU QoS performance information.
■ Syntax
start host-lu-qos-performance [-port {xyz|all}]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the ports from which the Host-LU QoS performance
information is collected. Two or more ports can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000, 100
For more details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
all
All the ports
■ Example(s)
The following example starts the collection of Host-LU QoS performance information:
CLI> start host-lu-qos-performance
The following example starts the collection of Host-LU Qos performance information from the specified
ports:
CLI> start host-lu-qos-performance -port 000,101
347
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > stop host-lu-qos-performance
stop host-lu-qos-performance
This command stops the collection of Host-LU QoS performance information.
■ Syntax
stop host-lu-qos-performance [-port {xyz|all}]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the ports from which the Host-LU QoS performance
information is collected. Two or more ports can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000, 100
For more details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
all
All the ports
■ Example(s)
The following example stops the collection of Host-LU QoS performance information:
CLI> stop host-lu-qos-performance
The following example stops the collection of Host-LU Qos performance information for the specified ports:
CLI> stop host-lu-qos-performance -port 000,101
348
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
show host-lu-qos-performance
This command displays the performance measurement information for each port, host, and LUN. To display
this information, CLI or GUI must be used to obtain this information.
■ Syntax
show host-lu-qos-performance [-port xyz [-host-number host_number | -host-name host_name]]
■ Parameter
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the port and the LUN or host that are associated with the
port for which the performance measurement information is to be displayed. Multiple ports
cannot be specified.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
-host-number
or
-host-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the host or the LUNs that are associated with the host for
which the performance measurement information is to be displayed. The "-port" parameter
must be set to use this parameter. Multiple hosts cannot be specified. For details, refer to
""1.2.10 Host Syntax" (page 23)".
■ Output
When parameters are omitted:
#
#
#
#
#
Port
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
IOPS
Ave
100
10
10
B
Min
10
1
1
C
Max
100
30
30
D
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
10
2
10
2
E
F
Max
3
100
100
G
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
Overflow
10
120
10
H
I
Port number
Average number of I/Os per second for a port
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a port
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a port
Average transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time for the start of a command due to the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command due to the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
349
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
When the port number is specified (the host affinity mode is enabled):
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
A
# Port Type
FC
B
# Host Affinity
Enable
C
# Performance Monitoring ON
D
# Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
E
# Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
F
#
#
# Port Total
IOPS
Ave
100
G
Min
1
H
Max
100
I
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
J
K
Max
100
L
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
M
N
# Host
# No. Name
#
0 Host#FC_0
#
1 Host#FC_1
O
P
IOPS
Ave
100
10
Q
Min
10
1
R
Max
100
30
S
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
10
2
T
U
Max
3
100
V
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
W
X
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
S:
T:
U:
V:
W:
X:
Host interface port number
Port type
Host affinity (Enable: enabled, Disable: disabled)
Measurement status (ON: performance is being measured, OFF: performance measuring is stopped)
Performance measurement start time
Performance measurement stop time
Average number of I/Os per second for a port
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a port
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a port
Average transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time for the start of a command due to the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command due to the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
Host number
Host name
Average number of I/Os per second for a host
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a host
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a host
Average transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time since the start of a command from the QoS control of a host (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command from the QoS control of a host (in milliseconds)
350
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
When the port number is specified (the host affinity mode is disabled):
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Port Performance Information
A
# Port Type
FC
B
# Host Affinity
Disable
C
# Performance Monitoring OFF
D
# Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
E
# Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
F
#
#
# Port Total
#
# LUN
#
1
# 1021
O
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
S:
T:
U:
V:
W:
IOPS
Ave
111000
G
Min
110
H
Max
222000
I
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
J
K
Max
30
L
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
M
N
IOPS
Ave
20
60
P
Min
10
11
Q
Max
100
30
R
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
S
T
Max
3
2
U
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
V
W
Host interface port number
Port type
Host affinity (Enable: enabled, Disable: disable)
Measurement status (ON: performance is being measured, OFF: performance measuring is stopped)
Performance measurement start time
Performance measurement stop time
Average number of I/Os per second for a port
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a port
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a port
Average transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a port (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time since the start of a command from the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command from the QoS control of a port (in milliseconds)
LUN number
Average number of I/Os per second for a LUN
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a LUN
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a LUN
Average transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time since the start of a command from the QoS control of a LUN (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command from the QoS control of a LUN (in milliseconds)
351
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
When the port number and the host are specified (the host affinity mode is enabled):
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
A
# Port Type
FC
B
# Host Affinity
Enable
C
# Performance Monitoring ON
D
# Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
E
# Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
F
# Host Performance Information
# Host No.
0
G
# Host Name
HOST#0
H
# WWN
aabbccddeeff0011
I (output when the port type is FC or FCoE)
# SAS Address
500605b000b5f344
I (output when the port type is iSCSI)
# iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
I (output when the port type is iSCSI)
# IP Address
192.168.43.1
J (output when the port type is iSCSI)
#
#
# Host Total
#
# LUN
#
1
# 1021
S
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
S:
T:
U:
IOPS
Ave
111000
K
Min
110
L
Max
222000
M
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
N
O
Max
30
P
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
Q
R
IOPS
Ave
20
60
T
Min
10
11
U
Max
100
30
V
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
W
X
Max
3
2
Y
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
Z
a
Host interface port number
Port type
Host affinity (Enable: enabled, Disable: disable)
Measurement status (ON: performance is being measured, OFF: performance measuring is stopped)
Performance measurement start time
Performance measurement stop time
Host number
Host name
Host WWN (when the port type is FC or FCoE), Host iSCSI name (when the port type is iSCSI), or Host SAS
address (when the port type is SAS)
Host IP address. This item is displayed only when the port type is iSCSI.
Average number of I/Os per second for a host
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a host
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a host
Average transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a host (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time for the start of a command from the QoS control of a host (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command from the QoS control of a host (in milliseconds)
LUN number
Average number of I/Os per second for a LUN
Minimum number of I/Os per second for a LUN
352
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
V:
W:
X:
Y:
Z:
a:
Maximum number of I/Os per second for a LUN
Average transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Minimum transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Maximum transfer amount per second for a LUN (in MB/s)
Accumulated delay time since the start of a command from the QoS control of a LUN (in milliseconds)
"Overflow" is displayed when a long time passes from the start of performance measurement to the end of
performance measurement and the accumulated delay time exceeds the limit.
Average delay time for a single command from the QoS control of a LUN (in milliseconds)
When the port type that is described above is iSCSI and a host without an IP address is specified,
performance measurement information is obtained from multiple IP address. When an IP address is not
specified, "J: Host IP address" shows the actual IP address of the host that is logged in to the ETERNUS Disk
storage system.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the performance measurement information when no parameters are set. For
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0, Delay Total Time exceeds the limit and "Overflow" is displayed:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance
Port
IOPS
Ave
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
100
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
10
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
10
Min
10
1
1
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
10
2
10
2
Max
100
30
30
Max
3
100
100
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
Overflow
10
The following example displays the performance measurement information when a host interface port with
the host affinity mode enabled is set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 000
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
Port Type
FC
Host Affinity
Enable
Performance Monitoring ON
Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
Port Total
IOPS
Ave
100
Min
1
Max
100
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
Max
100
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
Host
No. Name
0 Host#FC_0
1 Host#FC_1
IOPS
Ave
100
10
Min
10
1
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
10
2
Max
3
100
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
353
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
The following example displays the performance measurement information when a host interface port with
the host affinity mode disabled is set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 001
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 Port Performance Information
Port Type
FC
Host Affinity
Disable
Performance Monitoring OFF
Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
Port Total
LUN
1
1021
IOPS
Ave
111000
Min
110
Max
222000
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
Max
30
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
IOPS
Ave
20
60
Min
10
11
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
Max
3
2
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
The following example displays the performance measurement information when a host interface port with
the host affinity mode enabled and a host (the port type is FC) are set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 000 -host-number 0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
Port Type
FC
Host Affinity
Enable
Performance Monitoring ON
Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
Host Performance Information
Host No.
0
Host Name
HOST#0
WWN
aabbccddeeff0011
Host Total
LUN
1
1021
IOPS
Ave
111000
Min
110
Max
222000
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
Max
30
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
IOPS
Ave
20
60
Min
10
11
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
Max
3
2
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
The following example displays the performance measurement information when a host interface port with
the host affinity mode enabled and a host (the port type is iSCSI and the host IP address is set) are set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 000 -host-number 0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
Port Type
ISCSI
Host Affinity
Enable
Performance Monitoring ON
Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
Host Performance Information
Host No.
0
Host Name
HOST#0
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
IP Address
192.168.43.1
Host Total
LUN
1
1021
IOPS
Ave
111000
Min
110
Max
222000
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
Max
30
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
IOPS
Ave
20
60
Min
10
11
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
Max
3
2
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
354
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 3 Configuration Settings and Display
3.5 Host Interface Management > show host-lu-qos-performance
The following example displays the performance measurement information when a host interface port with
the host affinity mode enabled and a host (the port type is iSCSI and the host IP address is not set) are set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 000 -host-number 0
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
Port Type
ISCSI
Host Affinity
Enable
Performance Monitoring ON
Monitoring Start Time
2012-04-11 12:00:00
Monitoring Stop Time
2012-04-11 12:05:00
Host Performance Information
Host No.
0
Host Name
HOST#0
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
IP Address
192.168.43.151
Host Total
LUN
1
1021
IOPS
Ave
111000
Min
110
Max
222000
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
Max
30
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
IOPS
Ave
20
60
Min
10
11
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
Max
3
2
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
Host Performance Information
Host No.
0
Host Name
HOST#0
iSCSI Name
iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft
IP Address
192.168.43.152
Host Total
LUN
1
1021
IOPS
Ave
111000
Min
110
Max
222000
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
20
10
Max
30
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
1000
10
IOPS
Ave
20
60
Min
10
11
Max
100
30
Throughput(MB/s)
Ave
Min
2
1
2
1
Max
3
2
Delay Time(ms)
Total
Ave
20
10
120
10
The following example displays the performance measurement information when performance
measurements are not performed and a host interface port is set:
CLI> show host-lu-qos-performance -port 000
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Port Performance Information
Port Type
ISCSI
Host Affinity
Enable
Performance Monitoring OFF
355
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4
Function/System Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands related to the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.1
User account management
Advanced Copy management
Network management (Redundant IP/SNMP etc.)
SSH/SSL security configuration
Date and Time/NTP
System configuration (ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name, Box ID, encryption)
Power synchronization
Self-Encrypted Disk (SED) authentication settings
syslog server settings
Audit log settings
Key management server linkage function
Shutdown/system restart
User Management
This section explains the commands that manage a user account and a password.
4.1.1
Role
Roles define the user roles and the policies based on the definitions that are assigned to each role. Policies
are given to users as roles. There are default roles that are preset in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and
user-defined roles (custom roles). The following table shows the roles and their policies.
■ Default roles
The default roles and corresponding policies are shown in the following table.
Default role
User policy
Status Display
Monitor
Admin
Storage
Admin
Yes
Account
Admin
Security
Admin
Yes
Maintainer
Yes
Yes
RAID Group Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Volume - Create / Modify
Yes
Yes
Yes
Volume - Delete / Format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Host Interface Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Advanced Copy Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Software
(*1)
Yes
356
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management
Default role
User policy
Admin
Storage
Admin
Copy Session Management
Yes
Yes
Storage Management
Yes
User Management
Yes
Yes
Authentication / Role
Yes
Yes
Security Setting
Yes
Yes
Maintenance Information
Yes
Yes
Monitor
Maintenance Operation
Account
Admin
Security
Admin
Maintainer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Software Control
*1:
Software
(*1)
Yes
A role that is dedicated for external software. This role enables external software to access CLI.
■ Custom roles
Create custom roles when an operation cannot be performed with only the default roles.
Multiple user policies can be assigned to a single custom role.
For details on creating and setting up a custom role, refer to the "create role" and " set role" commands.
357
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > create role
create role
This command creates a new user-defined role to which any policy is assigned. Multiple policies can be
assigned to one role. Role names that are already registered cannot be used to create new roles.
■ Syntax
create role -name name -policy policy
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a unique name for the new role. Usable characters are alphanumeric
(case-sensitive), exclamation mark (!), hyphen (-), underscore (_), and dot (.) characters. A
minimum of 1 letter and a maximum of 16 letters are required.
-policy
This parameter specifies the policies that are assigned to the role. Use the numbers that are
listed below to specify policies. Multiple policies can be specified at the same time. Enter a
comma (,) or a hyphen (-) between numbers to specify multiple policies. Note that spaces are
not permitted before or after commas (,).
1
Status Display
2
RAID Group Management
3
Volume - Create/Modify
4
Volume - Delete/Format
5
Host Interface Management
6
Advanced Copy Management
7
Copy Session Management
8
Storage Migration Management
9
Resource Domain Management (not supported)
10
Storage Management
11
User Management
12
Authentication/Role
13
Security Setting
14
Audit Setting (not supported)
15
Maintenance Information
16
Maintenance Operation
■ Example(s)
The following example creates a Total Administrator as Role 1 to which the "Status Display", "User
Management", and "Authentication Management" policies are assigned:
CLI> create role -name Role1 -policy 1,11,12
358
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set role
set role
This command changes the registered user-defined role information. Note that this command cannot change
the role name or the role types. This command can also change the role that is currently assigned to the user.
Any changes are enabled after the next login.
■ Syntax
set role -role-name role_name [-policy policy]
■ Parameter
-role-name
This parameter specifies a role name. Two or more parameters cannot be specified at the same
time.
-policy
Optional. This parameter specifies policies to set for the role. Use the numbers that are listed
below to specify policies. Multiple policies can be specified at the same time. Enter a comma
(,) or a hyphen (-) between numbers to specify multiple policies. Note that spaces are not
permitted before or after commas (,).
If omitted, this parameter is not changed.
1
Status Display
2
RAID Group Management
3
Volume - Create/Modify
4
Volume - Delete/Format
5
Host Interface Management
6
Advanced Copy Management
7
Copy Session Management
8
Storage Migration Management
9
Resource Domain Management (not supported)
10
Storage Management
11
User Management
12
Authentication/Role
13
Security Setting
14
Audit Setting (not supported)
15
Maintenance Information
16
Maintenance Operation
■ Example(s)
The following example specifies "Resource Domain Management" policies for Role1.
CLI> set role -role-name Role1 -policy 10
359
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > delete role
delete role
This command deletes a specified user-defined role. Note that any roles that are already assigned to users
cannot be deleted.
■ Syntax
delete role -name name
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the role name that is to be deleted. Only one parameter can be
specified at the same time.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the role named "Role2":
CLI> delete role -name Role2
360
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > show role
show role
This command displays all the registered user-defined role information.
■ Syntax
show role
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Role Name
Role1
A
A:
B:
C:
type
all
B
Policies
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17]
C
User-defined role name
Role type (not supported)
Assigned policies
■ Example(s)
The following example displays all the registered user-defined roles:
CLI > show role
Role Name
Monitor
Admin
StorageAdmin
AccountAdmin
SecurityAdmin
Maintainer
Software
type
all
all
all
all
all
all
all
Policies
[1
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7
[
[1,
[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,
[
10,11,12,13,
11,12
10,
13,
]
]
]
]
15
]
15,16
]
17]
15
361
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > create user
create user
This command creates a new user account. User names that are already registered cannot be used.
■ Syntax
create user -name name -role role [-function {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies a unique name for the new user account. Usable characters are
alphanumeric (case-sensitive), exclamation mark (!), hyphen (-), underscore (_), and dot (.)
characters. A minimum of 1 letter and a maximum of 32 letters are required.
-role
This parameter specifies the role. For details, refer to "4.1.1 Role" (page 356).
Total Administrator role
Maintainer
Maintenance operator
SecurityAdmin
Security administrator
AccountAdmin
Account administrator
StorageAdmin
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system administrator
Administrator
Total administrator
Monitor
Monitor
Software
Software
User-defined role
Role that is created using the "create role" command.
-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the user account will be enabled.
enable
The user account created is enabled immediately (default).
disable
The user account is created but not enabled.
■ Example(s)
This example changes the role of the user account named "user1" to the Account Admin Role:
CLI> create user -name user1 -role AccountAdmin -function enable
362
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set user
set user
This command changes the information of an existing user account. A user name cannot be changed. A
currently logged in user account can be used, and any changes are enabled after the next login.
■ Syntax
set user -name name [-role role] [-function {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the user name. Only one user name can be specified at the same
time.
-role
Optional. This parameter specifies the role. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Total Administrator role
Maintainer
Maintenance operator
SecurityAdmin
Security administrator
AccountAdmin
Account administrator
StorageAdmin
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system administrator
Administrator
Total administrator
Monitor
Monitor
Software
Software
Custom role
Role that is created using the "create role" command.
-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the modified user account is enabled. If this
parameter is omitted, "enable" is set.
enable
The user account created is enabled immediately (default).
disable
The user account is created but not enabled.
■ Example(s)
This example changes the role of the user account named "user1" to the Administrator Role:
CLI> set user -name user1 -role Admin -function enable
363
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > delete user
delete user
This command deletes the specified user account. The currently logged in user account can be deleted, and
deletion is enabled after the next login. Even if a disabled user account is specified, the user account can be
deleted. In addition, if a SSH public key is registered, the key is also automatically deleted when this
command is executed.
■ Syntax
delete user -name name
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the user account name to be deleted. Only one user name can be
specified at the same time.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the user account named "user1":
CLI> delete user -name user1
364
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > show users
show users
This command displays all of the registered user accounts.
■ Syntax
show users
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# User Name
user1
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
User Role
SecurityAdmin
B
Availability
[Enable ]
C
SSH Public Key
[Registered
]
D
User account name
Role name
It shows if the user account is enabled.
It shows if an SSH public key is registered.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays all of the existing user accounts:
CLI> show users
User Name
manager
user1
domain_manager
user3
User Role
Administrator
Monitor
DomainAccountAdmin
DomainAdmin
Availability
[Enable ]
[Disable]
[Enable ]
[Enable ]
SSH Public Key
[Registered
]
[Not Registered]
[Registered
]
[Registered
]
365
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > show login-users
show login-users
This command displays the login users.
Users who are logged in to GUI or to the master CM to which the command is executed from CLI or software
are displayed. Users who are logged in to the slave CM from CLI or software are not displayed.
■ Syntax
show login-users
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Interface Session ID User Name User Role Login Date
Lock IP Address
GUI
65535 f.ce
Maintainer 2012-07-02 10:12:05 No
2001:db8::1234:0:0:9abc
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
User interface type
User session ID
User account name
Role name
Login date and time
Resource lock
IP address of logged in users
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the information of the users who are logged in:
CLI> show login-users
Interface Session ID User Name
GUI
65535 f.ce
GUI
5 root
CLI
* 6 anonymous
CLI
10 root
SOFT
112 esf_user
User Role
Maintainer
Admin
Monitor
Admin
Software
Login Date
2012-07-02
2012-07-02
2012-07-02
2012-07-02
2012-07-02
10:12:05
10:13:05
10:14:05
11:12:05
12:12:07
Lock
No
No
No
No
Yes
IP Address
2001:db8::1234:0:0:9abc
2002:C0A8:2101::1
192.168.0.2
fe80::20a:e4ff:fe9b:f50f
192.168.0.1
366
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set password
set password
This command changes the password of the specified user. This command prompts an operator for the new
password after command input.
■ Syntax
set password [-name name]
■ Parameter
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the user account name to change a password. Only users
with the User Management policy can specify this parameter. Only one user name can be
specified at the same time. The new password is confirmed after command input. If omitted,
the password of the currently logged in user is changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example changes the password of the user account named "user1":
CLI> set password -name user1
Old Password :
New Password :
Confirm Password :
367
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > initialize all-users
initialize all-users
This command clears all of the existing user accounts. Note that only the initial default user is enabled.
■ Syntax
initialize all-users -execution {yes|no}
■ Parameter
-execution
This parameter specifies the execution mode. User accounts are initialized only when selecting
"yes".
yes
All the user accounts are initialized.
no
No operation.
■ Example(s)
The following example initializes all of the registered user accounts:
CLI> initialize all-users
-execution yes
368
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > import ssh-public-key
import ssh-public-key
For SSH (Secure SHell) connections, passwords or certificate keys can be used for authentication. This
command is used to import a SSH public key into an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system from an FTP server when
using the certificate key method of authentication.
• One certificate key corresponds to a single user account.
• Even if a specific user account is disabled, a key may still be imported.
The key types that are supported are as follows:
• OpenSSH style RSA for SSH v1 (Strength 1024bit, 2048bit, or 4096bit)
• IETF style DSA for SSH v2 (Strength 1024bit, 2048bit, or 4096bit)
• IETF style RSA for SSH v2 (Strength 1024bit, 2048bit, or 4096bit)
■ Syntax
import ssh-public-key -account-name account_name
-port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account -filename filename [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-account-name
This parameter specifies a user account name used for a certificate key for authentication. Only
one user name can be specified at the same time.
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For details,
refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 only)
This parameter specifies an FTP server name where the public key is stored. The server name
format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or a fully qualified domain name.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
-filename
This parameter specifies the name of the file that contains a public key.
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
369
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > import ssh-public-key
■ Example(s)
For a user account named "manager", the following example imports a public key for SSH authentication
from an FTP server named "ftp.a.com" using the Ethernet Maintenance port (MNT port). The user name used
to log into the FTP server is "cli-user" and the file that contains the SSH public key is "/tmp/ssh_key1".
CLI> import ssh-public-key -account-name manager -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/
ssh_key1 -user cli-user
Password :
(An Operator should input a password, which is hidden.)
importing /tmp/ssh_key1 from ftp.a.com
complete.
The following example is the same as above, except that the progress indicator is not displayed:
CLI> import ssh-public-key -user-account manager -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/
ssh_key1 -user cli-user -indicator disable
(An Operator should input a password, which is hidden.)
Password :
370
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > delete ssh-public-key
delete ssh-public-key
This command deletes an existing public key for SSH authentication. Even if a specified user account is
disabled at that time, the SSH public key can be deleted.
■ Syntax
delete ssh-public-key -account-name account_name
■ Parameter
-account-name
This parameter specifies an existing user account name with the SSH certificate key registered
for authentication-use. Only one user account name can be specified at once.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the SSH public key for the "manager" user account.
CLI> delete ssh-public-key -account-name manager
371
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management
4.1.2
RADIUS Server Settings
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User) is the networking protocol for the centralized management of
the authentication, authorization and accounts of network users.
This section explains the commands to set authentication, authorize and account by the server.
• This command sets up the RADIUS authentication server.
• Display settings of the system and the RADIUS authentication server(s).
RADIUS
authentication
server (Primary)
Set up the RADIUS
authentication server(s).
Secondary is optional.
Check settings of the
RADIUS server(s).
User
ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system
RADIUS
authentication
server (Secondary)
372
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set radius
set radius
This command sets up the RADIUS authentication server. A secondary server cannot be set up without setting
up a primary server. Set the secondary IP address to "0.0.0.0." to disable the secondary-server setting.
■ Syntax
set radius -mode {enable | disable} [-after-error {internal | internal-net | no}]
[-primary-server primary_server] [-primary-port {maintenance | remote}]
[-primary-port-number port_number] [-primary-authentication-mode {chap | pap}]
[-primary-shared-secret shared_secret_code] [-primary-retry-timeout{10|20|30|40|50|60}]
[-secondary-server secondary_server] [-secondary-port {maintenance | remote}]
[-secondary-port-number port_number] [-secondary-authentication-mode {chap | pap}]
[-secondary-shared-secret shared_secret_code] [-secondary-retry-timeout{10|20|30|40|50|60}]
■ Parameter
-mode
-after-error
This parameter specifies enable or disable for RADIUS authentication, authorization and
accounts functions. To enable RADIUS authentication, the primary server must be set in
advance or at the same time that this parameter is set. RADIUS authentication can be disabled
regardless of the primary server setting status.
enable
RADIUS function is enabled.
disable
RADIUS function is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies what happens when an error occurs. If this parameter is
omitted, this setting is not changed.
internal
Authenticate and authorize for any error that occurs.
internal-net Authenticate and authorize for an error that occurs due to a network problem.
no
No authenticate and/or no authorize.
-primary-server
Optional. This parameter specifies the primary server. Only one server can be specified. If the
primary server is not set, specify the primary server for this parameter to enable RADIUS
authentication. The server name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256
"d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of
IPv6 addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local
addresses, and unique local addresses. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be specified.
Example: -primary-server 192.168.1.20
Example: -primary-server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -primary-server foo.bar
Example: -primary-server "" (when deleting)
373
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set radius
-primary-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the port number of the primary server for the authentication
protocol.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
-primary-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the UDP port number of the primary server for the
authentication protocol. Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot
be set above 65535. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The default value is 1812.
-primary-authentication-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the authentication method type of the primary server. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The following methods can be specified:
chap
Use CHAP. (Default)
pap
Use PAP.
PAP: Password Authentication Protocol
-primary-shared-secret
Optional. This parameter specifies the shared secret of the primary server (up to 64
alphanumeric characters). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-primary-retry-timeout
Optional. This parameter specifies the retry timeout value of the primary server. If omitted, 30
seconds (default value) is used. The timeout value should be selected from following values:
10
10 seconds
20
20 seconds
30
30 seconds (Default value)
40
40 seconds
50
50 seconds
60
60 seconds
-secondary-server
Optional. This parameter specifies the secondary server. Only one server can be specified. The
server name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6
address format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of IPv6 addresses that can
be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be specified.
Example: -secondary-server 192.168.1.20
Example: -secondary-server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -secondary-server foo.bar
374
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > set radius
-secondary-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the LAN port for secondary settings. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
-secondary-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the UDP port number of the secondary server for the
authentication protocol. Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot
be set above 65535. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The default value is 1812.
-secondary-authentication-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the authentication method of the secondary server. CHAP or
PAP can be selected for the authentication method. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. The following methods can be specified.
chap
Use CHAP. (Default)
pap
Use PAP.
PAP: Password Authentication Protocol
-secondary-shared-secret
Optional. This parameter specifies the shared secret of the secondary server. Up to 64
alphanumeric characters can be specified for the shared value. If omitted, the existing setting
is not changed.
-secondary-retry-timeout
Optional. This parameter specifies the retry timeout value of the secondary server. If omitted,
30 seconds (default value) is used. The timeout value should be selected from following
values:
10
10 seconds
20
20 seconds
30
30 seconds (Default value)
40
40 seconds
50
50 seconds
60
60 seconds
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the RADIUS authentication server:
CLI> set radius -mode -after-error no -primary-server 10.21.134.198 -primary-port maintenance -primaryport-number 1812 -primary-authentication-mode chap -primary-shared-secret "RADIUS Secret" -primary-retrytimeout 20 -secondary-server 10.17.80.6 -secondary-port remote -secondary-port-number 1912 -secondaryauthentication-mode pap -secondary-shared-secret "RADIUS Secret1" -secondary-retry-timeout 20
375
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > show radius
show radius
This command displays the settings of the RADIUS server.
■ Syntax
show radius
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# RADIUS authentication
# After error
# Primary server
# Primary port
# Primary port number
# Primary authentication mode
# Primary shared secret
# Primary retry timeout
# Secondary server
# Secondary port
# Secondary port number
# Secondary authentication mode
# Secondary shared secret
# Secondary retry timeout
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
[Enable]
A
[No]
B
[10.21.134.198]
C
[MNT]
D
[1812]
E
[CHAP]
F
[xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]
G
[20]
H
[10.17.80.6]
I
[RMT]
J
[1912]
K
[PAP]
L
[yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy]
M
[20]
N
Mode. Display the system's mode.
Displays which method used after found error.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the primary authentication server.
Port that is used for primary settings.
Port number of the primary authentication server for the authentication protocol.
Authentication method type of the primary authentication server.
Shared secret of the primary authentication server.
Retry timeout value of the primary authentication server.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the secondary authentication server
Port that is used for secondary settings.
Port number of the secondary authentication server for the authentication protocol.
Authentication method type of the secondary authentication server.
Shared secret of the secondary authentication server.
Retry timeout value of the primary authentication server.
376
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.1 User Management > show radius
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the settings of the RADIUS authentication servers:
CLI> show radius
RADIUS authentication
After error
Primary server
Primary port
Primary port number
Primary authentication mode
Primary shared secret
Primary retry timeout
Secondary server
Secondary lan port
Secondary port number
Secondary authentication mode
Secondary shared secret
Secondary retry timeout
[Enable]
[No]
[10.21.134.198]
[MNT]
[1812]
[CHAP]
[xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]
[20]
[10.17.80.6]
[RMT]
[1912]
[PAP]
[yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy]
[20]
The following example shows when the secondary server is not valid.
CLI> show radius
RADIUS authentication
After error
Primary server
Primary port
Primary port number
Primary authentication mode
Primary shared secret
Primary retry timeout
Secondary server
Secondary lan port
Secondary port number
Secondary authentication mode
Secondary shared secret
Secondary retry timeout
[Enable]
[No]
[10.21.134.198]
[MNT]
[1812]
[CHAP]
[xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]
[20]
[-]
[RMT]
[1912]
[PAP]
[yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy]
[20]
The following example shows when RADIUS authentication is disabled.
CLI> show radius
RADIUS authentication
After error
Primary server
Primary port
Primary port number
Primary authentication mode
Primary shared secret
Primary retry timeout
Secondary server
Secondary port
Secondary port number
Secondary authentication mode
Secondary shared secret
Secondary retry timeout
[Disable]
[No]
[10.21.134.198]
[MNT]
[1812]
[CHAP]
[xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx]
[20]
[-]
[RMT]
[1912]
[PAP]
[yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy]
[20]
377
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2
Advanced Copy Management
Advanced Copy is a function that copies an arbitrary volume of data at a certain point. The management unit
of Advanced Copy is referred to as "copy session" or "session".
Only SnapOPC+ type sessions can be started using CLI. However, all types of copy sessions can be displayed
and stopped.
The CLI commands for Advanced Copy are listed in the following table:
Function
Command
Advanced Copy license
set advanced-copy-license
delete advanced-copy-license
show advanced-copy-license
Advanced Copy policy
set advanced-copy-policy
show advanced-copy-policy
Advanced Copy parameter
set advanced-copy-parameters
show advanced-copy-parameters
Snap Data Volume (SDV)
initialize snap-data-volume
show snap-data-volume
Snap Data Pool (Pool/SDPV)
show snap-data-pool
delete snap-data-pool-volume
Advanced Copy session
start advanced-copy (only SnapOPC+)
stop advanced-copy (all types)
show advanced-copy-sessions (all types)
For details on REC (Remote Equivalent Copy), refer to "4.2.4 Remote Equivalent Copy Management" (page
408)
Advanced Copy functions for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system have the following features:
• Quick copy processes can be performed in units of a volume using ETERNUSmgr or CLI commands.
• Snapshots of volumes can be created using the Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service function.
• Backups and replications can be created using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager.
This section explains how to perform Advanced copy in units of a volume using CLI. For details about setting
parameters for each command, refer to this manual.
Note that snapshots of the specified volume are created by the ETERNUS Advanced Copy function for the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. The purposes of the Advanced Copy function (such as creating backups and
replications) and the procedure for using the Advanced Copy function via OS or software depends on the OS or
software that is used. For details about purposes and procedures, refer to the manual of the OS or software
that will be used.
Manage the Advanced Copy function by performing copy operations, and checking and deleting copy sessions
after preparing the Advanced Copy function.
378
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2.1
SnapOPC+ Outline
SnapOPC+ is a function that, to the server, appears to copy a volume (the copy source) in an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system to a different volume (the copy destination) in the same ETERNUS DX Disk storage system at a
specific point in time. Only a logical copy is performed initially, following which the SnapOPC+ records
changes as the data is updated.
Access to changed areas is then referenced via the SnapOPC+ record, while access to the unchanged areas is
transparently passed back to the original data (in the copy source area).
The expected amount of updates must be considered when deciding the size of the copy destination area.
By its nature, SnapOPC+ is best used for the temporary backup to tape of file server files and other low
modification rate data, as provision against operating failures and software errors.
Seen by server to have
the same capacity as
the original volume
Allows generational
management of data
updates (providing
diff history information)
In actually, only the
changes to original data
are copied and kept
4.2.2
Preparations for the Advanced Copy Function
4.2.2.1
Basic Settings
■ License registration
Register a license for using the Advanced Copy function.
If a license is not registered, the Advanced Copy function cannot be used.
[Example]
Registering a license key "1928569802345721"
CLI> set advanced-copy-license -key 1928569802345721
■ License registration status check
Check the status of the Advanced Copy license registration.
[Example]
CLI> show advanced-copy-license
379
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
■ Copy parameter settings (required)
Set the internal table size to match the capacity of the volume to be copied, and the copy speed in the device.
Copy table size (table size) and resolution vary according to the copy capacity and number of sessions that are
operated at the same time.
• Resolution
This value determines the amount of data each bit in the copy bitmap represents.
The allowed resolution settings of "1 (standard)", "2", "4", ",8", and "16" respectively give 8KB, 16KB, 32KB,
64KB, and 128KB regions of data per bitmap bit. The same value is used for all the copy sessions in the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
Set the resolution as small as possible. When a large value is specified, the performance may be reduced.
When unsure about whether the copy target area might be increased in future use, specify "16" for the
resolution.
To change the resolution of a copy session that is currently being performed, cancel the copy session and
start again.
• Internal table size
A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as a table size. The
table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the number of sessions
(volumes) that will be run simultaneously.
(Table size (S)) [MB] = (S1) + (S2) + (S3)
S1: Refers to the table size (MB) for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ without EC/REC and OPC
Restoration.
S2: Refers to the table size (MB) for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration.
S3: 16 [KB]  N3 / 1024 (rounded up to the nearest integer)
N3: Number of OPC/EC/REC sessions for GlobalServer volumes
• Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct setting for the copy table
size.
• A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in each CM.
• If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed, adjust the resolution (M) upward
until the maximum table size is no longer exceeded. The resolution (M) should be as small as
possible.
• Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows:
Device name
Maximum copy table size (per CM)
ETERNUS DX80 S2
256MB
ETERNUS DX90 S2
256MB
ETERNUS DX410 S2
512MB
ETERNUS DX440 S2
1024MB
ETERNUS DX8100 S2
1024MB
ETERNUS DX8700 S2
12288MB
• Allowance should be made for possible increases in the copy capacity.
• If the resolution is changed during an existing copy session, the table sizing formula described in this
section is not applied.
380
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
• The same bitmap ratio (M) value must be used by both the copy source device and copy destination
device. If the bitmap ratio settings for the copy source and copy destination devices are different, REC
cannot be performed. Note that the table sizes (S) do not need to be identical. If different
recommended resolutions are calculated for the copy source and copy destination devices, use
whichever resolution is greater for both devices. If the resolution (M) is changed, recalculate the table
size (S) setting for the device with the new resolution.
● The table size for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ without EC / REC and OPC Restoration (S1)
M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Set "x1" if possible.)
C1: The total copy capacity (GB) for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ without EC / / REC and
OPC Restoration (*1)
N1: The number of sessions for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ without EC / REC and OPC
Restoration
S1 [MB] = ((2  C1 / M) + N1)  8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)
● The table size for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration (S2)
M: Resolution (The same value is used in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. Set "x1" if possible.)
C2: The total copy capacity (GB) for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration in
the volume (*1)
N2: The number of sessions for OPC / QuickOPC / SnapOPC / SnapOPC+ with OPC Restoration
S2 [MB] = ((2  C2 / M) + N2)  2  8 [KB] / 1024 (Round up decimal point)
*1:
For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity
of all volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that are defined as copy
sources. For REC copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or
partitions) in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that are defined as copy destinations.
If the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is used for both the "EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, or
REC copy source" and the " REC copy source", the copy capacity is the total capacity of both.
The copy capacity for multi-copy sessions and for generation management by SnapOPC+ sessions is the
total capacity of copy source volumes (slices or partitions), multiplied by the number of copy destinations
(or generations) for each copy source.
Example:
B
A
Copy area in the copy source logical volume A: 200M,
number of copy destinations (generations): 4
Copy area in the copy source logical volume B: 500MB,
number of copy destinations (generations): 8
Add 200  4 + 500  8 = 4800MB to the copy capacity (C1).
The number of copy sessions (N1) is 4 + 8 = 12.
When executing OPC Restoration from a copy destination with multi-copy and SnapOPC+
multigeneration enabled, select one copy destination and apply the above formula. Other
copy destinations are calculated as being normal multi-copy and SnapOPC+ multigeneration.
381
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
• Copy speed
Specify the copy speed from one of the following, to match the operation to give priority during the copy
operation.
Low: Gives priority to operation process
High: Gives priority to copy process
Auto: Priority is set automatically
[Example]
Setting the Bitmap ratio to 2, table size to 32MB, and copy speed to Low.
CLI> set advanced-copy-parameters -resolution 2 -table-size 32 -ec-opc-priority low
4.2.2.2
Copy Destination Volume Creation
Create the copy destination volume to store the copied data (Snap Data Volume: SDV) and the pool area to
store the copied data when all of the SDV capacity is used (Snap Data Volume Pool: SDPV)
■ RAID group creation
Create a RAID group used for SDV in the normal procedure.
(Refer to this manual for how to create a RAID group.)
When considering the effect on performance, creating SDVs in a RAID group that is not used for the operation
is recommended, although the SDVs can be created in an existing RAID group.
■ SDV (Snap Data Volume) creation
Create SDVs, the copy destination for SnapOPC+, in the RAID group created in step (1).
[Example]
Creating one SDV with 10 GB virtual capacity in RAID group#2.
CLI> create volume -name SDV001 -rg-number 2 -type sdv -virtual-size 10gb -count 1
After creating the SDV, check the volume number.
CLI> show snap-data-volume
Volume Format is performed automatically after the SDV is created. Set the mapping to the LUN.
■ SDP (Snap Data Pool) creation
Create SDPVs in the created RAID group.
[Example]
Creating one SDPV having 1 [TB] capacity in the RAID group#4
CLI> create volume -name SDPV01 -rg-number 4 -type sdpv -size 1tb -count 1
Volume Format is performed automatically after the SDPV is created.
382
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2.2.3
Operation settings
■ Operation policy setup
Set the threshold for notification of SDPV overflow that may occur during copy operations and the action of the
notification.
[Example]
Setting for notification of "information", "warning", and "error" if up to 60% and 80%, and more than 95% of
the SDPV capacity is used respectively.
CLI> set advanced-copy-policy -level information -threshold 60
CLI> set advanced-copy-policy -level warning -threshold 80
CLI> set advanced-copy-policy -level error -threshold 95
[Example]
Set whether to send a notification for each threshold with an e-mail message (or SNMP) or not.
CLI> set event-notification -level i-sdp-policy-information -target email -suppression disable
4.2.3
Copy Session Management
4.2.3.1
Copy management
After preparation for Advanced Copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. During
operation, also check the status of the copy sessions and delete unnecessary copy sessions.
■ SnapOPC+ copy execution
Create a copy session by using the "start advanced-copy" command to start the SnapOPC+ copy.
[Example]
Starting the SnapOPC+ copy from the copy source volume#0 to copy destination volume (SDV) #100.
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 100
383
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
[Example]
Performing copies of seven generations with day-by-day rotation.
(Monday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 100
(Tuesday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 101
(Wednesday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 102
(Thursday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 103
(Friday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 104
(Saturday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 105
(Sunday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 106
(Monday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 100
(Tuesday)
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-number 0 -destination-volume-number 101
:
(Daily copy operations are repeated hereinafter)
:
When setting the SnapOPC+ session of volume#0100 for Monday,
• The SnapOPC+ session for the last Monday is deleted.
• The SDP used for the SnapOPC+ session for the last Monday is released and a new SnapOPC+ session is set
as a new backup point.
If the update size exceeds the SDV capacity, additional capacity is allocated from the SDPV area in units of
SDPE.
■ Copy session check
Check the status of the copy sessions by using the "show advanced-copy-sessions" command.
The "show advanced-copy-sessions" command displays the status of all the copy sessions.
[Example]
CLI> show advanced-copy-sessions
■ Copy session deletion
Delete unnecessary copy sessions by using the "stop advanced-copy" command.
SDPs used by the deleted copy sessions are released.
Data in the copy destination volume loses its meaning (becomes undefined).
[Example]
Deleting the copy session with copy session ID 1.
CLI> stop advanced-copy -session-id 1 -delete-mode normal
384
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set advanced-copy-license
set advanced-copy-license
There are four types of copy licenses: a "legitimate version", a "trial version", a "VAAI version" and a "free"
version". The "free" license is available only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2. If an attempt is made to
register a legitimate version license that is lower in software level than the already registered legitimate
license in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, an error occurs. The trial period of an already registered trial
version license can be changed only once by registering another trial version license. If a second attempt is
made, an error occurs. In addition, when a trial version license key is registered again, the trial period may be
shortened due to the valid period of the license key.
■ Syntax
set advanced-copy-license {-key key | -type { free | vaai} }
■ Parameter
-key
or
-type
This parameter specifies the Advanced Copy license key or the license type. The license key is
16 letters (fixed). Specify "free" for a free license. The "VAAI mode" version and "free" version
license types do not require a license key.
free
Free version (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
vaai
VAAI mode version
■ Example(s)
The following example registers an Advanced Copy license:
CLI> set advanced-copy-license -key 1928569802345721
The following example registers a "free" Advanced Copy license:
CLI> set advanced-copy-license -type free
385
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > delete advanced-copy-license
delete advanced-copy-license
This command deletes the registered Advanced Copy license.
■ Syntax
delete advanced-copy-license -execution {yes | no}
■ Parameter
-execution
This parameter confirms that the operation should proceed. The Advanced Copy license is
deleted only when the user explicitly specifies "-execution yes".
yes
The registered Advanced Copy license is deleted.
no
No operation.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the registered Advanced Copy license:
CLI> delete advanced-copy-license -execution yes
386
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-license
show advanced-copy-license
This command displays the registration status of the Advanced Copy license.
■ Syntax
show advanced-copy-license
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Copy
# Type
# Local
Status
# Remote
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
[Trial]
A
[Registered]
E
Trial registration
Date
2010/11/27 (1)
B
C
F
G
Trial expiration
Date
2011/01/05
D
H
Local copy license status "-", "Free/VAAI" (only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2), "VAAI", "Trial" and
"Registered".
Registration date of the trial version license for local copy. "-" is displayed for license that is not the trial
version.
Local copy, how many times the trial license is registered. If the license is not trial, it does not appear.
Local copy, trial license expiration date. If the license is not trial, it shows as "-".
Remote copy license status "-", "Trial" and "Registered".
Registration date of the trial version license for remote copy. "-" is displayed for license that is not the trial
version.
Remote copy, how many times the trial license is registered. If the license is not trial, it does not appear.
Trial period of the trial version license for remote copy. "-" is displayed for license that is not the trial version.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the registration status of the Advanced Copy license:
CLI> show advanced-copy-license
Copy
Status
Trial registration
Type
Date
Local
[Trial]
2010/11/27 (1)
Remote
[Registered] -
Trial expiration
Date
2011/01/05
-
The following example displays the status of the "VAAI mode" Advanced Copy license:
CLI> show advanced-copy-license
Copy
Status
Trial registration
Type
Date
[VAAI]
-
Trial expiration
Date
-
387
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-license
The following example displays the status of the free Advanced Copy license (for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90
S2):
CLI> show advanced-copy-license
Copy
Status
Trial registration
Type
Date
[Free/VAAI]
-
Trial expiration
Date
-
388
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set advanced-copy-policy
set advanced-copy-policy
This command sets the Advanced Copy pool policy (the threshold value of the Snap Pool area usage for each
policy level).
■ Syntax
set advanced-copy-policy -level {information | warning | error} -threshold threshold
■ Parameter
-level
This parameter specifies the policy level of the Advanced Copy. Only one policy level can be
specified at the same time.
information Information level.
• Settable range is 1 – 97%.
• Default value is 50%.
warning
Warning level.
• Settable range is 2 – 98%.
• Default value is 70%.
error
Error level.
• Settable range is 3 – 99%.
• Default value is 99%.
-threshold
This parameter specifies a threshold corresponding to the specified policy level.
It must be based on the following rule:
0% < Information level < Warning level < Error level < 100%
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the Warning level to 80%:
CLI> set advanced-copy-policy -level warning -threshold 80
389
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-policy
show advanced-copy-policy
This command displays the Advanced Copy policies for all the snap data pools that are assigned to the system.
■ Syntax
show advanced-copy-policy
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# SDP-ID
#
0
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
Information
50%
B
Warning
90%
C
Error
99%
D
Snap data pool number
Threshold value that is registered as the Advanced Copy policy Information level
Threshold value that is registered as the Advanced Copy policy Warning level
Threshold value that is registered as the Advanced Copy policy Error level
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the Advanced Copy policy:
CLI> show advanced-copy-policy
SDP-ID Information Warning Error
0
50%
90%
99%
390
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set advanced-copy-parameters
set advanced-copy-parameters
This command sets up parameters to use the Advanced Copy functions.
■ Syntax
set advanced-copy-parameters [-resolution {1|2|4|8|16}] [-table-size table_size ] [-sdpe {1g|2g|4g}]
[-ec-opc-priority {auto|very-low|low|middle|high|low}] [-warning warning_level ]
[-copy-schedule-mode {session-balancing|dst-rg-balancing}]
■ Parameter
-resolution
-table-size
Optional. This parameter specifies the Advanced Copy resolution. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
1
1 (default)
2
2
4
4
8
8
16
16
Optional. This parameter specifies the Advanced Copy table size. The size can be specified in
multiples of 8MB. Note that the maximum value depends on the memory size that is to be
installed in the controllers. The initial value is set to 0MB. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
The maximum Advanced Copy table size for each model are shown below:
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2: 0 to 256MB
ETERNUS DX410 S2: 0 to 512MB
ETERNUS DX440 S2: 0 to 4096MB
ETERNUS DX8100 S2: 0 to 1024MB
ETERNUS DX8700 S2: 0 to 12288MB
-sdpe
Optional. This parameter specifies the resolution for the SDPV. The initial value is set to 1GB. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
1g
1GB (default)
2g
2GB
4g
4GB
391
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set advanced-copy-parameters
-ec-opc-priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the EC/OPC priority and the EC/OPC rate mode. The initial
value is "auto". If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-warning
auto
Automatically (default)
very-low
Very low priority
low
Low priority
middle
Middle priority
high
High priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the threshold value for Advanced Copy table usage. This
value is indicated by percent (%). The initial value is set to 80%. If omitted, the existing setting
is not changed. In addition, the system has a function that notifies users when this value
reaches the specified upper limit value. This upper limit value is set by using this parameter.
For details, refer to the "show event-notification" command.
-copy-schedule-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the Copy Schedule Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed.
session-balancing
Session balancing is performed.
dst-rg-balancing
Destination RAID Group balancing is performed.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up Advanced Copy parameters. The resolution is set to twice the default, the
table size is set to 128MB, and the EC/OPC priority is set to automatic mode.
CLI> set advanced-copy-parameters -resolution 2 -table-size 128 -ec-opc-priority auto
392
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-parameters
show advanced-copy-parameters
This command displays the current settings of the Advanced Copy parameters.
■ Syntax
show advanced-copy-parameters
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Resolution
[x2]
A
# Advanced Copy Table Size [128MB]
B
# EC/OPC Priority
[Auto]
C
# Current EC/OPC Priority
D
# SDPE
E
# Advanced Copy Table Usage Threshold
F
# Used Advanced Copy Table Size
G
# Usable Advanced Copy Size
H
# Copy Schedule Mode
I
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
[Low Priority]
[1GB]
[80%]
[30MB]
[20GB]
[Session balancing]
Resolution
Advanced Copy table size
EC/OPC priority and EC/OPC rate mode that is currently set in the system (Example: Auto, Very Low Priority, Low
Priority, Middle Priority, High Priority)
EC/OPC priority that is currently used
Resolution of a snap data pool volume
Threshold value of the Advanced Copy table usage
Advanced Copy table size that is currently used
Usable Advanced Copy table size
Copy Schedule Mode (Example: Session balancing, Destination RAID Group balancing)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the Advanced Copy parameters:
CLI> show advanced-copy-parameters
Resolution
Advanced Copy Table Size
EC/OPC Priority
Current EC/OPC Priority
SDPE
Advanced Copy Table Usage Threshold
Used Advanced Copy Table Size
Usable Advanced Copy Size
Copy Schedule Mode
[x2]
[128MB]
[Auto]
[Low Priority]
[1GB]
[80%]
[30MB]
[20GB]
[Session balancing]
393
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > initialize snap-data-volume
initialize snap-data-volume
This command initializes Snap Data Volumes (SDV). Volume types other than snap data volumes cannot be
specified.
■ Syntax
initialize snap-data-volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the Snap Data Volume (SDV) identifiers to be initialized. One or more
SDVs can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example initializes the consecutive SDVs from #1 through #5:
CLI> initialize snap-data-volume -volume-number 1-5
394
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show snap-data-volume
show snap-data-volume
This command displays all the registered Snap Data Volumes (SDV). The SDVs that are displayed can also be
narrowed down by using the option parameter. The display includes the logical size, the physical size, the
used size, and various other items.
■ Syntax
show snap-data-volume [-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names]
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the Snap Data Volume (SDV) identifiers that are to be
displayed. One or more SDVs can be specified at the same time. If this parameter is omitted, all
the SDVs are displayed. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
■ Output
# Volume
Status
Size(MB)
# No. Name
# 100 SDV001 Available 102400
A
B
C
D
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
Logical
Size(MB)
5120
E
Physical Host Used Copy Used Host SDP
Copy SDP
Size(MB) Size(MB) Size(MB) Using Size(MB) Using Size(MB)
4144
3120
1024
3120
1024
F
G
H
I
J
Snap data volume number
Snap data volume name
Volume status
Volume size(unit: MB)
Logical size of SDV (unit: MB)
Physical size of SDV (unit: MB)
Host Used size (unit: MB)
Copy Used size (unit: MB)
Host Using size of snap data pool (SDP) area (unit: MB)
Copy Using size of snap data pool (SDP) area (unit: MB)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays all the registered SDVs:
CLI> show snap-data-volume
Volume
Status
No. Name
100 SDV001
Available
105 SDV002
Available
108 SDV003
Available
Size(MB)
102400
102400
102400
Logical
Size(MB)
5120
5120
5120
Physical
Size(MB)
4144
4144
4144
Host Used
Size(MB)
3120
3120
3120
Copy Used
Size(MB)
1024
1024
1024
Host SDP
Copy SDP
Using Size(MB) Using Size(MB)
3120
1024
3120
1024
3120
1024
395
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show snap-data-pool
show snap-data-pool
This command displays the snap data pool (SDP). The display includes the total size and the assigned size of
the SDP area.
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
show snap-data-pool
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Snap Data Pool Information
#
Total Size(GB)
# Unencrypted
5120
A
# Encrypted
4096
D
Snap
No.
0
G
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
Host Size(GB)
0
B
0
E
Data Pool Volume List
Name
Status
sdpv1
Available
H
I
Copy Size(GB)
5120
C
4096
F
Reserved Deletion
No
J
Size(MB)
5120
K
Total size as unencrypted data. (unit: GB)
Size directly updated from a host as unencrypted data. (unit: GB)
Size that is using the SDP for copying due to a shortage of SDV capacity as unencrypted data. (unit: GB)
Total size as encrypted data. (unit: GB)
Size directly updated from host as encrypted data. (unit: GB)
Size that is using the SDP for copying due to a shortage of SDV capacity as encrypted data. (unit: GB)
Snap data pool volume number
Snap data pool volume name
Snap data pool volume status
It indicates whether the deletion of snap data pool volume is reserved.
Snap data pool volume size
396
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show snap-data-pool
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the SDPs:
CLI> show snap-data-pool
Snap Data Pool Information
Total Size(GB)
Unencrypted
4
Encrypted
0
Snap
No.
2
3
Host Size(GB)
0
0
Copy Size(GB)
0
0
Data Pool Volume List
Name
Status
Reserved Deletion
SDPV#01
Not Ready
No
SDPV#11
Partially Exposed Rebuild No
Size(MB)
2048
2048
397
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > delete snap-data-pool-volume
delete snap-data-pool-volume
This command deletes Snap Data Pool Volumes (SDPV). Other volume types cannot be deleted by this
command.
■ Syntax
delete snap-data-pool-volume {-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names }
-mode {force | reservation}
■ Parameter
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
This parameter specifies the SDPV identifiers to be deleted. One or more volumes can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22).
-mode
This parameter specifies the deletion mode.
force
The SDPV is immediately deleted even when an SDP element (SDPE) has been
assigned to it. Up to 128 volumes can be specified at the same time.
reservation
The SDPV is deleted when the SDPE is no longer used.
■ Example(s)
The following example forcibly deletes the SDPV named "SDPV1":
CLI> delete snap-data-pool-volume -volume-name SDPV1 -mode force
The following example deletes SDPV #1 through #10 when the SDPE is no longer used:
CLI> delete snap-data-pool-volume -volume-number 1-10 -mode reservation
398
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > start advanced-copy
start advanced-copy
This command starts an Advanced Copy SnapOPC+ session. All other Copy types cannot be started using this
command.
■ Syntax
start advanced-copy
{-source-volume-number volume_number | -source-volume-name volume_name }
{-destination-volume-number sdv_number | -destination-volume-name sdv_name }
■ Parameter
-source-volume-number
or
-source-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifier of the copy source. The type must be OPEN.
Only one volume can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax"
(page 22).
-destination-volume-number
or
-destination-volume-name
This parameter specifies the volume identifier of copy destination. The type must be SDV. Only
one volume can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax"
(page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example starts an Advanced Copy session from the volume named "OPEN1" to the volume
named "SDV1":
CLI> start advanced-copy -source-volume-name OPEN1 -destination-volume-name SDV1
399
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > stop advanced-copy
stop advanced-copy
This command stops an Advanced Copy session or sessions. All types of copy sessions can be stopped.
■ Syntax
stop advanced-copy -session-id session_ids [-delete-mode {forced|normal}]
■ Parameter
-session-id
This parameter specifies the session IDs that are to be stopped. One or more numbers can be
specified at the same time.
Example:
-session-id 0 (Only 0)
-session-id 0,1 (0 and 1)
-session-id 2-5 (2 to 5)
-session-id 0,2-5 (0, and 2 to 5)
-delete-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies the deletion mode. This parameter can be specified for any
type of Advanced Copy session. If "forced" is specified, the specified session and all the sessions
before the specified session are forcibly deleted. If omitted, this parameter is handled as
though "normal" is specified. When multiple sessions are specified, this parameter is applied
to all the selected sessions.
forced
Sessions are forcibly deleted.
normal
Sessions are not forcibly deleted (default).
■ Example(s)
The following example forcibly stops Advanced Copy session ID #1:
CLI> stop advanced-copy -session-id 1 -delete-mode forced
400
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
show advanced-copy-sessions
This command displays a list of the Advance Copy sessions that are being started. The number of sessions for
each Advanced Copy type can be displayed when all parameters are omitted. A list of the sessions that are to
be displayed can be narrowed down to the Advanced Copy type, the requester, and the volume type. Details
for a session can also be displayed by specifying the session-ID, which is the number used to identify a
session. Note that only one session can be displayed at a time.
The status of some reserved copy sessions may be displayed as "Reserved" immediately after the session
starts. The type of sessions in Reserved status can only be distinguished as being either OPC, EC, XCOPY, or
ODX. In this case, sessions that are distinguished as OPC or EC may be determined as being another type of
session once the type of copy session can be confirmed.
■ Syntax
show advanced-copy-sessions
[ -session-id id | -type {all|ec|opc|qopc|sopc|sopc+|mon|rec|xcopy|odx}
[-requestor {all|gui|cli|guicli|smis|scsi|lan}] [-volume-type {all|open|standard}] ]
■ Parameter
-session-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the session ID that is to be used to display details. The
session ID is the number to identify a session. Only one session ID can be displayed at a time.
If this parameter is omitted, the details cannot be displayed.
This parameter cannot be specified with other parameters.
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the Advanced Copy type that is used to display a list of the
sessions. If this parameter is omitted, the Advanced Copy type cannot be narrowed down.
• This parameter can be specified with the "-requestor" and "-volume-type" parameters.
• The "-session-id" parameter cannot be specified with this parameter.
401
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
-requestor
all
All sessions for all the types are displayed.
ec
All EC sessions are displayed.
opc
All OPC sessions are displayed.
qopc
All QuickOPC sessions are displayed.
sopc
All SnapOPC sessions are displayed.
sopc+
All SnapOPC+ sessions are displayed.
mon
All Monitor sessions are displayed.
rec
All REC sessions are displayed.
xcopy
All XCopy sessions are displayed.
odx
All ODX copy sessions are displayed.
Optional. This parameter specifies the requester that is to be used to narrow down the
sessions. If omitted, this parameter is handled as though "-requestor all" is specified.
• This parameter can be specified with the "-requestor" and "-volume-type" parameters.
• The "-session-id" parameter cannot be specified with this parameter.
all
Sessions to be displayed are not restricted by the requesters. If omitted, this
operand is assigned.
gui
Only sessions being started from GUI are displayed.
cli
Only sessions being started from CLI are displayed.
guicli
Only sessions being started from both GUI and CLI are displayed.
smis
Only sessions being started from SMI-S are displayed.
scsi
Only sessions being started from SCSI are displayed.
lan
Only sessions being started from Software via LAN except from
SMI-S are displayed.
-volume-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the type of volume that is to be used to narrow down the
sessions. If omitted, this parameter is handled as though "-volume-type all" is specified.
• This parameter must be specified with the "-type" parameter.
• The "-requestor" parameter can be specified with this parameter.
• The "-session-id" parameter cannot be specified with this parameter.
all
Sessions to be displayed are not restricted by the volume type. If omitted, this
operand is assigned.
standard
Only sessions associated with the Standard volume type are displayed.
open
Same as "standard".
402
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
■ Output
When all parameters are omitted:
# Number
A
# Number
B
# Number
C
# Number
D
# Number
E
# Number
F
# Number
G
# Number
H
# Number
I
# Number
J
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
of EC Sessions
:
2
of OPC Sessions
:
1
of QuickOPC Sessions
:
1
of SnapOPC Sessions
:
1
of SnapOPC+ Sessions
:
1
of Monitor Sessions
:
1
of REC Sessions
:
1
of XCopy Sessions
:
1
of ODX Sessions
:
1
of Mainframe Volume Sessions :
1
The number of the Advanced Copy type EC sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type OPC sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type QuickOPC sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type SnapOPC sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type SnapOPC+ sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type Monitor sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type Remote Equivalent Copy (REC) sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type XCOPY sessions
The number of the Advanced Copy type ODX sessions
The number of the Mainframe Copy sessions (Only when GS License is registered)
When a list is displayed:
# SID
GeneType
#
ration
#
0
1/12 SnapOPC+
A
B
C
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
Volume
Type
Standard
D
Source Volume
Destination Volume
Status
No.
Name
No.
Name
8000 VOLUME0000123456 4000 VOLUME1111123456 Active
E
F
G
H
I
Phase
J
Error
Code
0x00
K
Requestor
CLI
L
The session ID of this system is displayed in decimal number.
The generation is displayed only when the type SnapOPC+ is selected.
The Advanced Copy type (EC, OPC, QuickOPC, SnapOPC, SnapOPC+, Monitor, REC, ODX, or XCOPY) is displayed.
The volume type that is to be copied in the session is displayed.
The copy source volume number is displayed.
The copy source volume name is displayed.
The copy destination volume number is displayed when types other than Monitor are selected.
The copy destination volume name is displayed when types other than Monitor are selected.
The session status (Idle, Reserve, Active, Error Suspend, Suspend, or Halt) is displayed.
The session phase (No Pair, Copying, Equivalent, Tracking, Tracking&Copying, or Readying) is displayed when
EC, QuickOPC, Monitor, or REC is selected.
The error code (for details, refer to "Copy session error codes" (page 405)) is displayed as a 2-digit hexadecimal
number.
The requester that started the session (GUI, CLI, SMI-S, SCSI or LAN) is displayed.
403
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
When details are displayed:
# SID
GeneType
Volume
Source Volume
Destination Volume
#
ration
Type
No.
Name
No.
Name
#
3
- EC
Standard
8004 VOLUME001
4004 VOLUME002
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Source Block Address (LBA)
: 0x1234567890123456
M
Destination Block Address (LBA): 0x1234567890123456
N
Total Data Size(MB)
: 1024
O
Copied Data Size(MB)
: 512
P
Modified Data Size(MB)
: Q
SDP Used Capacity(MB)
: R
SDP-ID (assigned to SDV)
: S
Direction
: T
Sync
: U
Transfer Mode
: V
Recovery Mode
: W
Split Mode
: X
Remote Session-ID
: Y
Remote Box-ID
: Z
Time Stamp
: 2010-11-17 18:30:00
a
Elapsed Time
: 1 day 1 hour 32 min 35 sec
b
Resolution
: x2
c
License
: Regular
d
Copy Range
: Extent
e
Secondary Access Permission
: No Read/Write
f
Concurrent Suspend Status
: Normal
g
Change Error
: Normal
h
Remain Time
: 1 day 1 hour 32 min 35 sec
i
Status
Phase
Active
I
Equivalent
J
Error Requestor
Code
0x00 GUI
K
L
A to L: Refer to the above information when a list is displayed.
M: The copy source Start Logical Block Address (LBA) in the specified range is displayed in 16-digit hexadecimal.
N:
The copy destination Start LBA in the specified range is displayed in 16-digit hexadecimal.
O:
Total Data Size is displayed.
P:
Copied Data Size is displayed.
Q:
Modified Data Size is displayed.
R:
Used Snap data pool capacity is displayed when the type SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ is selected.
S:
Snap data pool ID that is assigned to SDV is displayed when the type SnapOPC or SnapOPC+ is selected.
T:
In the relevant copy session, the direction of the copy is displayed when the type REC is selected (Primary: copy
source, Secondary: copy destination).
U:
Operation mode of the session is displayed.
Sync: Synchronous Operation Mode
Async: Asynchronous Operation Mode
V:
Transfer mode of the session is displayed. Details are as follows:
Through Mode: Asynchronous Through Mode
Stack Mode: Asynchronous Stack Mode
Consistency Mode: Asynchronous Consistency Mode
W: The recovery mode of the session is displayed only when the type REC is selected.
Automatic: A mode to restart copying automatically when the REC copy path has recovered from abnormal
status.
Manual: A mode not to restart copying automatically when the REC copy path has recovered from abnormal
status.
404
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
X:
Y:
Z:
a:
b:
c:
d:
e:
f:
g:
h:
i:
The split mode of the relevant session is displayed only when the type REC is selected.
Automatic: A mode in which Write I/O accesses to copy source are accepted when the copy path of REC is in
abnormal status.
Manual: A mode in which Write I/O accesses to copy source are accepted when the copy path of REC is in
abnormal status. Specified sense information is sent to the host.
The session ID of another which is remotely connected with this system is displayed.
The identifier of another which is remotely connected with this system is displayed.
Time stamp is displayed in local time.
The previous time stamp backed-up is displayed when the Status is Active or Suspend.
The time that the accident occurred is displayed when the Status is Error Suspend or Halt.
The elapsed time from starting the session is displayed (unit: day, hour, min, sec).
The resolution of the session is displayed (x2, x4, x8, x16).
The license information of the session is displayed (Regular, Trial, Unknown).
The copy range is displayed. (Totally, Extent)
It indicates whether the Secondary area can be accessed when the Status is Active. (Read Only at Equivalency,
No Read/Write)
It indicates the transition status of Concurrent Suspend. (Normal, Exec, Error, Unknown)
It indicates the execution result of the Change command. (Normal, Mode Change Error, Reverse Error)
It indicates the estimated time until the transition to Suspend status is complete.
■ Copy session error codes
Error code
Description
0x10 – 0x1F
An error that is caused by a copy source volume occurs. Some copy source volumes cannot be accessed because a failure has occurred in a component (e.g. drives and drive
enclosures).
0x20 – 0x2F
An error that is caused by a copy destination volume occurs. Some copy destination volumes cannot be accessed because a failure has occurred in a component (e.g. drives
and drive enclosures).
0x30 – 0x3F
An error that occurs due to a path.
0xBA
Bad data exists.
0xBB
SDV/SDP capacity is insufficient.
0xBD
Overload status is detected in a copy destination volume or a copy destination storage
system.
0xBE
A line has failed. Data is stored in the REC Buffer. This error is displayed only when the
"Type" is "REC".
0xBF
A line has failed. Data is stored in the REC Disk Buffer. This error is displayed only when
the "Type" is "REC".
Error codes other than above
An error other than the ones listed above occurs.
405
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the number of sessions for each Advanced Copy type (when GS License is not
registered). In this example, a list of sessions is not displayed:
CLI> show
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
advanced-copy-sessions
EC Sessions
OPC Sessions
QuickOPC Sessions
SnapOPC Sessions
SnapOPC+ Sessions
Monitor Sessions
REC Sessions
REC Sessions
XCopy Sessions
ODX Sessions
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The following example displays the number of sessions for each Advanced Copy type (when GS License is
registered). In this example, a list of sessions is not displayed.
CLI> show
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
Number of
advanced-copy-sessions
EC Sessions
OPC Sessions
QuickOPC Sessions
SnapOPC Sessions
SnapOPC+ Sessions
Monitor Sessions
REC Sessions
XCopy Sessions
Mainframe Volume Sessions
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The following example displays all the sessions for all Advanced Copy types:
CLI> show advanced-copy-sessions -type
SID
Gene- Type
Volume
Source
ration
Type
No.
0
1/12 SnapOPC+ Standard
8000
1
- QuickOPC Standard
8002
2
- Monitor Standard
8003
3
- EC
Standard
8004
4
- EC
Standard
8005
5
- OPC
Standard
8006
6
- REC
Standard
8007
7
- XCopy
Standard
8008
15
- ODX
Standard
8009
8002
- SnapOPC Standard
8001
all
Volume
Destination Volume
Status
Name
No. Name
VOLUME0000123456 4000 VOLUME1111123456 Active
VOLUME0000123457 4002 VOLUME1111123457 Active
VOLUME111
- Active
VOLUME001
4004 VOLUME002
Active
VOLUME005
4005 VOLUME505
Suspend
VOLUME006
4006 VOLUME606
Active
VOLUME007
4007 VOLUME707
Active
VOLUME008
4008 VOLUME808
Active
VOLUME006
4009 VOLUME909
Active
VOLUME0000111111 3000 VOLUME3000
Active
Phase
Error Requestor
Code
0x00 CLI
0x00 SMI-S
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 SCSI
Tracking&Copying
Copying
Equivalent
Copying
-
The following example only displays the EC type sessions:
CLI> show advanced-copy-sessions -type
SID
GeneType
Volume
Source
ration
Type
No.
3
EC
Standard
8004
4
EC
Standard
8005
ec
Volume
Name
VOLUME001
VOLUME005
Destination Volume
No. Name
4004 VOLUME002
4005 VOLUME505
Status
Phase
Active
Suspend
Equivalent
Copying
Error
Code
0x00
0x00
Requestor
GUI
GUI
The following example only displays the sessions that are being started by GUI amongst all the sessions.
When narrowing down the sessions by requester, the "-type" parameter must be specified with the "requestor" parameter.
CLI> show advanced-copy-sessions -type all -requestor gui
SID
GeneType
Volume
Source Volume
Destination Volume
ration
Type
No.
Name
No. Name
2
- Monitor Standard
8003 VOLUME111
- 3
- EC
Standard
8004 VOLUME001
4004 VOLUME002
4
- EC
Standard
8005 VOLUME005
4005 VOLUME505
15
- OPC
Standard
8006 VOLUME006
4006 VOLUME606
Status
Active
Active
Suspend
Error Suspend
Phase
Copying
Equivalent
Copying
-
Error Requestor
Code
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
0x00 GUI
406
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show advanced-copy-sessions
The following example displays the details of session #3: Multiple sessions cannot be specified at the same
time.
CLI> show advanced-copy-sessions -session-id 3
# SID
GeneType
Volume
Source Volume
Destination Volume
#
ration
Type
No. Name
No. Name
#
3
EC
Standard 8004 VOLUME001
4004 VOLUME002
Source Block Address (LBA)
: 0x1234567890123456
Destination Block Address (LBA): 0x1234567890123456
Total Data Size(MB)
: 1024
Copied Data Size(MB)
: 512
Modified Data Size(MB)
: SDP Used Capacity(MB)
: SDP-ID (assigned to SDV)
: Direction
: Sync
: Transfer Mode
: Recovery Mode
: Split Mode
: Remote Session-ID
: Remote Box-ID
: Time Stamp
: 2010-11-17 18:30:00
Elapsed Time
: 1 day 1 hour 32 min 35 sec
Resolution
: x2
License
: Regular
Copy Range
: Extent
Secondary Access Permission
: No Read/Write
Concurrent Suspend Status
: Normal
Change Error
: Normal
Remain Time
: 1 day 1 hour 32 min 35 sec
Status
Phase
Active
Equivalent
Error Requestor
Code
0x00 GUI
407
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2.4
Remote Equivalent Copy Management
The functions described in this section are not supported for the ETERNUS DX80 S2.
Remote Equivalent Copy (REC) is a function that is used to perform Equivalent Copy (EC) between remote
storage systems. CLI for settings related to REC allows the composing of REC path information, setting
information, tuning performance and other similar actions, but cannot support starting sessions and session
management. For controlling sessions, use ACM and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager. For further
information, refer to the related documentation.
For details about the license that is required for REC session connections, refer to the "set advanced-copylicense" and the "show advanced-copy-license" commands.
The CLI commands for Remote Equivalent Copy are listed in the following table:
Function
Command
Port mode
set host-port-mode
show host-port-mode
REC path
import rec-path
show rec-path
export backup-rec-path
show backup-rec-path-information
convert rec-path
Round trip time
measure rec-round-trip-time
set rec-round-trip-time
REC multiplicity
set rec-multiplicity
REC buffer
set rec-buffer
delete rec-buffer
show rec-buffer
REC disk buffer
create rec-disk-buffer
set rec-disk-buffer
delete rec-disk-buffer
show rec-disk-buffer
format rec-disk-buffer
release rec-disk-buffer
This section explains the CLI commands related to the environment settings used to control the REC. The
minimum requirements for both the copy source storage system and the copy destination storage system is a
path information file that defines the data transmission line and related performance boosting settings.
408
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2.5
Summaries of REC Environment Settings through CLI
Even though REC sessions may be started by using ACM and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager upon
applying the REC environment settings using CLI, it is recommended that round trip times be measured to
optimize the performance between storage systems. The steps involved in setting the REC environment using
CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
Switch the host interface ports to RA mode or CA/RA auto mode (on both the copy source
and the copy destination storage systems)
Use the "set host-port-mode" command to set the host interface port that is to be used to establish an
REC path to RA mode or CA/RA auto mode. The currently set mode can also be displayed by using the
"show host-port-mode" command. Parameter settings for each host interface port can be set by using
the "set fc-parameters" and "set iscsi parameters" commands.
2
Create TEXT type REC path information (TEXT type is recommended for CLI)
Describe the REC path information using a text editor, commercial software, etc. For details, refer to the
descriptions that follow.
3
Apply the REC path information
Use the "import rec-path" command to apply the REC path information to the target storage systems
(both the copy source and the copy destination). If a syntax error is detected, the command will
terminate with an error message and an error line. Make sure that the information in the REC path
information file matches the actual setup.
4
Measure and apply round trip times
Firstly, measure the round trip time using the "measure rec-round-trip-time" command in automatic
mode and apply it in the system. Individual round trip times can be manually measured and applied
afterwards if necessary. Multiplicity can also be set to fine tune the REC performance. For detail, refer to
the set rec-multiplicity command.
5
Define REC buffers (Only for REC Asynchronous Consistency Mode)
If the mode is used, define an REC buffer using the "set rec-buffer" command. The configuration and
status of the REC buffer can be checked by using the "show rec-buffer" command.
End of procedure
The following functions (services) are also supported:
• Exporting the REC path information system backup file to an FTP server.
• Converting the REC path information file type bi-directionally, from TEXT type to BINARY type, or from
BINARY type to TEXT type.
4.2.5.1
Path Information File
In order to control the REC, a path information file must be created. This file contains Box IDs, information
identifying ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems and remote adapters, host interface port information for the
host interface adapters installed in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. This file is set to RA (Remote
Adapter) mode. In the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, two different path information file formats are
supported; TEXT type and BINARY type.
409
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
• TEXT type
Path information is directly described using a text editor or similar tool (details follow). This is the
recommended approach for CLI-use.
• BINARY type
Path information is created and revised using the GUI edit function. This is the recommended approach for
GUI-use.
The contents of a typical REC path information file are as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2#1
Configuration Information in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system
CLI
Back-up REC Path Information
REC Path Information
Path information file
(BINARY type)
ETERNUS DX90 S2#2
show rec-path
CLI
show backup-rec-path
convert rec-path
show backup-rec-path-information
import rec -path
Either type is fine.
FTP server
Path information file
(TEXT type)
Path information can be
converted to the other type
with a CLI command.
Path information file
(BINARY type)
Path information can be directly
described with a text editor.
Path information can be created
and revised with a GUI tool.
ETERNUS DX90 S2#3
GUI
4.2.5.2
Storage system
information file
Path Information File Syntax (TEXT type)
For CLI-use, a path information file should be created using text editor, or something similar. The TEXT type
path information file description rules are as follows:
■ Basic rules
• Only ASCII characters may be used.
• All label names must be in lowercase. The following is a correct example.
storage 10
The following example has an uppercase label (a syntax error):
STORAGE 10
• Lines 'starting' (first non-space character) with a hash mark (#) are handled as comment lines. The
following example shows a correct comment line:
# definition of storage system
410
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
The following line is NOT handled as a comment line because the "box-id" string appears before the hash
mark:
box-id ###DXL###
• The number of space is not restricted. Note that at least one or more space keys are required between a
label name and operand, to set value. The following example is also identified as a correct line.
storage
10
The following example has no spaces between the "storage" label name and the operand value "10" (a
syntax error):
storage10
• The ASCII characters CR+LF (hexadecimal code 0x0d0a) are expected for line breaks, with CR or LF alone
also being interpreted as a line break. When exporting the system backup path information, line breaks
are output as ASCII code CR+LF.
• The maximum number of characters for each line is 256 (including the line break characters).
■ Authentication strings
• The following fixed string must be described from the first line and 1 column. Any space characters must
not be inserted:
eternus-rec-path-text-0101
■ Storage system definitions
storage
Defines an identification number (0-127) for each of the local and remote storage systems.
Usable numbers can be freely selected within this range. The following example uses "0" as
the storage system id number:
storage 0
box-id
Defines a Box ID for the target storage system. Note the following:
• The Box ID value must be double-quoted.
• Lowercase characters are automatically converted to uppercase.
• Hash marks (#) are automatically appended to Box IDs shorter than 40 characters in length.
• The Box ID can be confirmed using the "show boxid" command.
box-id "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######"
device-type
Defines a device type for the target storage system. The storage system is specified by two
numbers that indicate the unit type and the unit sub type.
The meaning of these numbers are shown in the table below.
Storage series / models
Unit type
Unit sub type
ETERNUS DX90 S2
4
4
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2
4
5
ETERNUS DX8100 S2
4
5
ETERNUS DX8700 S2
4
6
ETERNUS DX90
3
2
411
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
Examples are shown below.
device-type 4, 5
cmX-caY-portZ Define the World Wide Name (WWN) or iSCSI parameters of a host interface port set to RA
mode or CA/RA auto mode in the target storage system. The X in a label name is the
controller module number and the Y is the host interface port number on the controller.
Note the following points (in this case, all of the host interface ports on CM#0 are defined):
• RA mode or CA/RA auto mode can be switched by using the "set host-port-mode"
command.
• Host interface port WWNs or iSCSI name may be confirmed using the "show fru-ce"
command.
• The limitation for the number of characters for each iSCSI parameter is as follows:
- iSCSI name: At least 4 and a maximum of 223.
- RA port CHAP authentication username: At least 1 and a maximum of 63.
- RA port CHAP authentication password: At least 12 and a maximum of 32.
- When CHAP authentication is disabled, CHAP authentication username and password
should be omitted.
- Alias: At least 0 and a maximum of 31, which must be enclosed with double
quotations.
For example:
cm0-ca0-port0
cm0-ca0-port1
cm0-ca3-port2
cm0-ca3-port3
40000000abc80e38
40000000abc80e3a
40000000abc80e3c
40000000abc80e3e
Example host interface port iSCSI parameter definitions:
cm0-ca0-port0 iqn.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusdx400:00040080,10.11.12.13,eternus,bamboo,"eternus000"
cm1-ca1-port1 iqn.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusdx400:00040080,10.11.12.22,,,""
cm1-ca0-port0 iqn.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040080,fe80::250,,,""
cm1-ca1-port1 iqn.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternusdx400:00040080,2000:100::10:1:0:250,,,""
■ Inter storage system REC path information definitions
In order to use REC, a file that specifies the inter-storage-system copy paths must be created. This contains
REC path information indicating the whole paths (copy source, copy destination, and the path between them)
that are to be used for REC.
The following examples describe the various inter-storage-system REC path information parameters.
storage-link X,Y
Defines the numbers of the two storage systems (the copy source and the copy destination)
that are to be linked. The numbers are those used in the storage system definitions. The
following example shows numbers from the storage system definitions being used.
storage-link 5,6
412
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
path-type {direct | switched}
Defines the type of path connection between the linked storage systems. If the storage
systems are directly connected (P2P), use "direct". If the storage systems are connected
through a switch, use "switched". Direct connection example:
path-type direct
Switched connection example:
path-type switched
line-speed {1-65535}
Defines an effective line speed for the path between the linked storage systems. This is the
WAN bandwidth that is actually available and used for the REC. The possible range is from 1
to 65535 and the units are megabits per second (= Mbit/s). This definition is only specified
for switched type paths. The following example specifies 100 Mbit/s as the effective line
speed:
line-speed 100
port-link cmX-caY-portZ,cmW-caV-portU
Respectively defines the target host interface ports in the local and remote storage systems
in the same order as used in the "storage-link" field. In the following example, for the
"storage-link 5,6" used in the above storage system definition example, cm0-ca0-port1
belongs to storage system #5 and cm1-ca2-port3 belongs to storage system #6. In the
"cmX-portY-portZ,cmW-portV-portU" format, X and W indicate the controller module
number, Y and V indicate the host adapter on the specified controller module (0 is specified
for the ETERNUS DX90 S2), and Z and U indicate the host interface port number of the
specified host adapter.
port-link cm0-ca0-port1,cm1-ca2-port3
Note that space characters may not be inserted before and after the commas (,). The
following example has a space character after the comma (a syntax error):
port-link cm0-ca0-port1, cm1-ca2-port3
413
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
The example path information file that follows is based on the path topology shown below:
storage system #0
port#0
CM#0
CA0
Storage system #1
port#0
port#1
port#2
CA2
CM#1
CM#0
port#1
port#2
port#3
port#3
Storage system #2
CA1
port#0
port#1
CM#1
port#0
CM#0
port#1
CM#1
CA0
port#0
port#1
port#2
port#3
Storage system #3
port#0
CA3
CM#0
CM#1
port#1
CA1
port#0
port#1
414
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
eternus-rec-path-text-0101
# REC Path information file for ETERNUS
# Definition of storage system
# Storage system #0
storage 0
box-id
"00ETERNUSDXMS2ET00000A####EI000000######"
device-type 4,5
cm0-ca0-port2 40000000abc80e42
cm0-ca0-port3 40000000abc80e43
cm0-ca1-port0 40000000abc80e50
cm0-ca1-port1 40000000abc80e51
cm1-ca1-port0 irq.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040080,10.11.12.13,etern us,bamboo,"n0p110"
cm1-ca1-port1 irq.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040080,10.11.12.14,,,""
# Storage system #1
storage 1
box-id
"00ETERNUSDXMS2ET00000A####EI000001######"
device-type 4,5
cm1-ca2-port2 40000000abc80e42
cm1-ca2-port3 40000000abc80e43
# Storage system #2
storage 2
box-id
"00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######"
device-type 4,4
cm1-ca0-port0 40000000abc80e42
cm1-ca0-port1 40000000abc80e43
# Storage system #3
storage 3
box-id
"00ETERNUSDXMS2ET00000A####EI000003######"
device-type 4,5
cm0-ca3-port0 irq.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040080,10.11.12.93,eternus,bamboo,"n3p030"
cm0-ca3-port1 irq.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040080,10.11.12.94,,,""
# Definition of REC path information
# Linked between 0 and 1
storage-link 0,1
path-type
direct
port-link cm0-ca0-port2,cm1-ca2-port2
port-link cm0-ca0-port3,cm1-ca2-port3
# Linked between 2 and 0
storage-link 2,0
path-type
switched
line-speed
1000
port-link cm1-ca0-port0,cm0-ca1-port0
port-link cm1-ca0-port1,cm0-ca1-port1
# Linked between 0 and 3
storage-link 0,3
path-type
switched
line-speed
1000
port-link cm1-ca1-port0,cm0-ca3-port0
port-link cm1-ca1-port1,cm0-ca3-port1
415
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
4.2.5.3
REC Multiplicity
An REC multiplicity value must be set for the REC path between storage systems, and is determined based on
the following two values:
• Effective line speed (as described in the REC path information file)
• Round trip time (as actually measured using a CLI command)
The schematic diagram for determining the REC multiplicity is as follows:
Multiplicity
Output
A different multiplicity
may be manually set.
Recommended value
(Calculated from three values)
Automatic calculation by the system
Effective line speed
(In path information file)
4.2.5.4
Round trip time
(Measured value)
Input (two values)
Assigning REC Buffers
An area that is used to divide REC buffers is called a partition. This area can also be called a group. An REC
buffer must be assigned when the REC Asynchronous Consistency function is used. Up to 8192MB (*1) can be
assigned in the memory space area of REC buffers, and this can be separated into several partitions for each
CM. The maximum number of partitions in the system is 8 (*1). The maximum size of a partition is 2048MB
and the minimum is 128MB. Each partition is handled by specifying its partition number from 0 to 7 (*1).
*1:
These are the specification values for the ETERNUS DX440 S2. Values differ among models and types. For details,
refer to the "set rec-buffer" command.
The following example shows how partitions can be assigned for the ETERNUS DX440 S2:
Case.1. No partitions assigned:
8,192MB
Case.2. The maximum size memory is assigned to a single partition:
2,048MB
Case.3. 2048MB of memory is assigned to four separate partitions:
2,048MB
2,048MB
2,048MB
2,048MB
Case.4. 1024MB of memory is assigned to eight separate partitions:
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
416
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
Case.5. 2048MB of memory is assigned to one partition, and 1024MB of memory is assigned to six separate
partitions:
2,048MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
Assigning REC Disk Buffers
An REC disk buffer is used with REC buffer for REC Asynchronous Consistency when an REC buffer flood has
occurred. An REC disk buffer is made from four disks and is displayed as a RAID group of RAID1+0. However, it
is only used as an REC disk buffer. Up to 4 REC disk buffers can be assigned to one REC buffer.
The following figure shows how the REC disk buffer is used:
Volume 0
REC destination storage
REC disk buffer
Volume 2
Volume 1
Flood data is
cached to the
REC disk
buffer
temporarily.
Volume 2
REC buffer
partition 7
...
Volume 1
RA
Assign REC buffer for each
session.
REC buffer
partition 3
REC buffer
partition 2
REC buffer
partition 1
RA
Volume 0
4.2.5.5
1024MB
REC source storage
■ Summary of REC disk buffer settings through CLI
The steps involved in settings an REC disk buffer using CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
Create REC disk buffer.
To create an REC disk buffer, choose four disks that do not belong to a RAID group by using the "create
rec-disk-buffer" command.
Then create a volume from this RAID group. This is a RAID group that can be displayed by using the
"show rec-disk-buffer" command.
2
Format REC disk buffer volume.
When an REC disk buffer is created, a volume is also created. This volume must be formatted by using
the "format rec-disk-buffer" command.
417
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management
3
Associate REC buffer with REC disk buffer.
To associate an REC buffer with an REC disk buffer, use the "set rec-disk-buffer" command.
• To release the REC disk buffer from the REC buffer, use the "release rec-disk-buffer" command. This
can be confirmed by using the "show rec-disk-buffer" command.
• To delete an REC disk buffer, use the "delete rec-disk-buffer" command.
End of procedure
The following figure shows the process involved in setting the REC disk buffer through CLI:
Create one volume at the same time
that the REC disk buffer is created.
REC buffer
partition 2
Volume
format rec-disk-buffer
set rec-disk-buffer
(Association)
REC Disk Buffer
release rec-disk-buffer
delete rec-disk-buffer
"RECDB0001"
(Release)
create rec-disk-buffer
400
401
423
500
501
523
Use four disks
418
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set host-port-mode
set host-port-mode
This command sets which mode to use for host interface ports.
• Host interface ports used to REC functions must be switched to RA mode or CA/RA auto mode.
• When switching to RA mode or CA/RA auto mode, all host mapping information associated with the port
is lost.
• When reverting to CA mode, all REC path information defined for the port is lost.
• When the port mode is switched from the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode to another mode, the REC
transfer mode setting (Consistency/Stack/Through/Sync) of the port is changed to the default value
("enable" for all of the setting).
• When the port mode is switched from the RA mode to the CA/RA auto mode or vice versa, the REC transfer
mode setting (Consistency/Stack/Through/Sync) of the port is retained.
• When the port mode is switched from the RA mode or the CA/RA auto mode to another mode, the line
number (REC Line No.) setting of the port is changed to the default value (0).
• When the port mode is switched from the RA mode to the CA/RA auto mode or vice versa, the line number
(REC Line No.) setting for the port is retained.
■ Syntax
set host-port-mode -port {xyz|all} -mode {ra|ca|cara|initiator}
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the number of the host interface port that is to be switched. Two or
more parameters can be specified by separating them with a comma.
Example: -port 000,100
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
-mode
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host
interface port number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1 CA#2 port#3
all
All the host interface ports
Optional. This parameter specifies operation mode for the host interface port. RA mode must
be set when the REC functions are used. The RA mode can only be set for FC ports and iSCSI
ports. The Initiator mode can only be set for FC ports.
ra
RA mode (for REC)
ca
CA mode
initiator
Initiator mode (for Storage Migration)
cara
CA/RA auto mode
419
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set host-port-mode
■ Example(s)
The following example switches host interface port #0 on CM#1 CA#0 to RA mode:
CLI> set host-port-mode -port 100 -mode ra
The following example reverts port #3 on CM#1 CA#0 to CA mode:
CLI> set host-port-mode -port 103 -mode ca
The following example switches all the host interface ports to RA mode:
CLI> set host-port-mode -port all -mode ra
420
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show host-port-mode
show host-port-mode
This command displays operation mode that is set to each host interface port.
■ Syntax
show host-port-mode
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
#
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
A
A:
B:
Port Mode
RA
B
A location of a host interface port
Operation mode for a host interface port
■ Example(s)
The following example displays operation mode that is set to all the host interface ports on a system:
CLI> show host-port-mode
Port Mode
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 RA
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1 OCLINK
CM#0 CA#1 Port#0 CA
CM#0 CA#1 Port#1 CA
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0 RFCF-RA
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1 FCLINK
421
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > import rec-path
import rec-path
This command is used to import an REC path information file from a specified FTP server and apply it to a
system. Either type, TEXT or BINARY is available.
• For details, refer to "4.2.4 Remote Equivalent Copy Management" (page 408).
• If a TEXT type path information file has syntax errors, the number of the problem line is included with the
error message.
• This command may also be used to apply a GUI-created BINARY type path information file.
■ Syntax
import rec-path -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account -filename filename [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For details,
refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31)
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port
This parameter specifies the name of the FTP server that contains the REC path information
file. The server name format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or a fully
qualified domain name.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
-filename
This parameter specifies the REC path information filename.
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
422
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > import rec-path
■ Example(s)
The following example imports an REC path information file from the FTP server named "ftp.a.com" using the
Maintenance-use Ethernet port (MNT port). For the FTP server, the user name is "cli-user" and the filename is
"/tmp/rec-path1.txt".
CLI> import rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/rec-path1.txt -user cli-user
Password :
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
importing /tmp/rec-path1.txt from ftp.a.com
complete.
The following example is the same as above, except that the progress indicator is not displayed:
CLI> import rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/rec-path1.txt -user cli-user -indicator disable
Password :
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
423
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-path
show rec-path
This command is used to display the detailed REC path information of a system, and also displays the status of
any remotely connected devices. If this parameter is omitted, the information regarding all remote storage
systems is listed. If this parameter is specified, the path information for a single device can be displayed.
■ Syntax
show rec-path [-remote-boxid remote_storage_box_id]
■ Parameter
-remote-boxid
Optional. This parameter specifies the Box ID of the storage system whose REC path
information details are to be displayed. Only one Box ID can be specified at a time. If this
parameter is omitted, a list of the storage system and its remote storage systems is displayed
• Box IDs use a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and pound key characters
(#).
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• The pound key characters (#) are automatically appended when the input characters are
less than 40.
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted:
# Remote Storage System
# E Remote Box ID
#
#
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
# * 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000004######
A B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Path Type Line Speed Round Trip Multiplicity
(Mbit/s)
Time (ms) Current / Recommended
Direct
Switched
10
20
4
C
D
E
F
G
Priority Copy Schedule
Level
Mode
3 Session
3
- Destination
H
I
Error sign. If "*" mark is output, it means that path information status between storage systems is not normal.
You can check details by trying this command with this remote Box ID.
Box ID of a remote storage system registered in the system
Connection form of a remote storage system registered in the system
Effective line speed of a remote storage system registered in the system
Round trip time of a remote storage system registered in the system. If a round trip time is not measured,
`Unknown' is displayed.
Actual multiplicity of a remote storage system registered in the system. If "Auto" is displayed, it indicates that a
recommended multiplicity is used.
Multiplicity recommended by the system. If the round trip time is "Unknown", "***" is displayed.
Copy revel of a remote storage system registered in the system. "auto" indicates that the EC/OPC rate is used.
Copy Schedule Mode
424
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-path
When the parameter is specified:
# Storage Information
# Local Box ID (Current Storage System) 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000001######
A
# Remote Box ID
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######
B
# Line Information
# Path type
Switched
C
# Effective Line Speed
10 (Mbit/s)
D
# Round Trip Time
12 (ms)
E
# Current Multiplicity
Auto
F
# Recommended Multiplicity
3
G
# Priority Level
1
H
# Copy schedule Mode
Session balancing
I
# Path Information (to Remote Storage System)
# Local Port
Status
Remote Port WWN / iSCSI Name (IP Address)
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Error [I C S O T] 500000E0D0C40006
J
K
L
M
# CM#1 CA#1 Port#0 Normal
irq.2010-12.com (FE80::290:CCFF:FEA4:3A49)
J
K
N
#Error detail description(s):
# R: The copy path between the local device and remote device is in unstable status.
#
For example, link-down repeatedly occurs in a certain period of time or communication fails.
# B: The resolution settings are different between the local and remote devices.
# D: The copy path settings may be invalid.
# N: The error occurs in the remote device.
# T: The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the remote device.
# C: The error occurs in the cable.
# O: The error occurs in the local device or adapter other than the remote device.
#
This occurs only when the connection type is FC-AL.
# S: The error occurs in the switch or switch settings.
# I: The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the local device.
# M: The error occurs in the memory.
O P
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Box ID of a local storage system
Box ID of the specified remote storage system
Connection form of a remote storage system registered in the system
Effective line speed of a remote storage system registered in the system. A unit is Mbit/s.
Round trip time of a remote storage system registered in the system. A unit is millisecond.
Multiplicity of the remote storage system registered in the system
Multiplicity recommended by the system. If the round trip time is "Unknown", "***" is displayed.
Copy revel of a remote storage system registered in the system
Copy Schedule Mode
Host interface port number of the local storage system
Indicates path status between the local storage system and the remote storage system. Error/Warn/Normal.
Indicates error suspicious place or warn reason symbols
World Wide Name (WWN) of FC-RA of the remote storage system
iSCSI name and IP address of iSCSI-RA of the remote storage system
Error suspicious place symbol.
Detail description of the error suspicious place symbol. It will indicate when it appeared on J field.
425
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-path
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of remote storage systems connected to this system. In this case, an
error in the path information status is indicated with a "*" mark.
CLI> show rec-path
Remote Storage System
E Remote Box ID
Path Type
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
* 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000004######
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000006######
Direct
Switched
Switched
Line Speed
(Mbit/s)
10
10
Round Trip Multiplicity
Priority
Time (ms)
Current / Recommended Level
3
20
4
3
Unknown
4
3
-
Copy Schedule
Mode
Session
Destination
Session
The following example displays the path information details for the specified storage system. Note that if
spaces or hash mark (#) characters are used, the Box ID must be specified with double quotations:
CLI> show rec-path -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######"
Storage Information
Local Box ID (Current Storage System) 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000001######
Remote Box ID
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######
Line Information
Path Type
Switched
Effective Line Speed
10 (Mbit/s)
Round Trip Time
12 (ms)
Current Multiplicity
Auto
Recommended Multiplicity
3
Priority Level
Copy Schedule Mode
Session balancing
Path Information (to Remote Storage System)
Local Port
Status
Remote Port WWN / iSCSI Name (IP Address)
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0 Normal
500000E0D0C40005
CA#0 Port#1 Error [I T
] 500000E0D0C40006
Error [T
] 500000E0D0C40087
Normal
500000E0D0C40086
CA#0 Port#2 Error [R
] 500000E0D0C40007
CM#1 CA#1 Port#2 Error [C
] 500000E0D0C40006
CM#1 CA#2 Port#0 Error [B
] 500000E0D0C40085
Error detail description(s)
R: The copy path between the local device and remote device is in unstable status.
For example, link-down repeatedly occurs in a certain period of time or communication fails.
B: The resolution settings are different between the local and remote devices.
T: The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the remote device.
C: The error occurs in the cable.
I: The error occurs in the FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the local device.
The following example displays the path information details for the specified storage system. In this case,
iSCSI-RA is used:
CLI> show rec-path -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######"
Storage Information
Local Box ID (Current Storage System) 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000001######
Remote Box ID
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######
Line Information
Path Type
Switched
Effective Line Speed
10 (Mbit/s)
Round Trip Time
12 (ms)
Current Multiplicity
Auto
Recommended Multiplicity
3
Priority Level
Copy Schedule Mode
Destination RAID Group balancing
Path Information (to Remote Storage System)
Local Port
Remote Port Information
Local Port
Status
Remote Port WWN / iSCSI Name (IP Address)
CM#0 CA#2 Port#1 Error [B
] irq.2010-10.com (FE80::290:CCFF:FEA4:3A49)
CM#1 CA#1 Port#0 Error [T
] irq.2010-11.com (2001:DB8::8:800:200C:417A)
CA#2 Port#0 Normal
irq.2010-12.com (192.168.2.64)
CA#2 Port#0 Error [I C T S ] irq.2011-01.com (192.168.2.65)
CA#2 Port#1 Normal
irq.2010-12.com.fujitsu:storage-system.eternus-dx400:00040093405060808091
(192.168.2.66)
Error detail description(s)
B: The resolution settings
T: The error occurs in the
C: The error occurs in the
S: The error occurs in the
I: The error occurs in the
are different between the local and remote devices.
FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the remote device.
cable.
switch or switch settings.
FC-RA port or iSCSI-RA port on the local device.
426
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > export backup-rec-path
export backup-rec-path
Each storage system contains a backup path information file. This is a backup copy of the original path
information file. When the original path information file is imported, information that is described in the
original path information file is reflected to the configuration information database and a backup copy is
stored in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system. If the original file was TEXT type, it is automatically converted
to BINARY type. This command exports the backup path information file to an external FTP server.
• If the same file on an FTP server already exists, it would be overwritten.
• If the backup file is exported as TEXT type, comment lines are eliminated from the file. Therefore, even if
the originally imported path information file was also TEXT type, the TEXT type exported backup file may
not be identical.
■ Syntax
export backup-rec-path -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account -filename filename -type {text | binary} [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For details,
refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31)
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port
This parameter specifies the name of the FTP server name that is to receive the backup REC
path information file. The server name format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d"
string) or a fully qualified domain name.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
-filename
This parameter specifies the REC path information filename.
-type
This parameter specifies the type of path information file that is to be exported.
text
TEXT type
binary
BINARY type
427
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > export backup-rec-path
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example exports an REC path information file to the FTP server named "ftp.a.com" using the
Maintenance-use Ethernet port (MNT port). For the FTP server, the user name is "cli-user" and the filename is
"/tmp/rec-path1.txt". The file type is TEXT.
CLI> export backup-rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/rec-path1.txt -user cli-user
-type text
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
Password :
exporting /tmp/rec-path1.txt from ftp.a.com
complete.
The following example is the same as above, except that the progress indicator is not displayed:
CLI> export backup-rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -filename /tmp/rec-path1.txt -user cli-user
-type text -indicator disable
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
Password :
428
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show backup-rec-path-information
show backup-rec-path-information
This command displays a summary of the REC path information file backed up in a system. The information
includes date and file size of the backup file.
■ Syntax
show backup-rec-path-information
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Date
# File Size
A:
B:
2009-06-02 15:24:17
A
51224 Bytes
B
Date of the backed up path information file
File size of the backed up path information file
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the date and file size of the backup REC path information file.
CLI> show backup-rec-path-information
Date
2009-06-02 15:24:17
File Size 51224 Bytes
429
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > convert rec-path
convert rec-path
This command is used to convert the type of the REC path information file to the file type that is saved on and
to an FTP server by passing it through the storage system. This conversion only affects the REC path
information file on the FTP server, and has no effect on the current system setup.
ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system
FTP server
input file
TEXT
Conversion
Logic
output file
BINARY
• If the same file on an FTP server already exists, it would be overwritten.
• If a TEXT type path information file has syntax errors, the number of the problem line is included with the
error message.
■ Syntax
convert rec-path -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account -source-file source_file -output-file output_file
-mode {t2b | b2t} [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For details,
refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31)
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port
Both a conversion source file and a conversion destination file must be in an FTP server. This
parameter specifies the FTP server name. The server name format is IPv4 standard notation (a
base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or a fully qualified domain name.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
430
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > convert rec-path
-source-file
This parameter specifies the REC path information filename as the conversion source.
-output-file This parameter specifies the REC path information filename as the conversion destination.
-mode
-indicator
This parameter specifies conversion mode.
t2b
TEXT type is converted to BINARY.
b2t
BINARY type is converted to TEXT.
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example imports an REC path information file to the FTP server named "ftp.a.com" using the
Maintenance-use Ethernet port (MNT port) and exports the file to the server after the file is converted. For
the FTP server, the user name is "cli-user" and the conversion source filename is "/tmp/rec-path.txt" and the
conversion destination filename is "/tmp/bin/rec_path.bin". The conversion mode is a direction from TEXT
type to BINARY.
CLI> convert rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -user cli-user -source-file /tmp/rec_path.txt output-file /tmp/bin/rec_path.bin -mode t2b
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
Password :
importing /tmp/rec_path.txt from ftp.a.com
exporting /tmp/rec_path.bin to ftp.a.com
complete.
The following example is the same as above, except that the progress indicator is not displayed:
CLI> convert rec-path -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -user cli-user -source-file /tmp/rec_path.txt output-file /tmp/bin/rec_path.bin -mode t2b -indicator disable
Password :
(Operator inputs password, but it is hidden.)
431
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > measure rec-round-trip-time
measure rec-round-trip-time
After setting up the REC path information, the round trip times to all remote storage systems where a time
has not yet been set must be measured. This command measures the round trip time for each REC path,
displays it, and can also save it in the system if so desired.
• If the round trip time is measured with "-mode auto" specified, the path multiplicity is automatically set
to the recommended multiplicity.
• If the round trip time is measured with "-mode manual" specified, the path multiplicity is automatically
changed to the recommended multiplicity only if the results are saved to the system.
■ Syntax
measure rec-round-trip-time -mode {auto | manual}
[-remote-boxid remote_storage_system_box_id] [-save {yes | no}]
■ Parameter
-mode
This parameter specifies the round trip time measurement and the setting mode.
auto
Automatic mode. Round trip times are measured for all remote storage systems
for which the round trip time has not yet set, and these times are set to the
system as base information to optimize REC performance. This mode is
recommended for initial setup.
manual
Manual mode. Round trip times are measured for the specified single remote
storage system. The displayed times can then be saved to the system if desired.
-remote-boxid
Optional. This parameter specifies the Box ID of a single remote storage system. Only one Box
ID can be specified at a time.
• When "-mode auto" is specified, this parameter cannot be specified and when "-mode manual" is
specified, this parameter must be specified.
• Box IDs use a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and pound key characters (#).
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• The pound key characters (#) are automatically appended when the input characters are less than 40.
-save
Optional. This parameter specifies the save mode. If omitted, the displayed round trip time can
be saved to the system if requested by the operator. If "-mode auto" is specified, this
parameter cannot be specified.
yes
Path multiplicity is automatically set to the recommended multiplicity.
no
Path multiplicity is not set.
432
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > measure rec-round-trip-time
■ Output
When the "manual" mode is selected:
# Remote Box ID
Round Trip Time(ms)
# 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
20
A
B
A:
B
Box ID of a remote storage system
A measured round trip time
■ Example(s)
The following example measures the round trip times to all remote storage systems for which a round trip
time has not yet been set, and automatically reflects this to the system. remote storage systems for which a
round trip time has already been set are not remeasured or otherwise affected.
CLI> measure rec-round-trip-time -mode auto
The following example displays the measured round trip time, and confirms with the operator whether or
not the result is to be saved to the system. In this example, the measured round trip time is reflected to the
system.
CLI> measure rec-round-trip-time -mode manual -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######"
Remote Box ID
Round Trip Time(ms)
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
20
Enter 'y' to save this round trip time or 'n' to cancel.
> y
Complete.
The following example is the same as the above except entering a cancel. In this case, the round trip time is
not reflected to the system.
CLI> measure rec-round-trip-time -mode manual -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######"
Remote Box ID
Round Trip Time(ms)
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
20
Enter 'y' to save this round trip time or 'n' to cancel.
> n
Canceled.
433
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-round-trip-time
set rec-round-trip-time
The REC round trip time is set based on the result of the "measure rec-round-trip-time" command. However,
the REC round trip time for individual paths can be tuned in order to maximize REC performance. This
command is used to manually set the REC round trip time.
If the round trip time is specified, the path multiplicity is automatically changed to the recommended
multiplicity.
■ Syntax
set rec-round-trip-time -remote-boxid remote_storage_system_box_id -time round_trip_time
■ Parameter
-remote-boxid
This parameter specifies the Box ID of a single remote storage system. This is the storage
system for which the REC round trip time is to be manually set.
• Box IDs use a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and pound key characters
(#).
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• Hash marks (#) are automatically appended to Box IDs shorter than 40 characters in
length.
-time
This parameter specifies the REC round trip time. The possible values are from 1 to 65535
milliseconds. The following ranges are recommended:
Asynchronous Through Mode: 100ms or less
Synchronous Transfer Mode: 50ms or less
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the multiplicity to 5.
CLI> set rec-round-trip-time -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ED06F21AUABCPJ000001######" -time 5
434
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-multiplicity
set rec-multiplicity
REC multiplicity does not need to be set because the recommended multiplicity (which is automatically
calculated by the system) is normally used in most cases. However, REC multiplicity for individual paths can
be tuned in order to maximize REC performance. For remote connections, use this command to manually set
the REC multiplicity. For direct connections, use this command to manually set the priority level.
■ Syntax
set rec-multiplicity -remote-boxid remote_storage_system_box_id
{-multiplicity {auto | multiplicity} | -priority-level {auto | priority_level}}
[-copy-schedule-mode {session-balancing | dst-rg-balancing}]
■ Parameter
-remote-boxid
This parameter specifies the Box ID of a single remote storage system. This is the storage
system for which the REC multiplicity is to be manually set.
• Box IDs use a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and pound key characters (#).
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• The pound key characters (#) are automatically appended when the input characters are less than 40.
-multiplicity
This parameter specifies the REC multiplicity value for remote connections. From 1 to 1024 or
"auto" can be set for the value. The "-multiplicity" option and the "-priority-level" option cannot
be specified at the same time.
auto
The recommended multiplicity is used.
-priority-level
This parameter specifies the priority level value for direct connections. From 1 to 8 can be set
for the value. If "0" is specified, the EC/OPC priority is used. The "-multiplicity" option and the "priority-level" option cannot be specified at the same time.
auto
The EC/OPC priority is used.
-copy-schedule-mode
This parameter specifies the Copy Schedule Mode. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
session-balancing
Session balancing is performed.
dst-rg-balancing
Destination RAID Group balancing is performed.
435
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-multiplicity
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the REC multiplicity to 5:
CLI> set rec-multiplicity -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ED06F21AUABCPJ000001######" -multiplicity 5
The following example sets the Copy Level to 3.
CLI> set rec-multiplicity -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ED06F21AUABCPJ000001######" -priority-level 3
The following example sets the Copy Schedule Mode to Session balancing.
CLI> set rec-multiplicity -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ED06F21AUABCPJ000001######" -copy-schedule-mode session-balancing
436
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-buffer
set rec-buffer
This command sets up REC buffers for use by the REC Asynchronous Consistency function. Up to 4 REC buffers
for the ETERNUS DX90 S2 and up to 8 REC buffers for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100
S2/DX8700 S2 can be set. When an REC buffer is newly defined, all the parameters must be specified. When an
existing REC buffer is changed, only the needed parameters may be specified.
The size of each REC buffer can be selected as follows:
• ETERNUS DX90 S2: 128MB, 256MB, and 512MB
• ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, and 2048MB
• ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, and 2048MB
The maximum value of the total REC buffer transfer size is shown below. Note that the upper limit value
depends on the memory size that is installed in the controllers.
• ETERNUS DX90 S2: 512MB
• ETERNUS DX410 S2: 4096MB
• ETERNUS DX440 S2: 8192MB
• ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 8192MB
Receive and Send REC buffers must both be independently defined if the REC buffer is to be used bidirectionally.
■ Syntax
set rec-buffer -partition {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7}
[-remote-boxid storage_system_box_id]
[-buffer-size {128mb|256mb|512mb|1024mb|2048mb}]
[-buffer-type {receive | send}]
[-forwarding-interval {1|2|4|8|15|30|45|60|75|90|105|120}]
[-halt-wait-timer {0|5|10|15}]
[-monitoring-time {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12|13|14|15}]
[-io-response-mode {enable | disable}]
[-immed-halt-mode {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-partition
This parameter specifies the REC buffer partition number. This can also be called the group
number. This number starts from 0. Only one number can be specified at a time. The selectable
range is as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 to 3
ETERNUS ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 to 7
ETERNUS ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 to 7
When the specified number is already used, existing set values are overwritten.
437
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-buffer
-remote-boxid
Optional. This parameter specifies the Box ID of a single remote storage system that is to be
defined. Only one Box ID can be specified at a time. Only one Send/Receive REC buffer transfer
can be set using the Box ID of a single remote storage system. This parameter must be
specified for the initial setup. If omitted, this parameter value is not changed.
• Box IDs use a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and pound key characters
(#).
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• The pound key characters (#) are automatically appended when the input characters are
less than 40.
-buffer-size Optional. This parameter specifies the REC buffer size. This parameter must be specified for the
initial setup. If omitted, this parameter value is not changed. The size of each REC buffer can be
selected as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2:128MB, 256MB, and 512MB
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2:128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, and 2048MB
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2:128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB, 2048MB
-buffer-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the REC buffer type. This parameter must be specified for
the initial setup. If omitted, this parameter value cannot be changed.
receive
Use as a Receive buffer.
send
Use as a Send buffer.
-forwarding-interval
Optional. This parameter specifies the interval at which data should be transferred. A long
interval will reduce the Host I/O overhead, but increase the amount of data susceptible to loss
in the event of disaster. This parameter must be specified for the initial setup. If omitted, this
parameter value is not changed.
1
1 second (Recommended value)
2
2 seconds
4
4 seconds
8
8 seconds
15
15 seconds
30
30 seconds
45
45 seconds
60
60 seconds
75
75 seconds
90
90 seconds
105
105 seconds
120
120 seconds
438
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-buffer
-halt-wait-timer
Optional. This parameter specifies the maximum no-response time for which host I/O
responses may be delayed in order to prioritize data transfers from the REC buffer when it is in
a high-load state. When this time is exceeded, communication with the host I/O reopens, but
the copy session is halted. This parameter must be specified for the initial setup. If omitted,
this parameter value cannot be changed.
0
Disabled
5
5 seconds
10
10 seconds
15
15 seconds (Recommended value)
-monitoring-time
Optional. This parameter specifies the monitoring time for high-load state REC buffers. The
possible range is from 0 to 15 seconds. Zero means the monitoring function is disabled. When
the REC buffer has large amounts of data to be stored and is in a high-load state, the time
required for I/O responses to the server is gradually incremented by the "-halt-wait-timer"
parameter value. Once the delay state has continued for longer than this parameter value, all
REC Asynchronous Consistency Mode sessions that are currently transferring data are halted to
allow priority processing of the server responses. This parameter must be specified for the
initial setup. If omitted, this parameter value is not changed.
0
Disabled
1 – 15
1 to 15 minutes (5 minutes is recommended).
-io-response-mode
Optional. Specifying "enable" for this parameter may improve the Write I/O response during
initial copying of an REC Consistency mode copy session. If heavy-load Write I/O continues, an
extended period of time may be required to achieve an equivalent state. To prevent this from
occurring, make sure that the Write I/O during an initial copy is well below the REC line
throughput.
enable
The I/O response priority mode is enabled.
disable
The I/O response priority mode is disabled.
-immed-halt-mode
Optional. Specifying "enable" for this parameter may improve the Write I/O response while an
REC Consistency mode copy session maintains an equivalent state. If the Write I/O response is
affected even slightly, the REC buffer is changed to HALT status and the copy order may not be
guaranteed for an extended period of time. This parameter is effective only when the HALT
wait timer is set to 0 seconds.
enable
The Immediate Halt mode is enabled.
disable
The Immediate Halt mode is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up partition #1:
CLI> set rec-buffer -partition 1 -buffer-type receive -remote-boxid "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######" -buffer-size 128mb -forwarding-interval 1 -halt-wait-timer 15 -monitoring-time 5
439
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-buffer
The following example changes the defined size of partition #2 to 256MB:
CLI> set rec-buffer -partition 2 -buffer-size 256mb
440
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > delete rec-buffer
delete rec-buffer
This command is used to delete an existing REC buffer definition.
■ Syntax
delete rec-buffer -partition {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7}
■ Parameter
-partition
This parameter specifies the REC buffer group number that is to be deleted. This number starts
from 0. Two or more numbers cannot be specified at the same time. The selectable range is as
follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 to 3
ETERNUS DX400 S2 Series: 0 to 7
ETERNUS DX8000 S2 Series: 0 to 7
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes partition #1:
CLI> delete rec-buffer -partition 1
441
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-buffer
show rec-buffer
This command is used to display the information defined for REC buffers.
■ Syntax
show rec-buffer
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Part. Usage Remote Box ID
Status Size Forwarding Monitoring Halt Wait IO Resp
#
(MB) Interval (s) Time (m) Timer (s) Mode
#
1 Receive 00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002###### Active 128
1
5
15 Disable
A
B
C
D
E F
G
H
I
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
Immed-Halt Target Volume
Mode
Disable
Open Systems
J
K
Assigned partition number
REC buffer Usage
Box ID of a storage system that uses an REC buffer
REC buffer status
REC buffer size
Forwarding interval (unit: second)
Monitoring time (unit: minute)
HALT wait timer (unit: second)
I/O response priority mode
Immediate Halt mode
REC buffer volume copy type (When the GS License is registered)
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the REC buffer information and the REC buffer status.
CLI> show rec-buffer
Part. Type
Remote Box ID
1
2
3
4
Receive
Send
(Unused)
Receive
Status
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000002######
???
Active
Inactive
-
Size Forwarding
Monitoring Halt Wait
(MB) Interval (s) Time (m)
Timer (s)
128
4
3
10
128
1
1
5
128
1
1
5
Target Volume
Open Systems
Mainframe Systems
Mainframe Systems
442
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > create rec-disk-buffer
create rec-disk-buffer
This command creates an REC disk buffer for the REC Asynchronous Consistency function that is used when an
REC buffer flood occurs.
■ Syntax
create rec-disk-buffer -name rg_name -disks disks [-encryption {enable | disable}]
[-assigned-cm { 0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1|cm2cpu0| cm2cpu1|
cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1|cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1| cm6cpu0|cm6cpu1|
cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1| auto }] [-stripe-depth { 64kb | 128kb | 256kb | 512kb | 1024kb }]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the alias name of a RAID group for the REC disk buffer. Only one name
can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.4 Alias Name Syntax" (page 20).
-disks
This parameter specifies which disks will form the RAID group. For details, refer to "1.2.3 Disk
Syntax" (page 19). Specify four disks that are not used with other RAID groups.
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies whether the encryption by a CM is performed. The following
parameters can be specified.
enable
The REC disk buffer data is encrypted.
disable
The REC disk buffer data is not encrypted. (Default)
-assigned-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the assigned controller of the specified REC disk buffer. If
"auto" is specified, the controller is automatically assigned by the system. If omitted, "auto"
mode is selected. The following parameters can be specified.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2:
0
Controller module #0
1
Controller module #1
auto
Automatically (default)
For the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
443
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > create rec-disk-buffer
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module #0 CPU#0
cm0cpu1
Controller module #0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module #1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module #1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module #2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module #2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module #3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module #3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module #4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module #4 CPU#0
cm5cpu0
Controller module #5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module #5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module #6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module #6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module #7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module #7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
-stripe-depth
Optional. This parameter specifies the stripe depth for the REC Disk Buffer that is to be created.
If omitted, it is handled as if "64kb" is specified.
64kb
64k Byte
128kb
128k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 10 or more disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
256kb
256k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 9 or less disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
512kb
512k Byte (Only for RAID 5 configurations of 5 or less disks, RAID 0
configurations, and RAID1+0 configurations)
1024kb
1024k Byte (Only for RAID0 configurations and RAID1+0 configurations)
■ Example(s)
The following example creates an REC disk buffer using disks #001, #002, #011 and #012:
CLI> create rec-disk-buffer -name REC01 -encryption enable -assigned-cm 0 -disks 001-002, 011-012
444
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > set rec-disk-buffer
set rec-disk-buffer
This command assigns REC disk buffers with the REC buffer.
■ Syntax
set rec-disk-buffer -partition {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name }
■ Parameter
-partition
This parameter specifies the partition number for which an REC buffer is to be defined. The
partition numbers that can be specified for each storage system model are as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 to 3
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 to 7
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 to 7
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifier of the REC disk buffer for assignment of the
or
REC buffer. One to four parameter(s) can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group
-rg-name
Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example assigns an REC disk buffer which has RG number 0 to REC buffer partition 1:
CLI> set rec-disk-buffer -partition 1 -rg-number 0
The following example assigns two REC disk buffers which are named REC001 and REC002 to REC buffer
partition 2:
CLI> set rec-buffer -partition 2 -rg-name REC001, REC002
445
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > delete rec-disk-buffer
delete rec-disk-buffer
This command is used to delete the RAID group(s) of the REC disk buffer.
■ Syntax
delete rec-disk-buffer { -rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifier of the REC disk buffer for assignment of the
or
REC buffer. One or more RAID groups can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group
-rg-name
Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the REC disk buffer that was created as RAID group number 0:
CLI> delete rec-disk-buffer -rg-number 0
446
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-disk-buffer
show rec-disk-buffer
This command displays a list of all of the REC disk buffers or displays only the REC disk buffers that are
specified by the REC buffer partition number(s).
Detailed information of the RAID group that is displayed when this command is used can be checked by using
the "show raid-groups" command.
■ Syntax
show rec-disk-buffer [-partition partition_numbers]
■ Parameter
-partition
Optional. This parameter specifies the REC buffer partition number for REC disk buffers. One or
more numbers can be specified. If this parameter is specified, the CM-CPU information is also
displayed.
This number starts from 0. The selectable range is as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 to 3
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 to 7
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 to 7
Example:
-partition 1 (Only #1 is specified)
-partition 5,7 (Both #5 and 7 are specified)
-partition 2-5 (#2 through #5 are specified)
-partition 1,3,4-7 (#1, #3, and #4 through #7 are specified)
447
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > show rec-disk-buffer
■ Output
# Partition Status
# number
#
1 Active
A
B
:
#
- Formatting
# <CM CPU Info>
#
CM/CPU
MID Disk buffer(MB)
2097152
#
CM0-CPU0 10
#
O
P
Q
#
CM0-CPU1 18
0
#
CM1-CPU0 11
0
#
CM1-CPU1 19
0
A
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
S:
Progress
(%)
C
Encryption Session
count
2
D
E
80
Storage data(MB)
1572864
R
0
0
0
-
Elapsed
time(s)
F
-
1
-
Total disk buffer Total storage
size (MB)
data size (MB)
2097152
1572864
G
H
2097152
-
Free disk buffer
size (MB)
524288
I
No of
RGs
4
J
-
1
RG#1 RG#2
K
12
L
13
RG#3
M
14
RG#4
N
15
20
Free disk buffer(MB)
524288
S
0
0
0
REC Buffer Group partition number. If the REC disk buffer is not associated to REC buffer, it displays "-".
When REC Disk buffer is associated to REC buffer, it displays the status of REC Disk buffer as "Active",
"Rebuilding", "Error", "Formatting", "Not supported", "Not mirrored". Otherwise, it displays the status the same
as RAID groups.
REC Disk buffer progress, formatting or rebuilding. If there is nothing to format and/or rebuild, it displays "-".
REC Disk buffer encryption condition. It will be displayed as "Enable" or "Disable". When the encryption function
is disabled for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system, it is not displayed.
Number of sessions which used this REC disk buffer.
Elapsed time of between last copy worked time to current time.
Total REC disk buffer capacity.
Total REC disk buffer size which used to send data stored.
Total REC disk buffer remain size.
Number of RLU that associated RLU (REC disk buffer)
Associated RAID group #1
Associated RAID group #2
Associated RAID group #3
Associated RAID group #4
CM/CPU number indication. If "-partition" is specified, its and below are shown.
CM module ID.
Disk buffer size of its CM/CPU.
Storage data size of its CM/CPU.
Free disk buffer size of its CM/CPU.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a summary of all the REC disk buffers:
CLI> show
Partition
number
1
-
rec-disk-buffer
Status
Active
Formatting
Progress Encryption
(%)
- Encryption
80 Encryption
Session
count
2
-
Elapsed
time(s)
1
-
Total disk buffer
size (MB)
2097152
2097152
2097152
Total storage
data size (MB)
1572864
-
Free disk buffer No of
size (MB)
RGs
524288
4
1
1
RG#1 RG#2 RG#3
12
20
21
13
RG#4
14
15
RG#1 RG#2 RG#3
RG#4
The following example displays the details of the REC disk buffers associated with partition #1:
CLI> show rec-disk-buffer -partition 1
Partition Status
Progress Encryption Session Elapsed
number
(%)
count
time(s)
1 Active
2
1
<CM CPU Info>
CM/CPU
MID Disk buffer(MB)
Storage data(MB) Free disk buffer(MB)
CM0-CPU0 10
2097152
1572864
524288
CM0-CPU1 18
0
0
0
CM1-CPU0 11
0
0
0
CM1-CPU1 19
0
0
0
Total disk buffer
size (MB)
2097152
Total storage
data size (MB)
1572864
Free disk buffer No of
size (MB)
RGs
524288
4
12
13
14
15
448
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > format rec-disk-buffer
format rec-disk-buffer
This command formats the RAID group(s) of the REC disk buffer(s).
■ Syntax
format rec-disk-buffer { -rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }
■ Parameter
-rg-number
or
-rg-name
This parameter specifies the RAID group identifier of the REC disk buffer for assignment of
the REC buffer. One or more RAID groups can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID
Group Syntax" (page 22).
■ Example(s)
The following example formats the REC disk buffers that are assigned to RAID group number 0:
CLI> format rec-disk-buffer -rg-number 0
449
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.2 Advanced Copy Management > release rec-disk-buffer
release rec-disk-buffer
This command releases the assignment of the REC disk buffer(s) with REC buffer(s).
■ Syntax
release rec-disk-buffer -partition {0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} {-rg-number rg_number | -rg-name rg_name }
{-mode {all}}
■ Parameter
-partition
This parameter specifies the partition number for which REC disk buffer(s) are to be released.
The range is 0 to 7. One or more parameters can be specified at the same time.
The number of partitions available depends on the system model as follows:
ETERNUS DX90 S2: 0 to 3
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2: 0 to 7
ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2: 0 to 7
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifier of the REC disk buffer that is assigned to the
or
REC buffer. One or more RAID groups can be specified. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID Group
-rg-name
Syntax" (page 22).
-mode
This parameter sets the mode to delete the REC disk buffers.
all
All of the REC disk buffers that are associated with the REC buffer are deleted.
■ Example(s)
The following example releases the REC disk buffer from REC buffer partition #1:
CLI> release rec-disk-buffer -partition 1 -rg-number 1
450
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3
Network Management
This section explains commands related to the following network operations:
•
•
•
•
4.3.1
System network configurations
SNMP configurations
SMI-S configurations
Secure server keys
Network Settings
This section explains the commands related to network connectivity.
451
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
set network
This command sets up parameters for the Ethernet network, and checks the consistency of parameters. If the
system detects an inconsistency between the parameters, the command is terminated abnormally.
• An IP address can be deleted by specifying it as "0.0.0.0".
• An IP address that is used for connection to the MNT port on the master controller module (CM) cannot be
deleted.
• When critical changes are made (such as changing a subnet address), all of the network parameters
should be reconfigured.
• When a network change means that the connection cannot be maintained, the user is logged off
automatically.
• When "fst" is specified for "-port", gateway, DNSs and IP addresses cannot be set.
■ Syntax
set network -port {maintenance | remote | fst} [-ip-format {v4|v6}] [-ipv6-set-auto {disable|enable}]
[-master-ip ip_address] [-slave-ip ip_address] [-master-link-local-ip ip_address]
[-slave -link-local-ip ip_address] [-master-connect-ip ip_address] [-slave-connect-ip ip_address]
[-netmask netmask] [-subnet-prefix-length length] [-gateway gateway]
[-allow-ip1 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip2 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip3 ip_address,netmask]
[-allow-ip4 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip5 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip6 ip_address,netmask]
[-allow-ip7 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip8 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip9 ip_address,netmask]
[-allow-ip10 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip11 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip12 ip_address,netmask]
[-allow-ip13 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip14 ip_address,netmask] [-allow-ip15 ip_address,netmask]
[-allow-ip16 ip_address,netmask] [-speed {1000|100full|100half|10full|10half|auto}]
[-primary-dns-ip ip_address] [-secondary-dns-ip ip_address] [-wake-on-lan {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the Ethernet port.
maintenance
maintenance port (MNT port)
remote
remote port (RMT port)
fst
FST port (only for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2/
DX8700 S2)
"fst" is not supported in the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
-ip-format
Optional. This parameter specifies the format of the IP address that is to be set. If omitted, IPv4
is selected. This parameter can be specified when "maintenance" or "remote" is specified for
the "-port" parameter.
v4
The IPv4 setting is performed.
v6
The IPv6 setting is performed.
452
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
-ipv6-set-auto
Optional. When "enable" is selected, the link local IP address, the connect IP address, and
gateway are set automatically. If omitted, it is handled as if "disable" is selected. This parameter can only be specified when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter.
-master-ip
enable
IPv6 automatic setting is performed.
disable
IPv6 automatic setting is not performed.
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address of the master CM. The format is IPv4 standard
notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This
parameter can only be specified when "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter.
Example: -master-ip 192.168.1.1
• If the slave IP address is active, both master/slave IP addresses must belong to the same
subnet address.
• When "0.0.0.0" is set, the IPv4 settings for the port are disabled.
• When both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are disabled, the port becomes disabled. (This does not
apply to the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2. Both the maintenance port and the remote port
must be enabled for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2.)
-slave-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address of the slave CM. The format is IPv4 standard
notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string). This parameter cannot be specified for a singlecontroller type. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be
specified when "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter.
Example: -slave-ip 192.168.1.2
Both the master/slave IP addresses must belong to the same subnet address.
-master-link-local-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the link local IP address of the master IP. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be specified when "v6" is specified for
the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for the "-ipv6-set-auto" parameter.
Example: -master-link-local-ip fe80::9abd:2df
• When "0" is set, the IPv6 settings for the port are disabled.
• When both IPv4 and IPv6 settings are disabled, the port becomes unavailable. (This does not
apply to the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2. Both the maintenance port and the remote port
must be enabled for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2.)
453
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
-slave-link-local-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the link local IP address of the slave IP. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be specified when "v6" is specified for
the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for the "-ipv6-set-auto" parameter.
Example: -slave-link-local-ip fe80::9ab0:2d0
-master-connect-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the connect IP address of the master IP. Global unicast
addresses (including 6to4 addresses) and unique local unicast addresses can be specified for
the connect IP address. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only
be specified when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for
the "-ipv6-set-auto" parameter.
Example: -master-connect-ip 2003:12b:84d::87:3e3
-slave-connect-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the connect IP address of the slave IP. Global unicast
addresses (including 6to4 addresses) and unique local unicast addresses can be specified for
the connect IP address. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only
be specified when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for
the "-ipv6-set-auto" parameter.
Example: -slave-connect-ip 2003:120:84d::7ac:45
-netmask
Optional. This parameter specifies the subnet mask for the specified Ethernet port. The format
is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 address format. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be specified when "v4" is specified for
the "-ip-format" parameter.
Example: -netmask 255.255.255.0
-subnet-prefix-length
Optional. Specify a value from 3 to 128. When a global unicast address is specified for the
connect IP address, a value from 3 to 128 can be specified. When a unique local unicast
address is specified for the connect IP address, a value from 7 to 128 can be specified. (When a
6to4 address is used to specify the global unicast address, a value from 48 to 128 can be
specified.) If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be specified
when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for the "-ipv6set-auto" parameter. To delete the prefix length, set "0".
Example: -subnet-prefix-length 64
454
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
-gateway
Optional. This parameter specifies the gateway address for the specified Ethernet port. This
setting is required to permit access beyond the local sub-network (the sub-network to which
the system network addresses belong). The format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256
"d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 address format. The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are
local link addresses, global unicast addresses (including 6to4 addresses), and unique local
unicast addresses. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter can only be
specified when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for the
"-ipv6-set-auto" parameter, or when "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter.
Example: -gateway 10.1.1.2
Example: -gateway 2001:df:a012::3bbd
This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is specified.
-allow-ip1 Optional. These parameters specify IP addresses or network addresses that are permitted to
...
connect to this system. A maximum of 16 IP addresses can be specified. The types of IPv6
-allow-ip16 addresses that can be specified are global unicast addresses (including 6to4 addresses) and
unique local unicast addresses. If omitted, no changes are made to the table of allowed
addresses. This setting is not required to allow connection from the local sub-network (subnetwork to which the system network addresses belong). This parameter can only be specified
when "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter and "disable" is specified for the "-ipv6set-auto" parameter, or when "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter. This parameter
cannot be specified when "-port fst" is specified.
The following are examples.
Example: Specify the following parameter to only permit access from a terminal host that has
the IP address "192.168.1.2":
"-allow-ip1 192.168.1.2"
Example: Specify the following parameter to only permit access from a terminal host that has
the IP address "2001:d53:c51::78:332"
"-allow-ip1 2001:d53:c51::78:332"
Example: Specify the following parameter to permit access from all terminals that have an IP
address range of "192.168.3.1" to "192.168.3.254":
"-allow-ip1 192.168.3.0,255.255.255.0"
Example: Specify the following parameter to permit access from all terminals that have a
network address range of "2001:d53:c51:78::/64":
"-allow-ip1 2001:d53:c51:78::,64"
Example: Specify the following parameter to delete an IP address:
"-allow-ip1 0.0.0.0" (IPv4)
"-allow-ip1 0,0" (IPv6)
455
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
-speed
Optional. This parameter specifies the connection speed of the specified Ethernet port. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
1000
1Gbit/s
100full
100Mbit/s full-duplex
100half
100Mbit/s half-duplex
10full
10Mbit/s full-duplex
10half
10Mbit/s half-duplex
auto
Auto negotiation
-primary-dns-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the primary DNS IP address for the Ethernet port. The format
is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 format. The types of IPv6
addresses that can be specified are global unicast addresses (including 6to4 addresses) and
unique local unicast addresses. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is
specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
When "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter, the IP addresses must be specified using
IPv4 standard notation. When "v6" is specified for the "-ip-format" parameter, the IP addresses
must be specified in IPv6 address format. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is
specified.
-secondary-dns-ip
Optional. This parameter specifies the secondary DNS IP address for the Ethernet port. The
format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 format. The types of IPv6
addresses that can be specified are global unicast addresses (including 6to4 addresses) and
unique local unicast addresses. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. When "v4" is specified for the "-ip-format"
parameter, the IP addresses must be specified using IPv4 standard notation. When "v6" is
specified for the "-ip-format" parameter, the IP addresses must be specified in IPv6 address
format. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is specified.
-wake-on-lan
Optional. This parameter specifies whether or not the Wake on LAN (WOL) function is enabled.
This function can be independently set for each Ethernet port (MNT/RMT). The initial value is
disabled. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" selected. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port fst" is specified.
enable
Wake on LAN is enabled.
disable
Wake on LAN is disabled.
456
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set network
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up network parameters for the Maintenance port (MNT port). The IP address is
"192.168.1.100", and the subnet mask is "255.255.255.0":
CLI> set network -port maintenance -master-ip 192.168.1.100 -netmask 255.255.255.0
The following example sets up network parameters for the Maintenance port (MNT port). The IP address is
"10.10.10.1", the subnet mask is "255.255.0.0", and the gateway address is "10.10.10.250"; accessible
terminals are all addresses on the "10.11.0.0" network, and the single host address "192.168.1.1":
CLI> set network -port maintenance -master-ip 10.10.10.1 -netmask 255.255.0.0 -gateway 10.10.10.250 -allowip1 10.11.0.0,255.255.0.0 -allow-ip2 192.168.1.1
The following example changes the Ethernet speed of the maintenance port (MNT port) to 100Mbit/s fullduplex:
CLI> set network -port maintenance -speed 100full
The following example sets the IP address in IPv6 address format:
CLI> set network -port maintenance -ip-format v6 -ipv6-set-auto disable -master-link-local-ip
fe80:10:20:34:ab::55:234:abde -slave-link-local-ip fe80:20:31:abcf:f3f::78:4fa -master-connect-ip
2010:df:90a::55:33:234 -slave-connect-ip 2011:23:ab:345:77::32:12a -subnet-prefix-length 64 -gateway
2010:df:90a::52:ab:d3e -allow-ip1 2001:ab:df:23f::abc:56:2 -allow-ip2 2001:234::,64 -primary-dns-ip
2011:ab:def:190::900:32:a80 -secondary-dns-ip 2011:91:aa9::7ab:74:dd
The following example automatically sets the IP address in IPv6 format:
CLI> set network -port maintenance -ip-format v6 -ipv6-set-auto enable
457
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show network
show network
This command displays the Ethernet configuration parameters.
■ Syntax
show network
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# MNT port Enable
Maintenance port name (MNT port) and [Enable/Disable]
#
IPv4
Enable
#
Master IP
192.168.1.1
#
Slave IP
192.168.1.2
#
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
#
Gateway
192.168.1.250
#
Primary DNS
192.168.1.253
#
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
#
Allowed IP1
Whether IPv4 settings are enabled or disabled [Enable/Disable]
IP address of MNT port on master CM
IP address of MNT port on slave CM
This is not displayed for a single-controller type.
Subnet mask of MNT port
Gateway address of MNT port
Secondary DNS 192.168.1.254
Primary and secondary DNS IP address
Connection speed of MNT port
192.168.2.0,255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
Allowed IP2
10.10.10.0,255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
...
#
Allowed IP15 192.168.9.0,255.255.255.0
Allowed IP16 10.10.17.0,255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
IP address Subnet mask
The list of Allowed IP1-16 is accessible terminals through MNT port.
# Wake on LAN
Disable
It indicates if a function of the Wake on LAN is enabled on the MNT port.
# Ipv6
Enable
# Master Link Local IP
fe80:2:3:4:5:6:7:8
# Master Connect IP
1:2:3::6:7:8
# Slave Link Local IP
fe80:b:c:d:e:f:10:11
# Slave Connect IP
a:b:c:d::
# Length of Subnet Prefix
64
# Gateway
c0:a8:1:fa:ff:ff:ff:0
Whether IPv6 settings are enabled or disabled [Enable/Disable]
Link local IP address (Master)
Connect IP address (Master)
Link local IP address (Slave). This is not displayed for the single-controller
type.
Connect IP address (Slave). This is not displayed for the single-controller
type.
Prefix length
Gateway
458
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show network
# Primary DNS
c0:a8:1:fd::
# Secondary DNS
c0:a8:1:fe::
# Allowed IP1
c0:c8:2::,64
# Allowed IP16
::,0
# MAC Address
DNS (Primary)
DNS (Secondary)
IP address, prefix length
IP address, prefix length
List of IP addresses for connection destinations 1 to 16
CM#0 01:02:03:04:05:06 CM#1 11:12:13:14:15:16
Each MAC address of the MNT port on both controller modules
A hyphen (-) is displayed to the field of CM#1 in the case of single-controller type.
# RMT port Enable
Remote port (RMT port) name and [Enable/Disable]
#
IPv4
Enable
#
Master IP
192.168.128.1
#
Slave IP
192.168.128.1
#
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
#
Gateway
192.168.128.250
#
Primary DNS
192.168.128.253 Secondary DNS 192.168.128.254
#
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
#
Allowed IP1
Whether IPv4 settings are enabled or disabled [Enable/Disable]
IP address of RMT port on master CM
IP address of RMT port on slave CM
This is not displayed for a single-controller type.
Subnet mask of RMT port
Gateway address of RMT port
Primary and secondary DNS IP address of RMT port
Connection speed of RMT port
192.168.129.0,255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
Allowed IP2
10.10.10.1,255.255.255.0
IP address Subnet mask
...
#
Allowed IP15 192.168.136.0,255.255.255.0
#
Wake on LAN
Allowed IP16 10.10.10.8,255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
IP address Subnet mask
The list of Allowed IP1-16 is accessible terminals through RMT port.
Disable
It indicates if a function of the Wake on LAN is enabled on the RMT port.
# Ipv6
Disable
# Master Link Local IP
::
# Master Connect IP
::
# Slave Link Local IP
::
# Slave Connect IP
::
# Length of Subnet Prefix
0
# Gateway
::
# Primary DNS
::
# Secondary DNS
::
Whether IPv6 settings are enabled or disabled [Enable/Disable]
Link local IP address (Master)
Connect IP address (Master)
Link local IP address (Slave). This is not displayed for the single-controller
type.
Connect IP address (Slave). This is not displayed for the single-controller
type.
Prefix length
Gateway
DNS (Primary)
DNS (Secondary)
459
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show network
# Allowed IP1
::.0
IP address, prefix length
...
# Allowed IP16
#
MAC Address
::,0
IP address, prefix length
List of IP addresses for connection destinations 1 to 16
CM#0 21:22:23:24:25:26 CM#1 31:32:33:34:35:36
Each MAC address of the RMT port on both controller modules
A hyphen (-) is displayed to the field of CM#1 in the case of single-controller type.
# FST port Enable
FST port name and [Enable/Disable]
# IPv4
Enable
#
Master IP
192.168.128.1
#
Slave IP
192.168.128.1
#
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
#
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
#
MAC Address
Whether IPv4 settings are enabled or disabled [Enable/Disable]
IP address of the FST port on master CM
IP address of the FST port on slave CM
This is not displayed for a single-controller type.
Subnet mask of the FST port
Connection speed of the FST port
CM#0 41:42:43:44:45:46 CM#1 51:52:53:54:55:56
Each MAC address of the FST port on both controller modules
A hyphen (-) is displayed to the field of CM#1 in the case of single-controller type.
• FST port information is not supported in ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
• For the DX8700 S2, the MAC address of the port on the Service Controller is displayed.
Example: # MAC Address SVC#0 01:02:03:04:05:06 SVC#1 11:12:13:14:15:16
460
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show network
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the Ethernet configuration parameters:
CLI> show network
MNT port Enable
Ipv4
Enable
Master IP
192.168.1.1
Slave IP
192.168.1.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway
192.168.1.250
Primary DNS 192.168.1.253
Secondary DNS 192.168.1.254
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
Allowed IP1 192.168.2.0,255.255.255.0
Allowed IP2
Allowed IP3 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP4
Allowed IP5 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP6
Allowed IP7 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP8
Allowed IP9 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP10
Allowed IP11 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP12
Allowed IP13 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP14
Allowed IP15 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP16
Wake on LAN Disable
Ipv6
Master Link Local IP
Master Connect IP
Slave Link Local IP
Slave Connect IP
Length of Subnet Prefix
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Allowed IP1
Allowed IP2
Allowed IP3
Allowed IP4
Allowed IP5
Allowed IP6
Allowed IP7
Allowed IP7
Allowed IP9
Allowed IP10
Allowed IP11
Allowed IP12
Allowed IP13
Allowed IP14
Allowed IP15
Allowed IP16
MAC Address
10.10.10.0,255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Enable
fe80:2:3:4:5:6:7:8
1:2:3::6:7:8
fe80:b:c:d:e:f:10:11
a:b:c:d::
64
c0:a8:1:fa:ff:ff:ff:0
c0:a8:1:fd::
c0:a8:1:fe::
c0:c8:2::,64
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
CM#0 01:02:03:04:05:06 CM#1 11:12:13:14:15:16
RMT port Enable
Ipv4
Enable
Master IP
192.168.128.1
Slave IP
192.168.128.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway
192.168.128.250
Primary DNS 192.168.128.253 Secondary DNS 192.168.128.254
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
Allowed IP1 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP2 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP3 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP4 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP5 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP6 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP7 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP8 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP9 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP10 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP11 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP12 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP13 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP14 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP15 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Allowed IP16 0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0
Wake on LAN Disable
461
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show network
Ipv6
Master Link Local IP
Master Connect IP
Slave Link Local IP
Slave Connect IP
Length of Subnet Prefix
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Allowed IP1
Allowed IP2
Allowed IP3
Allowed IP4
Allowed IP5
Allowed IP6
Allowed IP7
Allowed IP7
Allowed IP9
Allowed IP10
Allowed IP11
Allowed IP12
Allowed IP13
Allowed IP14
Allowed IP15
Allowed IP16
MAC Address
Disable
::
::
::
::
0
::
::
::
::.0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
::,0
CM#0 21:22:23:24:25:26 CM#1 31:32:33:34:35:36
FST port Enable
Ipv4
Enable
Master IP
192.168.134.1
Slave IP
192.168.134.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Speed and Duplex Auto Negotiation
MAC Address CM#0 41:42:43:44:45:46 CM#1 51:52:53:54:55:56
462
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set firewall
set firewall
This command is used to enable and disable the individual Ethernet application service ports. The settings
listed in the table below must be performed for each Ethernet port.
Protocol
http
https
telnet
SSH
ETERNUS Maintenance Secure
Service type
GUI
CLI
Specify "-confirm-close-all yes" to disable all of the service ports for
the GUI and CLI connections or both of the service ports for the CLI
connection. If this parameter is not specified, the CLI command
terminates with an error message.
Secure storage platform software (such as monitoring software)
ICMP
ping
SNMP
SNMP protocol
RCIL
RCIL
• All the service ports can be disabled by using this command, but all software, CLI, GUI, and external
software such as monitoring software will not be able to establish a connection.
- Contact your maintenance engineer when an ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/
DX8700 S2 is used.
- For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2, the initial "all ports open" state can be restored by pushing the IP
RESET switch of the system. However, it should be noted that this will also clear all the network
information. For further information, refer to "ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 Disk storage system User's
Guide -Installation-".
• When any settings except for ICMP are changed, the CLI session is automatically disconnected after the
command is executed. Note that the session is disconnected even if a setting value not involved in CLI
connections is changed. For example, your system opens SSH and HTTPS ports, and closes all other ports.
At that case, if you requests to close only HTTPS port, your connection connected by SSH will be
disconnected. After disconnecting the connection, retry to log in the system.
• It can take a little time for the requested changes to be applied. For example, when GUI is used to request
the opening of the SSH port, it may take around a minute before an SSH connected CLI session can be
initiated.
■ Syntax
set firewall -port {maintenance | remote | fst} [-http {open | close}]
[-https {open | close}] [-telnet {open | close}] [-ssh {open | close}]
[-maintenance-secure {open | close}] [-icmp {open | close}]
[-snmp {open | close}] [-rcil {open | close}] [-ip-redirect-test {open | close}]
[-confirm-close-all {yes | no}]
463
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set firewall
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the Ethernet port.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port
"fst" is not supported in the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
-http
-https
-telnet
-ssh
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "http" application port is opened or closed. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "http" is opened.
close
Application port "http" is closed.
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "https" application port is opened or closed. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "https" is opened.
close
Application port "https" is closed.
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "telnet" application port is opened or closed. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "telnet" is opened.
close
Application port "telnet" is closed.
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "SSH" (Secure Shell) application port is opened or
closed. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "SSH" is opened.
close
Application port "SSH" is closed.
-maintenance-secure
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "ETERNUS Maintenance Secure (PCCT Secure)"
application port, which is used to connect to the monitoring software, is opened or closed. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial state is "open".
-icmp
open
Application port "ETERNUS Maintenance Secure" is opened.
close
Application port "ETERNUS Maintenance Secure" is closed.
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "ICMP"" (Internet Control Message Protocol)
application port is opened or closed. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial
state is "open".
open
Application port "ICMP" is opened.
close
Application port "ICMP" is closed.
464
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set firewall
-snmp
-rcil
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "SNMP" application port is opened or closed. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port
fst" is specified. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "SNMP" is opened.
close
Application port "SNMP" is closed.
Optional. This parameter specifies if the "RCIL" application port is opened or closed. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port remote" or
"-port fst" is specified. The initial state is "open".
open
Application port "RCIL" is opened.
close
Application port "RCIL" is closed.
-ip-redirect-test
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable the IP forwarding. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when "-port remote" or "-port fst" is
specified. The initial state is "close".
When IP forwarding cannot be set (this parameter is unavailable), the initial state is "open".
open
The IP forwarding is enabled.
close
The IP forwarding is disabled.
-confirm-close-all
Optional. Specify "-confirm-close-all yes" to disable all of the service ports for both GUI and CLI
connections.
This parameter must be specified in either of the following cases:
• When disabling all of the service ports for both GUI and CLI connections (HTTP, HTTPS, telnet, and
SSH)
• When disabling both of the service ports for CLI connections (telnet and SSH)
In all other cases, this parameter is ignored. For example, if a command such as "set firewall port remote -icmp close -confirm-close-all no" is entered, the command is executed with
exactly the same result as if the ICMP service protocol was disabled normally.
yes
Only required when all of the GUI and CLI related service ports are disabled.
no
Handled as "no operation".
■ Example(s)
The following example closes all the service ports, except the SSH service for CLI:
CLI> set firewall -port remote -http close -https close -telnet close -maintenance-secure close -icmp close -snmp close
CLI> set firewall -port maintenance -http close -https close -telnet close -maintenance-secure close -icmp close -snmp close
CLI> set firewall -port fst -http close -https close -telnet close -maintenance-secure close -icmp close -rcil close -ip-redirect-test close
The following example closes all the service ports involved in both GUI and CLI connections:
CLI> set firewall -port remote -http close -https close -telnet close -ssh close -confirm-close-all yes
CLI> set firewall -port maintenance -http close -https close -telnet close -ssh close -confirm-close-all yes
CLI> set firewall -port fst -http close -https close -telnet close -ssh close -confirm-close-all yes
465
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show firewall
show firewall
This command displays the status of each Ethernet application service port.
■ Syntax
show firewall
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# MNT Port
# http
# https
# telnet
# SSH
# Maintenance-Secure
# ICMP
# SNMP
# RCIL
# IP Redirect Test
#
# RMT Port
# http
# https
# telnet
# SSH
# Maintenance-Secure
# ICMP
# SNMP
#
# FST Port
# http
# https
# telnet
# SSH
# Maintenance-Secure
# ICMP
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
MNT port: Maintenance Ethernet port. RMT port: Remote Ethernet port. FST port: FST Ethernet port. The port
status of application service http, https, telnet, SSH, ETERNUS Maintenance Secure, ICMP, SNMP, RCIL (MNT
port only), and IP forwarding (MNT port only) are displayed respectively. [Open ] indicates that the port is
opened. [Closed] indicates the port is closed.
FST port information is not supported in ETETNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
466
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show firewall
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the status of each application service port:
CLI> show firewall
MNT Port
http
https
telnet
SSH
Maintenance-Secure
ICMP
SNMP
RCIL
IP Redirect Test
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
RMT Port
http
https
telnet
SSH
Maintenance-Secure
ICMP
SNMP
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
FST Port
http
https
telnet
SSH
Maintenance-Secure
ICMP
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Closed]
[Open ]
[Closed]
[Closed]
467
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.2
SNMP
This section explains the commands that are related to SNMP settings, MIB view controls, community
controls, and SNMP trap controls. ETERNUS DX Disk storage system supports SNMP v1, v2c and v3.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SNMP configuration settings
SNMP manager settings
SNMP MIB view settings
SNMP user settings
SNMP community profile settings
SNMP trap settings
Exporting enhanced SNMP MIB files
468
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp
set snmp
This command enables or disables SNMP and specifies the port to be used for SNMP.
■ Syntax
set snmp [-function {enable|disable}] [-port {maintenance|remote}]
[-authentication-failure {enable|disable}] [-engine-id {engine_id|default}]
[-mib-ii-rfc-version {1213|4293}]
■ Parameter
-function
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies whether SNMP functions are enabled or not. The initial
value is disabled. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Functions of each SNMP are enabled.
disable
Functions of each SNMP are disabled (default).
Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP trap sending port. This parameter is only applied
when the trap version is V1 and affects all traps. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
The default is the MNT port.
maintenance
MNT port (default)
remote
RMT port
-authentication-failure
Optional. This parameter specifies if the SNMP authentication failure function is enabled. This
function is used to notify the operator of Authentication Failure by an SNMP trap when this
system is accessed from a undefined SNMP community. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. The initial value is enabled.
-engine-id
enable
An SNMP trap is notified when SNMP authentication fails (default).
disable
An SNMP trap is not notified when SNMP authentication fails.
Optional. This parameter specified the engine identifier. The engine identifier is 12 to 66
characters because of 5 to 32bytes hexadecimal value which followed from the "0x". It is not
available which set all of character is "00" and/or "ff". When "default" is specified, the default
value is used.
If omitted, the existing id or default value is used.
-mib-ii-rfc-version
Optional. This parameter specifies the version of MIB-II that is used by the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
1213
The RFC1213 format is used. (default)
4293
The RFC4293 format is used.
469
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp
■ Example(s)
The following example disables SNMP functions:
CLI> set snmp -function disable
The following example uses the Remote port (RMT port) for SNMP:
CLI> set snmp -port remote
The following example uses the specified engine identifier:
CLI> set snmp -engine-id 0x800102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f
The following example uses the default engine identifier:
CLI> set snmp -engine-id default
The following example uses MIB-II RFC4293:
CLI> set snmp -mib-ii-rfc-version 4293
470
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp
show snmp
This command displays the SNMP parameters.
■ Syntax
show snmp
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# SNMP [Enable]
A
# Port [MNT]
B
# Authentication Failure [Enable]
C
# Engine ID [0x000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f] (Default)
D
E
# MIB-II RFC Version [RFC1213]
F
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
It shows whether SNMP functions are enabled or not.
Ethernet port to use SNMP functions
It shows whether to notify Authentication Failure by an SNMP trap when the system is accessed from
undefined SNMP communities.
It shows an engine identifier.
It shows when the engine identifier is the default. Even if the engine identifier is the same as the default
value, when using the "set snmp" command with a "-engine-id" parameter that is not "default", it does not
appear.
It shows the version of MIB-II that is used by the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the SNMP parameters:
CLI> show snmp
SNMP [Enable]
Port [MNT]
Authentication Failure [Enable]
Engine ID [0x000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f]
MIB-II RFC Version [RFC1213]
The following example displays the SNMP parameter that uses the RMT port and the default engine
identifier.
CLI> show snmp
SNMP [Enable]
Port [RMT]
Authentication Failure [Enable]
Engine ID [0x800000d380500000e0d0401400] (Default)
MIB-II RFC Version [RFC4293]
471
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create snmp-manager
create snmp-manager
This command sets IP address to receive SNMP traps in the SNMP manager setting. Since the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system has 10 entries, up to 10 settings can be specified. A new SNMP manager setting will be the
lowest number.
■ Syntax
create snmp-manager -ip-address ip_address
■ Parameter
-ip-address
This parameter specifies the SNMP manager IP address. To specify the SNMP manager IP
address, use IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or the IPv6 format. The
SNMP manager IP address cannot be specified with a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4
addresses), link local addresses, and unique local addresses.
Example: -ip-address 192.168.1.20
Example: -ip-address fe80::1b:332f:d0
■ Example(s)
The following example creates SNMP manager to set IP address 10.0.0.1:
CLI> create snmp-manager -ip-address 10.0.0.1
472
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-manager
set snmp-manager
This command sets an IP address to the snmp-manager setting.
This command is not available when the set SNMP manager setting is already used for a SNMP community or
SNMP trap.
■ Syntax
set snmp-manager -manager-number manager-number -ip-address ip_address
■ Parameter
-manager-number
This parameter specifies the SNMP manager settings number. This number can be confirmed
by using the "show snmp-manager" command.
-ip-address
This parameter specifies the SNMP manager IP address. To specify the SNMP manager IP
address, use IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) or the IPv6 format. The SNMP
manager IP address cannot be specified with a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types
of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link
local addresses, and unique local addresses.
Example: -ip-address 192.168.1.20
Example: -ip-address fe80::1b:332f:d0
■ Example(s)
The following example sets SNMP manager number 3 to IP address 192.168.0.254:
CLI> set snmp-manager -manager-number 3 -ip-address 192.168.0.254
473
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete snmp-manager
delete snmp-manager
This command deletes the SNMP manager settings.
This command is not available when the SNMP manager setting that is to be deleted is already used for an
SNMP community, an SNMP user, or an SNMP trap.
■ Syntax
delete snmp-manager -manager-number manager-numbers
■ Parameter
-manager-number
This parameter specifies the SNMP manager settings to delete. One or more numbers can be
specified by using "," or "-".
Example:
-manager-number 1,2,4
-manager-number 6-9
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the #4 SNMP manager setting:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
show snmp-manager
IP address
10.0.0.1
172.20.235.1
192.168.0.21
172.20.235.1
192.168.10.11
192.168.0.254
CLI> delete snmp-manager -manager-number 4
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
5
6
show snmp-manager
IP address
10.0.0.1
172.20.235.1
192.168.0.21
192.168.10.11
192.168.0.254
474
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-manager
show snmp-manager
This command displays the SNMP manager settings.
■ Syntax
show snmp-manager
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# No.
# 1
A
A:
B:
IP address
10.0.0.1
B
SNMP manager setting number
SNMP manager IP address.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the SNMP parameters:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
5
6
show snmp-manger
IP address
10.0.0.1
172.20.235.1
192.168.0.21
192.168.10.11
192.168.0.254
475
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create snmp-view
create snmp-view
This command creates an SNMP Management Information Base view (MIB view). A MIB is a data base which
has a tree structure, and the MIB view defines a set of sub-trees for a MIB. MIB views are used to define access
scope. A maximum of ten MIB views can be created. ETERNUS DX Disk storage system has three default view
settings. These entries can also delete and modify as same as other entries. These default values are
described in the "show snmp-view" section.
Regarding the SNMP sub-trees name, the following rules apply for descriptions.
• Up to 251 characters can be specified.
• Names must be specified as a combination of numbers and periods (.). Example: "1.3.5"
• A combination of numbers and periods (.) must be used. At least one period (.) must be used. Example:
"15" is NG.
• The number "0" cannot be specified between period (.) characters. Example: "1.0.1" is NG.
• Numbers that begin with 0 cannot be specified. Example: "1.01.1" is NG.
■ Syntax
create snmp-view -view view_name [-subtree1 subtree1] [-subtree2 subtree2] [-subtree3 subtree3]
[-subtree4 subtree4] [-subtree5 subtree5] [-subtree6 subtree6] [-subtree7 subtree7]
[-subtree8 subtree8] [-subtree9 subtree9] [-subtree10 subtree10]
[-include-subtree subtree_numbers] [-exclude-subtree subtree_numbers]
■ Parameter
-view
This parameter specifies the MIB view name. A maximum of 10 MIB views can be specified. It is
a unique name. Up to 32 characters can be specified for a view name and at least one
character must be specified.
-subtree1
...
-subtree10
Optional. These parameters specify the accessible sub-trees that make up the specified MIB
view (up to 10 sub-trees). If omitted or only two double quotation marks ("") are specified, the
subtree is deleted. Each sub-tree must be unique. If duplex is specified, the command
terminates with an error.
-include-subtree
Optional. This parameter specifies the "include" subtree type. A value between 1 and 10 can be
specified for the subtree number. Two or more subtree numbers can be specified by using "," or
"-".
If this parameter and the "-exclude-subtree" parameter are omitted, "include" is used as the
default for subtree.
The "-include-subtree" and "-exclude-subtree" parameters cannot both be specified for the
same subtree.
476
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create snmp-view
-exclude-subtree
Optional. This parameter specifies the "exclude" subtree type. A value between 1 and 10 can
be specified for the subtree number. Two or more subtree numbers can be specified by using
"," or "-".
If this parameter and the "-include-subtree" parameter are omitted, "include" is used as the
default for subtree.
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the MIB view named "1.3". It includes one sub-tree named "1.3.6.1.2.1" in the
MIB view.
CLI> create snmp-view -view xview4 -subtree1 1.3.6.1.2.1 -include-subtree 1
The following example is specified without the "-subtree2" parameter when "-subtree1", "-subtree3", "include-subtree1", and "-exclude-subtree3" are specified:
CLI> create snmp-view -view xview5 -subtree1 1.3.6.1.2.1 -subtree3 1.3.6.1.2.2 -include-subtree 1 -excludesubtree 3
477
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-view
set snmp-view
This command adds or deletes sub-trees to the specified SNMP MIB view. This command is not available when
the delete SNMP MIB view setting is already used for a SNMP community, SNMP user or SNMP trap.
Regarding the SNMP sub-trees name, the following rules apply for descriptions.
• Up to 251 characters can be specified.
• Names must be specified as a combination of numbers and periods (.). Example: "1.3.5"
• A combination of numbers and periods (.) must be used. At least one period (.) must be used. Example:
"15" is NG.
• The number "0" cannot be specified between period (.) characters. Example: "1.0.1" is NG.
• Numbers that begin with 0 cannot be specified. Example: "1.01.1" is NG.
■ Syntax
set snmp-view -view view_name [-subtree1 subtree1] [-subtree2 subtree2] [-subtree3 subtree3]
[-subtree4 subtree4] [-subtree5 subtree5] [-subtree6 subtree6] [-subtree7 subtree7]
[-subtree8 subtree8] [-subtree9 subtree9] [-subtree10 subtree10]
[-include-subtree subtree_numbers] [-exclude-subtree subtree_numbers]
■ Parameter
-view
This parameter specifies the name of the MIB view that will be changed. Only one view can be
specified at the same time. Up to 32 characters can be specified for a view name and at least
one character must be specified.
-subtree1
...
-subtree10
Optional. These parameters specify the accessible sub-trees corresponding to the specified MIB
view (up to 10 sub-trees). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Each sub-tree must
be unique. If duplex is specified, the command terminates with an error.
To delete a subtree, specify two double quotation marks (""). When two double quotation
marks ("") are specified, all of the subtrees are relocated. Example: -subtree3 "".
-include-subtree
Optional. This parameter specifies the "include" subtree type. A value between 1 and 10 can be
specified for the subtree number. Two or more subtree numbers can be specified by using "," or
"-".
If this parameter and the "-exclude-subtree" parameter are omitted, "include" is used as the
default for subtree.
The "-include-subtree" and "-exclude-subtree" parameters cannot both be specified for the
same subtree.
478
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-view
-exclude-subtree
Optional. This parameter specifies the "exclude" subtree type. A value between 1 and 10 can
be specified for the subtree number. Two or more subtree numbers can be specified by using
"," or "-".
If this parameter and the "-include-subtree" parameter are omitted, "include" is used as the
default for subtree.
■ Example(s):
The following example adds the sub-tree named "1.3.6.1.2.8" to the MIB view named "xview4":
CLI> set snmp-view -view xview4 -subtree2 1.3.6.1.2.8
The following example deletes the sub-tree #1 from the SNMP view named "xview5". For example, sub-tree
#2 is newly relocated as sub-tree #1:
CLI> set snmp-view -view xview5 -subtree1 ""
The following example changes the sub-tree #4 of "xview1" from "include" to "exclude":
CLI> set snmp-view -view xview1 -exclude-subtree 4
479
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete snmp-view
delete snmp-view
This command deletes one or more SNMP MIB views.
This command is not available when the SNMP MIB view setting that is to be deleted is already used for an
SNMP community, an SNMP user, or an SNMP trap.
■ Syntax
delete snmp-view -view view_names
■ Parameter
-view
This parameter specifies the MIB view name to be deleted. The wildcard asterisk (*) can be to
be used to specify the view names of two or more MIBs. Specify each part of a view name
followed by an asterisk (*) or only use an asterisk. The asterisk cannot be specified before the
part of each view name.
Examples are shown below.
*: Correct
part-of-view-name*: Correct
*part-of-view-name: Incorrect
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the MIB view named "xview4":
CLI> delete snmp-view -view xview4
The following example deletes the MIB views beginning with the name "xview1":
CLI> delete snmp-view -view xview1*
The following example deletes all the registered MIB views:
CLI> delete snmp-view -view *
480
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-view
show snmp-view
This command displays a list of the registered SNMP MIB views. If MIB view names are specified, the
command displays the associated sub-trees.
■ Syntax
show snmp-view [-view view_names]
■ Parameter
-view
Optional. This parameter specifies the MIB view name to display sub-trees. Two or more MIB
views can be specified by both a combination of a part of name and asterisk (*), a wildcard at
the same time and just scribing names. The wildcard rules are shown below:
Examples are shown below.
*: Correct
part-of-view-name*: Correct
*part-of-view-name: Incorrect
■ Output
When the parameter is omitted:
# xview1
MIB view name
When requesting the SNMP MIB view:
When requesting the SNMP MIB view.
# View-name : xview4
A
# Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.2.3
B
C
# Subtree2 : [Exclude] 1.3.6.1.2.4
A:
B:
C:
MIB view name
Sub-tree information, include/exclude
Sub-tree information, OID format sub-tree
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the registered MIB view names:
CLI> show snmp-view
"ViewALL"
"View-mib2"
"View-exmib"
"xview4"
"xview5"
481
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-view
The following example displays a sub-tree list of the MIB view named "View-exmib":
CLI> show snmp-view -view View-exmib
View-name : "View-exmib"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.1
The following example displays the sub-trees of the MIB views beginning with the name "xview":
CLI> show
View-name
Subtree1
Subtree2
Subtree3
snmp-view -view xview*
: "xview4"
: [Exclude] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.1
: [Exclude] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.2
: [Include] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.3
View-name
Subtree1
Subtree2
Subtree3
:
:
:
:
"xview5"
[Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1
[Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2
[Exclude] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
The following example displays all the registered MIB views and their sub-trees:
CLI> show snmp-view -view *
View-name : "ViewALL"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1
View-name : "View-mib2"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1
View-name : "View-exmib"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.1
View-name
Subtree1
Subtree2
Subtree3
:
:
:
:
"xview4"
[Exclude] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.1
[Exclude] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.2
[Include] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.3
View-name
Subtree1
Subtree2
Subtree3
:
:
:
:
"xview5"
[Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1
[Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.2
[Exclude] 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3
The following example displays the default MIB view:
CLI> show snmp-view -view *
View-name : "ViewALL"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1
View-name : "View-mib2"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.2.1
View-name : "View-exmib"
Subtree1 : [Include] 1.3.6.1.4.1.211.1.21.1
482
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create snmp-user
create snmp-user
This command creates SNMP user settings.
■ Syntax
create snmp-user -name user_name -view {mib_view_name|""} [-authentication {enable | disable}]
[-authentication-method {md5 | sha}] [-encryption {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the SNMP user name. Up to 10 SNMP user names can be specified. It
is a unique name. Between 8 and 32 characters can be specified for a name.
-view
This parameter specifies the MIB view name. Up to 32 characters can be specified for a view
name. Specify double quotation marks ("") to not specify a view name.
-authentication
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable authentication. If it is specified, the "authentication-method" and "-encryption" options can be specified. In addition, the ETERNUS
DX Disk storage system confirms the authentication password. Between 8 and 64 characters
can be used for the password. If omitted, it is enabled.
enable
Authentication is enabled (default).
disable
Authentication is disabled.
-authentication-method
Optional. This parameter specifies which authentication method is used. One of the following
methods can be selected.
md5
MD5 (default)
sha
SHA
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies the encryption mode. If this parameter is set to enable, the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system confirms the encryption password. Between 8 and 64
characters can be used for the password.
enable
Encryption is enabled (default).
disable
Encryption is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example creates the MIB user named "snmpuser1" with view "view13":
CLI> create snmp-user -name snmpuser1 -view view13
Authentication Password:
Confirm Authentication Password:
Encryption Password:
Confirm Encryption Password:
483
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create snmp-user
The following example creates the MIB user name "FooVar" with view "xview4" and authentication is
disabled:
CLI> create snmp-user -name FooVar -view xview4 -authentication disable
The following example creates the SNMP user name "FooUser" without specifying a view name:
CLI> create snmp-user -name FooUser -view ""
484
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-user
set snmp-user
This command modifies SNMP user settings.
■ Syntax
set snmp-user {-user user_name | -number number} -view {mib_view_name|""}
[-authentication {enable | disable}] [-authentication-method {md5 | sha}]
[-encryption {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-user
or
-number
This parameter specifies the SNMP user name or user number.
The user number can be confirmed by using the command "show snmp-user".
-view
This parameter specifies the name of the MIB view that will be changed. Only one view can be
specified at the same time. Up to 32 characters can be specified for a view name. If double
quotation marks ("") are specified, the associated view is removed from this user setting.
-authentication
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable authentication. If it is specified, the
"-authentication-method" and "-encryption" options can be specified. In addition, the ETERNUS
DX Disk storage system confirms the authentication password. Between 8 and 64 characters
can be used for the password.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Authentication is enabled.
disable
Authentication is disabled.
-authentication-method
Optional. This parameter specifies which authentication method is used. One of the following
methods can be selected. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
md5
MD5 (default)
sha
SHA
-encryption Optional. This parameter specifies the encryption mode. If this parameter is set to enable, the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system confirms the encryption password. Between 8 and 64
characters can be used for the password. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
Encryption is enabled.
disable
Encryption is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets user FooVar to SNMP view "xview4":
CLI> set snmp-user -user FooVar -view xview4
485
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-user
In the following example, user FooVar is set to SNMP view "xview4", the authentication method is set to
MD5, and encryption is enabled:
CLI> set snmp-user -user FooVar -view xview4 -authentication enable -authentication-method md5
Current Authentication Password:
New Authentication Password:
Confirm Authentication Password:
Current Encryption Password:
New Encryption Password:
Confirm Encryption Password:
486
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete snmp-user
delete snmp-user
This command deletes one or more SNMP user settings. This command is not available when the SNMP user
setting that is to be deleted is already used for an SNMP community or an SNMP trap.
■ Syntax
delete snmp-user {-user user_name | -number numbers}
■ Parameter
-user
or
-number
This parameter specifies the user name or user number to delete SNMP user entry. When using
"-number", one or more users can be specified using "," or "-".
When "-number all" is specified, all of the users are deleted. The user number can be confirmed
by using the "show snmp-user" command.
Example:
-name Foo
-number 1
-number 2,3
-number 1-4
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the SNMP user named "FooVar":
CLI> delete snmp-user -user FooVar
The following example deletes SNMP users number 2 and 4:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
4
show snmp-user
User name
"FooVar1"
"FooVax"
"BUZZ"
"snmpuser1"
Authentication
MD5
SHA
disable
MD5
Encryption
enable
disable
disable
enable
MIB-view
"xview4"
"xview5"
"view11"
"view13"
Authentication
MD5
disable
Encryption
enable
disable
MIB-view
"xview4"
"view11"
CLI> delete snmp-user -number 2,4
CLI>
No.
1
3
show snmp-user
User name
"FooVar1"
"BUZZ"
487
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete snmp-user
The following example deletes the SNMP users from number 1 to 3:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
4
show snmp-user
User name
"FooVar1"
"FooVax"
"BUZZ"
"snmpuser1"
Authentication
MD5
SHA
disable
MD5
Encryption
enable
disable
disable
enable
MIB-view
"xview4"
"xview5"
"view11"
"view13"
Authentication
MD5
Encryption
enable
MIB-view
"view13"
CLI> delete snmp-user -number 1-3
CLI> show snmp-user
No. User name
4
"snmpuser1"
488
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-user
show snmp-user
This command displays a list of the registered SNMP users.
■ Syntax
show snmp-user [{-name user_name|-number numbers}]
■ Parameter
-user
or
-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the user name or user number to display SNMP user entry.
When using "-number", one or more users can be specified using "," or "-". If this parameter is
omitted, all the registered SNMP users are listed.
Example:
-name Foo
-number 1
-number 2,3
-number 1-4
■ Output
# No.
User name
Authentication
Encryption
MIB-view
#
"FooVar1"
B
MD5
C
enable
D
"xview4"
E
A
1
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
User number
User name
Authentication method or disable
Encryption enable or disable
MIB view name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the registered SNMP users:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
4
5
show snmp-user
User name
"FooVar1"
"FooVax"
"BUZZ"
"snmpuser1"
"snmpuser2"
Authentication
MD5
SHA
disable
MD5
SHA
Encryption
enable
disable
disable
enable
enable
MIB-view
"xview4"
"xview5"
Encryption
disable
MIB-view
"view13"
"View-exmib"
The following example lists the SNMP users named "Buzz":
CLI> show snmp-user -user BUZZ
No. User name
3
"BUZZ"
Authentication
disable
489
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-user
The following example displays the SNMP users numbering from 2 to 4:
CLI>
No.
2
3
4
show snmp-user -number 2-4
User name
"FooVax"
"BUZZ"
"snmpuser1"
Authentication
SHA
disable
MD5
Encryption
disable
disable
enable
MIB-view
"view4"
"view13"
The following example displays the SNMP users numbering from 1 and 5:
CLI>
No.
1
5
show snmp-user -number 1,5
User name
"FooVar1"
"snmpuser2"
Authentication
MD5
SHA
Encryption
enable
enable
MIB-view
"xview4"
"View-exmib"
490
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create community-profile
create community-profile
This command specifies the network scope for SNMP by defining a community profile, which is an association
between an SNMP community name, an IP address and a MIB view.
The same community name and IP address cannot be used in more than one profile.
A maximum of 30 profiles can be created.
The SNMP agent of the system permits an access request by an SNMP manager if the request matches the
community profile.
A request matches a community profile if the following conditions are met:
• The community name presented by the manager to the agent must match the community name of the
profile.
• The IP address of the SNMP manager must also match the address defined in the profile. If the profile
contains an IP address that is "0.0.0.0", then all manager IP addresses are matched.
The MIB view associated with a matching profile defines the information that a manager can retrieve from the
agent.
Read-Only authority is granted to SNMP manager requests that match a community profile.
It is not possible for a profile to grant any authority other than read-only.
■ Syntax
create community-profile -community community_name -view {view_name|""}
-manager-number {manager_numbers|none}
■ Parameter
-community This parameter specifies the SNMP community name, which can contain up to 32
alphanumeric characters. Only one community name can be specified at the same time.
If the SNMP community name includes a space ( ), it must be enclosed by double quotation
marks ("). Quotation marks are included in the character count.
Example: -community "community 001" (using 15 letters)
-view
This parameter specifies the SNMP MIB view name that is accessible by members of the
community. If the specified community is set to trap only, specify double quotation marks ("")
instead of a view name.
-manager-number
This parameter specifies the number of SNMP managers.
Any value between 1 and 10 can be specified. One or more managers can be specified using ","
or "-". This number can be confirmed by using the "show snmp-manager" command. If
unlimited access is specified for the community, specify "none" instead of a manager number.
491
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create community-profile
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the SNMP community. SNMP manager numbers 1 to 10 are specified, and the
SNMP MIB view name is "xview4":
CLI> create community-profile -community community1 -manager-number 1-10 -view xview4
The following example creates the SNMP community in which the SNMP community is named
"community2", the SNMP manager number is 2, and the SNMP MIB view is able to access all MIB views:
CLI> create community-profile -community community2 -manager-number 2 -view xview5
The following example creates an SNMP community that is used only for traps.
CLI> create community-profile -community community3 -manager-number 3 -view ""
The following example creates an SNMP community for which unlimited access is specified:
CLI> create community-profile -community community4 -manager-number none -view xview6
492
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set community-profile
set community-profile
This command modifies community profiles to add or to delete SNMP managers.
■ Syntax
set community-profile -community community_name [-name new-community-name]
[-view {view_name|""}] [-manager-number {manager_numbers|none}]
■
Parameter
-community This parameter specifies the SNMP community name, which can contain up to 32
alphanumeric characters. Only one community name can be specified at the same time.
If the SNMP community name includes a space ( ), it must be enclosed by double quotation
marks ("). Quotation marks are included in the character count.
Example: -community "community 001" (using 15 letters)
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies a new community name for a community that already
exists.
-view
Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP MIB view name that is accessible by members of
the community. If the specified community is changed to be used for traps only, specify double
quotation marks ("") instead of a view name.
-manager-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of SNMP managers.
Any value between 1 and 10 can be specified. This number can be confirmed by using the
"show snmp-manager" command. One or more numbers can be specified using "," or "-". If
unlimited access is specified for the community, specify "none" instead of a manager number.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the SNMP community. SNMP manager numbers 1 to 10 are specified, and the
SNMP MIB view name is "xview4":
CLI> set community-profile -community community1 -manager-number 1-10 -view xview4
The following example sets the SNMP community in which the SNMP community is named "community2",
the SNMP manager number is 2, and the SNMP MIB view is able to access all MIB views:
CLI> set community-profile -community community2 -manager-number 2 -view xview4
493
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set community-profile
The following example sets an SNMP community that is used only for traps.
CLI> set community-profile -community community3 -manager-number 3 -view ""
The following example sets an SNMP community for which unlimited access is specified:
CLI> set community-profile -community community4 -manager-number none -view xview6
494
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete community-profile
delete community-profile
This command deletes an SNMP community profile and/or deletes SNMP managers from community profile.
This command is not available when the SNMP manager setting that is to be deleted is already used for an
SNMP trap.
• The community-profile "community4" has 3 manager settings #1 – #3.
• When deleting all of the settings using "-manager-numbers 1-3", not only the manager settings on the
profile setting, but also the community profile are deleted.
• The result is the same as when "-community community4" is specified.
■ Syntax
delete community-profile -community community_name [-manager-number manager_numbers]
■ Parameter
-community This parameter specifies the SNMP community name of profiles to be deleted. Only one
community name can be specified at the same time.
-manager-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the manager number.
Any value between 1 and 10 can be specified. This number can be confirmed by using the
"show snmp-manager" command. One or more numbers can be specified by using "," or "-". If
omitted, all the profiles that contain the specified SNMP community name are deleted.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes all the SNMP community profiles whose name is "community1":
CLI> delete community-profile -community community1
The following example deletes SNMP manager number 4 from community2:
CLI> delete community-profile -community2 -manager-number 4
495
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show community-profile
show community-profile
This command displays a list of all the registered SNMP community profiles.
■ Syntax
show community-profile [-community community_name]
■ Parameter
-community
Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP community name of the profiles to be
displayed. Only one community name can be specified at the same time.
■ Output
# No.
# 1
A
Name
"community1"
B
Manager No.
1, 2, 3,
C
4,
5,
6,
7,
8,
9, 10
MIB View
"view1"
D
# <Manager list>
# No. IP address
# 1
192.168.0.10
# 2
17.20.56.101
# 3
10.0.0.1
# 4
172.101.235.221
# 5
192.168.0.11
# 6
144.72.48.100
# 7
192.168.100.1
# 8
192.168.100.2
# 9
192.168.100.3
# 10
192.168.100.4
E
F
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
Community number
Community name
Manager number list
MIB view name
Manager number
Manager IP address
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the registered SNMP community profiles:
CLI>
No.
1
2
3
4
show community-profile
Name
"community1000000000000000000000"
"community2"
"community3.141592"
"c4"
Manager No.
1, 2, 3,
2
1,
2, 3,
4,
5,
4,
4,
5,
6,
6,
7,
8,
9, 10
7,
8,
9
MIB View
"view1"
"view3"
"view4"
"viewC4"
496
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show community-profile
The following example displays the SNMP community profiles that is named community2:
CLI> show community-profile -community community2
No. Name
Manager No.
2
"community2"
2,
6,
MIB View
"view3"
<Manager list>
No. IP address
2: 17.20.56.101
6: 144.72.48.100
The following example displays an SNMP community profile named community5 with 1, 2 and 3 registered
for the manager number that is only used to TRAP:
CLI> show community-profile -community community5
No. Name
Manager No.
5
"community5"
1, 2, 3
MIB View
<Manager list>
No. IP address
1: 192.168.0.10
2: 17.20.56.101
3: 10.0.0.1
The following example displays an SNMP community profile name community6 with unlimited access for all
managers:
CLI> show community-profile -community community6
No. Name
Manager No.
6
"community6"
MIB View
"xview6"
<Manager list>
No. IP address
497
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-trap
set snmp-trap
This command defines an SNMP trap, which is a definition associating an SNMP community string with an IP
address. A maximum of ten SNMP traps can be defined.
■ Syntax
set snmp-trap -manager-number manager_number [-version {v1|v2c|v3}]
[{-community community_name | -user user_name}]
[-trap-number trap_number] [-port-number port_number]
■ Parameter
-manager-number
This parameter specifies the SNMP manager number to send trap. Any value between 1 and 10
can be specified. This number can be confirmed by using the "show snmp-manager" command.
-version
Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP version. If this parameter is omitted when setting
an existing trap, the existing setting for this parameter is not changed.
v1
SNMP version 1.
v2c
SNMP version 2c.
v3
SNMP version 3. (default)
-community Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP community name, which can contain up to 32
alphanumeric characters. A single command cannot define multiple traps. This should be
specified for SNMP version 1 or 2c. This is not necessary for SNMP version 3. If double quotation
marks ("") are specified, the associated community is removed from this trap setting.
-user
Optional. This parameter specifies the SNMP user name. This should be specified for SNMP
version 3. This is not necessary for SNMP version 1 or 2c. If double quotation marks ("") are
specified, the associated user is removed from this trap setting.
-trap-number
This parameter specifies the trap number. The trap number can be confirmed using the "show
snmp-trap" command.
-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the port number of the manager. If omitted, the previously
set port number is used. If no port has been previously set, default port number 162 is used.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the SNMP trap corresponding to the SNMP community named "community1" and
SNMP manager number 3:
CLI> set snmp-trap -community community1 -manager-number 3
498
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set snmp-trap
The following example sets the v3 SNMP trap corresponding to the SNMP user named "user4" and SNMP
manager number 3:
CLI> set snmp-trap -user user4 -manager-number 3
499
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > delete snmp-trap
delete snmp-trap
This command deletes the SNMP trap that corresponds to an SNMP community. This command deletes the
trap, but does not delete the specified SNMP community.
■ Syntax
delete snmp-trap -trap-number trap_numbers
■ Parameter
-trap-number
This parameter specifies the setting trap number. The trap number can be confirmed using the
"show snmp-trap" command.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes SNMP trap numbers 2-4:
CLI> show snmp-trap
Trap SNMP
Manager IP
No.
Version Number
Address
1
v1
1
192.168.100.250
2
v2c
2
192.168.2.1
3
v3
3
10.0.0.1
4
v3
4
192.168.100.101
5
v3
1
192.168.100.250
CLI> delete snmp-trap -trap-number 2-4
CLI> show snmp-trap
Trap SNMP
Manager IP
No.
Version Number
Address
1
v1
1
192.168.100.250
5
v3
1
192.168.100.250
Community
Name
"community1"
"community2"
User
Name
Community
Name
"community1"
User
Name
"User1"
"user_four"
"trap_user2"
"trap_user2"
Port
Number
162
162
162
8162
162
Port
Number
162
162
500
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show snmp-trap
show snmp-trap
This command displays a list of the defined SNMP traps.
■ Syntax
show snmp-trap
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Trap
# No.
# 1
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
SNMP
Version
v1
B
Manager
Number
1
C
IP
Address
192.168.100.250
D
Community
Name
"community1"
E
User
Name
"User1"
F
Port
Number
162
G
Number of the entered SNMP traps.
SNMP version. v1/v2c/v3.
Manager number.
IP Address.
SNMP community name. This is not displayed if the version is not v1 or v2c.
SNMP user name. This is not displayed if the version is v1 or v2c.
Trap sending port number.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays a list of all the defined SNMP trap:
CLI> show snmp-trap
Trap SNMP
Manager
No.
Version Number
1
v1
1
2
v2c
2
3
v3
3
IP
Address
192.168.100.250
192.168.2.1
10.0.0.1
Community
Name
"community1"
"community2"
User
Name
"User1"
Port
Number
162
162
162
501
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > test snmp-trap
test snmp-trap
This command sends an SNMP trap to the registered SNMP Manager for testing.
■ Syntax
test snmp-trap
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example sends the SNMP trap for testing:
CLI> test snmp-trap
The following example sends the SNMP trap to the SNMP Managers:
CLI> show snmp-trap
Trap SNMP
Manager
No.
Version Number
1
v1
1
2
v2c
2
3
v3
3
4
v3
4
5
v3
1
CLI> test snmp-trap
IP
Address
192.168.100.250
192.168.2.1
10.0.0.1
192.168.100.101
192.168.100.250
Community
Name
"community1"
"community2"
User
Name
"User1"
"user_four"
"trap_user2"
Port
Number
162
162
162
8162
162
502
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export enhanced-mib
export enhanced-mib
This command exports the enhanced MIB file in the system to an FTP server.
■ Syntax
export enhanced-mib -port {maintenance|remote|fst} -server server_name -user login_user_name
[-server-view {enable|disable}] [-version {v1|v2cv3}] [-dir directory] [-filename filename]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies the Ethernet port used to connect to the FTP server. For details, refer
to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (not supported by the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
This parameter specifies the ftp server name to store the enhanced MIB file. The server name
format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address format, or a fully
qualified domain name.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user account name for access to the FTP server. This command
displays an FTP server password prompt.
-server-view Optional. This parameter specifies whether a file defined for use by ServerView is included or
not. If this parameter is omitted, the file is not included.
-version
-dir
enable
The file defined for ServerView is included.
disable
The file defined for ServerView is not included.
Optional. This parameter specifies the version of an exported MIB file by using the SNMP
version.
If omitted, the default value "v1" is used.
v1
SNMP version v1. (default)
v2cv3
SNMP version v2c or v3
Optional. This parameter specifies the directory name on the FTP server where the MIB file is to
be stored. Since the file name cannot be specified within this string, use the "-filename"
parameter to specify the file name.
503
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export enhanced-mib
-filename
Optional. This parameter specifies the file name to store the MIB file. Since the directory name
cannot be specified within this string, use the "-dir" parameter to specify the directory name. If
this parameter is omitted, the default file name is "FJDARY-E100.MIB" for the ETERNUS DX80
S2/DX90, ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2, and ETERNUS DX8100 S2, and "FJDARY-E102.MIB" for
the ETERNUS DX8700 S2. If the file already exists, it is overwritten.
The following conversion specifications, which begin with a percent character, are replaced by
their corresponding value at the time of execution. If other conversion strings are specified,
this command terminates abnormally with an error message.
%s
Serial number of the system
Example: MIB%s-mib.bin -> MIB123456789012-mib.bin
%d
Current date
Example: MIB%d-mib.bin -> MIB20080819-mib.bin
%t
Current time
Example: MIB%t-mib.bin -> MIB144855-mib.bin
%%
Percent character
Example: mib%%.bin -> mib%.bin
■ Example(s)
The following example exports the enhanced MIB to the FTP server named "ftp.a.com". The FTP server login
is user "profile1", the stored location is "/temp", the default stored filename "/FJDARY-E100.MIB" is used, and
the Ethernet port that is used is the Maintenance port (MNT port).
CLI> export enhanced-mib -port maintenance -server ftp.a.com -user profile1 -dir /temp
Password :
exporting /temp/FJDARY-E100.MIB to ftp.a.com
Complete.
504
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.3
E-mail Notification
This section explains the commands related to setting up e-mail notification.
505
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set email-notification
set email-notification
This command sets up parameters relating to E-mail notification functions.
■ Syntax
set email-notification [-send {enable|disable}] [-port {maintenance|remote|fst}]
[-port-number port_number] [-server smtp_server] [-authentication {none|auto|cram-md5|plain|login}]
[-user user_name][-from mail_address] [-to1 address] [-to2 address] [-to3 address] [-to4 address]
[-to5 address] [-text-count count] [-text1 strings] [-text2 strings] [-text3 strings] [-text4 strings]
[-text5 strings] [-text6 strings] [-text7 strings] [-text8 strings] [-text9 strings] [-text10 strings]
[-retry-count count] [-retry-interval interval] [-timeout seconds] [-partial-mode {enable|disable}]
[-partial-size size] [-send-log {enable|disable}] [-iom-log {enable|disable}]
[-customer-info {enable|disable}]
■ Parameter
-send
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the E-mail notification mode. It specifies whether the Email notification function is enabled or not. If this parameter is omitted, the status is not
changed. The initial value is disabled. All necessary parameters to send E-mail must be
specified when enabling this parameter.
enable
E-mail notification is enabled.
disable
E-mail notification is disabled (default).
Optional. This parameter specifies the Ethernet port to connect to an SMTP Server. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. For details, refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server"
(page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 only)
-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the port number to connect to an SMTP server. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. The initial value is 25.
-server
Optional. This parameter specifies the SMTP server address. Up to 64 letters can be specified.
The server name format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name. The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are
global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique local addresses.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
506
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set email-notification
-authentication
Optional. This parameter specifies the authentication method of the SMTP server. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed.
none
The system connects to the SMTP server without authentication.
auto
The system connects to the SMTP server using AUTH SMTP authentication and
automatically selects the appropriate authentication method from "cram-md5",
"plain" or "login".
cram-md5
The system connects to the SMTP server using AUTH SMTP authentication and
uses "cram-md5" as the authentication method.
plain
The system connects to the SMTP server using AUTH SMTP authentication and
uses "plain" as the authentication method.
login
The system connects to the SMTP server using AUTH SMTP authentication and
uses "login" as the authentication method.
-user
Optional. This parameter specifies the user account name to connect to the SMTP server using
AUTH SMTP authentication. This command displays a password prompt. When "-authentication
none" is specified, this parameter is unnecessary. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
-from
Optional. This parameter specifies the "from address" field of E-mail sent from the system. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-to1
-to2
-to3
-to4
-to5
Optional. This parameter specifies up to 5 e-mail addresses sent from the system. If any
parameter is omitted, the corresponding value is not changed.
You can delete an address by specifying double quotation characters consecutively.
Example: -to2 ""
-text-count
Optional. This parameter specifies the number of valid message lines. The fixed message is
output according to the specified one. Although this command is optional, it must be specified
when the fixed message is modified.
When 0 is specified, the fixed message is deleted.
-text1
...
-text10
Optional. These parameters specify the fixed lines of the E-mail messages. The maximum
number of lines is 10 and the maximum size is a total of 255 bytes. The system sends the
message from the "-text1" parameter to the last parameter that is not blank as consecutive
messages. If any parameter is omitted, the corresponding value is not changed.
507
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set email-notification
• The number after "-text" indicates the message line number. For example, "-text5" indicates
the 5th line. With the exception of the last line, two bytes of carriage return code (CR) are
added to each non-blank line.
Example: -text1 Hello -text2 Hello -text3 Hello
The total number of characters is 19 (5*3 + 2*2)
• The messages must be specified in ascending order beginning at "-text1".
Example: -text1 Hello
-text2 Morning.
-text3 bye.
- A pair of consecutive double quotation marks indicates a blank line.
Example: -text1 Hello
-text2 ""
-text3 bye
Result of this example:
line1 : Hello
line2 :
line3 : bye
* Line2 is blank.
- If a line includes a blank letter, both ends of the parameter must be enclosed by double
quotation marks ("). Double quotation marks are not include in the word count.
Example: -text1 Hello.
-text2 "This is your system." (20 letters)
- To include a double quotation mark, precede it by the back slash character. Back slash
characters are not include in the word count.
Example: -text1 abc\"def \"ghi (11 letters)
Result of this example:
abc"def"ghi
-retry-count Optional. This parameter specifies the number of retries that are performed when an e-mail
fails to send. Specify 0 or 1 for the retry count. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
The default value is 0 (no retry).
0
No retry (default).
1
Retry once.
-retry-interval
Optional. This parameter specifies the time of the interval to retry sending. Between 1 and 5
seconds should be specified for the value. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The
default value is 1 (a retry is attempted after a 1 second interval).
-timeout
Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies the time out value to connect to the SMTP server in seconds. Between 1
and 30 can be specified (1 to 30 seconds). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
508
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set email-notification
-partial-mode
Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies the mode to divide e-mail into parts when sending. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. The default value is disabled (e-mails are not divided).
enable
Partial e-mail mode is enabled.
disable
Partial e-mail mode is disabled (default).
-partial-size Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies the part size of an e-mail. It is available when "-partial-mode" is enabled,
and any mode can be specified. Between 64kb and 6400kb should be specified for the value
(between 64KB and 6400KB). "kb" must be specified after the number. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. The ETERNUS DX Disk storage system default value is 64KB (the size of
each e-mail is 64KB).
-send-log
-iom-log
Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies whether the E-mail log notification function is enabled or not. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed. The default value is disable.
enable
Sending the E-mail log is enabled.
disable
Sending the E-mail log is disabled (default).
Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies whether the I/O module logs are included. If omitted, the I/O module logs
are included.
enable
The I/O module log is included (default).
disable
The I/O module log is not included.
-customer-info
Optional. This parameter is only available for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that does
not have the REMCS support function. If this parameter is specified for an ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system that has the REMCS support function, this command terminates. This
parameter specifies whether to include customer information in the exported logs. If this
parameter is omitted, customer information is included in the logs.
enable
Customer information is included in the logs (default).
disable
Customer information is not included in the logs.
509
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set email-notification
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the parameters of the SMTP server. The Ethernet port is the Maintenance port
(MNT port), the SMTP server is "foo1.bar1", and the authentication method is "CRAM-MD5". The user name
for SMTP authentication is "profile1", the SMTP port number is the default, an e-mail sender address is
"foo2@bar2", and the e-mail receiver address is "foo@bar". The fixed message is the following:
test-line 1
test-line 2
CLI> set email-notification -send enable -port maintenance -server foo1.bar1 -authentication cram-md5 -user
profile1 -from foo2@bar2 -to1 foo@bar -text-count 2 -text1 "test-line 1" -text2 "test-line 2"
Password :
Confirm Password :
The following example sets up the parameters of the SMTP server. The Ethernet port is remote port (RMT
port), SMTP server is "buz.varx". E-mails sent that are larger than 128KB are divided into 128KB parts, other
options are not set, and default values are used:
CLI> set email-notification -send enable -port remote -server buz.varx -partial-mode enable -partial-size
128kb
510
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show email-notification
show email-notification
This command displays the parameters of E-mail notification functions.
■ Syntax
show email-notification
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
#Send E-Mail
#Port
#SMTP Server
#SMTP Port No
#Authentication
#User Name
#From
#To1
#Text1
#Retry Count
#Retry Interval(sec)
#Timeout(sec)
#Partial mode
#Partial size(KB)
#Send Log
#I/O Module Log
#Customer info
Enable
A
MNT
B
foo1.bar1
C
25
D
Auto
E
profile1
F
foo2@bar2
G
foo1@bar1
H
Hello
I
1
J
4
K
30
L
Enable
M
64
N
Enable
O
Enable
P
Enable
Q
511
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show email-notification
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
E-mail send mode
Ethernet port
SMTP server name
Access port number to an SMTP server
SMTP authentic method
User name for SMTP authentication
Sender of E-mail address
E-mail address sent from the system
The fixed messages included in E-mail message
Retry count
Retry interval (seconds)
Timeout value (seconds)
Partial mode. enable/disable
Partial size (KB)
E-mail log send mode. It displays only the models that do not support REMCS.
I/O module log send mode. It displays only the models that do not support REMCS.
Customer information send mode. It displays only the models that do not support REMCS.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the parameters related to E-mail notification setup:
CLI> show email-notification
Send E-Mail
Enable
Port
MNT
SMTP Server
foo1.bar1
SMTP Port No
25
Authentication
Auto
User Name
profile
From
foo2@bar2
To1
foo1@bar1
To2
foo2@bar2
To3
foo3@bar3
To4
foo4@bar4
To5
Text1
Hello
Text2
This is the ABC.
Text3
Thank you.
Retry Count
1
Retry Interval(sec) 4
Timeout(sec)
30
Partial mode
Disable
Partial size(KB)
64
Send Log
Enable
I/O Module Log
Enable
Customer info
Enable
512
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > test email
test email
This command sends an E-mail from the system for testing.
■ Syntax
test email
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example tests whether the e-mail can correctly be sent or not:
CLI> test email
513
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.4
Event Notification
There are three categories of events that can occur; Error, Warning and Information. When an event occurs, a
notification can be sent via E-mail, via SNMP, by returning a SCSI sense to the host, or by recording a syslog to
syslog server.
This section explains the commands related to assigning what notifications are sent when various events
occur.
514
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
set event-notification
This command sets up the parameters for event notification, primarily the notification targets such as E-mail,
SNMP traps, host sense, REMCS, syslog, and AIS Connect. Notification targets for specific events can be set
individually, all events of a particular level can be set to be notified in the same way, or one of two preset
options can be selected. When selecting either of the two preset values, other parameters cannot be
specified.
■ Syntax
set event-notification
{-preset {system-default | remcs-default} |
{-severity {error | warning | information |
e-parts-error | e-disk-error | e-temperature-error | e-battery-life |
e-rebuild-copyback-with-redundant |
e-rebuild-copyback-without-redundant |
e-complete-redundant-copy | e-complete-rebuild | e-bad-data |
e-pinned-data | e-not-ready | e-remote-path | e-halt-path |
e-halt-overload | e-halt-other | e-tp-pool-ratio |
e-redundant | e-copy-session-error | | e-sed-network-error |
w-parts-warning | w-disk-warning | w-temperature-warning | w-battery-life |
i-recovery-module | i-temperature-restoration | i-user-logon-logoff |
i-operate-raid-group | i-add-release-hot-spare | i-operate-volume | i-power-off-on-cfl |
i-sdp-policy-level1 | i-sdp-policy-level2 | i-sdp-policy-level3 |
i-limit-copy-table | i-expire-trial-copy-license | i-odx | i-sed-network-error-recovered |
i-fc-ca-port-link-status-changed | i-host-login-over }}
-method {email | snmp | host | remcs | syslog| ais}
-suppression {enable | disable | disable-when-no-hs}
[-host-sense-opmsg {enable | disable}]}
■ Parameter
-preset
This parameter specifies preset settings for event notification values. If this parameter is
selected, other parameters cannot be specified. The default values are described in the
examples below:
system-default
Set the system default (Factory shipping default).
remcs-default
Set the remote service default (recommended REMCS operation value).
515
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
-severity
This parameter specifies the events that will trigger a notification and cannot be specified if
the preset function is specified. An operand name starting with "e-" indicates a severity "Error
level" event, "w-" indicates a severity "Warning level" event, and "i-" indicates a severity
"Information level event". One or more event types can be specified by separating them with a
comma.
Example: -severity error, w-warning-disk (Specify "error" and "w-warning-disk")
"-suppression disable-when-no-hs" indicates whether the specified event is notified or not
when there is no hot spare in the system. It can be specified when "e-broken-disk", "e-rebuildcopyback-without-redundant", " e-redundant", "w-warning-disk", or "w-raid-degrade-event" is
specified.
error
All the Error level events are notified.
warning
All the Warning level events are notified.
information All the Information level events are notified.
e-parts-error
When modules other than disks are broken, error level events are notified. Host
sense, SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
e-disk-error When a disk is broken, error level events are notified. Host sense, SNMP, E-mail,
and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
e-temperature-error
When the sensor detects an error level temperature, error level events are
notified. Host sense, SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice
method.
e-battery-life
When battery life expires, error level events are notified. Host sense, SNMP, Email, and syslog may be specified as the notice method. (only for the ETERNUS
DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2)
e-rebuild-copyback-with-redundant
When rebuild/copyback occurs to a RAID group with redundancy, error level
events are notified. Only Host sense may be specified as the notice method. Any
notice method may be specified.
e-rebuild-copyback-without-redundant
When rebuild/copyback occurs to a RAID group without redundancy, error level
events are notified. Only Host sense may be specified as the notice method. Any
notice method may be specified.
e-complete-redundant-copy
When the redundant copy is complete, error level events are notified. Any notice
method may be specified.
e-complete-rebuild
When rebuild is finished, error level events are notified. Host sense, SNMP, email, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
e-bad-data
When bad data on a track occurs, error level events are notified. Host sense,
SNMP, e-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
e-pinned-data
When pinned data occurs or disappears, error level events are notified. Host
sense, SNMP, e-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method. Note
that, however, host sense is not used as the notification method when pinned
data disappears.
516
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
e-not-ready When Not-Ready occurs, error level events are notified. Host sense, SNMP, Email, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
e-remote-path
When REC path(s) are in an error condition, error level events are notified. Any
notice method may be specified.
e-halt-path When REC path(s) are halted due to a path(s) error, error level events are
notified. SNMP, E-mail, and REMCS may be specified as the notice method.
e-halt-overload
When REC path(s) are halted due to line overload, error level events are notified.
SNMP, E-mail, and REMCS may be specified as the notice method.
e-halt-other When REC path(s) are halted due to another cause, error level events are
notified. SNMP, E-mail, and REMCS may be specified as the notice method.
e-tp-pool-ratio
When the transition of the thin provisioning pool ratio increases, error level
events are notified. SNMP, E-mail and syslog may be specified as the notice
method.
e-redundant When the redundant copy starts or ends, error level events are notified. Any
notice method may be specified.
e-sed-network-error
When network connection errors occur with the key server, error level events are
notified. SNMP, E-mail, REMCS, syslog, and AIS Connect may be specified as the
notice method.
e-copy-session-error
When an error occurs for a copy session or an abnormal copy session disappears,
error level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, REMCS, and syslog may be specified
as the notice method.
w-parts-warning
When other modules are in a warning condition, warning level events are
notified. Host sense, SNMP, E-mail and syslog may be specified as the notice
method.
w-disk-warning
When disks are in a warning condition, warning level events are notified. Host
sense, SNMP, E-mail and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
w-temperaturewarning
When the sensor detects warning level temperature, warning level events are
notified. Host sense, SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice
method.
w-battery-life
When battery life will soon expire, warning level events are notified. Host sense,
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method. (only for the
ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2)
i-recovery-module
When parts are recovered, information level events are notified. Host sense,
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method. When reset
groups for host ports are set, only SNMP and E-mail may be specified as the
notice method.
517
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
i-temperature-restoration
When the temperature sensor detects that the transition of error/warning level
to normal level is occurred, information level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail,
and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-user-logon-logoff
When the user logs on/logs off, information level events are notified. SNMP, Email, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-operate-raid-group
When RAID groups are created or deleted, information level events are notified.
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-power-off-on-cfl
When the power is turned off and then turned on again or concurrent firmware
loading is being performed, information level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail,
and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-add-release-hot-spare
When hot spares are added or released, information level events are notified.
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-operate-volume
When volumes are created or deleted, information level events are notified.
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-sdp-policy-level1
When the snap data pool usage reaches the Error level of the Advanced Copy
policy, information level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be
specified as the notice method.
i-sdp-policy-level2
When the snap data pool usage reaches the Warning level of the Advanced Copy
policy, information level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be
specified as the notice method. When the system boot has completed,
information level events are notified using only SNMP and E-mail as the notice
method.
i-sdp-policy-level3
When the snap data pool usage reaches the Information level of the Advanced
Copy policy, information level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may
be specified as the notice method.
i-limit-copy-table
When copy table usage reaches the limit, information level events are notified.
SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-expire-trial-copy-license
When the trial copy license expires, information level events are notified. SNMP,
E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice method.
i-odx
When the backup area of the ODX Buffer volume is insufficient, information level
events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the notice
method.
i-sed-network-error-recovered
When network connection errors with the key server are cleared, information
level events are notified. SNMP, E-mail, and syslog may be specified as the
notice method.
518
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
i-fc-ca-port-link-status-changed
When the link status of the CA port is changed, information level events are notified. E-mail, SNMP, syslog, and AIS Connect may be specified as the notice
method.
i-host-login-over
When the number of hosts that log in exceeds the defined number, information
level events are notified. E-mail, SNMP, syslog, and AIS Connect may be specified
as the notice method.
-method
This parameter specifies the notification method. One or more methods can be specified by
separating them with a comma. This parameter cannot be specified in conjunction with the
preset function.
Example: -method email,snmp (Specify "E-mail" and "SNMP")
email
E-mail
snmp
SNMP trap
host
Host sense
remcs
REMCS (remote support)
syslog
syslog
ais
AIS Connect
-suppression
This parameter specifies the suppression mode. It sets whether the specified event level and
notice method are notified. This parameter cannot be specified in conjunction with the preset
function.
Set "-suppression on" for events that should not be notified.
enable
Not notified (Suppression is enabled)
disable
Notified
disable-when-no-hs
Notified when no hot spare exists.
-host-sense-opmsg
Optional. This parameter is only usable when "host" parameter is specified for "-method" and
"disable" or "disable-when-on-hs" is specified for "-suppression".
enable
Notification is through an operator message.
disable
Notification is not through an operator message.
519
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the system default:
CLI> set event-notification -preset system-default
CLI> show event-notification
[Severity: Error Level]
E-mail
Parts Error
Notify
Disk Error
Notify
Temperature Error
Notify
End of battery life
Notify
Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant
Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant Complete Redundant Copy
Do not notify
Complete rebuild
Notify
Bad data
Notify
Pinned data
Notify
Not ready
Notify
Remote Path Error
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Overload)
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Other Error)
Notify
Thin Provisioning Pool Rate
Notify
Redundant
Do not notify
Copy Session Error
Do not notify
SED Network Error
Notify
SNMP
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Notify
Host
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Do not notify
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Do not notify
-
REMCS
Do not
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not
Do not
Do not
[Severity: Warning Level]
Parts Warning
Disk Warning
Temperature Warning
Battery life Warning
E-mail
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
SNMP
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Host
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
REMCS
-
[Severity: Information Level]
Recovery module
Temperature restoration
User login/logout
Operated RAID Group
Added/Released Hot Spare
Operated Volume
Power off/on Apply Firmware
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3
Copy Table Size Usage Rate Over
Trial copy license expired
No Free Space on ODX Volume
SED Network Error Recovered
FC CA Port Link Status Changed
Host Login Over
E-mail
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
Host
-
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
SNMP
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
AIS Connect
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
REMCS
-
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
The following example sets the remote service default:
CLI> set event-notification -preset remcs-default
CLI> show event-notification
[Severity: Error Level]
E-mail
Parts Error
Notify
Disk Error
Notify(HS<0)
Temperature Error
Notify
End of battery life
Notify
Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant
Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant Complete Redundant Copy
Do not notify
Complete rebuild
Notify
Bad data
Notify
Pinned data
Notify
Not ready
Notify
Remote Path Error
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Overload)
Notify
REC Buffer Halt (Other Error)
Notify
Thin Provisioning Pool Rate
Notify
Redundant
Do not notify
Copy Session Error
Do not notify
SED Network Error
Notify
SNMP
Notify
Notify(HS<0)
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Notify
Host
Notify(OPMSG)
Do not notify
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Do not notify
Notify(HS<0,OPMSG)
Do not notify
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Do not notify
-
REMCS
Do not
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not
Do not
Do not
[Severity: Warning Level]
Parts Warning
Disk Warning
Temperature Warning
Battery life Warning
E-mail
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
SNMP
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Host
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
REMCS
-
[Severity: Information Level]
Recovery module
Temperature restoration
User login/logout
Operated RAID Group
Added/Released Hot Spare
Operated Volume
Power off/on Apply Firmware
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3
Copy Table Size Usage Rate Over
Trial copy license expired
No Free Space on ODX Volume
SED Network Error Recovered
FC CA Port Link Status Changed
Host Login Over
E-mail
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
REMCS
-
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
SNMP
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
Host
-
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
AIS Connect
Notify
Notify(HS<0)
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
AIS Connect
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Do not notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
Do
notify
notify
notify
notify
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
520
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set event-notification
The following example sets up the parameters for an event notification. The notification method is E-mail.
All events with Warning level are notified.
CLI> set event-notification -severity warning -method email -suppression disable
The following example sets up the parameters used for event notification. The notification methods are
Email and SNMP trap. All events with Warning level or Error level are notified.
CLI> set event-notification -severity error,warning -method email,snmp -suppression disable
521
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show event-notification
show event-notification
This command displays the parameters that have been set for event notification.
■ Syntax
show event-notification
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# [Severity: Error Level]
# Parts Error
#
#
. . .
Disk Error
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
E-mail
Notify
A
SNMP
Notify
B
Host
Notify(OPMSG)
C
REMCS
D
Notify(HS<0)
G
Notify(HS<0)
Notify(HS<0,OPMSG) H
syslog
Do not notify
E
AIS Connect
Notify
F
Do not notify
Notify(HS<0)
It indicates whether it is notified by E-mail, or not.
It indicates whether it is notified by SNMP trap, or not.
It indicates whether it is notified by Host sense, or not. Also, it means host sense as OPMSG.
It indicates whether it is notified by REMCS, or not.
It indicates whether it is notified by syslog, or not.
It indicates whether it is notified by AIS Connect, or not.
It indicates conditions when there was no hot spare in the system.
It indicates conditions when there was no hot spare in the system. Also, it means host sense as OPMSG.
522
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show event-notification
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the parameters that have been set for event notification:
CLI> show event-notification
[Severity: Error Level]
Parts Error
Disk Error
Temperature Error
End of battery life
Rebuild/Copyback w/ redundant
Rebuild/Copyback w/o redundant
Redundant Copy End
Complete rebuild
Bad data
Pinned data
Not ready
Remote Path Error
REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)
REC Buffer Halt (Overload)
REC Buffer Halt (Other Error)
Thin Provisioning Pool Rate
Redundant Copy Start Finish
Copy Session Error
SED Network Error
E-mail
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
SNMP
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Host
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
Notify(OPMSG)
-
REMCS
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
[Severity: Warning Level]
Parts Warning
Disk Warning
Temperature Warning
Battery life Warning
E-mail
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
SNMP
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Host
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
REMCS
-
[Severity: Information Level]
Recovery module
Temperature restoration
User login/logout
Operated RAID Group
Added/Released Hot Spare
Operated Volume
Power off/on Apply Firmware
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv1
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv2
SDP Usage Rate Over Lv3
Copy Table Size Usage Rate Over
Trial copy license expired
No Free Space on ODX Volume
SED Network Error Recovered
FC CA Port Link Status Changed
Host Login Over
E-mail
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
Host
-
REMCS
-
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
SNMP
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Do not
Notify
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
AIS Connect
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Do not notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Notify
Syslog
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Do not
Notify
Notify
Notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
notify
523
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set lcd-suppress
set lcd-suppress
This command sets up LCD suppression (whether the error display for the components is displayed on the
LCD). This command can only be used for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2.
■ Syntax
set lcd-suppress [-parts-error {enable | disable}] [-parts-warning {enable | disable}]
[-disk-error {enable | disable | disable-when-no-hs }]
[-disk-warning {enable | disable | disable-when-no-hs }]
■ Parameter
-parts-error Optional. This parameter is specified to suppress the error display for the components (other
than drives) on the LCD display. If omitted, the setting is not changed.
enable
Error display suppression is set for the components (other than drives).
disable
Error display suppression is canceled for the components (other than drives).
-parts-warning
Optional. This parameter is specified to suppress the warning display for the components
(other than drives) on the LCD display. If omitted, the setting is not changed.
-disk-error
enable
Warning display suppression is set for the components (other than drives).
disable
Warning display suppression is canceled for the components (other than drives).
This parameter is specified to suppress the error display for the drives on the LCD display.
Optional. If omitted, the setting is not changed.
enable
Error display suppression is set for the drives. The error display is suppressed
regardless of the number of hot spares left.
disable
Error display suppression is canceled for the drives. The error display is not
suppressed regardless of the number of hot spares left.
disable-when-no-hs
Error display suppression is set for the drives when a hot spare exists. Disk error
is displayed when no hot spares are left.
-disk-warning
This parameter is specified to suppress the warning display for the drives on the LCD display.
Optional. If omitted, the setting is not changed.
enable
Warning display suppression is set for the drives. The warning display is
suppressed regardless of the number of hot spares left.
disable
Warning display suppression is canceled for the disks.
disable-when-no-hs
Warning display suppression is set for the drives when a hot spare exists. Disk
warning is displayed when no hot spares are left.
524
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set lcd-suppress
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up LCD suppression:
CLI> set lcd-suppress -parts-error enable -parts-warning enable -disk-error enable -disk-warning enable
525
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show lcd-suppress
show lcd-suppress
This command displays the information on LCD suppression. This command can only be used for the ETERNUS
DX8700 S2.
■ Syntax
show lcd-suppress
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
CLI> show lcd-suppress
Parts Error
[Display]
A
[Suppress]
B
[Display (HS<0)]
C
[Display]
D
Parts Warning
Disk Error
Disk Warning
A:
B:
C:
D:
It shows whether error display for the components (other than drives) is displayed on the LCD.
Display: Displayed
Suppress: Not displayed
It shows whether warning display for the components (other than drives) is displayed on the LCD.
Display: Displayed
Suppress: Not displayed
It shows whether error display for the drives is displayed on the LCD.
Display: Displayed
Suppress: Not displayed regardless of the number of hot spares left
Display (HS<0): Not displayed when hot spares are left
It shows whether warning display or the drives is displayed on the LCD.
Display: Displayed
Suppress: Not displayed regardless of the number of hot spares left
Display (HS<0): Not displayed when hot spares are left
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the information on LCD suppression:
CLI> show lcd-suppress
Parts Error
Parts Warning
Disk Error
Disk Warning
[Display]
[Suppress]
[Display (HS<0)]
[Display]
526
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.5
SMI-S
This section explains the commands relating to the SMI-S function.
527
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set smi-s
set smi-s
This command enables or disables the SMI-S functions.
■ Syntax
set smi-s [-function {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether all SMI-S functions are enabled or not. The initial
value is disabled. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. To enable this parameter,
power cycle the system is required.
enable
Each SMI-S function is enabled.
disable
Each SMI-S function is disabled (default).
■ Example(s)
The following example disables all the SMI-S functions:
CLI> set smi-s -function disable
528
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show smi-s
show smi-s
This command displays whether the SMI-S functions are enabled or disabled.
■ Syntax
show smi-s
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Current
[Enable]
A
# After the next power cycle [Enable]
B
A:
B:
It shows whether all of the SMI-S functions are currently enabled.
It shows whether all of the SMI-S functions will be enabled after the next power cycle.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the SMI-S functions:
CLI> show smi-s
S
Current
[Enable]
After the next power cycle [Enable]
529
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.6
SSH/SSL Security Configuration
This section explains the commands related to setting up SSH/SSL security. The following items can be
configured:
• SSH server key
• SSL server key and self-signed certificate.
• SSL server key and certificate signed by certificate provider.
■ Summary of how to register SSL certification through CLI
There are two methods for SSL certification; a self-signed certificate and a certificate that is signed by the
certificate provider.
The steps involved in registering a certificate that is signed by the certificate provider using CLI are as follows:
Procedure
1
Generate and export Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
Use the "create ssl-certificate-request" command to generate and export a CSR for a signed certificate
from the certificate provider. This command generates and exports a CSR and a server key. The server
key should be hidden from other keys.
2
Send CSR to certificate provider and receive signed certificate.
Send the exported CSR to the certificate provider to sign. A signed certificate will be returned from the
provider.
3
Register the signed certificate.
To register, use the "import ssl-certificate" command to import the received signed certificate and the
server key generated in Step 1.
End of procedure
Use the "create ssl-certificate" command to register a self-signed certificate.
530
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
The following figure shows how to register the certificate:
Settings state when ships
from factory.
In case of register
certificate signed by provider.
Generate and export CSR (*1)
No Certificate
Cannot access with https
Send CSR to provider.
When registering a
self-signed certificate.
Receive signed certificate.
Issue self-signed certificate.
Register signed certificate.
Allow https access
Certificate
(self- or provider-signed)
*1: Certification Signing Request
■ Non-interactive CLI command execution
Use of SSH public key authentication enables non-interactive (scriptable) CLI command execution.
Perform the following procedure to execute the CLI command interactively:
Procedure
1
Create a key pair for SSH authentication in a client.
2
Convert the created public key file into IETF format.
3
Register the public key in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
4
Check that CLI is available in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system by using the public key
authentication.
5
Execute a CLI command using a here document in the SSH client.
End of procedure
531
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
Example(s)
$ ssh-keygen -N "" -f ~/.ssh/identity
Generating public/private rsa key pair.
Your identification has been saved in /home/foo/.ssh/identity.
Your public key has been saved in /home/foo/.ssh/identity.pub.
The key fingerprint is:
00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00 foo@192.168.0.100
$ ssh-keygen -e -f .ssh/identity.pub > identity.pub.ietf
$ telnet 192.168.0.101
Trying 192.168.0.101...
Connected to 192.168.0.101 (192.168.0.101).
Escape character is '^]'.
ETERNUS login is required. [2011-11-11 11:11:11]
Login:foo
Password:
CLI> import ssh-public-key -server 192.168.0.100 -port maintenance -user foo -filename identity.pub.ietf -account-name foo
Password :
$ importing ./identity.pub.ietf from 192.168.0.100
CLI> exit
$ rm identity.pub.ietf
$ ssh foo@192.168.0.101
CLI> exit
$ echo show status | ssh foo@192.168.0.101
CLI> show status
Summary Status [Normal]
CLI> $
$ ssh foo@192.168.0.101 << EOS
? show smi-s
? show status
? EOS
CLI> show smi-s
Current
[Enable]
After the next power cycle [Enable]
CLI> show status
Summary Status [Normal]
CLI> $
• A CLI command with the following format cannot be executed:
ssh foo@192.168.0.101 show status
Use a here document or a pipe character that are shown in the example above for the specifications.
532
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create ssh-server-key
create ssh-server-key
This command renews and registers an SSH (Secure Shell) server key. Once this command is executed,
connection via ssh is possible after five minutes have elapsed.
■ Syntax
create ssh-server-key [-key-length { 1024 | 2048 | 4096 }] [-version1 { enable|disable }]
■ Parameter
-key-length Optional. This parameter specifies the bit length of the generating SSH server key. Only one
value can be specified. If this parameter is omitted, 2048 (default value) is used for the key
length.
-version1
1024
Key length is 1024bits.
2048
Key length is 2048bits. (Default value)
4096
Key length is 4096bits.
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable connections using SSH Version 1. If this
parameter is omitted, it is handled as if "enable" is specified. If connection via SSH Version 1 is
disabled for this option, then only connection via SSH Version 2 is possible.
enable
Connection via SSH Version 1 is enabled (default value).
disable
Connection via SSH Version 1 is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example renews the SSH server key with a key length of 2048bits:
CLI> create ssh-server-key -key-length 2048 -version1 disable
533
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create ssl-certificate
create ssl-certificate
This command renews and registers an SSL (Secure Socket Layer) server key and an SSL server certificate.
■ Syntax
create ssl-certificate [-key-length {1024 | 2048 | 4096}]
-common-name common_name [-subject-alt-name altname1,altname2...]
■ Parameter
-key-length Optional. This parameter specifies the bit length of the generating SSL server key. Only one
value can be specified.
If this parameter is omitted, 2048 (default value) is used for the key length.
1024
Key length is 1024bits.
2048
Key length is 2048bits. (Default value)
4096
Key length is 4096bits.
-common-name
This parameter specifies an IP address or domain name that accesses HTTPS for the MNT port
or the RMT port. The IP address should be written in IPv4 standard notation (a base 256
"d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 address format. The domain name should be written in full-domain
notation (FQDN). Only one value should be specified for this parameter.
Example:
foo.var
192.168.1.1
2001:1b::430:db0
Abbreviated notations are recommended when inputting an IPv6 address. This is because
some browsers support only abbreviated notations.
-subject-alt-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address and/or domain name that can access HTTPS
for the MNT port or the RMT port. The IP address should be written in standard notation (string
specified forming d.d.d.d 256base notation) or IPv6 address format. The domain name should
be written in full-domain notation (FQDN). The string length of all the FQDNs or IP addresses
with these parameters delimiters should be within 511bytes.
Example:
foo.var.com (11bytes) Correct
foo.var.com, 192.168.1.1  (11 +1 +11bytes) Correct
jugemujugem...co.jp  (511bytes) Correct
jugemujugemu...co.jp  (512bytes) Incorrect
jugemujugem...co.jp, foo.var.com  (511 +1 +11bytes) Incorrect
534
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > create ssl-certificate
■ Example(s)
The following example renews and registers the SSL server certificate:
CLI>create ssl-certificate -key-length 2048 -common-name eternus.example.com -subject-alt-name eternus.example.com, eternusmnt.example.com, 172.16.1.11
535
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export ssl-certificate-request
export ssl-certificate-request
This command exports the CSR (Certificate Signing Request) file and server key file that were generated to
send to the certificate provider.
■ Syntax
export ssl-certificate-request -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account [-csr-filename csr-filename] [-key-filename key-filename]
[-key-length {1024 | 2048 | 4096}] -country-name country_name
-state-province-name state_province_name -locality-name locality_name
-organization-name organization_name -organization-unit-name organization_unit_name
-common-name common_name [-subject-alt-name altname1,alitname2...]
[-indicator {enable | disable }]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server.
For details, refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 only)
This parameter specifies the name of the FTP server on which the CSR/key file are loaded. The
server name should be in IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string) format, IPv6
address format or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user account name for access to the FTP server. This command
displays an FTP server password prompt.
536
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export ssl-certificate-request
-csr-filename
Optional. This parameter specifies the filename to store the CSR file. If omitted, "server.csr"
(default name) is used. If the same filename already exists, it is overwritten.
The following conversion specifications, which begin with a percent character, are replaced by
their corresponding values at execution time. If other conversion strings are specified, this
command terminates abnormally with an error message.
%s
Serial number of the system
Example:
server_%s.csr  server_123456789012.csr
%d
Current date
Example:
server_%d.csr  server_20100316.csr (March 16, 2010)
%t
Current time
Example:
server_%t.csr  server_123456.csr (12:34:56)
%%
Percent character
Example:
server%%.csr  server%.csr
-key-filename
Optional. This parameter specifies the filename to store the key file. If omitted, "server.key"
(default file) is used. If the same filename already exists, it is overwritten.
The following conversion specifications, which begin with a percent character, are replaced by
their corresponding value at the time of execution. If other conversion strings are specified,
this command terminates abnormally with an error message.
%s
Serial number of the system
Example:
server_%s.key  server_123456789012.key
%d
Current date
Example:
server_%d.key  server_20100316.key (March 16, 2010)
%t
Current time
Example:
server_%t.key  server_123456.key (12:34:56)
%%
Percent character
Example:
server%%.key  server%.key
537
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export ssl-certificate-request
-key-length Optional. This parameter specifies the bit length of the generating SSL server key. Only one
value can be specified. If this parameter is omitted, 2048 (default value) is used for the key
length.
1024
Key length is 1024bits.
2048
Key length is 2048bits. (Default value)
4096
Key length is 4096bits.
-country-name
Specify a country using two uppercase characters. "JP" indicates Japan. For other countries,
refer to ISO3166-1.
-state-province-name
Specify the state where the organization is located. Up to 63 characters can be specified.
-locality-name
Specify the area where the organization is located. Up to 63 characters can be specified.
-organization-name
Specify the organization name. Up to 63 characters can be specified.
-organization-unit-name
Specify the department name of the organization. Up to 63 characters can be specified.
-common-name
This parameter specifies an IP address or domain name that accesses HTTPS for the MNT port
or the RMT port. The IP address should be written in IPv4 standard notation (a base 256
"d.d.d.d" string) or IPv6 address format. The domain name should be written in full-domain
notation (FQDN). Only one parameter can be specified.
Example:
foo.var
192.168.1.1
2001:1b::430:db0
-subject-alt-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the IP address or domain name that can access HTTPS for
the MNT port or the RMT port. To specify the SNMP manager IP address, use IPv4 standard
notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), the IPv6 address format, or fully qualified domain name
(FQDN). One or more FQDNs or IP addresses can be specified. The string length of all the
FQDNs or IP addresses with this parameter delimiters should be within 511bytes.
Example:
foo.var.com  (11bytes) Correct
foo.var.com, 192.168.1.1  (11 +1 +11bytes) Correct
jugemujugem...co.jp  (511bytes) Correct
jugemujugemu...co.jp  (512bytes) Incorrect
jugemujugem...co.jp, foo.var.com  (511 +1 +11bytes) Incorrect
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
538
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > export ssl-certificate-request
■ Example(s)
The following example generates and exports the CSR and the server key:
CLI> export ssl-certificate-request -port maintenance -server ftp.example.com -user tornado -key-length
2048 -country-name JP -state-province-name Nagano -locality-name Nagano -organization-name FJL -organization-unit-name N-ORCA -common-name eternus0001.example.com
Password :
exporting ./server.csr to ftp.example.com
Password :
exporting ./server.key to ftp.example.com
complete.
539
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > import ssl-certificate
import ssl-certificate
This command imports and registers the SSL server certificate that is signed by the certificate provider.
■ Syntax
import ssl-certificate -port {maintenance | remote| fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account [-cert-filename cert-filename]
[-key-filename key-filename] [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server.
For further information, refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2 only)
This parameter specifies the name of the FTP server on which the certificate and key file are
stored. The server name should be in IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string)
format, IPv6 address format or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies a user account name for access to the FTP server. This command
displays an FTP server password prompt.
-cert-filename
Optional. This parameter specifies the filename to load the certificate file. If omitted,
"server.crt" (default file) is used. If the same file already exists, it is overwritten.
-key-filename
Optional. This parameter specifies the filename to load the key file. If omitted, "server.key"
(default file) is used. If the same file already exists, it is overwritten.
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example imports and registers the signed certificate and the server key:
CLI> import ssl-certificate -port maintenance -server ftp.example.com -user cli-user -cert-filename
server.cert -key-filename server.key
540
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management
4.3.7
AIS Connect Settings
AIS Connect is a remote support service function that monitors/remotely controls the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
systems from a remote server (an AIS Connect server). AIS Connect is equivalent to the REMCS function, which
is available for models in regions other than EMEA. AIS Connect is not available in Japanese models.
When performing the AIS Connect setting for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system for the first time, agreeing
to the terms and conditions must be performed via GUI. This agreement cannot be performed via CLI.
This section explains the commands to set up the AIS Connect function.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AIS Connect environment
AIS Connect environment display
AIS Connect server
AIS Connect remote session
AIS Connect test transmission
AIS Connect manual log transmission
AIS Connect test event notification
541
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect
set ais-connect
This command sets up the AIS Connect operation environment. If the "REMCS function" is running or "E-mail
log send mode" is enabled, the AIS Connect function cannot be enabled.
■ Syntax
set ais-connect
[-function {enable | disable}] [-port {maintenance | remote}] [-send-log {enable | disable}]
[-country-code country-code]
[-server-certification {enable | disable}]
[-proxy-server {proxy-server | ""}] [-proxy-port-number proxy-port-number]
[-proxy-type {http | socks}] [-user-name {user-name | ""}]
■ Parameter
-function
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable the AIS Connect function. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
enabled
The AIS Connect function is enabled.
disable
The AIS Connect function is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies which LAN port is used to communicate with the AIS Connect server. This parameter cannot be specified when the AIS Connect function is disabled. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
-send-log
RMT port
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to automatically collect logs and send them to the
AIS Connect server when a failure (Error/Warning) occurs. This parameter cannot be specified
when the AIS Connect function is disabled or "Undefined" is displayed for "Service Contract
Responsibility" (the code of the country in which the support office for the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system is located). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enabled
Logs are automatically sent.
disable
Logs are not automatically sent.
-country-code
Optional. This parameter specifies the shipment destination of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system (the country where the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is located). Specify a value
that is listed in "Country code list". This parameter cannot be specified when the AIS Connect
function is disabled. This parameter must be specified when the AIS Connect function is
enabled. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
542
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect
-server-certification
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable server certification for SSL/TLS communication between the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system and the AIS Connect server. This parameter cannot be specified when the AIS Connect function is disabled. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
enabled
Server certification is enabled (default).
disable
Server certification is disabled.
-proxy-server
Optional. This parameter specifies the proxy server. Only one proxy server can be specified at
the same time. The server name format should be either IPv4 standard notation (a base 256
"d.d.d.d" string) or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
can be specified. When a proxy server is not used, specify consecutive double quotations (""). If
consecutive double quotations ("") are specified, the proxy port number, the proxy type, and
the user name are initialized. When the AIS Connect function is disabled, only consecutive double quotations ("") can be specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -proxy-server 192.168.1.20
Example: -proxy-server foo.bar
-proxy-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the proxy server port number. Specify the port number
within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. This parameter cannot be
specified when the AIS Connect function is disabled or the proxy server is not set. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed.
-proxy-type Optional. This parameter specifies the type of communication with the proxy server. This
parameter cannot be specified when the AIS Connect function is disabled or the proxy server is
not set. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
http
Basic/NTLM HTTP authentication
socks
SOCKSv5 authentication
-user-name Optional. This parameter specifies the user name for proxy server authentication. Up to 32
characters can be specified. This parameter cannot be specified when the AIS Connect function
is disabled or the proxy server is not set. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up an AIS Connect operation environment:
CLI> set ais-connect -function enable -port maintenance -send-log enable -country-code 392 -server-certification enable -proxy-server foo.bar -proxy-port-number 123 -proxy-type http -proxy-user-name User1
Password :
Confirm Password :
543
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect
■ Country code list
This list provides the country codes and the country names that are used to specify the shipment destination
of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
4
AFGHANISTAN
8
ALBANIA
12
ALGERIA
16
AMERICAN SAMOA
20
ANDORRA
24
ANGOLA
660
ANGUILLA
10
ANTARCTICA
28
ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA
32
ARGENTINA
51
ARMENIA
533
ARUBA
36
AUSTRALIA
40
AUSTRIA
31
AZERBAIJAN
44
BAHAMAS
48
BAHRAIN
50
BANGLADESH
52
BARBADOS
112
BELARUS
56
BELGIUM
84
BELIZE
204
BENIN
60
BERMUDA
64
BHUTAN
68
BOLIVIA
70
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOWINA
72
BOTSWANA
74
BOUVET ISLAND
76
BRAZIL
86
BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY
96
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
100
BULGARIA
854
BURKINA FASO
108
BURUNDI
116
CAMBODIA
120
CAMEROON
124
CANADA
132
CAPE VERDE
136
CAYMAN ISLANDS
140
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
148
CHAD
152
CHILE
156
CHINA
162
CHRISTMAS ISLAND
166
COCOS VALUES (KEELING) ISLANDS
170
COLOMBIA
174
COMOROS
178
CONGO
184
COOK ISLANDS
188
COSTA RICA
384
COTE DIVOIRE
191
CROATIA (LOCAL NAME: HRVATSKA)
192
CUBA
196
CYPRUS
203
CZECH REPUBLIC
208
DENMARK
262
DJIBOUTI
212
DOMINICA
214
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
626
EAST TIMOR
218
ECUADOR
818
EGYPT
222
EL SALVADOR
226
EQUATORIAL GUINEA
232
ERITREA
233
ESTONIA
231
ETHIOPIA
238
FALKLAND ISLANDS VALUES (MALVINAS)
234
FAROE ISLANDS
242
FIJI
246
FINLAND
250
FRANCE
254
FRENCH GUIANA
258
FRENCH POLYNESIA
260
FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES
266
GABON
270
GAMBIA
268
GEORGIA
276
GERMANY
544
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect
288
GHANA
292
GIBRALTAR
300
GREECE
304
GREENLAND
308
GRENADA
312
GUADELOUPE
316
GUAM
320
GUATEMALA
324
GUINEA
624
GUINEA-BISSAU
328
GUYANA
332
HAITI
334
HEARD AND MC DONALD ISLANDS
340
HONDURAS
344
HONG KONG
348
HUNGARY
352
ICELAND
356
INDIA
360
INDONESIA
364
IRAN VALUES (ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF)
368
IRAQ
372
IRELAND
376
ISRAEL
380
ITALY
388
JAMAICA
392
JAPAN
400
JORDAN
398
KAZAKHSTAN
404
KENYA
296
KIRIBATI
408
KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF
410
KOREA, REPUBLIC OF
414
KUWAIT
417
KYRGYZSTAN
418
LAO PEOPLES DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC
428
LATVIA
422
LEBANON
426
LESOTHO
430
LIBERIA
434
LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA
438
LIECHTENSTEIN
440
LITHUANIA
442
LUXEMBOURG
446
MACAU
807
MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF
450
MADAGASCAR
454
MALAWI
458
MALAYSIA
462
MALDIVES
466
MALI
470
MALTA
584
MARSHALL ISLANDS
474
MARTINIQUE
478
MAURITANIA
480
MAURITIUS
175
MAYOTTE
484
MEXICO
583
MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF
498
MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF
492
MONACO
496
MONGOLIA
500
MONTSERRAT
504
MOROCCO
508
MOZAMBIQUE
104
MYANMAR
516
NAMIBIA
520
NAURU
524
NEPAL
528
NETHERLANDS
530
NETHERLANDS ANTILLES
540
NEW CALEDONIA
554
NEW ZEALAND
558
NICARAGUA
562
NIGER
566
NIGERIA
570
NIUE
574
NORFOLK ISLAND
580
NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS
578
NORWAY
512
OMAN
586
PAKISTAN
585
PALAU
275
PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED
591
PANAMA
598
PAPUA NEW GUINEA
600
PARAGUAY
545
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect
604
PERU
608
PHILIPPINES
612
PITCAIRN
616
POLAND
620
PORTUGAL
630
PUERTO RICO
634
QATAR
638
REUNION
642
ROMANIA
643
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
646
RWANDA
659
SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS
662
SAINT LUCIA
670
SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES
882
SAMOA
674
SAN MARINO
678
SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE
682
SAUDI ARABIA
686
SENEGAL
688
SERBIA AND MONTENEGRO
690
SEYCHELLES
694
SIERRA LEONE
702
SINGAPORE
703
SLOVAKIA VALUES (SLOVAK REPUBLIC)
705
SLOVENIA
90
SOLOMON ISLANDS
706
SOMALIA
710
SOUTH AFRICA
239
SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH
ISLANDS
724
SPAIN
144
SRI LANKA
654
ST. HELENA
666
ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON
736
SUDAN
740
SURINAME
744
SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN ISLANDS
748
SWAZILAND
752
SWEDEN
756
SWITZERLAND
760
SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC
158
TAIWAN, PROVINCE OF CHINA
762
TAJIKISTAN
834
TANZANIA, UNITED REPUBLIC OF
764
THAILAND
768
TOGO
772
TOKELAU
776
TONGA
780
TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO
788
TUNISIA
792
TURKEY
795
TURKMENISTAN
796
TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS
798
TUVALU
800
UGANDA
804
UKRAINE
784
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
826
UNITED KINGDOM
840
UNITED STATES
581
UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS
858
URUGUAY
860
UZBEKISTAN
548
VANUATU
336
VATICAN CITY STATE VALUES (HOLY SEE)
862
VENEZUELA
704
VIET NAM
92
VIRGIN ISLANDS VALUES (BRITISH)
850
VIRGIN ISLANDS VALUES (U.S.)
876
WALLIS AND FUTUNA ISLANDS
732
WESTERN SAHARA
887
YEMEN
894
ZAMBIA
716
ZIMBABWE
546
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show ais-connect
show ais-connect
This command displays the AIS Connect operation environment.
■ Syntax
show ais-connect
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# AIS Connect Function
[Enable]
A
# Port
[MNT]
B
# Send Log(Auto)
[Enable]
C
# Country Of Installation
[392 (JAPAN)]
D
# Service Contract Responsibility [392 (JAPAN)]
E
# SSL Server Certification
[Enable]
F
# Proxy Server
[foo.bar]
G
# Proxy Port Number
[123]
H
# Proxy Type
[HTTP]
I
# Proxy User Name
[User1]
J
# Remote Session
[Permit]
K
# Remote Session Timeout(hour)
[3]
L
<Trusted Root Certification Authorities>
Issuer Name
[Fujitsu Certification Authority]
M
Valid From
[2012-08-17 13:04:47]
N
Valid To
[2015-08-17 13:04:47]
O
547
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > show ais-connect
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
It indicates whether the AIS Connect function is enabled.
It indicates the LAN port on the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that communicates with the AIS Connect
server.
It indicates whether logs are automatically sent.
It indicates the code and name of the country where the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is shipped. If it is not
set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
It indicates the code and name of the country in which the support office for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system is located. If it is not set, "Undefined" is displayed.
It indicates whether server certification is disabled.
It indicates the FQDN or IP address (IPv4) of the proxy server. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
It indicates the proxy server port number. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
It indicates the type of communication with the proxy server (HTTP / SOCKS). If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
It indicates the user name for proxy authentication.
It indicates whether a remote session from the AIS Connect server to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is
allowed.
It indicates the timeout interval for remote sessions. A number between 1 to 24 or "Unlimited" is displayed.
Root certification issuer
Starting date of the validity period for the root certification
Ending date of the validity period for the root certification
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the operation environment of AIS Connect:
CLI> show ais-connect
AIS Connect Function
[Enable]
Port
[MNT]
Send Log(Auto)
[Enable]
Country Of Installation
[392 (JAPAN)]
Service Contract Responsibility [392 (JAPAN)]
SSL Server Certification
[Enable]
Proxy Server
[foo.bar]
Proxy Port Number
[123]
Proxy Type
[HTTP]
Proxy User Name
[User1]
Remote Session
[Permit]
Remote Session Timeout(hour)
[3]
<Trusted Root Certification Authorities>
Issuer Name
[Fujitsu Certification Authority]
Valid From
[2012-08-17 13:04:47]
Valid To
[2015-08-17 13:04:47]
Issuer Name
Valid From
Valid To
[Fujitsu Certification Authority2]
[2012-08-17 13:04:47]
[2015-08-17 13:04:47]
548
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > set ais-connect-remote-session
set ais-connect-remote-session
This command permits remote sessions to remotely control the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system from a
remote server by using the AIS Connect function.
This command cannot be used when the AIS Connect function is disabled.
■ Syntax
set ais-connect-remote-session -session {permit|forbid} [-timeout timeout]
■ Parameter
-session
-timeout
This parameter specifies whether remote sessions are permitted to remotely control the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system from the AIS Connect server. When connections of remote sessions
are permitted with this option, the setting is automatically reversed if the AIS Connect server
does not request remote sessions within the period that is specified for the "-timeout" option.
permit
Connections for remote sessions are permitted.
forbid
Connections for remote sessions are not permitted.
Optional, but must be specified when "permit" is specified for the "-session" parameter. This
parameter specifies the idle timeout interval for remote sessions. If the AIS Connect server
does not request remote sessions within the specified period, the setting that permits
connections of remote sessions is automatically reversed. This time period can be specified on
an hourly basis by using a number from 0 to 24. If "0" is specified, a timeout does not occur
(the idle timeout interval is unlimited).
■ Example(s)
The following example allows connection from the AIS Connect server and sets two hours as the timeout
interval:
CLI> set ais-connect-remote-session -session permit -timeout 2
549
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > test ais-connect
test ais-connect
This command checks the connections with the AIS Connect server.
■ Syntax
test ais-connect
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example checks the connection with the AIS Connect server:
CLI> test ais-connect
550
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > send ais-connect-log
send ais-connect-log
This command is used to manually send logs to the AIS Connect server.
■ Syntax
send ais-connect-log
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example manually sends logs to the AIS Connect server:
CLI> send ais-connect-log
551
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > test ais-connect-event-notification
test ais-connect-event-notification
This command is used to test an event notification to the AIS Connect server.
■ Syntax
test ais-connect-event-notification
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example tests an event notification to the AIS Connect server:
CLI> test ais-connect-event-notification
552
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.3 Network Management > import ais-ssl-certificate
import ais-ssl-certificate
This command imports and registers the SSL server certificate that is signed by the certificate provider.
■ Syntax
import ais-ssl-certificate -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name -user login_user_account
-filename -filename [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For further
information, refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (not supported in the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
This parameter specifies the FTP server name in which the certificate file is to be stored. The
server name format is IPv4 standard notation (as a string in the base 256 notation d.d.d.d),
IPv6 address format or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
-filename
This parameter specifies the certificate file name.
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example imports and registers the signed certificate:
CLI> import ais-ssl-certificate -port maintenance -server ftp.example.com -user cli-user filename
server.cert
Password :
553
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4
Miscellaneous
This section explains the commands related to the following miscellaneous functions.
The main functions are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.4.1
Date and time
NTP
ETERNUS DX Disk Storage System Name
Box ID
Power Synchronization
Syslog Server Settings
Shutdown/Restart System
Date, Time and NTP
This section explains the commands related to setting the date and time of the system. The system also
supports time correction using the Network Time Protocol (NTP).
554
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set date
set date
This command sets the date and time of the system.
■ Syntax
set date [-time YYYYMMDDhhmmss] [-timezone number] [-dst {enable|disable}]
[-from{MMDDhh|MM,{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat},hh}]
[-to {MMDDhh|MM,{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat},hh}]
■ Parameter
-time
Optional. This parameter specifies the date and time. The format is "YYYYMMDDhhmmss":
"YYYY" is the year (a four-digit number), "MM" is the number of the month (01-12), "DD" is the
number of the day (01-31), "hh" is the hour in 24-hour time (00-23), "mm" is the minute (0059), and "ss" is the second (00-59). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-timezone
Optional. This parameter specifies the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) . The
selectable preset numbers are shown below. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
0
Eniwetok, Kwajalein
-12:00
1
Samoa
-11:00
2
Honolulu
-10:00
3
Alaska
-9:00
4
Los Angels, San Francisco, San Diego
-8:00
5
Arizona
-7:00
6
Chicago, Mexico City
-6:00
7
New York, Bogota
-5:00
8
Caracas
-4:00
9
Newfoundland
-3:30
10
Sao Paulo, Brasilia
-3:00
11
Mid-Atlantic Ocean
-2:00
12
Azores Island, Cape Verde
-1:00
13
Dublin, London, Manchester, Lisbon
0:00
14
Paris, Madrid, Stockholm
+1:00
15
Rome, Vienna, Berlin
+1:00
16
Milan, Amsterdam
+1:00
17
Athens, Helsinki, Cairo
+2:00
18
Beirut, Cape Town
+2:00
19
Nairobi, Moscow
+3:00
20
Abu Dhabi
+4:00
21
Islamabad, Karachi
+5:00
22
New Delhi
+5:30
23
Dhaka
+6:00
555
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set date
-dst
24
Bangkok, Jakarta
+7:00
25
Hong Kong, Manila, Singapore
+8:00
26
Beijing, Taipei, Kuala Lumpur, Perth
+8:00
27
Tokyo, Osaka, Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo
+9:00
28
Seoul
+9:00
29
Adelaide
+9:30
30
Guam, Sydney, Melbourne
+10:00
31
Solomon Islands, New Caledonia
+11:00
32
Wellington, Auckland, Fiji
+12:00
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the daylight saving time is enabled or not. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
enable
DST is enabled.
disable
DST is disabled.
• When "enable" is specified, both the starting and the ending information must be specified.
• When "disable" is specified, the starting nor the ending information cannot be specified.
-from
Optional. This parameter specifies when DST (daylight saving time) starts, and must be
specified when enabling DST. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
There are two formats. One format is "MMDDhh": "MM" is the starting month number (01 –
12), "DD" is the starting day number (01 – 31), and "hh" is the starting hour in 24-hour time
(00 – 23). The other format is "MM,
{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat},hh": "MM" is the starting month
number (01 – 12), both "{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last}" and "{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat}" are
pairs, and means the starting day and the starting week. "hh" is the starting hour in 24-hour
time (00 – 23).
-to
Optional. This parameter specifies when DST (daylight saving time) ends, and must be
specified when enabling DST. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
There are two formats. One format is "MMDDhh": "MM" is the ending month number (01 – 12),
"DD" is the ending day number (01 – 31), and "hh" is the ending hour in 24-hour time (00 –
23). The other format is "MM, {1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last},{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat},hh":
"MM" is the ending month number (01 – 12), both "{1st|2nd|3rd|4th|last}" and
"{sun|mon|tue|wed|thu|fri|sat}" are pairs, and means the ending day and the ending week.
"hh" is the ending hour in 24-hour time (00 – 23).
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the system date to 11:55 PM on January 12, 2009 GMT:
CLI> set date -time 20090112235500
556
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set date
The following example sets the system date to 11:55 PM on January 12, 2009 in the New York time zone
(GMT -5:00):
CLI> set date -time 20090112235500 -timezone 7
The following example sets the system date to 12:30 PM on January 1, 2009 in the Honolulu time zone
(GMT-10:00). DST is set from 1:00 AM on the last Sunday of March to 1:00 AM on the last Sunday of October:
CLI> set date -time 20090101123000 -timezone 2 -dst enable -from 03,last,sun,01 -to 10,last,sun,01
The following example sets the system date to 12:30 PM on January 1, 2009. DST is set from 2:00 AM on
March 1st and 2:00 AM on October 30th:
CLI> set date -time 20090101123000 -timezone 2 -dst enable -from 030102 -to 103002
557
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show date
show date
This command displays the date and time of the system.
■ Syntax
show date
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# 2008-12-31 00:00:03 GMT+03:00 (Nairobi, Moscow)
date
time
timezone
# DST [ON] 06-01 02:00 - 09-30 02:00
dst : from 2:00 AM on June 1 to 2:00 AM on September 30
# 2008-01-01 23:55:00 GMT+01:00 (Paris, Madrid, Stockholm)
date
time
timezone
dst
DST [ON] 03-last-Sun 02:00 - 10-last-Sun 02:00
dst : from 2:00 AM on March last Saturday
to 2:00 on October last Saturday
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the system date and time:
CLI> show date
2008-10-01 10:59:59 GMT+09:00 (Tokyo, Osaka, Kyoto, Fukuoka, Sapporo)
DST [OFF]
CLI> show date
2008-12-31 00:00:03 GMT+03:00 (Nairobi, Moscow)
DST [ON] 06-01 02:00 - 09-30 02:00
CLI> show date
2008-01-01 23:55:00 GMT+01:00 (Paris, Madrid, Stockholm)
DST [ON] 03-last-Sun 01:00 - 10-last-Sun 01:00
558
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set ntp
set ntp
The system supports time correction using the Network Time Protocol (NTP) and implements the NTP client
functions. This command can set up the NTP environment.
■ Syntax
set ntp [-function {enable | disable}] [-server server_address] [-port {maintenance | remote}]
■ Parameter
-function
-server
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the NTP client is enabled or not. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
enable
NTP is enabled.
disable
NTP is disabled.
Optional. This parameter specifies the NTP server address. Up to 64 characters can be specified.
The server name format is IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name. The types of IPv6 addresses that can be specified are
global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique local addresses.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the Ethernet port to connect to the NTP Server. If omitted,
the existing setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the NTP configuration. The NTP Server is specified as the "ntpserver.com". The
Maintenance port (MNT port) is specified as the Ethernet port for NTP functions.
CLI> set ntp -function enable -server ntpserver.com -port maintenance
The following example sets the NTP configuration. The NTP Server is specified as IP address "10.1.1.100". The
Remote port (RMT port) is specified as the Ethernet port for NTP functions.
CLI> set ntp -function enable -server 10.1.1.100 -port remote
The following example disables NTP:
CLI> set ntp -function disable
559
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show ntp
show ntp
This command displays the NTP configuration.
■ Syntax
show ntp
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
CLI> show ntp
# NTP
[Enable]
# NTP Server
[ntpserver.com]
# NTP LAN Port
[MNT]
It shows whether the NTP function is enabled, or not.
NTP Server name
Ethernet port to connect to NTP server
# Access Status [2008-02-21 08:30:00 succeeded SYNC]
Result of synchronization
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the NTP configuration:
CLI> show ntp
NTP
NTP Server
NTP LAN Port
Access Status
[Enable]
[10.1.1.100]
[RMT]
[2008-02-21 08:30:00 succeeded SYNC]
CLI> show ntp
NTP
NTP Server
NTP LAN Port
Access Status
[Enable]
[fd80::abd0:223:ad]
[RMT]
[0000-00-00 00:00:00 failed SYNC]
CLI> show ntp
NTP
NTP Server
NTP LAN Port
Access Status
[Disable]
[10.1.1.100]
[RMT]
[0000-00-00 00:00:00 succeeded SYNC]
560
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.2
ETERNUS DX Disk Storage System Name
This section explains the commands used to set the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name.
561
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set storage-system-name
set storage-system-name
This command sets the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system information. Note that the Virtual Disk Service (VDS)
"Friendly" name corresponds to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name.
■ Syntax
set storage-system-name [-name name] [-installation-site location]
[-contact contact] [-description description]
■ Parameter
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name (up to 16
characters). Permitted characters are described in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19).
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-installation-site
Optional. This parameter specifies the installation site name (up to 50 letters). Permitted
characters are described in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19). If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
-contact
Optional. This parameter specifies the administrator address (up to 50 characters). Permitted
characters are described in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters" (page 19). If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
-description Optional. This parameter specifies the description of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system (up
to 50 characters). Permitted characters are described in "1.2.2 Keywords and Parameters"
(page 19). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name, installation site name, descriptions,
and contact address:
CLI> set storage-system-name -name E2000-No1 -installation-site FJ -contact AVRIL -description CALC2
562
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show storage-system-name
show storage-system-name
This command displays the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name.
■ Syntax
show storage-system-name
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
CLI> show storage-system-name
# Name
[E2000]
Series name of the system
# Installation Site [FJ]
Installation site
# Contact
[xxx.xxx.xxxx]
# Description
[admin-machine]
Contact address
Description of the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system name:
CLI> show storage-system-name
Name
[DXL-1]
Installation Site [FJ]
Contact
[AVRIL]
Description
[CALC1]
563
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.3
Encryption Mode
This chapter explains the commands related to encryption mode functions. Enabling encryption mode makes
the encryption mode functions that are performed by a CM available.
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
564
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set encryption
set encryption
This command specifies whether encryption mode is enabled or disabled. When the encryption mode is
enabled, "Fujitsu" or "AES" should be specified as the kind of encryption. After switching the encryption mode
from enabled to disabled, the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system power must be turned off and back on again
to apply the setting. When switching the encryption mode from disabled to enabled, this operation is not
required.
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
set encryption -mode {fujitsu | aes | disable}
■ Parameter
-mode
This parameter specifies encryption mode.
fujitsu
Encryption mode is enabled. (Fujitsu)
aes
Encryption mode is enabled. (AES)
disable
Encryption mode is disabled.
■ Example(s)
The following example enables the Fujitsu encryption mode function:
CLI> set encryption -mode fujitsu
The following example disables the encryption mode functions,
and then reboots the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to apply the setting:
CLI> set encryption -mode disable
CLI> shutdown -mode reboot
565
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show encryption
show encryption
This command displays the status of the encryption mode.
Encryption-related functions may not be available for some user environments.
■ Syntax
show encryption
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Encryption Mode [Fujitsu]
A
A:
Encryption mode
■ Example(s)
The following example displays whether the encryption mode is enabled or disabled:
CLI> show encryption
Encryption Mode [Fujitsu]
CLI> show encryption
Encryption Mode [AES]
CLI> show encryption
Encryption Mode [Disable]
566
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.4
Box ID
This section explains the commands related to the Box ID.
567
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set boxid
set boxid
Box ID is the identification information presented to certain applications. This command sets the Box ID. The
series name, the model name, the serial number, and additional fixed characters of the system are set as the
default for the Box ID.
■ Syntax
set boxid -id box_id
■ Parameter
-id
This parameter specifies a Box ID. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and hash marks
(#) can be specified. Each Box ID must be unique.
• All alphabetic characters are handled as uppercase.
• The pound key characters (#) are automatically appended when the input characters are
less than 40.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the Box ID:
CLI> set boxid -id "00DXL#########ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######"
568
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show boxid
show boxid
This command displays the registered Box ID.
■ Syntax
show boxid
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
Box ID [00E2000#######ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######]
A
A:
Box ID
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the registered Box ID:
CLI> show boxid
Box ID [00E2000#######ET06F21AUABCPJ000000######]
569
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.5
Power Synchronization
This section explains the commands related to power synchronization.
570
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set power-synchronization
set power-synchronization
This command configures the way in which the shutdown function interacts with the external sensor.
■ Syntax
set power-synchronization [-cm { 0 | 1 | all | none }] [-svc { 0 | 1 | all | none }]
[-auto-power {enable | disable}] [-resume-power {enable | disable}] [-shutdown-time shutdown_time]
[-preset { power-sync | pman | manual}] [-power-fail-signal { positive | negative }]
[-low-battery-signal { positive | negative }] [-ups-shutdown-signal { positive | negative }]
[-ups-shutdown { enable | disable }]
■ Parameter
-cm
-svc
Optional. This parameter specifies which controller module connects to the external sensor.
The connection method conforms to the RS-232C standard. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. This can only be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 and ETERNUS DX410 S2/
DX440 S2.
0
Controller module #0
1
Controller module #1
all
Both Service Controller #0 and Service Controller #1
none
No connection. If selected, only "-auto-power" and "-resume-power" from the
parameters that follow can be selected.
Optional. This parameter specifies which service controller connects to the external sensor. The
connection method conforms to the RS-232C standard. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. This parameter can only be set for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2.
0
Service Controller #0
1
Service Controller #1
all
Both Service Controller #0 and Service Controller #1
none
No connection.
-auto-power
Optional. If "enable" is specified, the system power is turned on when an AC power supply is
detected. The default value is set to disable.
enable
Enabled.
disable
Disabled.
-resume-power
Optional. If "enable" is specified, the system power is turned on when an AC power supply is
detected after the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system is shutdown due to a power outage. The
default value is set to disable.
enable
Enabled.
disable
Disabled.
571
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set power-synchronization
-shutdown-time
Optional. This parameter specifies the time in minutes between when a power outage signal is
received and when a system shutdown begins. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
The default value is set to "0". Any value between 0 and 15 can be specified. This can only be
set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
-preset
Optional. This parameter specifies the preset values for the power synchronization interface. If
this parameter is specified, the following "-power-fail-signal" and "-low-battery-signal"
parameters cannot be specified. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial
value is set to "pman". This can only be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
power-sync Power synchronized unit. If this operand is specified, "-power-fail-signal" is
assigned as positive and "-low-battery-signal" is assigned as negative.
pman
PMAN. If this operand is specified, "-power-fail-signal" is assigned as positive and
"-low-battery-signal" is assigned as positive.
manual
Manual setting. For this setting, "-power-fail-signal" and "-low-battery-signal"
must be specified at the same time.
-power-fail-signal
Optional. This parameter specifies the signal polarity of the power outage signal, which
indicates that the power supply has failed. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The
initial value is set to "positive". This can be set when "-preset manual" is specified. This can only
be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
positive
Positive is set.
negative
Negative is set.
-low-battery-signal
Optional. This parameter specifies the signal polarity of the low battery voltage signal, which
indicates that battery power is nearly exhausted. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed. The initial value is set to "positive". This can be set when "-preset manual" is
specified. This can only be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
positive
Positive is set.
negative
Negative is set.
-ups-shutdown-signal
Optional. This parameter specifies the signal polarity of the UPS stop signal when completing
shutdown. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial value is set to "negative".
This can only be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
positive
Positive is set.
negative
Negative is set.
-ups-shutdown
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the UPS stop signal output is issued after
completing shutdown. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. The initial value is set to
"disable". This can only be set for ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2.
enable
Enabled.
disable
Disabled.
572
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set power-synchronization
■ Example(s)
The following example sets how the shutdown function interacts with the external sensor. Both controller
modules are selected, the shutdown time is specified as 5 minutes, and the input signal that signals power
outage is specified as positive.
CLI> set power-synchronization -cm all -shutdown-time 5 -power-fail-signal positive
573
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show power-synchronization
show power-synchronization
This command displays the settings that control how the shutdown function interacts with the external
sensor.
■ Syntax
show power-synchronization
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Controller Module #0
# Service Controller #0
# Controller Module #1
# Service Controller #1
# Auto Power
# Resume Power
# Waiting Time to Shutdown
# Type
# Power Fail Signal
# Low Battery Signal
# UPS Shutdown Signal
# UPS Shutdown
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
Enable
A
Enable
B
Disable
C
Disable
D
Enable
E
Disable
F
5 min.
G
Power Synchronized Unit
H
Positive
I
Negative
J
Negative
K
Enable
L
It shows whether the CM#0 is connected to the power synchronized device. (This item is only displayed for the
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 and the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)
It shows whether the SVC#0 is connected to the power synchronized device. (This item is only displayed for the
ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
It shows whether the CM#1 is connected to the power synchronized device. (This item is displayed only for the
ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 and the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)
It shows whether the SVC#1 is connected to the power synchronized device. (This item is only displayed for the
ETERNUS DX8700 S2)
The setting to turn the system power on when AC power is supplied.
The setting to turn the system power on when AC power is supplied after the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system
is shutdown due to a power outage.
The time that starts the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system shutdown when a power outage signal is received
from an external sensor device (This item is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
The reset interface (Power Synchronized Unit, PMAN, or manual). In this output, the preset interface is
displayed if the same setup as the preset is set by manual setup (This item is displayed only for the ETERNUS
DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
The signal polarity that controls the input power outage signal when a power supply fails and power is not
provided (This item is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
The signal polarity that controls the battery voltage low signal when the battery usage of a UPS is low (This
item is displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
574
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show power-synchronization
K:
L:
The signal polarity that controls the UPS output stop signal when the shutdown is complete (This item is
displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
It shows whether the UPS output stop signal is enabled or not when the shutdown is complete (This item is
displayed only for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2).
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the settings that control how the shutdown function interacts with the
external sensor (for the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2):
CLI> show power-synchronization
Controller Module #0
Enable
Controller Module #1
Disable
Auto Power
Enable
Resume Power
Disable
Waiting Time to Shutdown
5 min.
Type
Power Synchronized Unit
Power Fail Signal
Positive
Low Battery Signal
Negative
UPS Shutdown Signal
Negative
UPS Shutdown
Enable
The following example displays the settings that control how the shutdown function interacts with the
external sensor (for the ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2):
CLI> show power-synchronization
Controller Module #0
Enable
Controller Module #1
Disable
Auto Power
Enable
Resume Power
Disable
The following example displays the settings that control how the shutdown function interacts with the
external sensor (for the ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show power-synchronization
Service Controller #0
Enable
Service Controller #1
Disable
Auto Power
Enable
Resume Power
Disable
575
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.6
Self-Encrypted Disk (SED) Authentication Settings
This section explains the commands that are related to the Self-Encrypted Disk (SED) authentication settings.
There are two types of authentication keys for SEDs: the common key that is stored in the ETERNUS DX Disk
storage system and an SED authentication key that is managed by the key server. Commands for setting the
common key are explained in this section. Note that if an SED authentication key is used, the common key
must also be set.
576
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set sed-authentication
set sed-authentication
This command sets the authentication key for Self-Encrypted Disks (SEDs). SEDs are used to prevent the
leakage of data in case a disk is stolen or lost.
■ Syntax
set sed-authentication -execution {yes|no}
■ Parameter
-execution
This parameter sets the authentication key for SEDs.
yes
The authentication key for SEDs is set.
no
The authentication key for SEDs is not set (default).
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the authentication key for an SED:
CLI> set sed-authentication
-execution yes
577
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show sed-authentication
show sed-authentication
This command displays the status of the authentication key registration for SEDs.
■ Syntax
show sed-authentication
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
CLI> show sed-authentication
SED authentication
[Registered]
A
A:
It indicates whether the SED authentication key is registered.
■ Example(s)
The following example shows the sed-authentication command when the SED authentication key is
registered:
CLI> show sed-authentication
SED authentication
[Registered]
The following example shows the sed-authentication command when the SED authentication key is not
registered:
CLI> show sed-authentication
SED authentication
[Not Registered]
578
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.7
Syslog Server Settings
Syslog is a protocol that allows a machine to send event notification message.
This section explains commands related to the sending settings for the server.
• Set up the association with Syslog server(s).
• Display settings of the association with the system and Syslog server(s).
Set up the association
with Syslog server(s).
User
Refer settings of
the association
with Syslog server(s).
Syslog server 1
ETERNUS DX
Disk storage system
Syslog server 2
579
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set syslog-notification
set syslog-notification
This command sets up an association with the syslog server.
■ Syntax
set syslog-notification
[-server1-function {disable | rfc3164 | rfc5424}]
[-server1 syslog-server1] [-server1-port-number port_number]
[-server1-port {maintenance | remote}]
[-server2-function {disable | rfc3164 | rfc5424}]
[-server2 syslog-server2]
[-server2-port-number port_number]
[-server2-port {maintenance | remote}]
■ Parameter
-server1-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable syslog server 1. If this parameter is
omitted, this setting is not changed.
-server1
disable
Syslog server 1 is disabled.
rfc3164
Syslog server 1 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC3164.
rfc5424
Syslog server 1 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC5424.
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1. Only one server can be specified. The server
name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of IPv6 addresses that can be
specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be specified. If this parameter is
omitted, this setting is not changed.
Example: -server1 192.168.1.20
Example: -server1 fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server1 foo.bar
-server1-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1's UDP port number for the syslog protocol.
Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. If
omitted, the setting is not changed. The default value is 514.
-server1-port
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1's LAN port. If this parameter is omitted, this
setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
580
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set syslog-notification
-server2-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable syslog server 2. If this parameter is
omitted, this setting is not changed.
-server2
disable
Syslog server 2 is disabled.
rfc3164
Syslog server 2 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC3164.
rfc5424
Syslog server 2 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC5424.
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2. Only one server can be specified. The server
name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of IPv6 addresses that can be
specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be specified. If this parameter is
omitted, this setting is not changed.
Example: -server2 192.168.1.20
Example: -server2 fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server2 foo.bar
-server2-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2's UDP port number for the syslog protocol.
Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. If
omitted, the setting is not changed. The default value is 514.
-server2-port
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2's LAN port. If this parameter is omitted, this
setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
■ Example(s)
The following example sets the syslog server:
CLI> set syslog-notification -server1-function rfc3164 -server1 10.21.134.198 -server1-port-number 514 server1-port maintenance -server2-function rfc5424 -server2 10.17.80.6 -server2-port-number 517 -server2lan-port remote
581
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show syslog-notification
show syslog-notification
This command displays settings of the syslog server association.
■ Syntax
show syslog-notification
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Server1 function
# Server1
# Server1 Port Number
# Server1 Port
# Server2 function
# Server2
# Server2 Port Number
# Server2 Port
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
Enable (RFC3164)
A
10.21.134.198
B
514
C
MNT
D
Enable (RFC5424)
E
10.17.80.6
F
517
G
RMT
H
It shows whether syslog server 1 is enabled.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the syslog server 1
UDP port number of the syslog server 1 for the syslog protocol
It shows which port is used.
It shows whether syslog server 2 is enabled.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the syslog server 2
UDP port number of the syslog server 2 for the syslog protocol.
It shows which port is used.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the settings of the syslog servers:
CLI> show syslog-notification
Server1 Function
[Enable (RFC3164)]
Server1
[10.21.134.198]
Server1 Port Number [514]
Server1 Port
[MNT]
Server2 Function
[Enable (RFC5424)]
Server2
[10.17.80.6]
Server2 Port Number [517]
Server2 Port
[RMT]
582
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.8
Audit Log Settings
Audit logs are audit trail information that records operations that are executed for the system by a system
engineer or administrator and the response from the system. Logs are sent to the server by using syslog protocols.
This section explains the following commands related to the audit log settings.
• Setting up the audit log function
• Displaying the audit log function
Information such as the
storage system name,
the user/role,
the process time,
the process details, and
the process results
Log in
Change settings
Log out
Audit log
System administrator
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system
Syslog server
583
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set audit
set audit
This command changes the general settings of the audit log function. Use the "show audit" command to display the audit log function settings that are configured by this command.
■ Syntax
set audit [-mode {enable | disable}]
[-server1-function {disable | rfc3164 | rfc5424}]
[-server1 audit_log_server1] [-server1-port-number port_number]
[-server1-port {maintenance | remote}]
[-server2-function {disable | rfc3164 | rfc5424}]
[-server2 audit_log_server2] [-server2-port-number port_number]
[-server2-port {maintenance | remote}]
■ Parameter
-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable the audit log function.
enable
The audit log function is enabled.
disable
The audit log function is disabled.
-server1-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable syslog server 1. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. This parameter cannot
be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
-server1
disable
Syslog server 1 is disabled.
rfc3164
Syslog server 1 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC3164.
rfc5424
Syslog server 1 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC5424.
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1. Only one server can be specified. The server
name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of IPv6 addresses that can be
specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be specified. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
Example: -server1 192.168.1.20
Example: -server1 fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server1 foo.bar
-server1-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1's UDP port number for the syslog protocol.
Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. If
omitted, the setting is not changed. The default value is 514. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
584
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set audit
-server1-port
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 1's LAN port. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
-server2-function
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to enable syslog server 2. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
-server2
disable
Syslog server 2 is disabled.
rfc3164
Syslog server 2 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC3164.
rfc5424
Syslog server 2 is enabled and uses message format based on RFC5424.
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2. Only one server can be specified. The server
name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). The types of IPv6 addresses that can be
specified are global addresses (including 6to4 addresses), link local addresses, and unique
local addresses. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be specified. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
Example: -server2 192.168.1.20
Example: -server2 fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server2 foo.bar
-server2-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2's UDP port number for the syslog protocol.
Specify the port number within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. If
omitted, the setting is not changed. The default value is 514. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
-server2-port
Optional. This parameter specifies syslog server 2's LAN port. If omitted, the existing setting is
not changed. This parameter cannot be specified when the audit log function is disabled.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the audit log function:
CLI> set audit -mode enable -server1-function rfc3164 -server1 10.21.134.198 -server1-port-number 514
-server1-port maintenance -server2-function rfc5424 -server2 10.17.80.6 -server2-port-number 517 -server2lan-port remote
585
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show audit
show audit
This command displays the settings of the audit log functions.
■ Syntax
show audit
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Audit Log
# Server1 function
# Server1
# Server1 Port Number
# Server1 Port
# Server2 function
# Server2
# Server2 Port Number
# Server2 Port
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Enable
A
Enable (RFC3164)
B
10.21.134.198
C
514
D
MNT
E
Enable (RFC5424)
F
10.17.80.6
G
517
H
RMT
I
It indicates whether the audit log function is enabled.
It indicates whether syslog server 1 is enabled.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the syslog server 1
UDP port number of the syslog server 1 for the syslog protocol
It indicates which port is used.
It indicates whether syslog server 2 is enabled.
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the syslog server 2
UDP port number of the syslog server 2 for the syslog protocol
It indicates which port is used.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the settings of the audit log function:
CLI> show audit
Audit Log
Server1 Function
Server1
Server1 Port Number
Server1 Port
Server2 Function
Server2
Server2 Port Number
Server2 Port
[Enable]
[Enable (RFC3164)]
[10.21.134.198]
[514]
[MNT]
[Enable (RFC5424)]
[10.17.80.6]
[517]
[RMT]
586
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.9
Key Management Server Linkage Function
The key management server linkage function manages the authentication keys that are used for SED
encryption in the key server.
This section explains the commands to set up the key management server linkage function.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting of the key management machine name
Display of the key management machine name
Setting of the key server
Display of the key server
Registration of the SSL/KMIP server certificate
Registration of the key group
Modification of the key group
Deletion of the key group
Display of the key group
Key update of the key group
Recovery from key group blockage
■ Summary of using CLI to perform key management server linkage function settings
The steps involved in setting the key management server linkage function are provided below.
Procedure
1
Register the SED authentication key.
Use the "set sed-authentication" command to register the SED authentication key. After executing this
command, use the "show sed-authentication" command to check if the SED authentication key is
registered.
2
Create an SSL self-signed certificate.
Use the "create ssl-certificate" command to create a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) server key and an SSL
server certificate.
3
Set the key management machine name.
Use the "set sed-key-machine-name" command to set the key management machine name. After
executing this command, use the "show sed-key-machine-name" command to check if the key
management machine name is set.
4
Add the key servers.
Use the "set sed-key-server" command to set up the key servers.
587
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
5
Create a key group.
Use the "create sed-key-group" command to create a key group.
• Use the "create sed-key-group" command to change a key group.
• Use the "delete sed-key-group" command to delete a key group.
6
Import the SSL/KMIP certificate.
Use the "import ssl-kmip-certificate" command to register the server certificate that is signed by a
certificate provider to the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
7
Update the SED authentication key.
Use the "change sed-key" command to update the SED authentication key for the key group.
If no SED authentication key is registered in the key group, an error occurs when the first update of the
SED authentication key is performed. In this case, register the SSL self-signed certificate of the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system in the key server, accept access from the ETERNUS DX Disk storage
system, and then update the SED authentication key again. The "Key Status" changes to "Normal".
8
Check the key server status.
Use the "show sed-key-groups" command to check the key server status.
9
Set the key group for a RAID group.
Use the "set raid-group" command to enable the key management server linkage function for a RAID
group.
End of procedure
588
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set sed-key-machine-name
set sed-key-machine-name
This command specifies the key management machine name that is used as the machine name for
connecting to the key server.
The key management machine name corresponds to the machine ID in the key server.
■ Syntax
set sed-key-machine-name -machine-name {machine_name | ""}
■ Parameter
-machine-name
This parameter specifies the key management machine name. Up to 48 alphanumeric characters and underscores (_) can be specified. Only an alphabetical character can be specified as
the first letter. Specify consecutive double quotations ("") to disable the specified key management machine name.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets a key management machine name:
CLI> set sed-key-machine-name -machine-name A0E2000000000_ET06F21AUABCPJ000000
589
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show sed-key-machine-name
show sed-key-machine-name
This command displays the key management machine name for connecting with the key server.
■ Syntax
show sed-key-machine-name
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# Key Machine Name
A:
A0E2000000000_ET06F21AUABCPJ000000
A
Key management machine name
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the key management machine name:
CLI> show sed-key-machine-name
Key Machine Name
A0E2000000000_ET06F21AUABCPJ000000
590
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set sed-key-server
set sed-key-server
This command sets up the key servers. Up to two key servers can be registered.
■ Syntax
set sed-key-server -server-id server_id [-server {server | ""}] [-port-number port_number]
[-port {maintenance | remote}]
■ Parameter
-server-id
This parameter specifies the key server ID that is to be registered. 1 or 2 can be specified.
-server
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server. Only one server can be specified. The server
name format should be IPv4 standard notation (a base 256 "d.d.d.d" string), IPv6 address
format, or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN). Up to 63 alphanumeric characters can be
specified. Specify consecutive double quotations ("") to disable the specified server ID. If
omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-port-number
Optional. This parameter specifies the port number of the key server. Specify the port number
within 1 to 5 digits. The port number cannot be set above 65535. If omitted, the setting is not
changed. The default value is 5696.
-port
Optional. This parameter specifies the LAN port for the key server. If omitted, the existing
setting is not changed.
maintenance
MNT port
remote
RMT port
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the key server:
CLI> set sed-key-server -server-id 1 -server 10.21.134.198 -port-number 5696 -port maintenance
591
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show sed-key-servers
show sed-key-servers
This command displays the key server.
■ Syntax
show sed-key-servers [-server-id server_id]
■ Parameter
-server-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server IDs that are to be displayed. 1 or 2 can be
specified. Multiple key server IDs can be specified at the same time. If this parameter is
omitted, all of the server information is displayed.
■ Output
# Server ID
1
A
10.21.134.198
B
5696
C
RMT
D
# Server
# Port Number
# Port
#
#
#
#
#
Server ID
Server
Port Number
Port
A:
B:
C:
D:
2
5696
MNT
Key server ID
FQDN or IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the key server
Port number of the key server
It shows which LAN port is used.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the key server information:
CLI> show sed-key-servers
Server ID
1
Server
10.21.134.198
Port Number
5696
Port
RMT
Server ID
Server
Port Number
Port
2
5696
MNT
The following example displays the key server information when the server ID is 1:
CLI> show sed-key-servers -server-id 1
Server ID
1
Server
10.21.134.198
Port Number
5696
Port
RMT
592
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > import ssl-kmip-certificate
import ssl-kmip-certificate
This command imports and registers in the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system the server certificate that is
signed by a certificate provider.
■ Syntax
import ssl-kmip-certificate -port {maintenance | remote | fst} -server server_name
-user login_user_account -filename -filename [-indicator {enable | disable}]
■ Parameter
-port
This parameter specifies which Ethernet port is used to connect to the FTP server. For details,
refer to "1.11 Note for Specifying FTP Server" (page 31).
maintenance
MNT port
-server
remote
RMT port
fst
FST port (not supported in the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2)
This parameter specifies the FTP server name in which the certificate file is to be stored. The
server name format is IPv4 standard notation (as a string in the base 256 notation d.d.d.d),
IPv6 address format or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Example: -server 192.168.1.20
Example: -server fd80::abd0:223:ad
Example: -server foo.bar
-user
This parameter specifies the user name that is to be used to access the FTP server. When this
parameter is specified, the command displays an FTP server password prompt.
-filename
This parameter specifies the certificate file name.
-indicator
Optional. This parameter specifies whether the progress indicator is displayed. If omitted, the
progress indicator is displayed.
enable
Progress indicator is displayed.
disable
Progress indicator is not displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example imports and registers the signed certificate:
CLI> import ssl-kmip-certificate -port maintenance -server ftp.example.com -user cli-user filename server.cert
593
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > create sed-key-group
create sed-key-group
This command creates a key group.
Only one key group can be created for the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system.
■ Syntax
create sed-key-group -name name -machine-group-name machine_group_name
[-security-level {low | high}] [-recovery-mode {auto | manual}] [-period { period | ""}]
[-master-server-id { master_server_id | ""}] [-slave-server-id { slave_server_id | ""}]
■ Parameter
-name
This parameter specifies the key group name. 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters and underscores (_) can be specified. Only an alphabetical character can be specified as the first letter.
-machine-group-name
This parameter specifies the machine group name. Set the same name as the device group
name in the key server. 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters and underscores (_) can be specified.
Only an alphabetical character can be specified as the first letter.
-security-level
Optional. This parameter specifies the security level. If omitted, "high" is set.
high
Rebuild or maintenance cannot be performed when communication with the key
server is not available during a disk failure or disk maintenance work in a RAID
group that uses the key group.
low
Rebuild or maintenance is performed using the common key when communication with the key server is not available during a disk failure or disk maintenance
work in a RAID group that uses the key group.
-recovery-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to automatically perform recovery of a drive or a
RAID group that cannot be communicated with due to blockage of the key server when the
communication recovers. When "manual" is set, recovery work is performed manually by the
user from Web GUI or CLI. If omitted, "auto" is set.
-period
auto
Automatic recovery is performed.
manual
Automatic recovery is not performed.
Optional. This parameter specifies the valid period of the key. This period can be specified on a
monthly basis by using a number from 1 to 12. Specify consecutive double quotations ("") or
omit this parameter to not set this period.
-master-server-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server ID for the master server. 1 or 2 can be specified. When the master server is not used, specify consecutive double quotations ("") or omit
this parameter. Use the same setting as the master server that is set in the key server.
594
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > create sed-key-group
-slave-server-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server ID for the slave server. 1 or 2 can be specified.
When the slave server is not used, specify consecutive double quotations (""). If omitted, the
slave server is not set. Use the same setting as the slave server that is set in the key server.
■ Example(s)
The following example sets up the key group:
CLI> create sed-key-group -name key-group1 -machine-group-name machine_group1 -security-level high
-recovery-mode auto -period 6 -master-server-id 1 -slave-server-id 2
595
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set sed-key-group
set sed-key-group
This command modifies the key group.
■ Syntax
set sed-key-group [-name name] [-machine-group-name machine_group_name ]
[-security-level {low | high}] [-recovery-mode {auto | manual}] [-period { period | ""}]
[-master-server-id { master_server_id | ""}] [-slave-server-id { slave_server_id | ""}]
■ Parameter
-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the key group name. 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters and
underscores (_) can be specified. Only an alphabetical character can be specified as the first
letter. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-machine-group-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the machine group name. Set the same name as the device
group name in the key server. 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters and underscores (_) can be
specified. Only an alphabetical character can be specified as the first letter. If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed.
-security-level
Optional. This parameter specifies the security level. If omitted, the existing setting is not
changed.
high
Rebuild or maintenance cannot be performed when communication with the key
server is not available during a disk failure or disk maintenance work in a RAID
group that uses the key group.
low
Rebuild or maintenance is performed using the common key when communication with the key server is not available during a disk failure or disk maintenance
work in a RAID group that uses the key group.
-recovery-mode
Optional. This parameter specifies whether to automatically perform recovery of a drive or a
RAID group that cannot be communicated with due to blockage of the key server when the
communication recovers. When "manual" is set, the recovery work is performed manually by
the user from Web GUI or CLI. If omitted, "auto" is set.
-period
auto
Automatic recovery is performed.
manual
Automatic recovery is not performed.
Optional. This parameter specifies the valid period of the key. This period can be specified on a
monthly basis by using a number from 1 to 12. Specify consecutive double quotations ("") or
omit this parameter to not set this period. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-master-server-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server ID for the master server. 1 or 2 can be specified. When the master server is not used, specify consecutive double quotations (""). If omitted, the existing setting is not changed. Use the same setting as the master server that is set
in the key server.
596
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > set sed-key-group
-slave-server-id
Optional. This parameter specifies the key server ID for the slave server. 1 or 2 can be specified.
When the slave server is not used, specify consecutive double quotations (""). If omitted, the
existing setting is not changed. Use the same setting as the slave server that is set in the key
server.
■ Example(s)
The following example modifies the key group:
CLI> set sed-key-group -name key-group2 -machine-group-name machine_group2 -security-level low -recovery
-mode manual -period "" -master-server-id 2 -slave-server-id 1
597
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > delete sed-key-group
delete sed-key-group
This command deletes the key group.
■ Syntax
delete sed-key-group
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example deletes the key group:
CLI> delete sed-key-group
598
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show sed-key-groups
show sed-key-groups
This command displays the key group and the server certificate.
■ Syntax
show sed-key-groups
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Output
# SED Key Group
# Name
# key_group1
A
# <Detail Information>
# Machine Group Name
Key Expiration Key Status
Date
2012-07-27
Normal
B
C
machine_group1
D
# Security Level
High
E
# Recovery Mode
Auto
F
# Period
7
G
# Master Server ID
1 (Normal)
H I
# Master Server
10.21.134.198
J
# Slave Server ID
2 (Normal)
K L
# Slave Server
10.21.134.199
M
# <Server Certificate Information>
# Issuer Name
Fujitsu Certification Authority
N
# Subject Name
Key Management Server
O
# Valid From
2012-08-17 13:04:47
P
# Valid To
2015-08-17 13:04:47
Q
# Serial Number
602199653074063
R
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Key group name
Valid period of the key being used. If the key server is inaccessible, "Not Available" is displayed. If a valid period
is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Key status
Machine group name
Security level
Recovery mode
Valid period of the key. If a valid period is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Master server ID. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Master server status
599
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > show sed-key-groups
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
O:
P:
Q:
R:
FQDN or IP address of the master server. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Slave server ID. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Slave server status
FQDN or IP address of the slave server. If it is not set, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Issuer name
Owner name
Start date of the valid period
End date of the valid period
Serial number
When a key group is registered, A to M are displayed.
When a server certificate is registered, N to R are displayed.
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the key group information and the server certificate information:
CLI> show sed-key-groups
SED Key Group
Key Expiration Key Status
Name
Date
key_group1
2012-07-27
Normal
<Detail Information>
Machine Group Name
machine_group1
Security Level
High
Recovery Mode
Auto
Period
7
Master Server ID
1 (Normal)
Master Server
10.21.134.198
Slave Server ID
2 (Normal)
Slave Server
10.21.134.199
<Server Certificate Information>
Issuer Name
Fujitsu Certification Authority
Subject Name
Key Management Server
Valid From
2012-08-17 13:04:47
Valid To
2015-08-17 13:04:47
Serial Number
602199653074063
The following example shows when a key group is registered but a server certificate is not registered:
CLI> show sed-key-groups
SED Key Group
Key Expiration Key Status
Name
Date
key_group1
2012-07-27
Normal
<Detail Information>
Machine Group Name
machine_group1
Security Level
High
Recovery Mode
Auto
Period
7
Master Server ID
1 (Normal)
Master Server
10.21.134.198
Slave Server ID
2 (Normal)
Slave Server
10.21.134.199
The following example shows when a key group is not registered but a server certificate is registered:
CLI> show sed-key-groups
<Server Certificate Information>
Issuer Name
Fujitsu Certification Authority
Subject Name
Key Management Server
Valid From
2012-08-17 13:04:47
Valid To
2015-08-17 13:04:47
Serial Number
602199653074063
600
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > change sed-key
change sed-key
This command updates the key for the key group.
■ Syntax
change sed-key -mode {reuse | delete}
■ Parameter
-mode
This parameter specifies the update mode.
reuse
The previously used key is reusable after being switched.
delete
The previously used key is not reusable after being switched.
■ Example(s)
The following example updates the key for the key group:
CLI> change sed-key -mode reuse
601
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > recover sed-key-group
recover sed-key-group
This command recovers a blocked key group.
■ Syntax
recover sed-key-group
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example recovers the blocked key group:
CLI> recover sed-key-group
602
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous
4.4.10
Shutdown/Restart System
This section explains the commands related to system shutdown or restart.
603
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 4 Function/System Settings and Display
4.4 Miscellaneous > shutdown
shutdown
This command will power off or power cycle (power off and on) the system. The CLI session is automatically
closed.
• The ETERNUS Disk storage system is shutdown and then restarted regardless of the power
synchronization setting.
• When power synchronization is enabled and the ETERNUS Disk storage system is shut down by this
command, the ETERNUS Disk storage system may automatically restart according to the power control
process of the server.
■ Syntax
shutdown -mode {off | reboot}
■ Parameter
-mode
This parameter specifies the shutdown mode.
off
Power off the system.
reboot
Power OFF and power ON the system.
■ Example(s)
The following example powers off the system:
CLI> shutdown -mode off
The following example powers the system off and on:
CLI> shutdown -mode reboot
604
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5
Information Settings and Display
This chapter explains the commands that display information collected by the system.
5.1
Performance
This section explains performance related commands.
5.1.1
Performance Information
These functions display the performance information that is collected and stored by the system. Information is
collected for each volume, each host interface port, each disk, and each controller module. Collection must be
enabled before performance information can be displayed.
This section explains the commands to collect and display performance information.
605
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > start performance
start performance
This command starts the collection of performance information. If performance information is already being
collected, then the command terminates with an error message.
■ Syntax
start performance [ -interval { 30 | 60 | 90 | 120 | 150 | 180 | 210 | 240 | 270 | 300 } ]
■ Parameter
-interval
Optional. This parameter specifies the update interval for performance information. A unit is
second. If omitted, the default value (30 seconds) is used.
30
Updated every 30 seconds (default).
60
Updated every 60 seconds.
90
Updated every 90 seconds.
120
Updated every 120 seconds.
150
Updated every 150 seconds.
180
Updated every 180 seconds.
210
Updated every 210 seconds.
240
Updated every 240 seconds.
270
Updated every 270 seconds.
300
Updated every 300 seconds.
■ Example(s)
The following example starts collecting the performance information at 30 seconds intervals:
CLI> start performance -interval 30
606
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > stop performance
stop performance
This command stops the collection of performance information.
■ Syntax
stop performance
■ Parameter
No parameters.
■ Example(s)
The following example stops the collection of performance information:
CLI> stop performance
607
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
show performance
This command displays the performance information collected and stored by the system. Performance
information can be displayed only when the collection of performance information has been started through
CLI and GUI.
■ Syntax
show performance
[ -type {host-io [-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names] |
advanced-copy [-volume-number volume_numbers | -volume-name volume_names] |
disks [-disks disks] | cm [-cm {0|1|cm0cpu0|cm0cpu1|cm1cpu0|cm1cpu1|cm2cpu0|cm2cpu1|
cm3cpu0|cm3cpu1| cm4cpu0|cm4cpu1|cm5cpu0|cm5cpu1|cm6cpu0|cm6cpu1|cm7cpu0|cm7cpu1}] |
port [-port xyz]
}]
■ Parameter
-type
Optional. This parameter specifies the type of performance information. If omitted, the
performance collection status is displayed.
host-io
Host I/O statistics for each volume
advanced-copy
Advanced copy statistics for each volume
disks
Statistics for each disk
cm
Statistics for controller module
port
Statistics for host interface port
-volume-number
or
-volume-name
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers. This parameter can be specified only
when "-type host-io" or "-type advanced-copy" is selected. One or more volumes can be
specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.9 Volume Syntax" (page 22). If omitted,
the information of all the volumes is listed.
-disks
Optional. This parameter specifies the volume identifiers. This parameter can be specified only
when "-type disks" is selected. One or more disks can be specified at the same time. For details,
refer to "1.2.3 Disk Syntax" (page 19). If omitted, the information for all disks is listed.
608
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
-cm
Optional. This parameter specifies the controller module number. This parameter can be
specified only when "-type cm" is selected. If omitted, the information for both controller
modules is listed.
For the ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2 and ETERNUS DX410 S2:
0
Controller module#0
1
Controller module#1
For the ETERNUS DX 440 S2 and ETERNUS DX8100 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU0
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU1
For the ETERNUS DX8700 S2:
cm0cpu0
Controller module#0 CPU#0
-port
cm0cpu1
Controller module#0 CPU#1
cm1cpu0
Controller module#1 CPU#0
cm1cpu1
Controller module#1 CPU#1
cm2cpu0
Controller module#2 CPU#0
cm2cpu1
Controller module#2 CPU#1
cm3cpu0
Controller module#3 CPU#0
cm3cpu1
Controller module#3 CPU#1
cm4cpu0
Controller module#4 CPU#0
cm4cpu1
Controller module#4 CPU#1
cm5cpu0
Controller module#5 CPU#0
cm5cpu1
Controller module#5 CPU#1
cm6cpu0
Controller module#6 CPU#0
cm6cpu1
Controller module#6 CPU#1
cm7cpu0
Controller module#7 CPU#0
cm7cpu1
Controller module#7 CPU#1
auto
Automatically (default)
Optional. This parameter specifies the host interface port number, and can be specified only
when selecting "-type port". Only one parameter can be specified at the same time. If omitted,
all the host interface ports are displayed.
Example: -port 001
For details, refer to "1.2.14 Host Interface Port Syntax" (page 25).
xyz
"x" is the controller module (CM) number, "y" is the CA number, and "z" is the host port
number.
Example: "123" indicates CM#1-CA#2-Port#3
609
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
■ Output
With no parameters specified:
# Status
# Interval
A:
B:
[ON]
A
[30sec]
B
It shows whether performance information is started, or not.
The interval time by which performance information is updated
When the host I/O performance information type is specified:
# Volume
# No.
Name
#
1 VOL001
#
2 VOL002
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
J:
K:
IOPS(IOPS)
Read / Write
6621
5192
7791
6608
C
D
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write
589
379
613
292
E
F
Response Time(msec.)
Read / Write
17055
12056
12148
11045
G
H
Cache Hit Rate(%)
Read / Write / Prefetch
41
37
36
41
37
36
I
J
K
Volume number
Volume name
Read IOPS
Write IOPS
Read Throughput
Write Throughput
Read Response Time
Write Response Time
Read Cache Hit
Write Cache Hit
Prefetch Cache Hit
When the Advanced Copy performance information type is specified:
# Volume
# No.
Name
#
1 VOL001
#
2 VOL002
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
IOPS(IOPS)
Read / Write
6621
5192
7791
6608
C
D
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write
589
379
613
292
E
F
Cache Hit Rate(%)
Read / Write / Prefetch
41
37
36
41
37
36
G
H
I
Volume number
Volume name
Read IOPS
Write IOPS
Read Throughput
Write Throughput
Read Cache Hit
Write Cache Hit
Prefetch Cache Hit
610
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
When the drive performance information type is specified:
# Location
# CE-Disk#1
A
A:
B:
Busy Rate(%)
66
B
Disk number
Disk busy rate
When the controller module performance information type is selected (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2):
# Location Busy Rate(%)
52
# CM#0 CPU#0
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
ROE Busy Rate(%)
52
C
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
D
Controller module number
Controller module busy rate
Controller module ROE busy rate
Copy residual quantity (unit: MB)
When the controller module performance information type is selected while the I/O Offloading function is
enabled (ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
# Location Busy Rate(%)
# CM#0 CPU#0
52
# CM#1 CPU#1
1
A
B
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
ROE#0 Busy Rate(%)
52
2
C
ROE#1 Busy Rate(%)
30
0
D
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
0
E
Controller module number
Controller module busy rate
Controller module ROE busy rate (ROE#0)
Controller module ROE busy rate (ROE#1)
Copy residual quantity (MB)
When the controller module performance information type is selected (ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2):
# Location
# CM#0
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
Busy Rate(%)
52
B
ROE Busy Rate(%)
52
C
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
D
Controller module number
Controller module busy rate
Controller module ROE busy rate
Copy residual quantity (unit: MB)
611
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
When the host interface port performance information type is specified and the host interface port mode is
CA:
# Location
#
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write Read / Write
7791
6608
613
292
B
C
D
E
Host interface location
Read IOPS
Write IOPS
Read Throughput
Write Throughput
When the host interface port performance information type is specified and the host interface port mode is
RA:
# Location
#
# CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
IOPS(IOPS)
Transmitted
6621
B
/ Received
5192
C
Throughput(MB/s)
Transmitted / Received
589
379
D
E
Host interface location
Transmitted IOPS
Received IOPS
Transmitted Throughput
Received Throughput
■ Example(s)
The following example displays the status of performance information collection:
CLI> show performance
Status
[ON]
Interval [30sec]
The following example displays the performance information when the host I/O performance information
type is specified:
CLI> show performance -type host-io
Volume
IOPS(IOPS)
No.
Name
Read / Write
1 VOL001
6621
5192
2 VOL002
7791
6608
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write
589
379
613
292
Response Time(msec.)
Read / Write
17055
12056
12148
11045
Cache Hit Rate(%)
Read / Write / Prefetch
41
37
36
41
37
36
The following example displays the performance information when the host I/O performance information
type is specified for the volume named "VOL001":
CLI> show performance -type host-io -volume-name VOL001
Volume
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
No.
Name
Read / Write Read / Write
1 VOL001
6621
5192
589
379
Response Time(msec.)
Read / Write
17055
12056
Cache Hit Rate(%)
Read / Write / Prefetch
41
37
36
612
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
The following example displays the performance information when the advanced copy performance
information type is specified:
CLI> show performance -type advanced-copy
Volume
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
No.
Name
Read / Write Read / Write
1 VOL001
6621
5192
589
379
2 VOL002
7791
6608
613
292
Cache Hit Rate(%)
Read / Write / Prefetch
41
37
36
41
37
36
The following example displays the performance information when the advanced copy performance
information type is specified for volume #2:
CLI> show performance -type advanced-copy -volume-number 2
Volume
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s) Cache Hit Rate(%)
No.
Name
Read / Write Read / Write
Read / Write / Prefetch
2 VOL002
7791
6608
613
292
41
37
36
The following example displays the performance information when the disk performance information type is
specified:
CLI> show performance -type disks
Location
Busy Rate(%)
CE-Disk#0
67
CE-Disk#1
66
The following example displays the performance information when the drive performance information type
is specified for disk #0 in the CE:
CLI> show performance -type disks -disks 000
Location
Busy Rate(%)
CE-Disk#0
67
The following example displays the performance information when the controller module performance
information type is specified for both CMs: (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)
CLI> show performance -type cm
Location Busy Rate(%) ROE Busy Rate(%)
CM#0 CPU#0
66
66
CM#0 CPU#1
1
1
CM#1 CPU#0
52
52
CM#1 CPU#1
1
1
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
0
55191552
0
The following example displays the performance information when the controller module performance
information type is specified for CM#1: (ETERNUS DX410 S2/DX440 S2)
CLI> show performance -type cm -cm 1
Location Busy Rate(%) ROE Busy Rate(%)
CM#1 CPU#0
52
52
CM#1 CPU#1
1
1
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
0
The following example displays the performance information when the controller module performance
information type is selected for both CMs (ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2):
CLI> show performance -type cm
Location Busy Rate(%) ROE Busy Rate(%)
CM#0
66
66
CM#1
52
52
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
55191552
613
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
The following example displays the performance information when the controller module performance
information type is selected for CM#1 (ETERNUS DX80 S2/DX90 S2):
CLI> show performance -type cm -cm 1
Location Busy Rate(%) ROE Busy Rate(%)
CM#1
52
52
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
The following example displays the performance information when the controller module performance
information type is selected while I/O Offloading function is enabled (ETERNUS DX8700 S2):
CLI> show performance -type cm
Location Busy Rate(%) ROE#0 Busy Rate(%)
CM#0 CPU#0
66
70
CM#0 CPU#1
30
40
CM#1 CPU#0
66
70
CM#1 CPU#1
30
40
CM#2 CPU#0
66
70
CM#2 CPU#1
30
40
CM#3 CPU#0
66
70
CM#3 CPU#1
30
40
CM#4 CPU#0
66
70
CM#4 CPU#1
30
40
CM#5 CPU#0
66
70
CM#5 CPU#1
30
40
CM#6 CPU#0
66
70
CM#6 CPU#1
30
40
CM#7 CPU#0
66
70
CM#7 CPU#1
30
40
ROE#1 Busy Rate(%)
30
10
30
10
30
10
30
10
30
10
30
10
30
10
30
10
Copy Residual Quantity(MB)
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
55191552
32001532
For FC and iSCSI, the following example displays the performance information for the host interface ports:
CLI> show performance -type port
Location
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write Read / Write
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
6621
5192
589
379
CM#1 CA#1 Port#1
7791
6608
613
292
The following example displays performance information when the host interface port performance
information type is selected for CM#0-CA#0-Port#0:
CLI> show performance -type port -port 000
Location
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write Read / Write
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
6621
5192
589
379
The following example displays performance information when the host interface port performance
information type is specified and the host interface port mode is RA.
CLI> show performance -type port
RA Port Information
Location
IOPS(IOPS)
Transmitted / Received
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
6621
5192
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
7791
6608
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
6621
5192
CM#1 CA#0 Port#2
7791
6608
Throughput(MB/s)
Transmitted / Received
589
379
613
292
589
379
613
292
614
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > show performance
The following example displays performance information when the host interface port performance
information type is specified and the host interface ports are a mix of both RA and CA modes.
CLI> show performance -type port
CA Port Information
Location
IOPS(IOPS)
Throughput(MB/s)
Read / Write Read / Write
CM#0 CA#0 Port#0
6621
5192
589
379
CM#0 CA#0 Port#1
7791
6608
613
292
CM#0 CA#0 Port#3
6621
5192
589
379
CM#1 CA#0 Port#3
7791
6608
613
292
RA Port Information
Location
IOPS(IOPS)
Transmitted
CM#0 CA#0 Port#2
6621
CM#1 CA#0 Port#0
7791
CM#1 CA#0 Port#1
6621
CM#1 CA#0 Port#2
7791
/ Received
5192
6608
5192
6608
Throughput(MB/s)
Transmitted / Received
589
379
613
292
589
379
613
292
615
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance
5.1.2
Performance Tuning Parameters
This section explains the commands related to performance tuning parameters. The following items can be
tuned:
•
•
•
•
RAID group performance
Cache performance
Disk performance
Cache size for Bind in Cache
616
ETERNUS CLI User’s Guide
Copyright 2015 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-1030-09ENZ0
Chapter 5 Information Settings and Display
5.1 Performance > set raid-tuning
set raid-tuning
This command the performance tuning parameters for the specified RAID group. For normal operations, the
performance tuning parameters do not need to be changed.
■ Syntax
set raid-tuning {-rg-number rg_numbers | -rg-name rg_names }
[-dcmf {1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10}] [-rebuild-priority {low|middle|high}] [-disk-tuning {enable|disable}]
[-throttle {10|20|30|40|50|60|70|80|90|100}] [-ordered-cut {0-65535}]
■ Parameter
-rg-number This parameter specifies the RAID group identifiers whose tuning parameters are to be set up.
or
One or more parameters can be specified at the same time. For details, refer to "1.2.8 RAID
-rg-name
Group Syntax" (page 22).
-dcmf
Optional. This parameter specifies the value of Disk Command Multiplying Factor (DCMF).
DCMF is a coefficient that increases the limit on the number of outstanding disk commands.
Increasing the value of DCMF improves sequential write performance. The default value is one.
A DCMF value of two results in the limit on the number of outstanding commands by a factor of
two from the default.
-rebuild-priority
Optional. This parameter specifies the priority for Rebuild of the relevant RAID group. The same
priority is set to all of the RAID groups that are specified with the "-rg-number" parameter or
the "-rg-name" parameter.
low
Low. Normal priority is given for rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy.
middle
Middle. Rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy are given the same priority as
host access.
high
High. Rebuild, copyback, and redundant copy are given priority over host access.
-disk-tuning
Optional. The default setting is "disabled". This parameter specifies whether to enable or
disable the tuning settings for disk accesses. If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
When "disable" is specified, the "-throttle" and "-ordered-cut" parameters cannot be specified.
If omitted, the existing setting is not changed.
-throttle
enable
The tuning settings are enabled.
disable
The tuning settings are disabled. (default)
Optional. This parameter specifies the ratio of command issues to disks as a percentage value.
This parameter can be specified only when "enable" is specified or is already set for the &q